System Operator Workshop for IBM i

V6.0

cover

Front cover

System Operator Workshop for IBM i (Course code AS24)

Instructor Guide ERC 8.1

Instructor Guide

Trademarks IBM® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both: Active Memory AS/400 Electronic Service Agent OS/400 PowerPC POWER7 Redbooks System Storage WebSphere

AIX 5L BladeCenter iSeries Power PowerVM POWER8 System i System x xSeries

AIX DB2 i5/OS POWER POWER6 Print Services Facility System p System z

Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries. Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. VMware and the VMware "boxes" logo and design, Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered trademarks or trademarks (the "Marks") of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

December 2011 edition The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an “as is” basis without any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer’s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer’s operational environment. While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.

© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2001, 2011. This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM. Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

V6.0 Instructor Guide

TOC

Contents Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv Instructor course overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi Unit 1. Power i and IBM i concepts and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 The IBM Systems family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Power i expands on a rich heritage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Processor technology roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Innovative IBM i technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Central processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 What is installed here? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Other system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Integrated by design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 IBM i overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Other licensed program products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Installed software using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Installed software using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Disk storage management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Independent ASPs (ASP 33-255) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 What is a partition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 Partition characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Partition resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 Logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Virtual i partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 xSeries server integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54 Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56 Linux support (POWER and x86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Java support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60 Integrated Web serving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62 PASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64 Capacity on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66 Clustering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68 System i Access family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Which console type? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73 Operations console (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

iii

Instructor Guide

Operations console (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-77 Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79 Systems Director Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-82 SDMC features versus HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-85 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-90 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-92 Unit 2. Reference material and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 IBM i and Power i Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 IBM i Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 IBM Power i homepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Support: Power i technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 IBM Redbooks page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 System displays: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Menu display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 How to display a menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Menu navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Menu display help (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Menu display help (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Menu display help (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Menu display help (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Menu display help (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Entry display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Entry display help (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Entry display help (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 List display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Information display overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Additional help: Information Assistant Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Information Assistant option 1:Where Do I Look for Information? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Information Assistant option 2:How Can I Comment On Information? . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Using the System Request panel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Accessing the System Request panel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46 Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48 TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50 F9: Retrieve previous command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52 Using the Command Entry display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54 Retrieve a prior command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56 Operational Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58 Operational Assistant menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60 iv

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.


TOC

Assistance levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your choice: Basic or intermediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User assistance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-62 3-65 3-67 3-69 3-71 3-73 3-75

Unit 4. Overview of System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 What is System i Access for Windows? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 What you can do with System i Access for Windows? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 What is Navigator? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 What can you do with Navigator? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Navigator main panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Main panel: Left pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Main panel: Right pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Main panel: Taskpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Object context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 View drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Customize this View dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Help drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Direct help button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Help icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Unit 5. Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.1. What is it and how does it work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 What is Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 How do you get it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 What is included? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 What is not included? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 How it works (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 How it works (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 What is included: Base functions (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 What is included: Base functions (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 What is included: Additional LPPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 5.2. Overview of this interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Enter the URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Certificate exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Secure port: Sign-on window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Expired password limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

v

Instructor Guide

Web console interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 New controls overview (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 New controls overview (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 New controls overview (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 New controls overview (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 New terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 5.3. Manage and set open pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47 Manage Open Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Setting My Startup Pages (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Setting My Startup Pages (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Setting My Startup Pages (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54 5.4. Overview of System task page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57 Set Target System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58 System status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60 History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62 Display disk status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64 Setting up 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66 5250 emulation session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68 Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70 Application Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-72 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-74 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80 Unit 6. Messaging concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Types of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 Where messages come from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6 What is a message queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8 How are message queues created? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10 How are message queues allocated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 How are message queues allocated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 General System Tasks menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Message menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11 Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15 Display your messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Display inquiry messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22 Display message details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24 Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 vi





TOC

How messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Object Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grant Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-28 7-30 7-32 7-34 7-36 7-38 7-40

Unit 8. Messaging using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Basic Operations > Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Messages context menu: Send Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Inquiry versus informational message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Request a reply: Send reply to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Send Message: Send to users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Send Message: Send to workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Send Message: Interrupt user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Display message properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Customize messages: Include (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Include (F11): System operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Customize messages: Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Unit 9. Messaging using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Basic Operations > Send a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Inquiry versus informational message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Request a reply: Send reply to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Send Message: Send to users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Send Message: Send to users (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Send Message: Send to users (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Send Message: Send to workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Send Message: Interrupt user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Display Messages: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Properties: General and Detail tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Customize: View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Customize: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Customize: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Unit 10. CL command concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Control language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

vii

Instructor Guide

CL commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 CL command structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Some other CL command facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15 Unit 11. CL commands using 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2 Where to enter a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4 Command prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6 F11: Keywords or choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9 Conditional parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11 Free format method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Finding a command: Major Command Groups menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Finding a command by category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-17 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-19 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-21 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-23 Unit 12. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2 12.1. Object concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5 Object-based architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6 Object: A definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8 IBM: Supplied objects start with Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-10 Working with an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-12 12.2. Library and library list concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-15 What is a library? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-16 Purpose of libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-18 IBM: Supplied libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-21 Native library structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-23 Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-25 Finding an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-28 Quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-31 Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-33 12.3. Integrated file system concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-35 What is the integrated file system? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-36 File system concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-38 Overview of the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-40 File systems supported by the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-43 IFS accessed with Windows browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-46 Stream files versus database files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-48 IFS structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-50 Locating objects in the IFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-53 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-56 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-58 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-60

viii





TOC

Unit 13. Object management using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13.1. Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 The DATA and FILE menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Work with Objects command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Work with Objects display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Display Object Description command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Display Object Description details (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Display Object Description details (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Create Duplicate Object command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Copy File command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 13.2. Libraries and library lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Library and Library Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Work with Libraries command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Create Library command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Display Library List command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30 Library List: Add and Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 13.3. IFS concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35 IFS access using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36 Work with Object Links display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46 Unit 14. Object management using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 14.1. User profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 User Profile: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 User Profile: Jobs > Session startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 14.2. Running commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Run a command using prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Management Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 System groups: Run Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18 14.3. Creating a library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21 Database: New library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 File Systems: New library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 Display libraries on the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Display contents of your team library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28 14.4. Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31 Supported actions by object type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34 File Systems: Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36 Database: Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

ix

Instructor Guide

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-46 Unit 15. Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . .15-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2 15.1. User profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5 Users and Groups task: Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6 Users: Click arrow for a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8 Users: Create a new user based on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10 Users: Other profile data displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12 Users: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-14 Jobs: Session startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-16 15.2. Running commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-19 System: Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-20 Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22 Run a command using prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-24 15.3. Creating a library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-27 Databases: Your database (i520BL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-28 Schemas: New Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-30 File systems: New Folder (library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-32 IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-34 IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-36 Databases: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-38 Databases: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-40 Display contents of your team library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-42 15.4. Object properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-45 Supported actions by object type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-46 Object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-48 File systems: Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-50 Database: Copy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-52 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-54 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-56 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-58 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-60 Unit 16. Introduction to work management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-2 Methods of processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-4 What is a job? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-6 Types of jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-8 The life cycle of a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-10 What is a job queue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-13 Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-16 Job/thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-19 What is a job description? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-22 How a user profile relates to a job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-24 What is a subsystem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-26 Subsystem description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-28 Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-30 x





TOC

Memory pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16-33 16-36 16-39 16-41 16-43

Unit 17. Work management using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Job description: What is it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4 Job description: Library list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6 How a user profile relates to a job description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8 Work with Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10 Work with System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12 Using the additional function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14 Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20 Unit 18. Job control using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Work with User Jobs command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 Work with User Jobs display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7 Working with Signed-On Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9 Work with Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11 Option 5: Work with Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13 Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16 Submitting a batch job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18 Work with Submitted Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20 Work with Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22 Working with jobs on a job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25 Working with job scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28 Working with advanced job scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-31 Ending a user job abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33 Disconnecting a user job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-35 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-37 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-39 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-41 Unit 19. Job control using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Basic Operations > Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Work Management > Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6 Active Jobs: Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8 Active Jobs > Customize this View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10 Customize this View > Include (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13 Customize this View > Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15 Qualified job: Name, Current User, Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17 Job Properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-19 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

xi

Instructor Guide

Job Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-21 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-24 Subsystems > Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-26 Job queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-28 Explore Qbatch job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-30 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-32 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-34 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-36 Unit 20. Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-2 Basic Operations: User jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-4 User jobs: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-6 Work Management: Active Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-8 Active Jobs: Configure columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-10 Active Jobs: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-12 Active Jobs > Customize your window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-15 Customize this view > Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-18 Customize this view > Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-20 Customized to show qualified job name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-22 Job properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-24 Job properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-26 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-29 Subsystems > Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-31 Active Job Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-33 Explore Qbatch job queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-35 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-37 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-39 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-41 Unit 21. Print concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-2 IBM i printing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-4 How are output queues created? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-7 Why did the output end up there? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-9 What can you do with a spool file? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-12 Start Printer Writer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-14 Printer load balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-16 Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-18 Set an expiration date for spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-20 Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-22 Work management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-24 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-27 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-29 Unit 22. Print control using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-2 Printer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-4 xii





TOC

Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6 Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8 Change Spooled File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10 Delete Expired Spooled files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12 Work with Output Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15 Work with Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-17 Restarting a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19 Start Printer Writer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-21 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-23 The flow of a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-25 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-27 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-29 Unit 23. Print control using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 Basic Operations: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Customize: Include (F11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Customize: Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8 Printer Output: Individual report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10 Printer Output: Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12 Properties: General and Printer/queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14 Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-16 Properties: Layout and Staples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18 Properties: Overlay and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20 Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22 Properties: Other 1 and Other 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24 Drag and drop output to Windows desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-26 Active Jobs: Right-click job> Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-28 Work Management: Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-30 Printers: Customize > Columns (F12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-32 Printer Output: Convert to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-34 Printers: Printer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-36 System Values: Detach printer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-38 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-40 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-42 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-44 Unit 24. Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Basic Operations: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4 Printer Output: Include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6 Printer Output: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8 Printer Output: Individual report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10 Printer Output: Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12 Options for a spool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-14 Spoolfile Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-16 Properties: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-18 Properties: Printer/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

xiii

Instructor Guide

Properties: Copies/Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-22 Properties: Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-24 Properties: Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-26 Properties: Staples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-28 Properties: Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-30 Properties: Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-32 Properties: Origin/Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-34 Properties: User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-36 Properties: Other 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-38 Properties: Other 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-40 Printer Output: Export as ASCII Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-42 Active Jobs: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-44 Work Management: Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-46 Add a Printer wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-48 Printers: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-50 Printers: Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-52 System Values: Detach printer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-54 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-56 Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-58 Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-60 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-62 Unit 25. Starting and stopping the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-2 25.1. Starting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-5 IPL overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-6 IPL speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-9 Change IPL Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-12 What can you do using the control panel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-15 Control panel function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-17 Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-20 Power On and Off Tasks menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-22 Schedule power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-24 When to perform an attended (manual) IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-27 Attended (manual) IPL steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-29 Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-32 Attended IPL: Sign On display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-34 Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-36 Attended IPL: IPL Options display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-38 Attended IPL: Set Major System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-40 Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-43 IPL types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-45 What is a system value? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-48 System values and IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-50 System startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-53 Startup program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-55 Automatic IPLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-58 System value using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25-61 xiv





TOC

System values using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System values using Systems Director Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2. Stopping the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the system: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steps prior to power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Power Down System command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlled power-down with time limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Power push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25-63 25-65 25-67 25-68 25-70 25-73 25-76 25-78 25-80 25-82 25-84

Unit 26. System security concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2 Types of security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4 Types of security control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6 Setting up a new user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8 Type of user: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10 System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-13 Group profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-16 Authorization list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18 Public versus private authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20 Object authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22 System values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-24 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-26 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28 Unit 27. System security using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2 Change Password: CHGPWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4 Display User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6 Enable a disabled user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-8 Work with Objects by Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-10 Display Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12 Grant Object Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-14 Work with Authorization Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16 Display Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-18 Security system values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-20 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-24 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-26 Unit 28. System security using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2 Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4 User profile > Properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6 User profile > Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-8 Capabilities: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-10 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

xv

Instructor Guide

Capabilities: System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-13 Capabilities: Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-16 User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-19 User profile: Owned Objects (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-22 Password System Values (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-24 Password System Values (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-26 Authorizing objects: Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-28 Permissions: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-30 Permissions: Details (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-32 Permissions: Details (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-35 Permissions: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-37 New Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-39 New Group profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-41 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-43 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-45 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-47 Unit 29. System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . .29-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-2 Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-4 User profile > Properties (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-6 User profile > Properties (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-8 Capabilities: Privilege class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-10 Capabilities: System privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-13 Capabilities: Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-16 User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-18 User profile: Owned Objects (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-20 System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-22 Password System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-24 Authorizing objects: Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-26 Permissions: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-28 Permissions: Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-30 Permissions: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-33 Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-35 New Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-37 Authorization List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-39 New Group profile (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-41 New Group profile (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-43 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-45 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-47 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29-49 Unit 30. System configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-2 Sample configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-4 Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-6 Locally attached: CD-ROM, tape drives, and controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-8 Locally attached: Workstation controller (twinaxial) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30-10 xvi





TOC

LAN attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remotely attached: Remote workstation controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal systems attachment summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power i consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30-12 30-14 30-16 30-18 30-21 30-23

Unit 31. Configuration using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2 System control system values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4 Printer device system value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6 Creating device description automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-8 Creating device description manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-11 Work with messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-13 Display Messages: Assistance level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-15 Work with Hardware Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-17 Work with Hardware Resources: Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-19 Managing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-21 The command used to manage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-23 Menu to manage communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-26 Command used to manage communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-28 Printing device addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-31 Start System Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-34 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-37 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-39 Unit 32. Configuration using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2 System Values: Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4 System Values: Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6 System operator message queue (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-8 System operator message queue (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10 System operator message queue (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-12 System operator message queue (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-14 Monitoring hardware status (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-16 Monitoring hardware status (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-18 Hardware resource properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-20 Start SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-22 SST: Display disk and graphical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-24 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-27 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-29 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-31 Unit 33. Configuration using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Values: Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Values: Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Values: Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

33-1 33-2 33-4 33-6 33-9 xvii

Instructor Guide

System operator message queue (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-11 System operator message queue (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-13 Using SST functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-15 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-17 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-19 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33-21 Unit 34. Save concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-2 The save/restore facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-4 Information that can be saved and restored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-6 What you cannot save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-8 What happens when an object is saved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-10 Save considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-12 Free storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-14 34.1. Save to tape media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-17 Option 1: Save to tape media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-18 Purposes of tape on Power i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-20 Using tape labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-22 Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-24 34.2. Save to save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-27 Option 2: Save to save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-28 34.3. Save to virtual tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-31 Option 3: Save to virtual tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-32 Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-34 Virtual tape support advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-36 Virtual tape support considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-39 34.4. The tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-41 Tools used to save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-42 Question . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-44 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-47 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-49 Unit 35. Save using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-2 35.1. Tape operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-5 Tape menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-6 Display Tape: DSPTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-9 Contents of a tape: *LABELS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-11 Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-13 Initialize Tape: INZTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-15 35.2. Save file operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-17 Save File Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-18 Create Save File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-20 Save library to a save file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-22 Other save file commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-24 35.3. Virtual tape operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-27 Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-28 xviii System Operator Workshop for IBM i




TOC

Image Commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Device Desc and vary on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create virtual tape image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create virtual volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving to a virtual volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4. Save menus and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Save System and User Data Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Assistant backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic default backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save menu option 21: Entire system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save menu option 22: System data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save menu option 23: All user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35-30 35-32 35-34 35-36 35-38 35-40 35-43 35-45 35-47 35-48 35-50 35-52 35-54 35-56 35-59 35-61 35-64 35-66 35-68 35-70 35-72 35-74

Unit 36. Save using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-2 36.1. Setting up virtual tape support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-5 Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-6 Stand-Alone Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-8 Create virtual device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-10 Device: Make Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-12 Create Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-14 Create Catalog pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-16 Add volumes (create virtual images) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-18 Add volume details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-20 List Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-23 Load the image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-25 36.2. The backup function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-27 Backup > Policies > Daily: General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-28 Backup > Policies > Daily: What tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-30 Backup > Policies > Daily: When tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-32 Backup > Policies > Daily: Where tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-34 36.3. BRMS function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-37 Backup, Recovery, and Media Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38 BRMS: Backup control group policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-40 36.4. Saving an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-43 Navigator: Save an object using BRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-44 Save information for an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-46 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-48 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

xix

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-50 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36-52 Unit 37. Save using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-2 37.1. Setting up virtual tape support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-5 Overview and implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-6 Configuration tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-8 Create virtual tape device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-10 Device: Make available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-12 Create Tape Image Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-14 Create tape image catalog parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-16 Add volumes (create virtual images) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-18 Add volume parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-20 List virtual volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-23 Load the image catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-25 37.2. BRMS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-27 Backup, Recovery and Media Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-28 BRMS tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-30 BRMS drop-down menu: Manage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-32 Manage devices: New Media Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-34 37.3. Saving an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-37 BRMS: Backup specific items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-38 BRMS: New Backup Control Group wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-40 System: Run a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-42 Prompting the save object command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-44 Prompting the save library command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-46 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-48 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37-50 Unit 38. Restore concepts and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-2 Restoring objects to disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-4 Restore menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-6 Restore commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-8 What is restored? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-10 Restore menu option 21: System and user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-12 Restore menu option 22: System data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-14 Restore menu option 23: All user data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-16 Complete system restore (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-18 Complete system restore (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-21 Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-24 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-26 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-28 Unit 39. Problem determination using 5250 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39-2 Problem solving tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39-4 xx





TOC

Problem determination steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-7 Using the Work with Job command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-9 Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-12 Job log printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-15 Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-18 Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-20 Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-23 USERHELP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-25 TECHHELP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-28 Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-31 Problem Summary Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-33 Problem Handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-35 Option 2 or WRKPRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-37 Status for a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-40 Analyze a problem (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-43 Analyze a problem (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-46 PROBLEM2 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-48 Analyzing problems with a system reference code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-51 History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-54 Problem analysis: History log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-56 Saving and deleting history logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-58 Operational Assistant cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-60 Functions that are automatically cleaned up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-63 Automated problem management: DSPSRVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-65 Copy screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-67 Network Management menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-69 Network Problem Handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-72 IBM Redbook SG24-8253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-75 Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-77 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-79 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-81 Unit 40. Problem determination using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-2 Active Jobs: Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-4 Active Jobs: Elapsed Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-6 Job Log: Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-8 Active Pools: Customize Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-10 Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-12 System Status: General / Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-14 System Status: Processors / Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-17 System Status: Disk Space / Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-19 Disk Status and Disk Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-21 System operator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-24 Electronic Service Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-27 Configuration of Electronic Service Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-30 IBM Electronic Services on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-33 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-35 © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011 Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.

Contents

xxi

Instructor Guide

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40-37 Unit 41. Overview of the PTF process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-2 What is a fix or PTF? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-4 PTF process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-6 Types of fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-8 How to determine available PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-10 Ordering fixes (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-13 Ordering fixes (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-15 PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-17 PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-19 OS and LPP PTF installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-21 LIC PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-23 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-26 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41-28 Unit 42. PTFs using 5250 emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-2 Working with PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-4 Ordering a fix using ECS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-7 Ordering a fix using the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-10 Receiving a fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-12 Sample PTF cover letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-14 Copy the cover letter to IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-16 Display / Print the cover letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-18 Option 8: Install PTF package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-20 Option 7: Install PTF off a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-22 Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-24 Display PTF Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-26 Verifying PTF installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-28 Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-30 Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-32 Unit 43. PTFs using System i Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-1 Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-2 Management Central: Fix wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-4 Copy fixes from media (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-7 Copy fixes from media (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-9 System group: Update fix inventory (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-11 Update fix inventory (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-14 Compare and Update fixes (1 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-16 Compare and Update fixes (2 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-19 Compare and Update fixes (3 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-21 Compare and Update fixes (4 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-23 Compare and Update fixes (5 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-25 Compare and Update fixes (6 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-27 Compare and Update fixes (7 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43-29 xxii System Operator Workshop for IBM i




TOC

Compare and Update fixes (8 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare and Update fixes (9 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare and Update fixes (10 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare and Update fixes (11 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare and Update fixes (12 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare and Update fixes (13 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compare and Update fixes (14 of 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Fixes (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Fixes (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Fixes (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Fixes (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Fixes (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the status of the fixes (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the status of the fixes (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean up fixes (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean up fixes (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43-31 43-33 43-35 43-37 43-39 43-41 43-43 43-45 43-48 43-50 43-52 43-54 43-56 43-58 43-60 43-62 43-64 43-66 43-68

Unit 44. Class summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Operator Workshop for IBM i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44-1 44-2 44-4 44-6 44-8

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1


Contents

xxiii

Instructor Guide

xxiv System Operator Workshop for IBM i




TMK

Trademarks The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies: IBM® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both: Active Memory™ AS/400® Electronic Service Agent™ OS/400® PowerPC® POWER7® Redbooks® System Storage® WebSphere®

AIX 5L™ BladeCenter® iSeries® Power® PowerVM™ POWER8® System i® System x® xSeries®

AIX® DB2® i5/OS® POWER® POWER6® Print Services Facility™ System p® System z®

Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries. Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. VMware and the VMware "boxes" logo and design, Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered trademarks or trademarks (the "Marks") of VMware, Inc. in the United States and/or other jurisdictions. Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.


Trademarks

xxv

Instructor Guide

xxvi System Operator Workshop for IBM i




pref

Instructor course overview Market Requirement Power i system operations, while extremely user-friendly when compared to the same function on many other systems, can be very intimidating to the new and inexperienced system operator. Many tasks that the system operator must perform on a regular basis require an understanding of system concepts and terminology that can best be taught in an interactive classroom environment. System operators tend to perceive their greatest need as knowing how to perform a task, not why. While it is almost impossible to perform a task without understanding how, it is equally difficult to perform the task efficiently or to extend one's capabilities without understanding something about why. This course attempts to address both the how and why aspects of system operations with the emphasis on the how.


Instructor course overview


xxvii

Instructor Guide

xxviii System Operator Workshop for IBM i




pref

Course description System Operator Workshop for IBM i Duration: 4 days Purpose This course enables a new system operator to develop basic to intermediate level skills needed for day-to-day operations of the Power i system and IBM i. Specifically, the course explains how to: • Use the online help and references • Send, display, and reply to messages • Monitor and control jobs, devices, and job and output queues • Start and stop the system • Create and change user profiles • Use authorization lists and group profiles • Manage system configuration • Save and restore objects, libraries, and the system • Monitor job and history logs • Diagnose a system problem • Order, receive, and apply PTFs • Perform all of these functions using a 5250 emulation session as well as System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Hands-on exercises reinforce the lecture topics and prepare the student to successfully operate a Power i system.

Audience This course is intended for the person who has responsibility for daily system operations. It is not intended for technical audiences who are seeking an in-depth look at how the Power i works. This audience should instead attend the IBM i Programming Facilities Workshop, OE49 or OV49.


Course description

xxix

Instructor Guide

Prerequisites None.

Objectives After completing this course, you should be able to: • Send, display, and respond to messages • Use the online help and reference materials • Monitor and control job queues, active jobs, and output queues • Create and change user profiles • Use authorization lists and group profiles • Start and stop the operating system (i or IBM i) • Manage system devices, user display stations, and printers • Save and restore objects and libraries • Monitor job and history logs • Diagnose a system problem • Order, receive, and install PTFs

Curriculum relationship This course is part of the Power i curriculum. There is one additional operations course: • Advanced System Operator for IBM i, the classroom course code is AS27 or the Instructor Led Online (ILO) is OV27.

xxx





pref

Agenda Day 1 (00:50) Unit 1: Power i and IBM i concepts and overview (00:15) Unit 2: Reference material and support (00:40) Unit 3: Overview of 5250 emulation and help (00:35) Exercise 1: Using the keyboard and system displays (00:20) Unit 4: Overview of System i Navigator (00:20) Exercise 2: Overview of System i Navigator (00:20) Unit 5: Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Exercise 3: Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:10) Unit 6: Messaging concepts (00:25) Unit 7: Messaging using 5250 emulation (00:15) Exercise 4: Messages using 5250 emulation (00:15) Unit 8: Messaging using System i Navigator (00:20) Exercise 5: Messages using System i Navigator (00:10) Unit 9: Messaging using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:10) Exercise 6: Messages using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:10) Unit 10: CL command concepts (00:10) Unit 11: CL commands using 5250 emulation (00:25) Unit 12: Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS


Agenda

xxxi

Instructor Guide

Day 2 (00:25) Unit 13: Object management using 5250 emulation (00:45) Exercise 7: Object management using 5250 emulation (00:25) Unit 14: Object management using System i Navigator (00:30) Exercise 8: Object management using System i Navigator (00:15) Unit 15: Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Exercise 9: Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Unit 16: Introduction to work management (00:15) Unit 17: Work management using 5250 emulation (00:15) Exercise 10: Work management using 5250 emulation (00:15) Exercise 11: Work management using System i Navigator (00:10) Exercise 12: Work management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Unit 18: Job control using 5250 emulation (00:25) Exercise 13: Job control using 5250 emulation (00:20) Unit 19: Job control using System i Navigator (00:20) Exercise 14: Job control using System i Navigator (00:15) Unit 20: Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Exercise 15: Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:15) Unit 21: Print concepts (00:15) Unit 22: Print control using 5250 emulation (00:25) Exercise 16: Print control using 5250 emulation

xxxii System Operator Workshop for IBM i




pref

Day 3 (00:15) Unit 23: Print control using System i Navigator (00:20) Exercise 17: Print control using System i Navigator (00:15) Unit 24: Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Exercise 18: Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:35) Unit 25: Starting and stopping the system (00:10) Exercise 19: System values using 5250 emulation (00:10) Exercise 20: System values using System i Navigator (00:10) Exercise 21: System values using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:15) Unit 26: System security concepts (00:15) Unit 27: System security using 5250 emulation (00:30) Exercise 22: System security using 5250 emulation (00:20) Unit 28: System security using System i Navigator (00:20) Exercise 23: System security using System i Navigator (00:20) Unit 29: System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Exercise 24: System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:10) Unit 30: System configuration overview (00:20) Unit 31: Configuration using 5250 emulation (00:15) Unit 32: Configuration using System i Navigator (00:10) Unit 33: Configuration using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:30) Exercise 25: Managing your system configuration


Agenda

xxxiii

Instructor Guide

Day 4 (00:25) Unit 34: Save concepts (00:45) Unit 35: Save using 5250 emulation (00:30) Exercise 26: Save using 5250 emulation (00:25) Unit 36: Save using System i Navigator (00:30) Exercise 27: Save using System i Navigator (00:30) Unit 37: Save using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i (00:20) Unit 38: Restore concepts and overview (00:20) Exercise 28: Restore using 5250 emulation (00:20) Exercise 29: Restore using System i Navigator (00:35) Unit 39: Problem determination using 5250 emulation (00:45) Exercise 30: Problem determination (00:20) Unit 40: Problem determination using System i Navigator (00:15) Unit 41: Overview of the PTF process (00:15) Unit 42: PTFs using 5250 Emulation (00:45) Unit 43: PTFs using System i Navigator (00:15) Unit 44: Class summary

xxxiv System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Unit 1. Power i and IBM i concepts and overview Estimated time 00:50

What this unit is about In this unit, you begin to familiarize yourself with the Power i hardware and software.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe the functions provided by the operating system • Explain the layers of software • Explain how data is stored on the system • Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can provide • Describe the clustering capability of the system • Explain capacity on demand • List the different types of supported consoles

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Checkpoint questions


Unit 1. Power i and IBM i concepts and overview


1-1

Instructor Guide

Unit objectives IBM i

After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe the functions provided by the operating system Explain the layers of software Explain how data is stored on the system Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can provide Describe the clustering capability of the system Explain capacity on demand List the different types of supported consoles

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-1. Unit objectives

AS248.1

Notes:

1-2





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Discuss the material in the student materials kit, particularly the student notebook and student exercises. Details — This might well be the first formal IBM training on the Power i for many of the students, and they could be intimidated by the experience. Try to establish an atmosphere that makes them feel at ease. Take your time during the discussion of the student materials kit and facilities. Give them time to get their feet on the ground. It is particularly important that you pay close attention to the students during introductions. Try as much as possible to understand why each one is in the class. Depending on the makeup of your audience, you might want to present certain topics in the course in either more or less depth than is indicated by this guide. The overview must be just that. You do not have time to go into detail about hardware and software. If students have questions, refer them to the appropriate documentation or take questions offline at break or lunch. Additional information — Remind the students to put their names on a tent card and set it up. Ask them to fill out their student questionnaires so that you can collect them later. Explain the purpose of the Class Evaluation form, and let them know that you will collect these forms at the end of class. Transition statement —




1-3

Instructor Guide

The IBM Systems family IBM i

Innovative, proven technology providing platform choice to match unique business needs

BladeCenter Simplify data center complexity.

Power i

System z

Install faster, maintain easier.

The flagship for IBM Systems innovation and the heart of a highly secure, resilient and integrated infrastructure.

System x

System Storage

Innovation comes standard.

Connected. Protected. Complete.

System p Get the power to do more, spend less.


Figure 1-2. The IBM Systems family

AS248.1

Notes: All of IBM’s systems and storage, along with the microelectronics upon which they are built are part of the same group today; the same management structure. The best of IBM’s technology is freely shared among all of the product lines. As a result, IBM has the most comprehensive and competitive systems and storage products in the industry today. Though many common technologies are shared among the various products, each remains distinct in the markets they serve. Each grew out of separate beginnings. • System z is the class leader in the industry for mainframes. • BladeCenter leads the industry in its category, and System x, our Intel-based offering, is gaining share against the competition. • System p leads the industry for UNIX-based servers. • System Storage has forged ahead with storage virtualization technologies. Power i is in a class by itself. Its beginnings, its roots, are in business computing. It does not require the technical expertise of a mainframe, yet it has the same power.

1-4





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an Instructor Led Online (ILO) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which systems they have installed in their company or organization. For a Face to Face (FTF) class: Ask the students to raise their hands if they have any IBM systems other than Power i at their organization. Additional information — Transition statement — Power i has grown from a heritage of business computing, and this is its strength. It installs faster and is easier to maintain.




1-5

Instructor Guide

Power i expands on a rich heritage IBM i

AS/400e iSeries

eServer i5

AS/400 Power i A technology-friendly architecture supporting continuous innovation without disruption


Figure 1-3. Power i expands on a rich heritage

AS248.1

Notes: Twenty years ago IBM introduced the AS/400, bringing together two of IBM's most successful platforms of the time: S/36 and S/38. It was the first of a new generation of servers with a revolutionary virtualized operating system. It allowed companies to simply write business applications that exploited its integrated database.

1-6





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement —




1-7

Instructor Guide

Processor technology roadmap IBM i


Figure 1-4. Processor technology roadmap

AS248.1

Notes: This visual charts the evolution of the POWER processors from the early days of POWER4 in 2001 to the current generation, POWER7, and even points to the future with POWER8. Some details are provided as to the density of the components on each generation. The numbers in the boxes below the graphic of the processor chips represent, in rough terms, the spacing of components in nanometers or microns. As these numbers get smaller over time we are seeing the evolution of the technology, of creating processors with the components more tightly squeezed together. The advantage of this is to increase the functionality of the processor and at the same time to reduce performance draining latency. The boxes below each generation highlight some of the enhancements to functionality associated with the processor. • POWER4 was the first to have more than one processor core on a chip (chip multiprocessing). • POWER5 introduced simultaneous multi-threading (SMT). 1-8





Uempty

• POWER6 included Altivec extensions which extended the range of high performance workloads that could be deployed on Power systems. • POWER7 increases the number of cores per chip, includes L3 cache on the chip, and extends SMT. For IBM POWER7 clients, there is the certainty of the POWER architecture roadmap and the sense of investment protection along with the proven evolution of the architecture to higher and higher levels of functionality and performance.




1-9

Instructor Guide


1-10 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Innovative IBM i technology IBM i


Figure 1-5. Innovative IBM i technology

AS248.1

Notes: Innovative technology has been built into the Power i family of products operating system throughout its life cycle. This visual lists some of the technologies that have been built into the operating system (OS) known as IBM i. On our system, these technologies have been designed into the OS from the inception, designed from the ground up. Whereas on other systems, these are additional layers of software that must be purchased and installed on their system. These are just some of the components that make our OS better than other operating systems.




1-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Central processing unit IBM i

Many generations of processors Choice of processing speeds with a range of: Processor cycle speed (MHz rating) L1/L2/L3 cache Multiple threads

Multiple processors: Core systems (Core = 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 32, 64) Capacity on demand (CoD)

Range of throughput capacities based on combination of: Generation of processors Number of processors


Figure 1-6. Central processing unit

AS248.1

Notes: The Power i family of servers consists of different system types and models, each with different capabilities and processing speeds. On the Power i family of servers these are measured by commercial processing workload (CPW). CPW is a measure used in IBM's Power i family of servers used to compare computer system models in terms of how efficiently each system processes a typical workload of commercial applications involving frequent database access. The CPW also represents a test of database commitment control, concurrent data access by many users, and a range of updating complexity.




1-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Tell students that the System Handbook is the best place to get all of the technical information for a particular model of the Power i. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

What is installed here? IBM i

System values for processor using:

System value . . . . . : QMODEL Description . . . . . : System model number Model number . . . . . :

520

5250 emulation: System value . . . . . : QPRCFEAT Description . . . . . : Processor feature

QMODEL - System model number

Processor feature . . : 7457

QPRCFEAT - Processor feature

System value . . . . . : QSRLNBR Description . . . . . : System serial number

QSRLNBR - System serial number

Serial number . . . . :

65FB92D

System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Configuration and service System values © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-7. What is installed here?

AS248.1

Notes: System values are provided as part of the OS. They are used by the system to control certain operations in the OS and to communicate the status of certain conditions. Changes to some system values take effect immediately, some do not take effect until new jobs are started, and others do not take effect until the next initial program load (IPL). More information about system values is in the Work Management information in the Power i and IBM i Information Center at: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm Use the work with system values (WRKSYSVAL) command to display and change system values on the system. • System model number (QMODEL): This is the number or letters used to identify the model of the system. • Processor feature (QPRCFEAT): This is the processor feature code level of the system. The processor feature system value is the same in each partition on a system.




1-15

Instructor Guide

• System serial number (QSRLNBR): This value cannot be changed. It is retrieved from the data fields by the system when installing the operating system licensed program.





Uempty





1-17

Instructor Guide

Other system components IBM i

Memory: Multiple memory cards Choice of memory capacity What is installed seen using green screen and GUI?

Storage cards Capacity per card System i Navigator (only available using GUI)

I/O buses Dependent on attached peripheral I/O processors

I/O processors provides support for:

Disk Tape Communication adapters Workstation adapters

Note: Each hardware component is identified by a four digit feature code.


Figure 1-8. Other system components

AS248.1

Notes: The system provides the capability to see what hardware and software is installed. This information can be displayed and, in some cases, changed using either the 5250 emulation interface, System i Navigator, or Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. To see this information using 5250 emulation, use the Work Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command. This information can also be seen by way of the supported graphical interfaces using the Configuration and Service branch or task.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Recommend that students become familiar with the System Handbook, SG24-7486. Additional information — Transition statement —




1-19

Instructor Guide

Peripherals IBM i

Disk drives Tape drives Communications adapters Workstations


Figure 1-9. Peripherals

AS248.1

Notes: Depending on the specific system model installed, each will support a specific model of disk drives. The different disk drives supported have a variety of storage capacity and access speeds. What is installed on your system can be displayed by using the Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) command through the 5250 emulation or interface or by using the Configuration and Service branch or task. There are also a large variety of tape drives that are supported on this family of servers. Each of the different tape systems that can be connected have different capacities with different read and write speeds and performance. Depending on the customer’s requirements, different communications adapters can be installed to support connectivity through fiber optics or Ethernet.





Uempty





1-21

Instructor Guide

Integrated by design IBM i

Traditional systems

Power i IBM i Higher level functions exposed to users and applications based on SLIC services Graphical user interface Vast range of high level language functions (C/C++, RPG, COBOL)

Directory Backup and recovery on s unicati Comm

Online transaction processing

Technology Independent Machine Interface - TIMI

Security

Relational database

Sys man tems agem ent

Java

Operating system Hardware and microcode

System Licensed Internal Code (LIC) Process control Resource management Integrated SQL-compliant database Security enforcement Network communications File systems Storage management Java virtual machine (JVM) Other primitives

64-bit POWER Systems


Figure 1-10. Integrated by design

AS248.1

Notes: In addition to knowing which devices are attached to your Power i and how to operate them, you should also be familiar with the system software that is installed. There are four primary categories of software on the Power i which build on each other: • Licensed Internal Code (LIC) • Operating system, named IBM i • Programming support • Application support These will be discussed in more detail on the next couple of pages.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Emphasize the following: • Hardware layer • LIC and the function it serves • TIMI - important to discuss what function this servers • IBM i - the OS (covered in more detail on the following pages) Point out that the software is like building blocks. That is, IBM i requires LIC, programming support requires IBM i and LIC, and application support requires LIC, IBM i, and, in most cases, programming support. Additional information — Transition statement —




1-23

Instructor Guide

IBM i overview IBM i

System software: Operating system (5770-SS1) Support for applications native to other operating systems Integrated xSeries server

System resource management: Processors Memory Disk

System control interface: Control language (CL) support System or user-written commands

Integrated support:

Security Communications System management Database management system (DBMS) - DB2 UDB for i © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-11. IBM i overview

AS248.1

Notes: The operating system software is knows as IBM i and is licensed program 5770-SS1. Previously, it was named OS/400; then it became i5/OS, and now it is known as IBM i or i. The most current version is V7R1 (Version 7 Release 1) or 7.1. As we saw on the previous page, several functions are integrated into the operating system. These include: • Database management system (DBMS) known as DB2 UDB for i • Security • Communications: - Systems Network Architecture (SNA) and Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) - Windows Network Neighborhood support - HTTP/Apache and so forth





Uempty

• System management: - System-managed access-path protection (SMAPP) - System i Navigator and Management Central • Support for applications native to other operating systems: -

UNIX application programming interfaces (API) Portable Application Solutions Environment (PASE) AIX-based applications Linux

• Integrated xSeries server The OS provides commands and graphical interface options to manage the system resources, such as: • Processors • Memory • Disk The following support is available to interface with the system: • Control language (CL) support • High level programming language • System or user-written commands




1-25

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Application software IBM i

Traditional applications Workload Interactive, character-based (ICPW) Batch (no on going user interaction)

Support through specific IBM i jobs Application users = IBM i users - refer to work management

Client/server applications Workload: Information processing (interactive or batch) Database serving Interaction with IBM i jobs Application users might not be known to IBM i.


Figure 1-12. Application software

AS248.1

Notes: The performance capacity of all Power i servers is represented by CPW. CPW values are assigned to all Power i processors and are derived by performing various monitored and measured workloads. The reported values or results are used to compare relative performance characteristics of processor features offered for Power i servers. They serve as a means to compare performance.




1-27

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Other licensed program products IBM i

TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities (TC1) Backup and Recovery Media Services (BR1) Application Development Tools (WDS): Program Development Languages Control Language (included with IBM i)

Query (QU1) DB2 Query Manager (ST1) Performance Tools (PT1) Performance Management (PM1) Cryptographic Support (CR1) Advanced Job Scheduler (JS1) Lotus Domino (LD7), and so forth © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-13. Other licensed program products

AS248.1

Notes: There are many more software products available for the Power i than those listed in this visual. Depending on the version and release level of the OS installed on your system, the program numbers for the software will change. For example, the licensed program number for the TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities is 5770-TC1 on a system running at V7R1. On a system running at V6R1, the program number is 5761-TC1. Whenever a new version or release for the OS becomes available, the numbering for the licensed program software will change.




1-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Question IBM i

How do you use the Power i in your organization?


Figure 1-14. Question

AS248.1

Notes:




1-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to use the “type text on screen” tool to describe in a sentence the functions their Power iPower i performs or will be performing at their organization. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands and select two or three students to briefly describe the functions their Power i performs or will be performing. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Installed software using 5250 emulation IBM i


Figure 1-15. Installed software using 5250 emulation

AS248.1

Notes: To see this menu, issue the GO LICPGM command; then select option 10. On the Display Installed Licensed Programs screen, press the F11 key to see all of the additional information available on this screen.




1-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check Yes or No using the polling options if they have used the LICPGM menu before. Once you have finished the polling question, play file AS248-U01-F15 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students a video demonstration of how to use the LICPGM command. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U01-F15 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via a green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands to indicate if they have ever used the LICPGM menu before. Optionally, you can then play file AS248-U01-F15 on your PC to provide the students with a video demonstration of the LICPGM command. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Installed software using System i Navigator IBM i


Figure 1-16. Installed software using System i Navigator

AS248.1

Notes: On this visual is a System i Navigator view of installed software on a system. To see this window perform the following steps: • Open a System i Navigator window. • Click to expand My Connections. • Click your system, and sign on with your user ID and password when prompted. • Click to expand Configuration and Service. • Click to expand Software. • Click Installed Products to update the right pane to show the software installed on your system. This function is not yet available using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i, which is the other interface that will be covered in this class. There is a Configuration and Service task, but it does not include a link to display software. Perhaps this function will be added in the future. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



1-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — System i Navigator is one of two GUIs to be presented in this class. This function is not yet available using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. There is a Configuration and Service task but it does not include a link to display software. Perhaps this function will be added in the future. For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check yes or no using the polling options if they have ever used System i Navigator before. You can then play file AS248-U01-F16 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students with an exercise of how to view licensed programs in System i Navigator. • To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. • Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U01-F16 and click Play. • Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands to indicate if they have ever used System i Navigator before. You can then play file AS248-U01-F16 on your PC to provide the students with a demonstration of how to view licensed programs in System i Navigator.





Uempty

Disk storage management IBM i

Data

IBM i

All data spread across available disk arms Not all information necessarily contiguous Optional rebalancing Minimal database administration © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-17. Disk storage management

AS248.1

Notes: On this system when you create or restore an object, data is spread across all of the available disk drives. This is done to optimize performance when reading or writing data. Therefore, all of the data on your Power is not necessarily stored in a contiguous location. This helps improve performance; there is a more balanced disk arm utilization. One of the options available to a system administrator when signed on through service tools is that you can choose an option to rebalance your disk drives. This is something that is typically done whenever new disk drives are added to the system. This is also something that is done whenever a disk drive is replaced on your system (after a service call). This system requires minimal database administration. When a user creates a new object or when an object is restored on the system there are three pieces of information that are required. An object must have a unique name, you must specify what type of object is being created or restored, and you must specify the name of the library for the object. The OS is responsible to managing the specific location (the address on the disk where this data will be located).




1-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty

ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs IBM i

Data IBM i

ASP-1 (System + Appl-1) Database changes

ASP-2 (Journal Receiver)

ASP: Auxiliary storage pool (disk pool) A collection of disks used to isolate IBM i objects from others on another collection of ID disks.

Data

ASP-3 (Appl-2)


Figure 1-18. ASPs: Up to 32 user ASPs

AS248.1

Notes: An auxiliary storage pool (ASP) is one or more physical disk units assigned to the same storage area. ASPs allow you to isolate types of objects on specified physical disk units. The server ASP isolates server programs and the temporary objects that are created as a result of processing by server programs. User ASPs can be used to isolate user objects, such as libraries, SQL objects, journals, journal receivers, applications, and data. The Power i supports up to 32 basic user ASPs and 223 independent user ASPs. Isolating libraries or objects in a user ASP protects them from disk failures in other ASPs and reduces recovery time. In addition to reduced recovery time and isolation of objects, placing objects in an ASP can improve performance. If a journal receiver is isolated in a user ASP, the disks associated with that ASP are dedicated to that receiver. In an environment that requires many read and write operations to the database files, this can reduce arm contention on the disks in that ASP and can improve journaling performance.




1-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Independent ASPs (ASP 33-255) IBM i

Auxiliary storage pools (ASPs or disk pools)

System *SYSBAS

User Basic Independent

*SYSBAS

*SYSBAS

HSL

Independent ASP (switchable disks) can be switched between Power i servers without restarting the servers.

IASP


Figure 1-19. Independent ASPs (ASP 33-255)

AS248.1

Notes: An independent ASP is a collection of disk units that you can bring online or take offline independent of the rest of the storage on a system. Independent ASPs contain any of the following: • One or more user-defined file systems • One or more external libraries Each independent ASP contains all of the necessary Power information associated with the data it contains. Therefore, while the Power is active, you can take the independent ASP offline, bring it online, or switch between systems. When you vary on an independent ASP, several changes occur within the root (/) file system.




1-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

What is a partition? IBM i

A partition allocates one systems resources to create logically separate systems. Each partition is an independent operating environment.

From one to many


Figure 1-20. What is a partition?

AS248.1

Notes: When a Power i is subdivided into multiple, independent operating Power images, those independent operating environments are called partitions. The resources on the system are divided up among the partitions. Applications running on a partitioned system do not have to be redesigned for the partitioned environment. Each partition runs its own operating system which might or might not match operating systems in other partitions on the same system. Each partition can be started and stopped independently of other partitions.




1-43

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Partition characteristics IBM i

Each partition has its own: Operating system LIC for IBM i or Open Firmware for AIX 5L and Linux Console Load source disk or boot resources ASPs and memory pools Other components expected in a stand-alone operating system environment


Figure 1-21. Partition characteristics

AS248.1

Notes: The list in the visual illustrates how each partition is independent. As stated before, each partition runs its own operating system which can be IBM i or Linux or AIX. Each partition shares a few physical system attributes, such as the system serial number, system model, and processor feature code, with other partitions. In addition, you can choose to share other hardware among partitions. Other components expected in a standalone operating system environment include: • • • • • •

Problem logs Data (libraries, objects, file systems) Performance characteristics Language feature codes Network identity Date and time




1-45

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Partition resources IBM i

Resources are allocated to partitions: Memory Processing units I/O slots including virtual devices 5250 emulation (interactive) for IBM i Load source IOP and disk unit Console

Virtual resources can be shared: Ethernet SCSI Serial


Figure 1-22. Partition resources

AS248.1

Notes: Resources Resources are the system components that are configured into partitions. The maximum number of partitions is related to the total amount of resources on system. Minimum amount of resources Each partition must be configured with a minimum amount of memory, one tenth of a physical processor, and enough I/O devices to provide a load source (boot resources), to have a console, and to connect to a network. The minimum is dependent on the model of the system and the version and release of the OS. Memory Memory is allocated in 16 MB segments. A partition can be as small as 128 MB or as large as all of the installed memory.




1-47

Instructor Guide

Processing units Processing power is configured in processing units equivalent to 1/100 of a physical processor. A partition can be configured with as little as one processing unit or as much as the equivalent to all of the available installed physical processors. I/O slots I/O resources are allocated to partitions at the slot level. At minimum, you must configure a partition with enough I/O resources to include the load source disk (boot resources) and a network adapter. 5250 CPW (IBM i partitions only) Your system has a certain amount of interactive performance based on the type of system and the number of processors. The 5250 emulation refers to how much the user must interact with (and respond to prompts from) the computer. You can contrast this with batch, where no user intervention is required. Given the amount of interactive performance on your system, you need to determine what percentage will be available for each partition. Virtual devices Other devices can be configured to be shared between partitions. Each partition can configure virtual I/O slots which can be configured with a virtual adapter instance. These virtual adapters can be an Ethernet interface.





Uempty





1-49

Instructor Guide

Logical partitions IBM i

Partitions can support: Consolidated operations

3

1

CPU CPU

Multinational requirements Multiple business units

CPU

3

CPU

4

CPU

CPU

CPU

CPU

CPU

CPU

IOP

IOP

CPU

IOP

IOP

Sys. integrators, outsourcing IBM i

Mixed application server Mixed test environments Departmental systems Integrated cluster Constrained systems

LINUX

IBM i

IBM i

1 CPU

IOP

Firewall

IBM i (Hypervisor)

12-way Processor

Partitions can communicate with each other internally: Over virtual LAN or Physical LAN

System allocates a percentage of interactive workload to each partition. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-23. Logical partitions

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





1-51

Instructor Guide

Virtual i partitions IBM i

IBM i-based virtualization: Supports IBM i partition using I/O resources from another IBM i partition

i

Eliminates requirement to buy adapters and disk drives for each IBM i partition

i Hypervisor

POWER6

Requires POWER6 processor-based systems or newer with V6R1 or higher

Adds to IBM i storage virtualization capabilities: AIX and Linux partitions Integrated BladeCenter and System x servers running VMware, Windows, or Linux


Figure 1-24. Virtual i partitions

AS248.1

Notes: Virtual i partitions will be supported without requiring physical hardware adapters for the partition, just like we have offered for POWER Linux and AIX partitions. You can easily add partitions for tests and development. This configuration requires at least a POWER6 system and a minimum of IBM i at V6R1 or higher for both the host and client partitions. Additionally, IBM i can get its storage from a Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) partition. The IBM i partition does not own any physical adapters in this configuration. This requires a minimum of a POWER6 Systems and IBM i V6R1 for the IBM i partition.





Uempty





1-53

Instructor Guide

xSeries server integration IBM i

Integrated xSeries servers

Power Power i i

Up to 60 per Power i 2.0 GHz Intel Xeon processor Power i PCI Bus Attach

512 KB L2

Up to three LAN adapters

Integrated xSeries adapters Up to 60 per Power i: Direct attach of N-way IBM xSeries servers Connection using high-speed link (HSL) Scalability high-speed link

IBM xSeries Server


Figure 1-25. xSeries server integration

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





1-55

Instructor Guide

Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power i IBM i

Power i connects selected System x and BladeCenter products using standard Ethernet cables and switches. Power i exploits IBM i virtual storage to manage Windows storage. Power i streamlines communication between Windows and IBM i applications with virtual Ethernet. IBM i integrates operations and backup.


Figure 1-26. Integrate System x and BladeCenter with Power i

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





1-57

Instructor Guide

Linux support (POWER and x86) IBM i

Linux runs in a Power i partition. Leverages LPAR and integrated xSeries server concept Acts as a guest of a partition running IBM i Uses Linux partition hardware: Processor: Minimum (0.1 processor/64 MB memory) Maximum (8 processors, 4 GB of memory)

IBM i

IBM i

IBM i Host

P

PPP

PPPP

Linux

PP

Linux

P

LAN, virtual LAN, console Disk Virtual LAN

P = Processor


Figure 1-27. Linux support (POWER and x86)

AS248.1

Notes: POWER Linux runs in a partition and requires a minimum of POWER5 or newer hardware. x86Linux runs on iSCSI only, not IXS or IXA (VIO required). • Disk: - Virtual disk - Power i disk management - Power i network storage device using Power i I/O processors - Direct attach disk using Power i I/O adapters





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For those customers who have the need, it is possible to run Linux in its own separate LPAR. Additional information — Transition statement —




1-59

Instructor Guide

Java support IBM i

Java - the standard for dynamic Internet applications

Client

Server

Java development tools (like VisualAge)

Java virtual Machine (JVM) JVM integrated with IBM i

Toolbox for Java

Enabling Power i to take advantage of a growing portfolio of Java applications © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-28. Java support

AS248.1

Notes: The new IBM 64-bit Java virtual Machine (JVM) is the cross-platform JVM to be used on the various IBM platforms. It has shown improved performance over the 32-bit classic JVM. Both version are available. Improvement is primary in Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) and DB2 for i and Java. It includes 64 pages, and is only available on POWER5+ and beyond.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Impress on the students that Java: 1. Is built into the OS 2. Is supported at the hardware level 3. Has no special requirements to implement on this system Additional information — Transition statement —




1-61

Instructor Guide

Integrated Web serving IBM i

Client

HTML

Browser on PC

Multimedia

Server: HTTP HTML, XML, and so forth

Web application serving WebSphere Application Server (WAS)

Network HTTP/Apache CGI-bin, and so on

Internet/intranet

DB

Internet/intranet

Browser

Security

URL

Clients

Servers

Network © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-29. Integrated Web serving

AS248.1

Notes: Starting at V6R1, IBM i no longer supports a version of Tomcat. The IBM i integrated WebSphere Application Server (WAS) replaces Tomcat. Customers can still download Tomcat from the Apache Website, but the responsibility of installing, using, and servicing Tomcat is up to the customer. The performance goal is to have a Web container that can run on the smallest Power i servers. We need this because of management tools like IBM Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Impress on the students that Web serving is supported through different Web servers supported on the Power i: • Apache • ASF Tomcat • WebSphere Additional information — Transition statement —




1-63

Instructor Guide

PASE IBM i

Portable Application Solutions Environment: Is an integrated runtime environment Supports selected UNIX applications Provides broad subset of the support

IBM i PASE: Supports direct execution of PowerPC machine instructions Runs on the System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC) kernel on the Power i


Figure 1-30. PASE

AS248.1

Notes: Portable Application Solutions Environment (PASE) is an integrated runtime environment for AIX applications run on IBM i. PASE: • Supports selected UNIX applications - Especially IBM-AIX Runtime Support - Application binary interface (ABI) of AIX - Other UNIX-based programs (must successfully compile on AIX) • Provides broad subset of the support - AIX shared libraries, shells, and utilities IBM i PASE: • Supports direct execution of PowerPC machine instructions - No drawbacks of an emulation environment • Runs on the System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC) kernel on the Power i - Not a UNIX operating system on Power i 1-64 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — PASE provides the capability to allow compiled AIX software to port to and run on the Power i. It will run in an AIX environment. Additional information — Transition statement —




1-65

Instructor Guide

Capacity on demand IBM i

Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD) Permanent activation of processors or memory

Trial CoD No charge 30-day activation of processors or memory resources

On/Off CoD

Add reserve resources

Ability to activate processor or memory resources temporarily

Reserve CoD: Processors only Prepaid for certain number of days

Mobile CoD Move permanent processor or memory activation from one server to another © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-31. Capacity on demand

AS248.1

Notes: CoD is a list of features that can be purchased. The bullets in the visual list the purchasing options. These options are managed from the Hardware Management Console (HMC) and require a license key to activate. • Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD) requires a purchase agreement. Once processors or memory are added, there is no ability to turn off the capacity. • Trial CoD is available for 30 days at no additional cost to allow testing and emergency relief while the customer processes the purchase of permanent CUoD resources. • On/Off CoD provides temporary additional processor or memory resources. Activity is reported to IBM, and there must be an On/Off Capacity agreement. • Reserve CoD adds reserve processor capacity to the shared processor pool if the base shared pool capacity is exceeded. There must be a prepaid debit agreement for a set number of days. • Mobile CoD is the ability to move a permanent activation of a resource (processor or memory amount) from one server to another. 1-66 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Testing is allowed for 30 days, at which point the customer must enter a software key if they want to continue using the software. Otherwise, they will be locked out of that software by the system. For an Instructor Led Online (ILO) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which systems they have installed in their company or organization. For a Face to Face (FTF) class: Ask the students to raise their hands if they have any IBM systems other than Power i at their organization. Additional information — Transition statement —




1-67

Instructor Guide

Clustering IBM i

Demand for continuous availability (24x365): Need to minimize planned downtime Single Power i - 99.94% available (Ref: Gartner Report)

Power i implementation: Shared-nothing model Up to 128 Power i nodes Availability through: APIs Application restart Independent ASPs

Cluster Control © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-32. Clustering

AS248.1

Notes: Clustering is the practice of connecting multiple processors or servers to cooperate on complex workloads as a single unified computing resource. Demand for continuous availability (24x365). • Need to minimize planned downtime: - Maintenance - Upgrades • Single Power i - 99.94% available (reference the Gartner Report) Power i implementation: • Shared-nothing model: - Each resource is owned by a host - Critical (resilient) resources replicated over nodes • Up to 128 Power i nodes





Uempty

• Availability through: - APIs • IP address switching - Application restart: • Custom code • High availability BP products - Independent ASPs • Switchable disks




1-69

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Clustering is a very common tool used in the availability arena. For example, if a customer has three systems: • System 1 is replicated onto system 2 • System 2 is replicated onto system 3 • System 3 is replicated onto system 1 If one of the three systems goes down, the other two have all of the application software that would normally run on the system that is down. In this environment, you should test that the replication is working. Take the systems down, usually once a week, to verify that clustering is working. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

System i Access family IBM i

These products provide the functionality and interfaces to gain access to applications, data, and resources on i. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-33. System i Access family

AS248.1

Notes: Power i Access for Windows (5770-XE1). Power i Access for Web (5770-XH2). Power i Series Access for Wireless (5770-XP1). • IBM IBM i Toolbox for Java ME Power i Access for Linux (5770-XL1).




1-71

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Which console type? IBM i

Connect the console using: Windows PC: Connected by serial port Serial Port

Connected by LAN OR

m

^

Twinax (5250 terminal) Twinax


Figure 1-34. Which console type?

AS248.1

Notes:




1-73

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Operations console (1 of 2) IBM i

Provides system console session Includes graphical control panel

Is included with System i Access for Windows: LAN connect directly to Power i Remote connect through TCP/IP dial-up connection


Figure 1-35. Operations console (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Setting up an operations console is an option for those customers who do not have a Hardware management console (HMC) or a Systems director management console (SDMC) installed on their system. It is used to provide graphical access to the system control panel.




1-75

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Operations console (2 of 2) IBM i

Server code Installable option of System i Access for Windows (5770-XE1)

System i Access code System i Access family (5770-XW1 product) EZ Setup includes the client Console cable for System console functions Connects into Async adapter on PC Connects into MFIOP or ECS port on Power i

PC5250 or Power i Navigator

Modem connection TCP/IP only

RCS

Remote controlling system

LCS

Local controlling system

Control panel cable for control panel functions Connects into Async adapter on PC Connects into control panel (that is, SAMI/J19 port) on Power i


Figure 1-36. Operations console (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: The console cable is directly connected to the Power i multifunction I/O processor (MFIOP) (similar to the way the PC console is connected). The control panel application can be used if the required control panel cable is directly connected to the Power i control panel. Note If you configure an Operations Console on a Power i that previously used a twinax console, you must change the console mode in DST to Operations Console. During the manual IPL, the Power i might detect a twinax workstation for use as the console before it finds Operations Console. You can avoid this if you power down the twinax device or reconfigure the cabling.




1-77

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The console cable is directly connected to the Power i MFIOP (similar to the way the PC Console is connected). Specific cables are required to support this function. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Hardware Management Console IBM i

For POWER5,POWER6 and POWER7 systems, the HMC is required for: Virtual console windows LPAR configuration and operation management CoD management Service tools Rack-mount 7310-CR2

HMC is a PC-based console: Closed custom appliance Remotely accessible Connects to service processor over private or open network

Desktop 7310-C03 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 1-37. Hardware Management Console

AS248.1

Notes: HMC description Officially, the name of the PC-based console is IBM Hardware Management Console for Power i, also known as an HMC. It is available in a Desktop or a rack-mount model. The user can only access the management application, and no additional applications can be installed. A second HMC can be connected to a single managed system for redundancy. Two managed systems can be managed by a single HMC. The HMC is required for systems running LPARs. Remote access to the HMC functions Remote access to the HMC application is provided by using WebSM. The WebSM client runs on Microsoft Windows PCs and on Linux and AIX 5L workstations. In addition, there are extensive HMC command-line controls accessible through the secure shell (SSH). HMC is independent from the managed system and its partitions. The managed system refers to the Power i being managed by the HMC. While the HMC is necessary for some functions, such as configuring LPARs, it does not affect the operational © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



1-79

Instructor Guide

status of any partitions if something goes wrong. The partition configuration information is not only kept on the HMC but also in nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) on the managed system; therefore, if the HMC were to crash, the partitions would continue to run. In fact, you can remove the HMC, replace it with another (after contacting your service provider), and then download the partition data from the NVRAM on the managed system and not affect the running of the partitions. Service errors focal point If a hardware error occurs, that error might be reported by multiple partitions. To prevent confusion, the HMC is also used as a service focal point for error reporting. An application on the HMC serves as a filter for errors to ensure IBM service calls are placed only once per actual hardware error. Alternatively, a partition configured as the service partition might collect system errors and report them to IBM.





Uempty





1-81

Instructor Guide

Systems Director Management Console IBM i

Hardware Appliance

Software Appliance Software Appliance: SDMC Management Base Systems Director Express Edition

IBM-provided Hardware

Non Turn Key Solution

Plus Software Appliance: SDMC Management Base Systems Director Express Edition

Utilize existing x86 virtualization infrastructure Customer provided hardware Finite set of server options

Turn Key Solution


Figure 1-38. Systems Director Management Console

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Management Console is also known as SDMC. Functions included: • All configuration, service and management capabilities provided by the HMC and IVM today will be supported natively in IBM Systems Director: - At a high level SDMC provides Server Management and PowerVM Virtualization Management - Console Management becomes a responsibility of Director • CLI Interface - Same functionality (for the Server Management and PowerVM Management functions) - Syntactically there are no differences • Aliases have been provided to offer almost complete compatibility





Uempty

• GUI interface: - Same functionality (for the Server Management and PowerVM Management functions) - Completely new to comply with Director look and feel - Some modifications to simply user navigation and tasks




1-83

Instructor Guide






Uempty

SDMC features versus HMC IBM i

Capability

SDMC

v s

SDMC provides simplified Virtualization Management (versus HMC) SDMC can manage Blades (HMC cannot) SDMC is offered in a virtual appliance (HMC is not)

HMC

* * * * * * * *

Simplified Virtualization

Blades Management Mobility between Blades and Servers Dual VIOS for Blades Active Memory Expansion for Blades Virtual Appliance Option Consistent Look and Feel OS Management and Monitoring

SDMC integrates Power hardware, service, and virtualization management into a common look and feel (Director)

40


Figure 1-39. SDMC features versus HMC

AS248.1

Notes: The Hardware Appliance is very similar to the HMC: • Will use 7042-CR6 hardware platform as the base (with additional DASD and Memory) Can chose to run exactly the same software (OS and all) on an x86 Hypervisor (for example, VMware or KVM) When would you use the Hardware Appliance? 1. Required for all mid/high-end systems (> 550 / 750) 2. Want a turn-key solution that is delivered, pre-installed, and serviced as one entity 3. Never used an x86 Hypervisor before and do not feel a pressing need to learn When would you use the Software Appliance? 1. All of the systems are Low / Mid-range systems (550/750 and below) 2. All of my systems have static IP addresses and do not rely on an HMC for DHCP




1-85

Instructor Guide

Note While it is possible to use DHCP on the virtual appliance, it complicates the hypervisor network configuration and cabling.

3. Already have an x86 virtualization infrastructure that can have network connectivity to my Power systems. Note It is possible (and quite easy) to create a bare-bones infrastructure needed to run the virtual appliance, however the hardware appliance is even easier.

4. Want to take advantage of x86 virtualization – backups via snapshots, quick restores, mobility, and so on.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U01-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U01-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U01-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




1-87

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint (1 of 2) IBM i

1. True or False: Security is built into the operating system. 2. The OS on this system, at V7R1, is now known as which of the following? a. OS/400 b. i5/OS c. IBM i d. All of the above 3. True or False: The data administrator tells the system where data will be stored on the disk drives.


Figure 1-40. Checkpoint (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details —

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2) IBM i

1. True or False: Security is built into the operating system. The answer is True.

2. The OS on this system, at V7R1, is now known as which of the following? a. b. c. d.

OS/400 i5/OS IBM i All of the above

The answer is IBM i. 3. True or False: The data administrator tells the system where data will be stored on the disk drives. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Additional information — Transition statement —




1-89

Instructor Guide


4. Which of the following are found in every partition? a. Operating system b. Memory c. Disk d. All of the above 5. True or False: Linux is supported as a guest operating system in a partition. 6. True or False: Capacity on demand is managed by the system console.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. Which of the following are found in every partition? a. b. c. d.

Operating system Memory Disk All of the above

The answer is All of the above.

5. True or False: Linux is supported as a guest operating system in a partition. The answer is True.

6. True or False: Capacity on demand is managed by the system console. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





1-91

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe the functions provided by the operating system Explain the layers of software Explain how data is stored on the system Explain what a logical partition is and the functions it can provide Describe the clustering capability of the system Explain capacity on demand List the different types of supported consoles


Figure 1-42. Unit summary

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Additional information — Transition statement —




1-93

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 2. Reference material and support Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about In this unit, you go over the reference materials and the Web sites available that provide support for your Power i.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • List the steps required to access the Information Center • Describe the support available on the Information Center • List the Web sites that support the Power i family of products • Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain how to access these tools • Explain how to access support for System i Navigator • Explain how to access support for IBM Systems Director


Unit 2. Reference material and support


2-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: List the steps required to access the Information Center Describe the support available on the Information Center List the Web sites that support the Power i family of products Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain how to access these tools Explain how to access support for System i Navigator Explain how to access support for IBM Systems Director



AS248.1

Notes:

2-2





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Perform a Web tour for this entire unit. • First launch the Web tour by clicking the Earth icon in the Elluminate toolbar. • Then enter the URL for the next slide, http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm. • Click the icon to the right of the URL address bar to past the URL into the text chat. • Remind the students to bookmark this for easy reference. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Open a Web browser and enter the Website URL: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm. Encourage the students to follow along on their classroom computers if possible. Additional information — Transition statement —




2-3

Instructor Guide

IBM i and Power i Information Center IBM i


Figure 2-2. IBM i and Power i Information Center

AS248.1

Notes: The Information Center is the central navigation point for documentation. It replaces the distribution of hardcopy manuals. The URL used to access this Web page is: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/?topic=/rzahg/icmain.htm The first page displayed will show the versions of the operating system that are currently supported. Click the link that applies to your system to see the window on the next page. In this example, we will click i 7.1.

2-4





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Recommend to students that they connect to and save the Web pages discussed in this unit. Students should visit these pages regularly for any new or updated information. Click the current version number to advance to the next visual in the presentation. Additional information — Transition statement —




2-5

Instructor Guide

IBM i Information Center IBM i


Figure 2-3. IBM i Information Center

AS248.1

Notes: Notice the links available in the pane on the right. The other option is to click and expand the links on the pane in the left. You can expand until you find your area of interest. Lastly, you can enter keywords in the search field to locate reference materials of interest.

2-6





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Enter the URL http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i to advance to the next visual in the presentation. Additional information — Transition statement —




2-7

Instructor Guide

IBM Power i homepage IBM i


Figure 2-4. IBM Power i homepage

AS248.1

Notes: This is the home page for IBM Power i. http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i This page is a good starting point from which to navigate to get the latest Power i information. Links are available on this Web page to learn more about the library (Redbooks and Information Center), support, education, and the support available for both software and hardware. Click the Support and services link on the left to see the Web page on the next page in the guide.

2-8





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Click the Support and services link on the left to see this Web page to advance to the next visual. Additional information — Transition statement —




2-9

Instructor Guide

Support: Power i technical support IBM i


Figure 2-5. Support: Power i technical support

AS248.1

Notes: Click the Support and services link on the Web page on the previous page in this guide to see this Web page.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Note all of the links on the top left. Additional information — Transition statement — Enter the URL http://www.redbooks.ibm.com to advance to the next visual in the presentation.




2-11

Instructor Guide

IBM Redbooks page IBM i


Figure 2-6. IBM Redbooks page

AS248.1

Notes: Redbooks are excellent supplements to IBM’s standard documentation. The URL to access this Web page is: http://www.redbooks.ibm.com Students should connect to this site and save it as a favorite. Users of this site must register the first time they connect. There is no charge, but they will need their customer numbers. When a new user registers, they will have the opportunity to sign up for email notifications. • Notifications come whenever new Redbooks are available for your interest areas. • Notifications cover as many interest areas as they might have (no charge).





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — Enter the URL: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/software/navigator/index.html to advance to the next visual in the presentation.




2-13

Instructor Guide

System i Navigator IBM i


Figure 2-7. System i Navigator

AS248.1

Notes: System i Navigator is the graphical user interface for the Power i. To access this page, use the following URL: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/software/navigator/index.html





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — Enter the URL: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/software/director/editions/index.html to advance to the next visual in the presentation.




2-15

Instructor Guide

IBM Systems Director IBM i


Figure 2-8. IBM Systems Director

AS248.1

Notes: The URL used to access this Web page is: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/software/director/editions/index.html





Uempty





2-17

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: List the steps required to access the Information Center Describe the support available on the Information Center List the Web sites that support the Power i family of products Describe the purpose served by IBM Redbooks and explain how to access these tools Explain how to access support for System i Navigator Explain how to access support for IBM Systems Director



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





2-19

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help Estimated time 00:40

What this unit is about This unit describes the 5250 emulation interface and the help facilities available.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe and use green screen general display types: -

Menu List Entry Information

• Access and use special green screen menus: - Information Assist - System Request - Operational Assist • Access and use the command entry display • Access green screen help

How you will check your progress Accountability: • Exercise • Checkpoint questions


Unit 3. Overview of 5250 emulation and help


3-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe and use green screen general display types: Menu List Entry Information

Access and use special green screen menus: Information Assist System Request Operational Assist

Access and use the command entry display Access green screen help © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes: In this unit, you will learn how to: • Sign on to the system • Select a desired menu • Run options from a menu • Return to previous menus You will also be able to identify the four types of system displays: menu, entry, list, and information. You will learn how to use the command entry display as well as the System Request menu. Lastly, you will be able to select the types of displays, whether basic or advanced, that you want to work with.

3-2





Uempty





3-3

Instructor Guide

System displays: Overview IBM i

1

4

IBM I Main Menu

USER

User Tasks User Tasks - Help

1. User tasks 2. Office tasks 3. General system tasks . . .

How to Use a Menu

1 Menu 2 Entry 3 List 4 Information 2

3

Submit Job (SBMJOB)

Work with All Output Queues Type options, press Enter.

Type choices, press Enter.

2=Change

Command to run . . . . .___ ______________________

Opt

Queue

Library


Figure 3-2. System displays: Overview

AS248.1

Notes: Some terminology: • Screen - The surface of the workstation or terminal on which information is displayed. • Display - A predefined grouping of information arranged in a specified way and displayed on a screen. Displays are sometimes referred to as green screens because of the default colors used to display them (green letters on a black background). IBM licensed programs use only the four display types listed on the visual to display information.

3-4





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A word of caution: The term panel is a System Application Architecture (SAA) term primarily used to define the layout of information which is displayed on a workstation screen. A panel can consist of one or multiple windows. From the perspective of most system operators, what they see on the workstation screen at any particular instant is probably best termed a display. A system operator sees information presented in the format defined by each of the four display types shown on the visual. Point out to the students that the displays are sometimes called green screens, as opposed to the graphical user interface (GUI) of System i Navigator. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U03-F03 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U03-F03 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You should play file AS248-U03-F03 on your instructor PC in place of the next visual.




3-5

Instructor Guide

Menu display overview IBM i

2 1 3

4 5 6 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 3-3. Menu display overview

AS248.1

Notes: Once a user has signed on, a general menu is displayed. This is the most common type of green screen display and the one you use most often. It allows you to easily select work that needs to be done without having to remember and enter a long command every time you want to do something. The IBM i Main Menu shown in the visual is the most powerful menu provided by IBM i operating system. From this menu, just typing the number of a menu option allows you to access any function in the system for which you are authorized. Except for option 90, all options on this menu cause some other menu to be displayed. The IBM i Main menu shows the characteristics of most system menus. 1. Title

The name of the menu. The title is located in the center of the top line.

2. Menu ID

The shortened title which is shown in capital letters in the upper left-hand corner of the first line. Menus are the only types of displays that have IDs. You can use the menu ID to access a particular menu quickly.

3-6





Uempty

3. List of options

The functions which you can perform from this menu. The list of options includes a list of numbers and descriptions. To perform a function, enter the option number on the command line. This list of options will vary by menu.

4. Command line

An input area which is provided for entering a menu option, number, or command.

5. Function keys

Keyboard keys (sometimes called active function keys) that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer functions. They are located below the command line and differ by menu. If there are more function keys than can be shown on a single display, a user can press F24 (more keys) to display the additional keys.

6. Message line

A blank line (or a line which contains copyright information) at the bottom of the display. If the system needs to communicate with you, a message will be displayed here.




3-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — It is recommended you show all of the displays on the visuals in this unit from your PC attached to a Barco. Probably the most common type of display used by system operators is the menu. The IBM i Main Menu illustrates the structure and content of most system menus. Each option on the IBM i Main Menu causes another menu to be displayed, and from that menu another menu can be selected, and then another, and so on, moving down to a point where a specific command can be run. Additional information — Transition statement —

3-8





Uempty

How to display a menu IBM i

IBM i Main Menu 1. User tasks 2. Office tasks 3. General system tasks

Menu options or GO Command

General System Tasks 1. Jobs 2. Status 3. Messages

Messages 1. Send a message 2. Send a break message 3. Display messages

Go to Menu (GO) Type choices, press Enter. Menu..............______ Library........ *LIBL Return point...*YES

Name, generic*, *ALL Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB... *YES, *NO


Figure 3-4. How to display a menu

AS248.1

Notes: There are a couple of ways you can display a menu. You can: 1. Enter menu options to walk through many menus as shown on the top half of the visual. 2. Use the GO command to go directly to a menu (this is shorter) as shown in the visual. To use the GO command, you must know the menu ID. If you need to display a menu but can only remember the first character or two of its name, use the go x* form of this command, replacing the x with those beginning characters of the menu name which you do remember. After you enter this command, IBM i displays a list of all menus whose names begin with those characters and allows you to select the one you want to display. When the GO command is used to move from one menu to the next, the system remembers the names of the last 10 menus used in the job. Using F12 lets the user back out through those same 10 menus, one at a time.




3-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The GO command lets a user select the menu they want to use and proceed directly to that menu. Options on system menus that cause another menu to be displayed use this command behind the scenes. If the user is looking for a command to perform a needed function but does not know how to spell it, there are some helpful menus. Use of the Major Command Groups menu and other forms of the GO command (go major, go cmd*, and go cmdxxx) are discussed in the CL commands unit. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Menu navigation IBM i

IBM i Main Menu 1. User tasks 2. Office tasks 3. General system tasks

General System Tasks 1. Jobs 2. Status 4. Messages

Messages 1. Send a message 2. Send a break message 3. Display messages

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

F16=System Main menu

F23=Set initial menu


Figure 3-5. Menu navigation

AS248.1

Notes: Function keys 3 and 12 (F3 and F12) are both used to back up through a stack of menus which you have displayed; however, there is a difference in how the two work. F12 always displays the previous menu in the stack, while F3 might skip one or more menus while backing up. In this example, we used option 3 on the IBM i Main Menu to display the General System Tasks menu. We then used option 4 on the General System Tasks menu to display the Messages menu. With the Messages menu displayed, pressing F12 returns us to the General System Tasks menu, while pressing F3 from the Messages menu returns us to the IBM i Main Menu. Pressing function key 16 (F16) from either the General System Tasks or Messages menu will cause the IBM i Main Menu to be displayed. On other menus, F16 can have a different function. The first menu a user sees after sign on depends on the user profile. With proper authority, the user may change the initial sign on menu. To do this, the user should display the menu desired at sign on and then press function key 23 (F23). Doing this permanently changes the user profile. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



3-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — To select a function from a menu, the user types the corresponding option number on the command line and presses Enter. If another menu is displayed (General System Tasks on this visual), the user can type the appropriate option number and press Enter again. On this visual, yet another menu (Messages) is displayed. After the user has selected and completed an option from this menu and wants to return to the immediately preceding display (on this visual, General System Tasks), they should use F12 to perform that function. F3 lets the user exit from a function and return to a previous system menu, but it might not be the menu immediately preceding the current one. On this visual, using F3 while the Messages menu is displayed causes a return directly to the IBM i Main Menu, bypassing the General System Tasks menu altogether. F16 on the General System Tasks and Messages menus returns the user directly to the IBM i Main Menu. On other menus, F16 can have a different function. A user might be able to change their initial menu (the first one displayed when they sign on) by using F23 even though this function key is not displayed. If they have the authority to use this function, the menu which is displayed when F23 is pressed becomes their initial menu. This is a permanent change to their user profile. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Menu display help (1 of 5) IBM i

Cursor in a general area


Figure 3-6. Menu display help (1 of 5)

AS248.1

Notes: The Help function on the Power i displays is cursor sensitive. This means that depending on the position of the cursor on the display, the corresponding help is shown. On this menu display, the cursor is not in the function key description area or the area where an option is described when the F1 key or the Help key is pressed. This shows the help about the whole display.




3-13

Instructor Guide






Uempty


Cursor on options description or option number typed



AS248.1

Notes: Either the cursor is positioned in the area where a menu option is described, in this case, option 4, or the option is typed in the Selection or command area and F1 or Help is pressed. F22 (extended help) expands from showing only help text for the area selected, in this case, help for option 4, to include all the help text available for the whole display.




3-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty


Hypertext links to additional help

F1 SYSTEM

General System Tasks

Select one of the following: 1. Jobs 2. 3. Option 1 - Help 4. 5. Select this option to contro 6. example, you can: 7. o Work with: 8. - Jobs 9. - Statistics for active jobs 10. - Printer devices - Job queues

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Jobs Job A job is a unit of work on the system. Jobs run in subsystems and use system resources, such as storage, disk and processor cycles, to perform their tasks. Jobs can be allocated priorities and can run either interactively or in batch.

Enter Enter

1. Jobs 2. 3. Subsystem 4. 5. Jobs are run in a subsystem. A subsystem creates a suitab 6. environment for a job to do its work. The system can cont 7. one or many subsystems that can be created or deleted by t 8. user. 9. 10. As the number of different types of jobs increases in the system, more subsystems can be defined to manage those j © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes: Hypertext links together a series of help information displays by keywords or phrases. These words or phrases are called reference phrases and are easy to spot. They are yellow and underlined on color displays or bright and underlined on monochrome (black and white) displays. A reference phrase indicates that a hypertext link to additional help information is available. You can move through hypertext links by positioning the cursor on a hypertext link and pressing the Enter key or double-clicking. If you get lost while using hypertext, do not worry. You can press F6 (Viewed Topics) from any of the help displays to view all of the hypertext displays in the order in which you viewed them, or you can use F12 to back up through the topics one-by-one.




3-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — In this hypertext example, a user presses Help while the cursor is positioned on the General System Tasks title line. As the user reads the help information that is displayed, they run into a word they are not familiar with: job. This word happens to be underlined (which mean it is a hypertext link), therefore, they move the cursor under the word job and press Enter. More help information is displayed which explains what a job is. As they read about a job, they run across another word they do not understand: subsystem. This also happens to be underlined. They move the cursor under the word subsystem and press Enter. Help information explaining what a subsystem is appears. If you get lost while using hypertext, do not worry. You can use F6 (Viewed Topics) to view a window of all hypertext information topics viewed in the order you viewed them, or you can use F12 to back up through the topics one-by-one. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty


Cursor in Function Keys area



AS248.1

Notes: The cursor is positioned in the area where the function keys are described, and F1 or Help is pressed.




3-19

Instructor Guide






Uempty


Cursor in Selection or command area where DSPLIB typed



AS248.1

Notes: A command, in this case DSPLIB, is typed in the Selection or command area, and F1 or Help is pressed.




3-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Explain the steps detailed in the student notes on this page then perform the following. For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class. You should play file AS248-U03-F10 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to allow the students to practice navigating the help menus. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U03-F10 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You should play file AS248-U03-F10 on your PC from in the multimedia library of Elluminate to allow the students to practice navigating the help menus. Prompt the students for each step in the exercise. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Entry display overview IBM i

1

2 3

4

5 6 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 3-11. Entry display overview

AS248.1

Notes: Entry displays present information and prompts or allow a user to enter new information. The Submit Job (SBMJOB) display shows the characteristics of entry displays: 1. Title

The name of the entry display (located in the center of the top line).

2. Default value

Value that the system assumes if no other value is entered into the field. The first time you use an entry display, the system fills in most of the fields with default values.

3. Blank field

Field into which you might have to enter a value. Some blank fields can be skipped. The system uses a default value.

4. Choices

Valid values that you can enter into the field.

5. Function keys

Keyboard keys that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer functions. These are sometimes called active function keys. They are located at the bottom of the display and differ by display.




3-23

Instructor Guide

6. Message line

Line at the bottom of the display which normally is blank or contains copyright information. If the system needs to communicate with a user, a message is displayed on this line.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — An entry display allows the user to view and change existing data or enter new data. Applications might have displays similar to this one. Each value to be entered has prompts, an input area, and some possible choices listed. The descriptions of any function keys available are also shown at the bottom of the entry display. Point out the underlines on the display. Underlines have special meaning on system displays. All underlined fields are input capable; that is, you can type new information into a blank, underlined field. If information has been entered in an underlined field, you can change it. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-25

Instructor Guide

Entry display help (1 of 2) IBM i

Position cursor, press Help.

In addition to field help, you can get: Extended help Message help © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011 Figure 3-12. Entry display help (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: To obtain help information for a field, position the cursor on a field (the field can be blank or filled in) and press Help. Help information about the field is displayed. On this display, an attempt was made to execute the DSPJOB command which resulted in the error message: *FILE not valid for parameter OPTION. From this point, any of the online help information methods shown on the visual can be used to help solve the error.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If a user has requested prompting for a command but has questions about the command or about one or more parameters, the Help key can be of assistance by providing: 1. General command information 2. Detailed parameter information 3. Message help 4. Entry to the search index function known as InfoSeeker In this visual, the greater than symbol (>) to the left of four parameters indicates that IBM i has recognized that these parameters no longer contain their system default values. The greater than symbol (>) and the fact that those parameter values are in uppercase (not to mention the error message at the bottom of the display) are evidence that either Enter or a function key has been pressed. There is an error with the OPTION parameter. The cause of this error might be obvious to the students, but, if not, what could they do? If the cursor is positioned on the OPTION parameter and Help is pressed, detailed help information describing this specific parameter is displayed. If F2 (Extended help) is pressed on the Option (OPTION) - Help display, additional help information for the option is displayed. If F11 (InfoSeeker) is pressed on the Option (OPTION) - Help display, InfoSeeker is displayed. If the cursor is positioned on the error message at the bottom of the display and Help is pressed, additional help information for the message is displayed. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-27

Instructor Guide

Entry display help (2 of 2) IBM i

Cursor in an entry field


Figure 3-13. Entry display help (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: This is the help display that results when the cursor is positioned in the area shown in the previous visual and F1 or Help is pressed.





Uempty





3-29

Instructor Guide

List display overview IBM i

1

2

3

4 5 6 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 3-14. List display overview

AS248.1

Notes: A list display is a list of objects (for example, jobs, libraries, files, or output queues) which is requested by a user, gathered from within the system, and displayed in lists (or columns). The Work with All Output Queues display is an example of a list display. Most work with commands display a list display. A list display has the following characteristics: 1. Title

Name of the list display (located in the center of the top line).

2. List

Column of information which is identified by a short title. For example, there are five columns on this display (Queue, Library, Files, Writer, and Status).

3. Input field

Field into which you can enter one of the options shown at the top of the list display. Options vary depending on the list display and your user authority.

4. Command line

Blank line which is usually provided for entering a menu option, number, or a command.





Uempty

5. Function keys

Keyboard keys that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer functions.

6. Message line

Normally, a blank line or a line which contains copyright information. If the system needs to communicate with a user, a message will be displayed on this line.

To perform one of the options listed on the display (for example, 2 = Change or 4 = Delete), just type the associated option number (for example, 2 or 4) in the Opt column along the left-hand side of the display next to the list element (or elements) on which you want to perform the function. Different options can be specified for different elements. If More... is displayed in the lower right-hand corner, there are more list elements available than can be displayed on one display. Use the Page Down/Up (or Roll Up/Down) keys to view these additional list elements.




3-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Most of the work with commands use a list display. Options are shown at the top of the display and function key descriptions at the bottom. There is also a command line. Options are entered at the left side of the display in the Opt column. A system operator uses this type of display often when working with jobs and spooled output. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge) IBM i


Figure 3-15. List display help: Opt column versus F20 (enlarge)

AS248.1

Notes: This help display shows up when the cursor is positioned in the Opt column of a list and F1 or Help is pressed. The screen capture in the lower right shows how the screen can be enlarged using F20 (Enlarge). If USROPT (*HLPFULL) is specified in a user’s profile, help initially appears in full-screen format.




3-33

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Information display overview IBM i


Figure 3-16. Information display overview

AS248.1

Notes: Click the Help key from most displays and you see a typical information display. Information displays simply display information; the information cannot be changed, and new information cannot be added. The Work with All Output Queues - Help display shows the characteristics of an information display: 1. Title

Name of the information display (located in the center of the top line.

2. Information

Information you requested from the system. Sometimes the information appears in narrative form, and other times it appears in columns.

3. Function keys

Keyboard keys that allow a user to select keyboard or programmer functions. These are sometimes called active function keys. They are located at the bottom of the information display and differ by display. There can be one or two lines of active function keys.




3-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Information displays present information but do not allow it to be changed or any new information to be entered. Generally, the only keys that can be used when an information display is shown are functions keys, roll keys, or Help and Enter keys. The information display shown in this visual is used to display online help text. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Additional help: Information Assistant Options menu IBM i

1

Option 10 from the IBM i main menu

2

F13 from the Help display

3

GO INFO


Figure 3-17. Additional help: Information Assistant Options menu

AS248.1

Notes: To display the Information Assistant Options menu, enter option 10 from the IBM i Main Menu, press F13 from most help menus, or type the GO INFO command on a command line.




3-37

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Use the Information Assistant Options menu to do the following: • 1. Where do I look for information? Select option 1 to find out how to use the Softcopy Library to find online books, which are good if you are getting started on the Power i system. Also select option 1 to learn how to find and order printed publications and where to look on the Internet for the latest Power i information. • 2. How can I comment on information? Select option 2 to learn how to comment on all types of Power i information. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Information Assistant option 1: Where Do I Look for Information? IBM i


Figure 3-18. Information Assistant option 1:Where Do I Look for Information?

AS248.1

Notes: This display contains links to help text about reference material.




3-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Information Assistant option 2: How Can I Comment On Information? IBM i


Figure 3-19. Information Assistant option 2:How Can I Comment On Information?

AS248.1

Notes: This visual explains how to send your feedback to IBM.




3-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Using the System Request panel group IBM i

Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req Enter


Figure 3-20. Using the System Request panel group

AS248.1

Notes: The key sequence to call up this display is: Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req + Enter A special menu you might find helpful is the System Request menu. Look at option 1 (Display sign on for secondary job). This option allows you to suspend whatever you are doing, start an entirely new job, and then return to exactly where you were in your initial job when required.




3-43

Instructor Guide

Options 10 to 14 perform the following functions: Option 10

Suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the previous system (the source or client system for the current system). Transfer back to the home system (the first system on which you entered the pass-through command or the TELNET command). Transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the previous system. Transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the home system.

Option 13

Option 11 Option 14





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The System Request function allows a user who is already signed on and running one job at a workstation (called a primary job) to start a secondary interactive job at the same workstation. This function allows the user to interrupt one job (a system operator function), start a second job (a business application), and return to the first without ending either job. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-45

Instructor Guide

Accessing the System Request panel group IBM i

Non-intelligent workstations: Shift + Sys Req Enter

PCs attached using personal communications: Actions Display pop-up keypad SysRq


Figure 3-21. Accessing the System Request panel group

AS248.1

Notes: For PCs attached through personal communications, choose Actions from the menu bar, then Display pop-up keypad, and click SysRq.





Uempty





3-47

Instructor Guide

Question IBM i

What are some possible scenarios where you could use the System Request function?



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to use the type text on screen tool to describe briefly explain how they would use the system request function. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands and select two or three students to briefly explain how they would use the system request function. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-49

Instructor Guide

TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1 IBM i

Two interactive jobs Job 1

Job 2 User application

Operating the system General Systems Tasks

1 Shift (or Alt) + Sys Req

Application Menu

1.Jobs 2.Status

2 Enter


Figure 3-23. TFRSECJOB command or system request opt 1

AS248.1

Notes: CL command TFRSECJOB or option 1 (Display sign on for secondary job) on the System Request menu allows a user to easily switch back and forth between two jobs at one workstation. This is a great productivity aid; however, if the user is performing the same or similar functions in both jobs, it can be difficult to remember which job they are in at the time. To assist a user in determining which job they are in, they can use the Display Work Station User (DSPWSUSR) command. This command lists all jobs in the system currently active or suspended at the display station where the command is entered and shows which is active.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A user can use CL command TFRSECJOB or option 1 to go back and forth between two jobs. Either job can be ended first. The secondary job can use the same user profile as the primary job or a different one. A maximum of two jobs can be started at a workstation using this facility. Student notes reference the Display Work Station User (DSPWSUSR) command. If you have not done so already, try running this command with multiple jobs active at a single workstation to show the students the information that the DSPWSUSR command displays. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-51

Instructor Guide

F9: Retrieve previous command IBM i

MAIN IBM I Main menu 1. User tasks MAIN 2. Office tasks Selection or command ===> addlible ol29lib F3=Exit F4=Prompt F F23=Set initial menu

Enter

IBM I Main menu

1. User tasks 2. Office tasks Selection or command ===>________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F23=Set initial menu Library OL29LIB added to library list. MAIN

IBM I Main menu

1. User tasks 2. Office tasks

F9

Selection or command ===> addlible ol29lib _____________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F23=Set initial menu


Figure 3-24. F9: Retrieve previous command

AS248.1

Notes: While using any system menu, a user can retrieve previously entered commands by using F9. IBM i remembers all the commands the user entered since signing on. The first time the user presses F9, the last command the user entered is retrieved. Each subsequent time the user presses F9 (without pressing Enter or one of the supported function keys) the next older command is retrieved. Once the correct command is displayed, that command can be optionally modified and then run again by pressing Enter. This can reduce much of the need to re-enter commands.





Uempty





3-53

Instructor Guide

Using the Command Entry display IBM i

Call QCMD + Enter


Figure 3-25. Using the Command Entry display

AS248.1

Notes: The Command Entry display is an optional entry display for commands. To access this display, type call qcmd on a command line, and press Enter.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Another display used to enter commands is the Command Entry display. It is accessed by calling the program QCMD (CALL QCMD). This display can be used as an alternative to entering menu options or commands on a menu command line; however, its true value is shown on the next visual. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-55

Instructor Guide

Retrieve a prior command IBM i

1 Press F10. Command Entry All previous commands and messages: >_dsplibl > dspjob

I520DVL2 Request level: 4

Type command, press Enter. ===> _______________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F10=Exclude detailed messages

2 Position cursor on command to be retrieved, and press F9. Command Entry All previous commands and messages: >_dsplibl > dspjob

I520DVL2 Request level: 4

Type command, press Enter. ===> dsplibl ________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F10=Exclude detailed messages


Figure 3-26. Retrieve a prior command

AS248.1

Notes: From the Command Entry display a user can retrieve any command entered since signing on. To do this: • Press F10 (Exclude detailed messages). All of the commands previously entered since signing on are displayed. • Position the cursor on the command to be retrieved, and press F9 (Retrieve).





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — F9 can be used on the Command Entry display to directly retrieve any command entered since a user signed on. A user can press F10 to view all of the commands that have been entered since signing on; then, the user should position the cursor on the command to be retrieved and press F9 once, not multiple times, as on a menu. This selective retrieve facility simplifies operations which require repetition of several different commands in the same sequence. If the command that is needed does not appear in the top portion of the display, the operator can scroll backward to find it. How can you make working with system functions easier while you gain operational experience? Answer: Operational Assistant. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-57

Instructor Guide

Operational Assistant IBM i

OA

For system operator, administrator, user

Tasks simplified:

Managing printer output Controlling jobs Handling messages Changing password

Scheduling: Automatic power off and on Automatic disk cleanup

System management: System backup Device control User enrollment © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 3-27. Operational Assistant

AS248.1

Notes: Operational Assistant (OA) provides easy access to the most commonly performed functions. It is provided free of charge with IBM i and is available to all users on all systems.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Make sure the students understand that OA does not provide any function that cannot be performed by way of a standard system menu option or a CL command. OA simply provides a user-friendly interface to the more common system functions, such as managing printer output, controlling jobs and handling messages, scheduling and performing power on and off functions, disk cleanup tasks, managing system backup, controlling devices, and enrolling new users on a Power i system. Most of the function of OA can be used without ever disrupting the Operational Assistant menu. This type of access can be provided by an installation's programming staff through direct calls to OA programs or, more commonly, through a feature called basic assistance level. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-59

Instructor Guide

Operational Assistant menu IBM i


Figure 3-28. Operational Assistant menu

AS248.1

Notes: The OA functions can be accessed by displaying the Operational Assistant Menu. To display this menu, enter the go assist command on any command line. IBM i tailors this menu based on the security class of the user accessing the menu.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The Operational Assistant Menu provides the most common method of access to OA. • When displayed, this menu is automatically tailored by IBM i based on the class of the user accessing OA. Additional information — Transition statement —




3-61

Instructor Guide

Assistance levels IBM i

Basic

Displays that provide the most assistance Supports the more common user and operator tasks Does not use computer terminology Intermediate

Displays that support all system tasks Uses computer terminology Complex tasks can be done using this level Advanced

Same type of displays as intermediate assistance level Displays contain as many lines of information as possible Function keys and options not displayed © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 3-29. Assistance levels

AS248.1

Notes: The system allows you to choose the amount of assistance you want to receive when you are interacting with the system. The various degrees of assistance are referred to as assistance levels. There are three assistance levels: basic, intermediate, and advanced. The level of assistance that a user chooses determines the number and complexity of the displays they see. To select the assistance level you want, simply press F21 (Select assistance level) from a display. Not all assistance levels are available from all displays. As a system operator, many of the functions you perform require the use of the intermediate assistance level, and as you become more familiar with system functions, you might even decide to use the advanced level. This course is designed around the intermediate assistance level. The default assistance level shipped is *BASIC and is stored in the assistance level (QASTLVL) system value. Where the displays or system actions are significantly different between basic and intermediate levels, basic interface displays are also discussed.





Uempty

The commands below, most of which are discussed later in this course, support the basic assistance level. To select the basic assistance level from these command displays, press F21. • • • • • • • •

DSPMSG: Display messages WRKMSG: Work with messages WRKUSRJOB: Work with user jobs WRKSPLF: Work with spooled files WRKWTR: Work with writers WRKCFGSTS: Work with configuration status DSPSYSSTS: Display system status WRKUSRPRF: Work with user profiles




3-63

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — As described on this visual, IBM i provides three different levels of assistance for interfacing to system functions. The primary differences between the levels are: • The language used • The complexity of the tasks which can be performed • The amount of descriptive information contained on system displays Not all assistance levels are available with all functions. Many of the functions performed by a system operator require the use of the intermediate assistance level. As the students become more familiar with system displays, they might even decide to use the advanced level. This course is designed around the intermediate assistance level. Where the displays or system actions are significantly different between basic and intermediate levels, basic assistance level displays are also discussed. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Your choice: Basic or intermediate IBM i

* BASIC

OR

* INTERMED


Figure 3-30. Your choice: Basic or intermediate

AS248.1

Notes: These two displays present identical information, but note the difference in format and wording between the two. Most commands which support basic assistance level: • Allow you to use F21 to toggle between basic and intermediate level • Remember the level you request each time you use the command • Use that same level when you use the command again. The default assistance level for a Power is set with a system value by the system administrator.




3-65

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — In class, the students use the intermediate assistance level, but on their own system the choice of assistance level is left up to the individual. Every student should use the one which allows them to most efficiently perform their job. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

User assistance level IBM i

Menu: F21 (where available): Changes the assistance level for the individual session Not available from System i Navigator

CL command Changes user profile: F11 - Keywords for command CHGPRF ASTLVL(*BASIC, *INTERMED, or *ADVANCED) Changes the assistance level for the individual user

System value QASTLVL Sets the default assistance level for system © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 3-31. User assistance level

AS248.1

Notes:




3-67

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Exercise Guide - Appendix A Instructor will provide the information listed; this data is used to perform the exercises. Exercise: Using the keyboard and systems displays

Inform instructor when you have completed your exercise.


Figure 3-32. Exercise

AS248.1

Notes: Fill in the information in Appendix A of the Exercises Guide. This information will be provided by the instructor. Use the information on this worksheet to perform the exercises.




3-69

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — • Be aware that in order to perform the lab exercise, three of the students will use the Web server created by the instructor as part of lab setup (Appendix B or C). - Tell students to choose a Web server based on what is available to them in their work environment. - If there is no preference, instruct a student to use the Web server Appendix C option. - The greater the number of students using the Web server, the better it should perform. • Optionally, the students can choose to run the exercises in both Appendix B and Appendix C. The lab set up program has created a separate user ID that has QSECOFR authority required to run these labs. The user ID is AS24Bxx and the password is AS24PWD. The profile has been created as disabled with the password expired. The instructor must enable this profile for the student in order to run this one lab. Once students have completed the exercises in Appendix B and C, the instructor must disable the profile so that is not used by the student for any other exercises. Using the WRKOBJOWN command, verify that this profile was not used by a sneaky student to create a profile with more authority than what they are supposed to have for this class. • Remind students that if they create their own server, they should also follow the steps to delete all of their user-created Web objects at the end of the last class at the end of the week. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual you should play file AS248-U03-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U03-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U03-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty


1. True or False: Any menu can be accessed on the system with the GO command. 2. Which function key is used to access Help? a. b. c. d.

F1 F3 F9 F12

3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command that was previously entered? a. b. c. d.

F1 F3 F9 F12 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




3-71

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Any menu can be accessed on the system with the GO command. The answer is True.

2. Which function key is used to access Help? a. F1 b. F3 c. F9 d. F12 The answer is F1.

3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command that was previously entered? a. F1 b. F3 c. F9 d. F12 The answer is F9. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty


4. True or False: The default assistance level for a system is set with a system value by the system administrator. 5. True or False: The Operational Assistant menu will support functions performed by a user, a system operator or by a system administrator? 6. True or False: The command entry display will show what commands have been entered since you signed on to the system.



AS248.1

Notes:




3-73

Instructor Guide



4. True or False: The default assistance level for a system is set with a system value by the system administrator. The answer is True.

5. True or False: The Operational Assistant menu will support functions performed by a user, a system operator or by a system administrator? The answer is True.

6. True or False: The command entry display will show what commands have been entered since you signed on to the system. The answer is True.







Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe and use green screen general display types: Menu List Entry Information

Access and use special green screen menus: Information Assist System Request Operational Assist

Access and use the command entry display Access green screen help © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




3-75

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 4. Overview of System i Navigator Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about This unit describes the System i Navigator graphical user interface (GUI). We will also discuss the help facilities available for this interface.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Explain how you get System i Navigator • List the functions supported by System i Navigator • List the functions that can only be performed using Navigator • Describe the Navigator main panel • Describe the functions performed by the taskpad • Explain how to customize what Navigator will display • Describe how to access the different help support that is available for this interface



Unit 4. Overview of System i Navigator


4-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain how you get System i Navigator List the functions supported by System i Navigator List the functions that can only be performed using Navigator Describe the Navigator main panel Describe the functions performed by the task pad Explain how to customize what Navigator will display Describe how to access the different help support that is available for this interface



AS248.1

Notes:

4-2





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — System i Navigator continues to be enhanced in each release; however, it still does not contain all of the functions available with green screens, such as creating new devices (CRTDEVTAP). Additional information — Transition statement —




4-3

Instructor Guide

What is System i Access for Windows? IBM i

System i Access for Windows 5770-XE1 Integrate with Windows (32-bit and 64-bit) interface Manage network resources using: My Computer Windows Explorer Network Neighborhood

Create new connections Right mouse button

Access System i Access programs and functions using: Taskbar, Online Help, Control Panel

www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/software/access/windows/index.html © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 4-2. What is System i Access for Windows?

AS248.1

Notes:

4-4





Uempty





4-5

Instructor Guide

What you can do with System i Access for Windows? IBM i

System i Access for Windows provides support for: Emulation services: 5250 display station emulation Printer emulation

File server Database server ODBC and OLE System i Navigator


Figure 4-3. What you can do with System i Access for Windows?

AS248.1

Notes:

4-6





Uempty





4-7

Instructor Guide

What is Navigator? IBM i

System i Navigator is an easy-to-use GUI for managing the system Typical users are system administrators and system operators It is fully integrated into the Windows environment: Windows skills can be used to administer a Power i End users do not have to learn green screen interface

Some functions can only be performed using this GUI: DNS setup Graphical performance Graphical database management tools

Navigator is continually being enhanced © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 4-4. What is Navigator?

AS248.1

Notes: Navigator is the graphical user interface (GUI) for managing the system. It simplifies operations by combining multiple tasks and minimizing the number of options needed to complete a task. It also allows multiple environments to be managed from one application window. Navigator is fully integrated into Windows. This means that system administrators and system operators who are familiar with Windows can handle IBM i tasks the same way as they would Windows tasks. For example, they can drag and drop a user onto a group to add the user to that group, use context menus, the File option on the menu bar, and the properties function to display or change information. With System i Navigator, there is little need to learn Power i system displays and CL commands. Some Power i functions can be performed only from System i Navigator; they cannot be performed from IBM i green screens. For example, DNS server setup (or configuration), which is part of network setup, and graphical performance, which displays real-time performance graphs of selected metrics, can be performed only from Navigator. Navigator is continually being enhanced. 4-8





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Navigator is an optionally installed component of Client Access for Windows. Every Power i Power is shipped with System i Navigator, which does not require a Client Access for Windows license. Navigator was first shipped with V3R1M1 of Client Access for Windows 95. With each release of Client Access, Navigator has been enhanced. Navigator continues to be enhanced. Some IBM i functions are added to Navigator but are not added to the green screens. Other functions, which currently can be performed from the green screens, will probably never be added to Navigator. Additional information — Transition statement —




4-9

Instructor Guide

What can you do with Navigator? IBM i

Navigator allows you to: Manage: Messages Printer output Printers User jobs System jobs Subsystems Memory pools

Secure your network Work with database records Connect your network Limit application availability Manage multiple systems with Management Central © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 4-5. What can you do with Navigator?

AS248.1

Notes: Navigator provides a powerful suite of functions to handle your system administration tasks. The Management Central technology, which is an integral part of Navigator, allows you to manage tasks across one or more servers simultaneously. You can simplify your system management with task scheduling, real-time performance monitoring, managing fixes or program temporary fixes (PTFs), distributing objects, managing users and groups, running commands from a central system, and so on. You can use Navigator to access your LPAR information, change LPAR configuration, manage security, and change processing resources without requiring a system restart. Navigator has several integrated features that help build a strong defense against the security risks you might encounter in a the network. Use Navigator to configure everything from your basic system security policy to secure end-to-end VPN connections and to implement filter rules, address translation, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), enterprise identity mapping, and so on.





Uempty

You can perform many of your database tasks using Navigator. These tasks include creating and maintaining database objects, inserting or changing data, monitoring and analyzing query performance, and creating a map of your database. You can use the network component of Navigator to configure and manage network communications on your server. You can find wizards to easily configure the interfaces, routes, and servers that are necessary for network communications. You can verify connectivity by using the PING and trace route utilities. System jobs are created by the operating system to control system resources and perform system functions. System jobs run when the Power i server starts, without user input. These jobs perform a variety of tasks, from starting the operating system to starting and ending subsystems and to scheduling jobs. Application Administration allows administrators to limit or grant access to functions, including several Navigator functions, and to other applications for the users and groups on a specific Power i server. Administrators can also centrally manage many of the properties used by IBM Power i Access for Windows clients and use the advanced Application Administration settings to centrally control environment, password, connection, service, and language settings.




4-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play flash file AS248-U04-F06 in place of the next slide for the students to explore the sections of the System i Navigator screen. You can also choose to perform an application share. To perform an application share: 1. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 2. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, it is recommended you show a live demo of all of the screen shots on the visuals in this unit from your PC. To display the System i Navigator main window, do one of the following: 1. Double left-click the System i Navigator icon on the Desktop. 2. Double left-click the System i Navigator icon in the IBM Power i Access for Windows folder.





Uempty

Navigator main panel IBM i

1 2

3

5

4

7

6 8 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 4-6. Navigator main panel

AS248.1

Notes: There are a number of ways to open the Navigator main window. The most common is to double-click the System i Navigator icon on the Desktop. Once you have signed on, the Navigator main window shown on the visual appears. From this window, you can use any system functions to which you have been granted access by clicking the function icon. Following is an explanation of the Navigator main window: 1. System i Navigator icon

Located in the top corner of the window.

2. Menu bar

Contains the available options for this window. To perform an option, click it. The functions available for the displayed window will appear in a drop-down box.

3. Toolbar

The available tools for this window are represented by smart icons. Not all tools are available for all windows. Placing your mouse cursor over a smart icon brings up the name of the tool. To open a tool, click it.




4-13

Instructor Guide

4. Left pane

Contains the Management Central icon and the My Connections icon. Under that is an icon for each Power i system configured on the workstation. Under each Power icon are icons representing the System i Navigator functions available for that system.

5. Right pane

If a user clicks a System i Navigator icon in the left pane, the options for this function are displayed in the right pane. Optionally, the icon can be right-clicked and the Explore option selected.

6. Taskpad

Shows the tasks available for the element selected in the left pane of the window. The taskpad changes to show the shortcuts available for each element selected in the left pane.

7. My taskpad

The left part of the taskpad, also known as My taskpad, can be customized by adding your favorite tasks from the right pane. This part of the task does not change when different elements are selected in the left pane.

8. Status bar

Shows the status of the action being performed.





Uempty





4-15

Instructor Guide

Main panel: Left pane IBM i


Figure 4-7. Main panel: Left pane

AS248.1

Notes: Clicking the plus sign (+) in the box beside My Connections in the left pane (also called expanding My Connections) causes nested listed items for each system configured for the workstation to appear. Expanding a system brings up the System i Navigator functions you can work with on this system. The available functions depend on: • The version and release of the operating system (IBM i) on the Power i • The version and release of Power i Access on the Power i • Whether the user has been granted access to the functions by the system administrator Expanding one of the functions causes one or more functions in the nested list below it to appear. In this example, expanding Basic Operations shows the functions Messages, Printer Output, Printers, and Jobs.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Make sure the students understand that the available functions depend on what version and release of IBM i and Power i Access is installed on the system and on whether the user has been authorized to use the functions. If more than one system has been configured for a workstation, potentially different System i Navigator functions can be displayed for each system. Additional information — Transition statement —




4-17

Instructor Guide

Main panel: Right pane IBM i


Figure 4-8. Main panel: Right pane

AS248.1

Notes: Clicking any function in the left pane causes objects associated with that branch in the function tree to appear in the right pane. In this example, the users clicked the system and signed on to the system; then the user clicked and expanded Work Management, which will show the different sub-branches on the function tree. Lastly, the user clicked the Active Jobs branch in the left pane to show its associated data in the right pane. Note All of the navigation described in lectures and labs will be shown in an abbreviated format. The following abbreviation will be shown as opposed to the long formatted description in the previous paragraph. Click System > Work management > Active jobs





Uempty





4-19

Instructor Guide

Main panel: Taskpad IBM i


Figure 4-9. Main panel: Taskpad

AS248.1

Notes: The System i Navigator taskpad, which is the lower right pane, serves as a quick launching point for tasks that are performed frequently. You can launch a task from the taskpad by clicking it. The tasks shown in the taskpad are those related to the System i Navigator function that you are currently working with. In the visual, two examples of the taskpad are shown. • The example on the top is what you see when you click on the system branch. • The example on the bottom is what you see when you click Work Management. The lower right pane shows the customized taskpad that includes all of your frequently used tasks, no matter which function they are associated with. To customize your taskpad: 1. Expand the folder that you want to work with. The taskpad updates when you change folders.





Uempty

2. When a task that you want to add to your customized taskpad is shown in the taskpad, right-click it and select Add to My Tasks. 3. To add more than one task from a function, right-click anywhere in the taskpad and select Customize Taskpad. You can select multiple tasks and change the order in which they appear. 4. Once you have selected your tasks, you can choose to display only the tasks in your customized taskpad. On the Customize Taskpad dialog, select the View tab, and then select Display “My Tasks” only.




4-21

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Object properties IBM i


Figure 4-10. Object properties

AS248.1

Notes: To see the properties of an item in the right pane, perform the following: Expand File Systems > Integrate file system > QSYS.LIB. Locate and click your library. Locate your object in the right pane, and either double-click the item name or right-click it and select Properties.




4-23

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Object context menu IBM i


Figure 4-11. Object context menu

AS248.1

Notes: Right-clicking an item brings up a context menu. The options in the menu depend on the type of object. Some options on the pop-up menu might even include a sub-menu. When you click or select User Objects, it will show a sub-menu with more options.




4-25

Instructor Guide






Uempty

View drop-down menu IBM i


Figure 4-12. View drop-down menu

AS248.1

Notes: Not only can you choose which elements of the GUI window you want to see (Status Bar, Taskpad), you can also choose how you want to display the information in the right pane (Small or Large Icons, Details). For some views in the right pane, you can customize what is displayed and how much is displayed. The Customize this View drop-down menu is shown on the next visual.




4-27

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Customize this View dialogs IBM i


Figure 4-13. Customize this View dialogs

AS248.1

Notes: You can also choose Customize this View from the View drop-down menu. There are two things that can be customized. • The Include dialog is used to control what information is displayed in the right panel. For example, when you click Messages this would allow you to specify whose messages you want to see. • The Columns dialog is used to control what columns of information are displayed in the right panel. For example, once you clicked Messages and told it whose messages to display, this options allows you to specify which columns of information to display. - For every function that you click there will be some columns that are shown as a default, but there might be additional columns of information that can be displayed. - This is equivalent to the emulation session when you press the F11 key to see additional columns of information.




4-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Help drop-down menu IBM i


Figure 4-14. Help drop-down menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Help drop-down menu is always available. This drop-down menu provides an option for Help topics, which is displayed on the next page, and it also provides an option to access the Power i Information Center.




4-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Help Topics IBM i


Figure 4-15. Help Topics

AS248.1

Notes: This is displayed when you click Help Topics on the Help drop-down menu. You can use this to answer questions or to learn how to perform functions when using System i Navigator.




4-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — • Be aware that the Help interface has been changed at V5R4 and V6R1. • This is an excellent learning tool that you can recommend to the students to help them learn Navigator. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Direct help button IBM i


Figure 4-16. Direct help button

AS248.1

Notes: Direct help for specific System i Navigator functions is available through the Help button on many System i Navigator panels. Left-clicking Help displays the available help. The visual shows the help available for creating a new user.




4-35

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Help icon IBM i


Figure 4-17. Help icon

AS248.1

Notes: This visual shows another form of Help. In some panels, a question mark (?) is shown in the top right corner. Clicking the question mark (?) causes the mouse pointer to change to a help cursor. Moving the Help cursor to any area of the window with which you need help and clicking causes specific Help information for that part of the window to appear. In this visual, the small window which has the text that begins Lists the user name. . . is just such help.




4-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Exercise Guide - Appendix A Instructor will provide the information listed; this data is used to perform the lab exercises. Exercise: System i Navigator Overview




AS248.1

Notes: Fill in the information in Appendix A of the Exercises Guide. This information will be provided by the instructor. Use the information on this worksheet for performing the exercises.




4-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty


1. True or False: System i Navigator does not require any additional software to be installed on the PC. 2. System i Navigator allows you to manage which of the following? a. b. c. d.

Messages Jobs Security All of the above

3. True or False: Help is available for the functions performed with the System i Navigator.



AS248.1

Notes:




4-41

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: System i Navigator does not require any additional software to be installed on the PC. The answer is False.

2. System i Navigator allows you to manage which of the following? a. b. c. d.



3. True or False: Help is available for the functions performed with the System i Navigator. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty


4. True or False: System i Navigator is fully integrated into Windows. 5. Which of the following customize options will allow you to control what is displayed in the right pane when you click on a function? a. b. c. d.

Sort Include Columns Auto refresh

6. True or False: System i Access for windows is available in 32-bit or 64-bit.



AS248.1

Notes:




4-43

Instructor Guide



4. True or False: System i Navigator is fully integrated into Windows. The answer is True.

5. Which of the following customize options will allow you to control what is displayed in the right pane when you click on a function? a. b. c. d.


The answers are Include and Columns.

6. True or False: System i Access for windows is available in 32-bit or 64-bit. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain how you get System i Navigator List the functions supported by System i Navigator List the functions that can only be performed using Navigator Describe the Navigator main panel Describe the functions performed by the task pad Explain how to customize what Navigator will display Describe how to access the different help support that is available for this interface



AS248.1

Notes:




4-45

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 5. Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about This unit describes the System i Navigator for IBM i GUI.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe Systems Director Navigator and how to install it on the system • List what functions are and are not included with this GUI • Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support this GUI • Explain the steps to start this GUI and sign on • Explain how to access the tasks available in this GUI • Explain how to set up which pages open at startup • Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user can access

How you will check your progress • Exercise • Checkpoint questions


Unit 5. Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


5-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe Systems Director Navigator and how to install it on the system List what functions are and are not included with this GUI Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support this GUI Explain the steps to start this GUI and sign on Explain how to access the tasks available in this GUI Explain how to set up which pages open at startup Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user can access © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:

5-2





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — System i Navigator continues to be enhanced in each release. Additional information — Transition statement —




5-3

Instructor Guide

5-4





Uempty

5.1. What is it and how does it work Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




5-5

Instructor Guide

What is Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? IBM i

It is the strategic management console for i. It is the Web-based console included in IBM i starting with V6R1. It uses the same Integrated Solutions Console (ISC) framework as the Web-based IBM Systems Director. It is considered a level one console used to manage a POWER i server. Starting at V7R1 you can specify which server to access. It contains all the currently Web-enabled functions of System i Navigator (over 300 tasks). © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 5-2. What is Systems Director Navigator for IBM i?

AS248.1

Notes: IBM Director manages a limited set of IBM i functions. It ships with an order for IBM i. IBM Director provides some extension support for Virtualization Manager, IBM Active Energy Manager, and Electronic Service Agent. IBM Systems Director Navigator means the following: • Director means it is progressing towards director interfaces and functionality. • Navigator means it comes from System i Navigator heritage. • It is included as part of IBM i. IBM Systems Director Navigator runs in the IBM i Integrated Application Server. IBM System Director Navigator ca be used instead of System i Navigator and 5250 green screen display terminal.

5-6





Uempty





5-7

Instructor Guide

How do you get it? IBM i

IBM Systems Director Navigator for IBM i is included as part of the base operating system option 3 (5770-SS1 option 3). The following products must also be installed (these should already be on your system): Host servers

5770-SS1 option 12

Qshell

5770-SS1 option 30

PASE

5770-SS1 option 33

IBM HTTP server for IBM i

5770-DG1

IBM Developer Kit for Java

5770-JV1

J2SE 5.0 32 bit

5770-JV1 option 8

IBM Toolbox for Java

5770-JC1 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 5-3. How do you get it?

AS248.1

Notes:

5-8





Uempty





5-9

Instructor Guide

What is included? IBM i

All Web-enabled functions of System i Navigator are included: Organized into 13 different task categories (over 300 tasks total) Jobs, messages, system values, database, users, file systems, security, performance, and so forth

In addition, functions from the following for-purchase licensed program products (LPPs) will be available in the console when the LPPs are installed: iHASM (Power i High Availability Solutions Manager)

5770-HAS

BRMS (Backup, Recovery, & Media Services)

5770-BR1

IBM Performance Tools for IBM i (DiskWatcher)

5770-PT1

IBM Performance Tools for IBM i (JobWatcher) option 3

5770-PT1


Figure 5-4. What is included?

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





5-11

Instructor Guide

What is not included? IBM i

Management Central functions Use IBM Systems Director products for multisystem tasks on the Web

Database functions that involve graphics and charts: SQL scripts Visual Explain Database Navigator SQL Assist

Disk management: Graphical View Disk Unit Physical Location Disk Unit/ASP Capacity chart


Figure 5-5. What is not included?

AS248.1

Notes: Database functions are tied to Windows APIs. There are a lot of database non-graphical functions in Systems Director Navigator for i.





Uempty





5-13

Instructor Guide

How it works (1 of 2) IBM i

Ensure the HTTP administration servers are running. These are auto start servers beginning in V6R1; starts with the TCP/IP servers.


Figure 5-6. How it works (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Is also possible to ensure the HTTP administrator server running by 5250 screen with work active job screen WRKACTJOB and looking at QHTTPSVR subsystem.





Uempty





5-15

Instructor Guide

How it works (2 of 2) IBM i

Starting with V6R1, all Web-based consoles run on the Integrated Web Application Admin servers.

HTTP Web Admin GUI, LDAP, Web Navigator, IPP

IBM Systems Director Navigator, Secure Perspective, Cluster Services, HASM

IBM Access for Web


Figure 5-7. How it works (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Starting with V6R1, all of the Web-based consoles run on the Integrated Web Application Admin servers. The Admin2 job must be running in the Qhttpsvr subsystem in order for a user to use the Systems Director Navigator for IBM i interface and connect to your system. These are jobs (Admin, Admin2, and Admin3) that automatically start when your system is started or powered on or when the administrator runs the Start TCP (STRTCP) command.





Uempty





5-17

Instructor Guide

What is included: Base functions (1 of 2) IBM i

System

Commonly used system tasks include viewing system status, messages, disk status, and passwords.

Basic Operations

Basic tasks to easily manage lists of messages, printer output, and printers.

Work Management

Control the work performed on the system, including support for interactive and batch work. Distribute resources to ensure applications run well.

Configuration and Service

Functions to help you manage both hardware and software on your system, including system values, time management, and disk units.

Network

Control TCP/IP configuration, remote access services, networking servers, and IP policies.

Integrated Server Administration

Manage servers hosted by i and enroll and manage users and groups.

Security

Plan and implement security on your system, including authorization lists, object permissions, and cryptographic functions. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 5-8. What is included: Base functions (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: This all functions will show after open IBM i Management main item.





Uempty





5-19

Instructor Guide

What is included: Base functions (2 of 2) IBM i

Users and Groups

Display and manage a complete list of the users and groups, and create, delete, and modify users and lists.

Databases

Perform many common admin database operations, access and modify objects, work with performance monitors, and access the health center.

Journal Management

Work with journals and journal receivers.

Performance

Collect performance data, and view the collection to investigate potential performance issues.

File Systems

Link to the most commonly used file systems tasks, integrated file system, i NetServer, network file system.

Internet Configurations

Work with IBM i Internet configuration tasks, HTTP server, digital certificates, IBM IPP, Web-based help server, and Internet Setup wizard.


Figure 5-9. What is included: Base functions (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





5-21

Instructor Guide

What is included: Additional LPPs IBM i

Backup, Recovery, Simply and easily manage your most critical and complex and Media Services backups, including online backups of Lotus servers. You can also recover your system fully in the event of a disaster or hardware failure.

Cluster Resource Services

Use a task-based approach to set and manage your high availability solution. Create a customized high availability solution by separately creating each element of the high availability solution. Create and manage clusters, cluster resource groups, device domains, and cluster administrative domains, and perform switchovers.

High Availability Solutions Manager

Use an easy, guided approach to set up high availability. This interface ensures and validates prerequisites, configures all necessary technologies for the selected solution, and tests the setup. This management solution interface is best for smaller businesses which want simpler solutions requiring fewer resources.

Performance

Use browser-based performance tasks to manage performance data collections, use GUI to collect performance data, and graphically view and analyze performance data using Collection Services, Job Watcher, and Disk Watcher. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 5-10. What is included: Additional LPPs

AS248.1

Notes: Additional LPPs function will be available after install this products. Performance function exist in this same page also in basic like in additional functions. In basic is only collection data or view collected performance data. The additional performance function give you GUI and tools to analyze performance data.





Uempty





5-23

Instructor Guide





Uempty

5.2. Overview of this interface Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




5-25

Instructor Guide

Enter the URL IBM i

Enter the following URL into a browser: http://system:2001 (either sysname or IPaddress)

Supports the following browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or later Mozilla Firefox Version 1.0 or later © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 5-11. Enter the URL

AS248.1

Notes: Connection by Web browser for system name or IP address and port number 2001.





Uempty





5-27

Instructor Guide

Certificate exchange IBM i

Accept the certificate warnings. The console runs on SSL.

Firefox 2

Internet Explorer 6

Internet Explorer 7


Figure 5-12. Certificate exchange

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





5-29

Instructor Guide

Secure port: Sign-on window IBM i

The URL will be re-routed to secure path Port 2005. Enter your IBM i user ID and password for this system.


Figure 5-13. Secure port: Sign-on window

AS248.1

Notes: On this window, enter your user ID and password to sign on to Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. Browser will be redirected to a secure path, similar to the following: https://:2005/ibm/console/logon.jsp





Uempty





5-31

Instructor Guide

Expired password limitation IBM i

Interface does not support expired password.


Figure 5-14. Expired password limitation

AS248.1

Notes: At V7R1, this interface does not support expired passwords. If your password has expired and you are working with either a 5250 emulation session or with System i Navigator, you will be allowed to specify a new password and continue the sign on process; however, this interface does not allow a user the option to specify a new password. This is a known limitation at V7R1.





Uempty





5-33

Instructor Guide

Web console interface IBM i

Expand IBM i Management to view the task categories. Click the desired task to view Welcome page for that task. Click a task on the Welcome page or click Show All Tasks to view all Web-enabled tasks for that category. Each selected task appears in a separate portlet, and a tab appears at the top of the work space.


Figure 5-15. Web console interface

AS248.1

Notes: All the functions which were access by port 2001 earlier (V5R4 or earlier) can be reached by open link IBM i task page.





Uempty





5-35

Instructor Guide

New controls overview (1 of 4) IBM i

New tab for each view!

Left navigation groups all the tasks in logical compartments.

Select Action menu

Help link!

Most common functions included on each Welcome menu

All functions © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 5-16. New controls overview (1 of 4)

AS248.1

Notes: On the left navigation, there are four main navigation items. 1. Standard Welcome page 2. Customizing My Startup Page (here the user can customize startup page, adding pages which will be shown after logon 3. System with base functions to manage server and also additional installed LPPs like BRMS 4. Settings like Credential Store, and Console Logging and Tracing For each open page, view will open as a separate tab On the Select Action menu, you can manage opened pages or adding pages to user’s My Startup Page.





Uempty





5-37

Instructor Guide


The All Tasks view shows every task that is supported for this category in a tree view. 1. Click arrows to see actions that you can perform. 2. Click an action or click Close.



AS248.1

Notes: Clicking Show All Tasks on the previous visual shows the window captured on this visual.





Uempty





5-39

Instructor Guide


Select from the available actions Fast path icons to table tasks! Filters Sorts Entry selection

Object tasks

Category tasks

Table tasks - Columns, Filters, Sorts

Select an entry Click the arrow Tasks for object



AS248.1

Notes: To perform actions against the listed you objects, you can either: • Click the arrow for your object, and then select an action from the drop-down menu. • Select an object (place a checkmark), and then click the down arrow for the Select Action, and click an Action in the drop-down menu; then click Go. • On some tabs, the object might be underlined, which means you can double-click it to open or expand it.





Uempty





5-41

Instructor Guide


Operations are broken down to tasks with logical groupings

Wizard like interfaces to organize values © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes: This window is displayed when you click the Users and Groups task. Click Create User Link to see the tab captured in the upper left hand of the visual. Click Personal to show the window in the lower right corner on this visual. Security is explained in a later topic. At this point, we just want show how navigation work with this graphical interface.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — When performing an application share or live demo, do not create a user profile. This is merely to show how to navigate. Additional information — Transition statement —




5-43

Instructor Guide

New terminology IBM i

Banner Common image across all consoles

Page bar navigate between pages

Navigation Tree group tasks

Work area © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 5-20. New terminology

AS248.1

Notes: Page opened from navigation tree group task will display in a separate tab on page bar.





Uempty





5-45

Instructor Guide





Uempty

5.3. Manage and set open pages Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




5-47

Instructor Guide

Manage Open Pages IBM i

From far right drop-down, select the Manage Open Pages link. Manage large numbers of open pages: View Close Navigate


Figure 5-21. Manage Open Pages

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





5-49

Instructor Guide

Setting My Startup Pages (1 of 3) IBM i

Sign in and specified pages automatically opened Great for watching important system functions and activities


Figure 5-22. Setting My Startup Pages (1 of 3)

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





5-51

Instructor Guide


Open desired page; In far right drop-down, select Add to My Startup Pages.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





5-53

Instructor Guide


Click OK on the confirmation screen.



AS248.1

Notes: If you work with a task or page a lot (for instance, System Operator Messages), you can add it to your list of startup pages.





Uempty





5-55

Instructor Guide





Uempty

5.4. Overview of System task page Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




5-57

Instructor Guide

Set Target System IBM i


Figure 5-25. Set Target System

AS248.1

Notes: The steps to set your system are: • Click Set Target System, • Then choose Manage local system, then click OK, or • Manage another system, at which point you can specify: - System name or IP address - User ID and password for target system Notice the current target system is the system to which this browser was started. It shows the current system IP address and the release of the operating system.





Uempty





5-59

Instructor Guide

System status IBM i


Figure 5-26. System status

AS248.1

Notes: Clicking System Status will show you the equivalent to running the work with system status (WRKSYSSTS) command on a 5250 emulation session. You can see most of the system health information like number of jobs, disk, processor usage and so on.





Uempty





5-61

Instructor Guide

History log IBM i


Figure 5-27. History log

AS248.1

Notes: Select History log to display and work with the current system history log.





Uempty





5-63

Instructor Guide

Display disk status IBM i


Figure 5-28. Display disk status

AS248.1

Notes: Display disk status will show disk statistics and usage of storage for specific disks. Note This function does not require a DST user ID. What you see on this window is equivalent to running the work with disk status ( WRKDSKSTS) command on a 5250 emulation session.





Uempty





5-65

Instructor Guide

Setting up 5250 emulation IBM i


Figure 5-29. Setting up 5250 emulation

AS248.1

Notes: For those users who prefer to work with a traditional green screen 5250 interface, this GUI provides an option to open or start an emulation window. You can set the parameters for your emulation session. Click Start session button to see the window on the next page.





Uempty





5-67

Instructor Guide

5250 emulation session IBM i


Figure 5-30. 5250 emulation session

AS248.1

Notes: After you perform the steps on the previous page, you will see this window. With this interface, some of the function buttons are listed on the top and some are at the bottom of the screen. To use your keyboard, press the Keyboard function key button. This is a toggle switch, it will turn on the green light indicator next to Keyboard focus to inform you when the function keys are active.





Uempty





5-69

Instructor Guide

Change password IBM i


Figure 5-31. Change password

AS248.1

Notes: Use this option to change your own password. Assuming you are authorized to do so, you can use this window to change the user profiles for other users.





Uempty





5-71

Instructor Guide

Application Administration IBM i


Figure 5-32. Application Administration

AS248.1

Notes: The option is used by system administrators. This option will allow an administrator to to specify which users can use specific options with this GUI.





Uempty





5-73

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Exercise Guide - Appendix A Instructor will provide the information listed; this data is used to perform the exercises. Exercise: Overview of Systems Director Navigator for IBM i




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U05-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U05-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U05-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the board.




5-75

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i requires that additional software be installed on the PC. 2. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i is included in the OS? 3. Which of the following is not included in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? a. Basic operations b. Work management c. Configuration and service d. Management Central



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i requires that additional software be installed on the PC. The answer is False.

2. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i is included in the OS? The answer is True.

3. Which of the following is not included in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? a. b. c. d.

Basic operations Work management Configuration and service Management Central

The answer is Management Central. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





5-77

Instructor Guide


4. Which of the following jobs must be running on your system in order for a user to connect to your system using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? a. b. c. d.

Admin Admin2 Admin3 Qhttpsvr

5. True or False: In the browser, the user will always specify port 2005 when they start the connection request. 6. True or False: In Systems Director Navigator for IBM I, you cannot customize the startup page.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. Which of the following jobs must be running on your system in order for a user to connect to your system using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i ? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Admin2.

5. True or False: In the browser, the user will always specify port 2005 when they start the connection request. The answer is False.

6. True or False: In Systems Director Navigator for IBM I, you cannot customize the startup page The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





5-79

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe Systems Director Navigator and how to install it on the system List what functions are and are not included with this GUI Explain which jobs need to be active on the system to support this GUI Explain the steps to start this GUI and sign on Explain how to access the tasks available in this GUI Explain how to set up which pages open at startup Explain how to customize which tasks and functions a user can access © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





5-81

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 6. Messaging concepts Estimated time 00:10

What this unit is about This unit describes the concepts of messaging and how this function works on the Power i.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Describe how the message function works • Explain what a message queue is and how they are created • List the different types of messages that can be sent • List where messages can be sent from and where they can be sent to



Unit 6. Messaging concepts


6-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe how the message function works Explain what a message queue is and how they are created List the different types of messages that can be sent List where messages can be sent from and where they can be sent to



AS248.1

Notes:

6-2





Uempty





6-3

Instructor Guide

Types of messages IBM i

Informational The manufacturing program completed successfully. The system will shutdown at 9:00 p.m.

Inquiry: Requires reply Are you finished with the report? Do you have the licensed program tape? Verify alignment on device PRT01. (I C G N R)


Figure 6-2. Types of messages

AS248.1

Notes: A message is a communication sent from a person or program to another person or program. Messages are the means of communication among workstation users, between the system operator and workstation users, and between programs and workstation users. There are two main types of messages that you, as a system operator, will send. • Informational These messages do not require a reply. • Inquiry An inquiry message requires a reply. It might also contain information.

6-4





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — While there are many different types of messages defined by the IBM i operating system (each with its own predefined type identifier), a system operator normally sends either informational (*INFO) or inquiry (*INQ) messages. Every command that can be used to send a message has a parameter to control what type of message is sent: informational (*INFO) and inquiry (*INQ). The default message type for the commands that a system operator normally uses to send messages is *INFO. An informational message merely conveys information to another user or to the system operator. Even if the message text is a question, as long as the message type on the sending command is *INFO, IBM i treats the message as informational only. An inquiry message requires a reply. Even if the message text does not contain a question, as long as the message type on the sending command is *INQ, IBM i treats the message as an inquiry only. In System i Navigator, the distinction between an informational and an inquiry message, for the sender of the message, is whether the Request a reply checkbox is checked. Additional information — Transition statement —




6-5

Instructor Guide

Where messages come from IBM i

System programs

System operator System going down

Cursor in protected area

Workstation

Can accounts receivable program run?

Mfg. program completed successfully

Other workstations

Application programs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 6-3. Where messages come from

AS248.1

Notes:

6-6





Uempty





6-7

Instructor Guide

What is a message queue? IBM i

Think of a message queue as being a kind of mailbox.

Prt01 is out of forms. The system will be IPLed in 10 minutes. The workstation DSP03 is offline. Do you have the licensed program tape? The program OPR01 compiled successfully. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 6-4. What is a message queue?

AS248.1

Notes: Even though it might appear that a message is being sent directly to a user or a workstation, messages are always sent to a message queue. A message queue is similar to a mailbox. • It receives and holds messages (just like your mailbox receives and holds your mail) until the messages can be read. • Just as you can decide when to view and respond to your mail, you can decide when to view and respond to messages.

6-8





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Communication using messages on a Power i occurs through a type of object known as a message queue. Messages are actually sent to a message queue, not to a user or a workstation. When messages are displayed, it is really the contents of a message queue that are displayed, that is, the messages on the queue. Discuss the messages (shown on the visual) that a system operator and other workstation users might send and that might be used to communicate between a system or application program and a workstation user. Point out the informational messages (System going down, Cursor in protected area, Manufacturing program completed successfully) and the inquiry message (Can accounts receivable program run?). Additional information — Transition statement —




6-9

Instructor Guide

How are message queues created? IBM i

User profile is created.

Workstation device description is created.

PROFILE

DSP01

AS2401 DSP01

AS2401

Workstation message queue

User message queue

ARDEPT

QSYSOPR

User-created message queue

System operator message queue

CRTMSGQ System supplied © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 6-5. How are message queues created?

AS248.1

Notes: A message queue can be created whenever: • A device description for a workstation (display) is created. A workstation message queue is automatically created when a workstation (or display) is created. A workstation message queue is created for each display configured on the system. The message queue name is the same as the display name. • A user (profile) is created. A user message queue is created when a user profile is created. A user message queue exists for each user profile. The name of the user message queue is the same as the user profile name unless it is specified differently. • The system operator message queue (QSYSOPR) is supplied as part of i. When the Power is configured for the first time, QSYSOPR is created. • Other message queues can be created by Power implementers with the Create Message Queue (CRTMSGQ) command.





Uempty





6-11

Instructor Guide

How are message queues allocated? IBM i

At sign-on, you are assigned certain messages queues: Workstation device message queue User profile message queue

Optionally, you can allocate a message queue: By assigning a message queue to yourself: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK CHGMSGQ ARDEPT *NOTIFY

Assuming your user profile has been authorized to that specific message queue


Figure 6-6. How are message queues allocated?

AS248.1

Notes: At sign-on, the user is assigned certain message queues. When working with a 5250 green screen session, the following messages are automatically allocated: • Workstation device message queue • User profile message queue The Change Message Queue (CHGMSGQ) command changes the attributes of the specified message queue. Delivery (DLVRY) specifies how the messages that are sent to this message queue are delivered. *HOLD *BREAK *NOTIFY *DFT





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U06-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U06-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-7U06-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




6-13

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which of the following message types is requesting a reply? a. b. c. d.

Informational Questioning Inquiry User

2. When you create a user profile, which of the following is automatically created? a. b. c. d.

User message queue Workstation message queue System operator message queue Application message queue

3. Which message type will interrupt a user who is signed on to a 5250 emulation session? a. b. c. d.

Informational Inquiry Workstation Break


Figure 6-7. Checkpoint

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty


Checkpoint solutions IBM i

1.

Which of the following message types is requesting a reply? a. Informational b. Questioning c. Inquiry d. User The answer is Inquiry.

2. When you create a user profile, which of the following is automatically created? a. User message queue b. Workstation message queue c. System operator message queue d. Application message queue The answer is User message queue.

3. Which message type will interrupt a user who is signed on to a 5250 emulation session? a. Informational b. Inquiry c. Workstation d. Break The answer is Break. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





6-15

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe how the message function works Explain what a message queue is and how they are created List the different types of messages that can be sent List where messages can be sent from and where they can be sent to



AS248.1

Notes: As a system operator, you are expected to be the message expert. Not only do you display, send, receive, and remove messages, but you are also asked to help others with their questions. You are asked to explain what the messages mean and how to respond to them.





Uempty





6-17

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit describes how to work with and manage the messaging function when working with a 5250 emulation session.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • How message queues get allocated • The menus and commands used to work with messaging • Describe the difference between a message and break message • Explain the process used to display and manage messages • Explain the difference between an informational and an inquiry message • Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on your screen • Explain how to determine who has allocated a message queue to themselves



Unit 7. Messaging using 5250 emulation


7-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: How message queues get allocated The menus and commands used to work with messaging Describe the difference between a message and break message Explain the process used to display and manage messages Explain the difference between an informational and an inquiry message Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on your screen Explain how to determine who has allocated a message queue to themselves © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:

7-2





Uempty





7-3

Instructor Guide

How are message queues allocated? IBM i

At sign-on, you are assigned certain messages queues: Workstation device message queue User profile message queue

Optionally, you can allocate a message queue: By assigning a message queue to yourself: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK CHGMSGQ ARDEPT *NOTIFY

Assuming your user profile has been authorized to that specific message queue


Figure 7-2. How are message queues allocated?

AS248.1

Notes: At sign-on, the user is assigned certain message queues. When working with a 5250 green screen session, the following messages are automatically allocated: • Workstation device message queue: The upper right-hand corner on the sign-on screen will show the name of the workstation device for your session. The message queue assigned to that device or workstation session will automatically be assigned to the user. • User profile message queue: A message queue is automatically created for each user profile created on the system. The user message queue is automatically allocated when the user signs on. The Change Message Queue (CHGMSGQ) command changes the attributes of the specified message queue. If the delivery mode is being changed to *BREAK or *NOTIFY, and if the message queue is not already in *BREAK or *NOTIFY mode or specifically allocated to another job, it is implicitly allocated by this command.

7-4





Uempty

Delivery (DLVRY) specifies how the messages that are sent to this message queue are delivered. The method of delivery is in effect only as long as the message queue is allocated to the job. When the queue is no longer allocated, the delivery mode is changed to *HOLD for workstation, system operator, and user message queues. *HOLD

The messages are held in the message queue until they are requested by the user or program.

*BREAK

When a message arrives at the message queue, the job to which the message queue is allocated is interrupted, and the program specified for the Break handling program (PGM) parameter is called, or the Display Message (DSPMSG) command is processed. When changing to *BREAK mode, if a program name is not specified, or if PGM(*SAME) is specified, the PGM parameter defaults to *DSPMSG for the break program and *ALWRPY for the allow other jobs to reply attribute.

*NOTIFY

When a message arrives at the message queue, an interactive job to which the message queue is allocated is notified by the Message light turning on and a buzzer sounding (if you have that feature).

*DFT

Messages requiring replies are answered with their default reply. No messages are added to the message queue unless the message queue is QSYSOPR.




7-5

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A message queue can be allocated to one user at a time. If you want to free up or to put the message queue back on the shelf so that somebody else can allocate it to them self, then put it back into *Hold mode. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share to show a live demo of your 5250 emulation screen where possible. To perform an application share: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens, select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Perform a live demo by running 5250 emulation on your instructor PC where possible. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.

7-6





Uempty

General System Tasks menu IBM i


Figure 7-3. General System Tasks menu

AS248.1

Notes: The menu displayed on this page is the General System Tasks menu. The command used to display the General System Tasks menu is GO SYSTEM.




7-7

Instructor Guide


7-8





Uempty

Message menu IBM i


Figure 7-4. Message menu

AS248.1

Notes: The menu displayed on this page is the Messages menu. • The command used to display the Messages menu is Go Message. • Another way to display this menu is to select option 4 - Messages from the General System Tasks menu, the menu displayed on the previous page.




7-9

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG IBM i


Figure 7-5. Option 1: Send Message: SNDMSG

AS248.1

Notes: The Send Message (SNDMSG) command is used by a display station user to send an immediate message from their display station to one or more message queues. The message can be sent to the system operator, to other display station users, to a user's message queue, to all currently active users' message queues, or to the system history log, QHST. The sender can require a reply from the message receiver. The primary users of this command are display station users and the system operator. Restrictions: • You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) and add (*ADD) authorities for the message queue. • You must have use (*USE) authority for the specified message queues and *USE authority for the libraries in which they are located. • The SNDMSG command only allows a message of up to 512 characters of first-level message text to be sent. This command can only send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(*INQ)) to one message queue or to two message queues if one of the queues is *HSTLOG. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



7-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG IBM i


Figure 7-6. Option 2: Send Message: SNDBRKMSG

AS248.1

Notes: The Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) command is used to send an immediate message to one or more work station message queues. An immediate message is a message that is not predefined and is not stored in a message file. The command causes the message to be delivered always in break mode. The DSPMSG display is shown for the message when it is received, regardless of the setting of the message queue's delivery mode, severity, and break handling program; however, the message might not be displayed in some cases, depending on the Break Message job attribute. This command is primarily intended for the system operator's use. Restrictions: • This command can be used to send break messages to work station message queues only. • This command cannot send inquiry messages (specified by MSGTYPE(INQ)) to multiple workstations.




7-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Inform students that break messages can only be sent to a workstation message queue. This means that break messages can only be sent to users who are signed on to a 5250 green screen or emulation session. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG IBM i


Figure 7-7. Option 3: Display Message: DSPMSG

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Messages (DSPMSG) command is used by the display station user to show the messages received at the specified message queue. If the message queue is not allocated to the job in which this command is entered or to any other job, it is implicitly allocated by this command for the duration of the command. When the messages are shown, options are also shown that allow the user to either remove one or more messages from the queue or to enter a reply to each inquiry message.




7-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Display your messages IBM i


Figure 7-8. Display your messages

AS248.1

Notes: The following function keys allow you to manipulate messages: • F10=Display messages: This includes those that have been excluded from other displays due to the parameters of the Display Message (DSPMSG) command. • F11=Remove a message: Position the cursor over a message and press this key. The message will be removed from the message queue. • F13=Remove all: Press this key to remove all messages from the message queue. The default reply is sent for any unanswered inquiry messages. • F14=Work with problem: Position the cursor over a message that is preceded with an asterisk (*) and press this key to work with the problem. The key is operational and shown on the display only when a message has an asterisk. • F16=Remove all except unanswered: All messages except the unanswered inquiry messages and sender copy messages will be removed.




7-17

Instructor Guide

• F21=Select assistance level: This function allows you to change the Power interface you are using. You can choose the: - Operational Assistant interface - Current Power interface • F22=Display list details: This function displays additional information about the message queue in which the messages are contained.





Uempty





7-19

Instructor Guide

Display inquiry messages IBM i


Figure 7-9. Display inquiry messages

AS248.1

Notes: An inquiry message is a message that is asking a question or expecting a reply. Inquiry messages can be sent by a user or a program. A user could be asking a question of another user or a program could be asking for input in order to continue processing.





Uempty





7-21

Instructor Guide

Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages IBM i


Figure 7-10. Option 4: Display QSYSOPR messages

AS248.1

Notes: When you place the cursor on a specific message on this panel and press the F1 key, it will take you to the display shown on the next visual.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A user will only be allowed to display the QSYSOPR message queue if they have been authorized to work with this message queue. Additional information — Transition statement —




7-23

Instructor Guide

Display message details IBM i


Figure 7-11. Display message details

AS248.1

Notes: The Additional Messages Information screen is displayed when you place the cursor on a specific message on the Display Messages screen (see the previous page in the student guide) and press the F1 - help key.





Uempty





7-25

Instructor Guide

Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ IBM i


Figure 7-12. Option 6: Work with Message Queues: WRKMSGQ

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Message Queues (WRKMSGQ) display shows a list of message queues you have authority to use. You can use this list to do some common tasks related to messages. The list of message queues shown is based on the value you enter for the message queue (MSGQ) parameter. For example, if you type T* in the library QGPL, a list of all the message queues starting with T in library QGPL is displayed. If you know the name of the object, you can fill in the top blank fields with the option number, object name, and library name, and then press the Enter key. You can also type the option number next to a specific object and press the Enter key. You can type option numbers next to more than one object at a time to do more than one task, one after the other.





Uempty





7-27

Instructor Guide

How messages are displayed IBM i

Display Messages Queue.... : QSYSOPR Library.... : QSYS Severity.. : 70

Program...: *DSPMSG Library....: Delivery....: *HOLD

Type reply (if required), press Enter. Device COOKPCF no longer communicating. Device COOKPCI no longer communicating. Display Controller COOKPC hasMessages disconnected. Controller COOKPC contacted on line ITSCTRN. Messages Queue.... : QPADEV0001 *DSPMSG Device QPADEV0007 no longerProgram...: communicating. Library.... : QSYS Library....: Select one Severity.. : 00of the following: Delivery....: *NOTIFY Type reply a(ifmessage required), press Enter. 1.Send From... : AS2401 04/02/08 09:02:14 2.Send a break message A break message interrupts your current job and displays the message on your screen.

Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve

DSPMSG command

Receive a break message

Receive on the message line

Function key not allowed © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 7-13. How messages are displayed

AS248.1

Notes: The system displays messages: • On the display messages display (DSPMSG command). • As a break message. The current job is interrupted and the message is shown on the display. • On the message line.





Uempty





7-29

Instructor Guide

Work with Object Locks IBM i


Figure 7-14. Work with Object Locks

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) command allows you to work with the object lock requests in the system for a specified object. You can work with both held locks and locks waiting to be applied. This command can be used by a user to determine who has allocated a message queue for their use. For example, you are not allowed to set a message queue in break mode if somebody else has already allocated that same queue for their use. This command will show you who has already locked, or allocated, this message queue.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — This command could be used by an operator to find out who is using a specific object and thus has it locked. In the example, you can use this command to find out has allocated the QSYSOPR message queue to themselves. Additional information — Transition statement —




7-31

Instructor Guide

Grant Object Authority IBM i


Figure 7-15. Grant Object Authority

AS248.1

Notes: The Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) command grants specific authority for the objects named in the command to another user or group of users. Authority can be given to: • Named users • Users (*PUBLIC) who do not have specific authority to the object or the authorization list • Users of the object referred to by the reference object (REFOBJ), reference object type (REFOBJTYPE), and parameters • Authorization lists Before a user can work with a message queue, that user must be authorized to work with that message queue. This is the command that a security officer or a security administrator would use to grant that authority.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Typically, system operators would not be granting authority to objects on the system. This display is provided to teach this specific security concept to an operator, that is, how to grant a user-specific authority to an object. Additional information — Transition statement —




7-33

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Messages using 5250 Emulation




AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Messages exercise.





Uempty





7-35

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: You can allocate an application message queue when you sign on. 2. Which of the following delivery value will direct the system to take the default reply to a message? a. b. c. d.

Hold Break Notify Default

3. When the system creates a workstation device description, which of the following is automatically created? a. b. c. d.

User message queue Workstation message queue System operator message queue Application message queue © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: You can allocate an application message queue when you sign on. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following delivery value will direct the system to take the default reply to a message? a. Hold b. Break c. Notify d. Default The answer is Default.

3. When the system creates a work station device description, which of the following is automatically created? a. b. c. d.

User message queue Workstation message queue System operator message queue Application message queue

The answer is User message queue. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





7-37

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: You can send a message to any user on the system. 5. Which message type will interrupt a user who is signed on to a 5250 emulation session? a. b. c. d.


6. True or False: The default mode for a message queue is *Notify.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. True or False: You can send a message to any user on the system. The answer is True.



e. The answer is Break.

6. True or False: The default mode for a message queue is *Notify. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





7-39

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: How message queues get allocated The menus and commands used to work with messaging Describe the difference between a message and break message Explain the process used to display and manage messages Explain the difference between an informational and an inquiry message Explain the different ways that messages are displayed on your screen Explain how to determine who has allocated a message queue to themselves © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes: As a system operator, you are expected to be the message expert. Not only do you display, send, receive, and remove messages, but you are also asked to help others with their questions. You are asked to explain what the messages mean and how to respond to them.





Uempty





7-41

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 8. Messaging using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit describes how messaging works when using the System i Navigator GUI.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Explain how to access and use the messaging function using System i Navigator • Explain how to send messages using this interface • Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages • Explain how to display your messages • Explain how to customize the messaging function



Unit 8. Messaging using System i Navigator


8-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to access and use the messaging function using System i Navigator Explain how to send messages using this interface Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages Explain how to display your messages Explain how to customize the messaging function



AS248.1

Notes:

8-2





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual you should perform an application share to perform a live demo where possible. To perform an application share: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual you should perform a live demo where possible. To perform a live demo: • Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID.




8-3

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations > Messages IBM i


Figure 8-2. Basic Operations > Messages

AS248.1

Notes: Expand Basic Operations and click Messages to see the messages for the user signed on using this GUI. Notice that the status bar, in this example, shows the following information: • 10.31.83.12 shows the name of the system to which you connected. • Message shows the name of the user whose messages are being displayed. • User shows whose messages are being displayed. From System i Navigator, you can display a list of messages. You can customize the list to specify which messages you want to include. You can also specify which columns of information you want to display in the list and in what order you want the columns to be displayed. From the message list, you can reply to a message, send a new message, delete one or more messages, and display the properties of a message. By default, this function shows the messages for the user who is signed on to this GUI.

8-4





Uempty





8-5

Instructor Guide

Messages context menu: Send Message IBM i


Figure 8-3. Messages context menu: Send Message

AS248.1

Notes: The options available to send messages using this interface are: • Expand Basic Operations, right-click Messages, click Send Message from the pop-up menu. • Click Basic Operations to populate the task area; then you can select Send a Message from the taskpad area.

8-6





Uempty





8-7

Instructor Guide

Inquiry versus informational message IBM i


Figure 8-4. Inquiry versus informational message

AS248.1

Notes: Request a reply specifies to send an inquiry message, which always requires a reply. The inquiry message is placed on a message queue, and the name of the person that the inquiry is sent to is added to the beginning of the message text. This allows the person receiving the reply to determine which user or workstation the reply is from. If this check box is not selected, the message is an informational message.

8-8





Uempty





8-9

Instructor Guide

Request a reply: Send reply to IBM i


Figure 8-5. Request a reply: Send reply to

AS248.1

Notes: For an inquiry message, clicking the Request a reply check box allows you to stipulate that the reply go to a message queue other than the message queue of the sender. Click Advanced to specify where to send the reply if you are sending an inquiry message. • Send reply to specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the name of the message queue that the reply is sent to. You can choose to have the reply sent to the sender's message queue, or you can specify the name of another message queue to receive the reply. • Coded Character Set ID (CCSID) of message text specifies the CCSID that is used for the message text supplied on the Send Message dialog. CCSID is a 16-bit number identifying a specific set of encoding scheme identifiers, character set identifiers, code page identifiers, and other relevant information that uniquely identifies the coded graphic representation used.





Uempty





8-11

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Send to users IBM i


Figure 8-6. Send Message: Send to users

AS248.1

Notes: You can click the Users check box to send your message to a user. To fill in this parameter, you can click Browse to see the pop-up windows that shows a list of users on your system. One or more user message queues (separated by commas) can be typed in, and one or more users can be selected from the pop-up window that appears when you click Browse.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Be sure to add several users from the system to the message so that the students can see how it appears in the window. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Be sure to add several users from the system to the message so that the students can see how it appears in the window. Additional information — Transition statement —




8-13

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Send to workstations IBM i


Figure 8-7. Send Message: Send to workstations

AS248.1

Notes: The alternative is to send your message to a workstation. Check the Workstation check box; then click Browse to see a list of the workstations on the system. You can either broadcast a message to all workstation message queues or type in a specific workstation message queue.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Be sure to add several workstations from the list to the message so that the students can see how it appears in the window. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Be sure to add several workstations from the list to the message so that the students can see how it appears in the window. Additional information — Transition statement —




8-15

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Interrupt user IBM i


Figure 8-8. Send Message: Interrupt user

AS248.1

Notes: Interrupt user specifies to send a break message. • When a break message is sent to a user, the message goes to the workstation message queue that the user is signed on to. If the user is in an emulation session, the message temporarily interrupts the work that the user is doing. • When a break message is sent to a user who is not signed on, the message goes to the user's message queue. When a break message is sent to one or more workstations, the message goes to the message queues for the specified workstations. Note Break messages do not interrupt System i Navigator users.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Do not send the message when doing an application share or live demo. Click Cancel and continue on with the next visual/topic. Additional information — Transition statement —




8-17

Instructor Guide

Display message properties IBM i


Figure 8-9. Display message properties

AS248.1

Notes: Click Messages to see a list of messages that are in your message queue. To view the details of a specific message, either double-click Messages in the From User column or right-click the icon and select Properties. To delete a specific message, select Delete.





Uempty





8-19

Instructor Guide

Customize messages: Include (F11) IBM i


Figure 8-10. Customize messages: Include (F11)

AS248.1

Notes: To customize what information is displayed when you click the Messages branch, you can: • Right-click Messages, and select Include. Or • Highlight the Messages branch, and press F11.





Uempty





8-21

Instructor Guide

Include (F11): System operator IBM i


Figure 8-11. Include (F11): System operator

AS248.1

Notes: To customize what information is displayed when you click the Messages branch, you can: • Right-click Messages, and select Include. Or • Highlight the Messages branch, and press F11.





Uempty





8-23

Instructor Guide

Customize messages: Columns (F12) IBM i


Figure 8-12. Customize messages: Columns (F12)

AS248.1

Notes: By default, every function includes the set of default columns that are displayed. Those are the columns listed in the right pane. Usually, there are additional columns of information that can be selected from the list on the left.





Uempty





8-25

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Messages using System i Navigator




AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Messages exercise.





Uempty





8-27

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: System i Navigator only allows you to see your messages. 2. Which of the following message types can be sent with this GUI? a. b. c. d.

Informational Inquiry User All of the above

3. Which customize option allows you to specify whose messages to view? a. b. c. d.

Sort Include Columns Auto refresh © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: System i Navigator only allows you to see your messages. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following message types can be sent with this GUI? a. Informational b. Inquiry c. User d. All of the above The answer is All of the above.

3. Which customize option allows you to specify that you want to view messages for a different user? a. Sort b. Include c. Columns d. Auto refresh The answer is Include. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





8-29

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: A break message will interrupt a user who is only signed on using System i Navigator. 5. The message function is found under which of the following? a. b. c. d.

Basic operations Work management Configuration and service Network

6. True or False: You are only allowed to delete a message from your message queue.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. True or False. A break message will interrupt a user who is only signed on using System i Navigator. The answer is False.

5. The message function is found under which of the following? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Basic operations.

6. True or False: You are only allowed to delete a message from your message queue. The answer is False.






8-31

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to access and use the messaging function using System i Navigator Explain how to send messages using this interface Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages Explain how to display your messages Explain how to customize the messaging function



AS248.1

Notes: As a system operator, you are expected to be the message expert. Not only do you display, send, receive, and remove messages, you are also asked to help others with their questions. You are asked to explain what the messages mean and how to respond to them.





Uempty





8-33

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 9. Messaging using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:10

What this unit is about This unit describes how messaging works when using the Systems Director Navigator for IBM i GUI.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Explain how to access and use the messaging function using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i • Explain how to send messages using this interface • Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages • Explain how to display your messages • Explain how to customize the messaging function



Unit 9. Messaging using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


9-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to access and use the messaging function using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Explain how to send messages using this interface Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages Explain how to display your messages Explain how to customize the messaging function



AS248.1

Notes:

9-2





Uempty





9-3

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations > Send a Message IBM i


Figure 9-2. Basic Operations > Send a Message

AS248.1

Notes: Click Basic operations, and then click Send Messages to send a message.

9-4





Uempty





9-5

Instructor Guide

Inquiry versus informational message IBM i


Figure 9-3. Inquiry versus informational message

AS248.1

Notes: Request a reply specifies to send an inquiry message, which always requires a reply. The inquiry message is placed on a message queue, and the name of the person that the inquiry is sent to is added to the beginning of the message text. This allows the person receiving the reply to determine which user or workstation the reply is from. If this check box is not selected, the message is an informational message. If the check box Interrupt user is selected, the message is an inquiry message.

9-6





Uempty





9-7

Instructor Guide

Request a reply: Send reply to IBM i


Figure 9-4. Request a reply: Send reply to

AS248.1

Notes: For an inquiry message, clicking the Request a reply check box allows you to stipulate that the reply go to a message queue other than the message queue of the sender. Click Advanced to specify where to send the reply if you are sending an inquiry message. Send reply to specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the name of the message queue that the reply is sent to. You can choose to have the reply sent to the sender's message queue, or you can specify the name of another message queue to receive the reply. Coded Character Set ID (CCSID) of message text specifies the CCSID that is used for the message text supplied on the Send Message dialog. CCSID is a 16-bit number identifying a specific set of encoding scheme identifiers, character set identifiers, code page identifiers, and other relevant information that uniquely identifies the coded graphic representation used.

9-8





Uempty





9-9

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Send to users IBM i


Figure 9-5. Send Message: Send to users

AS248.1

Notes: You can click the Users check box to send your message to a user. Click Browse to see this tab, which shows a list of users on your system. One or more user message queues can be selected. Click OK.





Uempty





9-11

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Send to users (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 9-6. Send Message: Send to users (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: You can click the field next to Users and manually type the user who sent a message.





Uempty





9-13

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Send to users (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 9-7. Send Message: Send to users (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: For the Send to parameter, click the down arrow which will show: • All users • All signed-on users • System operator • Users to whom send messages were sent previously





Uempty





9-15

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Send to workstations IBM i


Figure 9-8. Send Message: Send to workstations

AS248.1

Notes: The alternative is to send a message to a workstation. Check the Workstation check box; then click Browse to see this tab. • You can click the Select All icon to broadcast a message to all workstation message queues, • or you can select a specific workstation message queue. • Click OK.





Uempty





9-17

Instructor Guide

Send Message: Interrupt user IBM i


Figure 9-9. Send Message: Interrupt user

AS248.1

Notes: The Interrupt user parameter is used to specify to send a break message. • When a break message is sent to a user, the message goes to the workstation message queue that the user is signed on to. If the user is in an emulation session, the message temporarily interrupts the work that the user is doing. • When a break message is sent to a user who is not signed on to an emulation session, the message goes to the user's message queue. • When a break message is sent to one or more workstations, the message goes to the message queues for the specified workstations. Note Break messages do not interrupt Systems Director Navigator for IBM i users.





Uempty





9-19

Instructor Guide

Display Messages: Properties IBM i


Figure 9-10. Display Messages: Properties

AS248.1

Notes: Click Messages to see a list of your messages. • You can customize the list to specify which messages you want to include in the list. • You can also specify which columns of information you want to display in the list and in what order you want the columns to be displayed. From the message list, you can reply to a message, send a new message, delete one or more messages, and display the properties of a message. By default, this function shows the messages for the user who signed on to this GUI. To view the details of a specific message, click the arrow for the message and select Properties. To delete a specific message, select Delete. The recommendation is to delete messages once you have read them. Clean up the message queue as you go.





Uempty





9-21

Instructor Guide

Properties: General and Detail tabs IBM i


Figure 9-11. Properties: General and Detail tabs

AS248.1

Notes: This is the tab that is displayed when you select Properties. Notice there are two tabs you can click to display the details for the message. It is recommended that you delete messages that have been viewed and handled. Clean up your message queue as you go!





Uempty





9-23

Instructor Guide

Customize: View IBM i


Figure 9-12. Customize: View

AS248.1

Notes: You can use Select Action for make some action with messages and customize view messages list.





Uempty





9-25

Instructor Guide

Customize: Include IBM i


Figure 9-13. Customize: Include

AS248.1

Notes: To customize which message queue information is displayed when you click Messages, click Select Action > Include > Go to see the tab in the lower right of this visual. From this tab, you can choose a specific user or a specific message queue.





Uempty





9-27

Instructor Guide

Customize: Columns IBM i


Figure 9-14. Customize: Columns

AS248.1

Notes: To customize which columns are displayed when you click Messages, click the down arrow for Select Action. Then click Columns > Go to see the tab in the lower right of this visual. • Notice that the columns in the right pane will display automatically. • The columns in the left pane will show additional columns of information that you can choose to display when you click this function. • In addition, you can also move columns up or down to organize them to your liking.





Uempty





9-29

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Messages using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

Inform instructor when you have completed your exercise. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U09-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U09-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U09- checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




9-31

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Any type of message can be sent using Systems Director Navigator. 2. When using Systems Director Navigator, you can send a message to which of the following? a. b. c. d.

Users Workstations System operator All of the above

3. True or False: A break message will interrupt a user who is signed on using Systems Director Navigator.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: Any type of message can be sent using Systems Director Navigator. The answer is True.

2. When using Systems Director Navigator, you can send a message to which of the following? a. b. c. d.



3. True or False: A break message will interrupt a user who is signed on using Systems Director Navigator. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





9-33

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to access and use the messaging function using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Explain how to send messages using this interface Explain how to send informational versus inquiry messages Explain how to display your messages Explain how to customize the messaging function



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





9-35

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 10. CL command concepts Estimated time 00:10

What this unit is about This unit briefly explains what a control language (CL) command is and where commands can be entered. We will also discuss assistance provided by IBM i to help you find a command.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • • • •

Describe how CL commands are entered Describe the types of CL commands that are available Describe the structure of a CL command Explain how command parameters and user values are used to customize the function performed by a command



Unit 10. CL command concepts


10-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe how CL commands are entered Describe the types of CL commands that are available Describe the structure of a CL command Explain how command parameters and user values are used to customize the function performed by a command



AS248.1

Notes: Commands have a special structure and consist of parameters that give the system specific instructions on how to execute the requested function.





Uempty





10-3

Instructor Guide

Control language IBM i

All system functions are controlled through the use of a single language: By the user In a program Interactively or in batch


Figure 10-2. Control language

AS248.1

Notes: One way in which you communicate with IBM i is through a special language called control language (CL). CL consists of commands. Every command instructs the system to perform a specific action. • A CL command can be run by a user or be included in a program. • A command can be processed interactively where there is two-way communication between a user and the system. • A program can also be processed in batch mode; after a user submits a command, the system uses the command with no further information needed from the user.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Normally, in order to use a command, a user must have access to a command line. Additional information — Transition statement —




10-5

Instructor Guide

CL commands IBM i

DLTAUTL DLTDEVD DLTLIB

CRTLIB CRTMNU CRTPF

HLDWTR PWRDWNSYS DSPJOBLOG

WRKMNU WRKJOBD WRKMSGQ

Plus many more © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 10-3. CL commands

AS248.1

Notes: This visual shows just a few of the more commonly used commands. There are a large number of commands available on the system. Even the most experienced users are seldom familiar with more than a few hundred of these. Each command name is abbreviated and has been standardized so that you can tell what action is being performed on which object. Following, in alphabetical order, is a description of the action abbreviations shown on the visual: Abbreviation CRT... DLT... DSP... HLD... PWRDWN... WRK...

Action performed Create Delete Display Hold Power down Work





Uempty Following, in alphabetical order, is a description of the object abbreviations shown on the visual:

Abbreviation ...AUTL ...DEVD ...JOBD ...JOBLOG ...LIB ...MNU ...MSGQ ...PF ...SYS ...WTR

Item on which action is performed Authorization list Device description Job description Job log Library Menu Message queue Physical file System Writer




10-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Careful examination of the commands on the visual illustrates several things that are common to all commands. • Most commands are abbreviated with vowels omitted. • To make the abbreviations easier to understand, they have been standardized so that a user can tell what major function (action) each command performs and what item (or object) the function is performed on. The commands shown on the visual are incomplete. The CRTLIB command shown in the top left on the visual creates a library. But what library? The system needs further information, such as the name of the library to be created, and some characteristics of the library. Providing information to the system about a CL command is done with parameters. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

CL command structure IBM i

Command name

CRTLIB Action

Item abbreviation

Parameter

LIB(PAYLIB) Keyword

Value


Figure 10-4. CL command structure

AS248.1

Notes: Each command consists of a command name followed by parameters. Some commands will use zero parameters (this command does one thing in one way) while other commands use up to the maximum of 75 parameters. The format for a command is: command-name parameter parameter parameter... A command name consists of two abbreviated parts for easy identification: an action and an object on which the action is performed. Even though there are a very large number of commands, there are a fairly limited number of action and object pairs. To execute a command, you need only put the right action and object pair together. A parameter also has two parts: a keyword followed, in parentheses, by one or more values. A parameter is used either to provide information to the command to control what it does. The CRTLIB LIB(PAYLIB) command shown on the visual instructs the system to create a library named PAYLIB. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



10-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Usually only a few parameters are specified for a CL command, each separated from the preceding one by one or more spaces. The first parameter is separated from the command name by one or more spaces. Each parameter consists of a keyword followed by one or more values enclosed in parentheses. It is the parameters and their values that give real meaning to a command. A keyword identifies a single parameter from among the 75 parameters possible for each command. The information enclosed in parentheses are the values assigned to the parameter and used by the command. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Some other CL command facts IBM i

Conditional parameters: Some of the additional parameters will display based on what is selected Some parameters are mutually exclusive

Each of the supported interfaces provides prompting to assist when entering a command Each of the supported interfaces provides help: To explain what a command is used for To explain the purpose served of each parameter

CL commands can be created by an administrator or a programmer


Figure 10-5. Some other CL command facts

AS248.1

Notes:




10-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Now that you know where to enter a command, let's look at how you can enter a command. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U10-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U10-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248U10-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: A user must memorize the format of a command since the system does not provide any help. 2. True or False: CL commands can be specified within a program. 3. True or False: Parameters are used to customize a CL command.



AS248.1

Notes:




10-13

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: A user must memorize the format of a command since the system does not provide any help. The answer is False.

2. True or False: CL commands can be specified within a program. The answer is True.

3. True or False: Parameters are used to customize a CL command. The answer is True.







Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe how CL commands are entered Describe the types of CL commands that are available Describe the structure of a CL command Explain how command parameters and user values are used to customize the function performed by a command



AS248.1

Notes: Menus and CL commands can take you almost anywhere you want to go and allow you to do what you want to do on the Power if you have the proper authority. Prompting helps you enter commands by reducing your dependency on memorization and reference manuals. When in doubt, use the GO CMDxxx or GO MAJOR commands.




10-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The combination of menus and CL commands makes the system very flexible and user-oriented. In summary, assure the students that they will use menus heavily only while still learning their way around the system. As time goes on, they will find themselves using the appropriate commands more and more. It is always natural to use prompting. Why memorize? The online help is always there to give them more information as they work with areas that are less familiar. Learning the item (LIB, OBJ, FLR, DIR, and so forth) and the action (WRK, DSP, CRT, RMV, and so forth) abbreviations offer rewards as they will find they can use GO CMDxxx to find new commands that help them accomplish new tasks. They can also use the GO MAJOR command to bring up the appropriate menu listing all the related commands. Additional information — Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Transition statement —





Uempty

Unit 11. CL commands using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:10

What this unit is about This unit describes the different menus available to assist users with finding and using commands. We will also discuss the assistance provided by IBM i to help you find a command.


Explain where to enter a CL command Describe what command prompting is and how to use it Explain the use of command parameters and user values Explain what conditional parameters are and how these are used to customize a command • List the different menus used to find commands



Unit 11. CL commands using 5250 emulation


11-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain where to enter a CL command Describe what command prompting is and how to use it Explain the use of command parameters and user values Explain what conditional parameters are and how these are used to customize a command List the different menus used to find commands



AS248.1

Notes: Commands have a special structure and consist of parameters that give the system specific instructions on how to execute the requested function.





Uempty





11-3

Instructor Guide

Where to enter a command IBM i

Command line

Command Entry display

- or © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 11-2. Where to enter a command

AS248.1

Notes: If you have the proper authority, you can enter a command either on a command line or on the Command Entry screen. • The command line is easy to use and readily accessible. • The Command Entry screen is specially designed to allow you to efficiently enter commands, view previously entered commands, duplicate commands for reuse, and receive additional assistance on error messages. From the Operational Assistant menus, pressing the F9 key brings up the command line near the bottom of the display.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Now that you know where to enter a command, let's look at how you can enter a command. Additional information — Transition statement —




11-5

Instructor Guide

Command prompting IBM i

DSPOBJD + F4 or ?DSPOBJD 1 2

3

4

5


Figure 11-3. Command prompting

AS248.1

Notes: If you need help entering parameters for a command, you can request a display tailored to the command name. This display shows (or prompts you for) the command parameters. This request is called command prompting. You can request command prompting in one of the following ways: • Press F4 after typing the command name on a command line or after using the F9 key to recall the last command (in the latter case, command prompting is very useful because most of the parameters were previously entered). • Type a question mark (?) immediately preceding the command name on a command line, and press the Enter key. Each command entry display has certain characteristics, which are shown on the visual. 1. The descriptive and abbreviated command name is shown at the top of the display. 2. Choices are shown in the box on the right side of the display. These are some valid values for each parameter. If an ellipsis (...) follows the last choice entered, more choices are available and can be seen by positioning the cursor in the entry field for that 11-6 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

parameter and pressing F4 or by entering a question mark (?) and at least one space and pressing Enter. 3. + for more values shown in the box in the middle of the display indicates that this is a parameter list (which means that you can enter more than one value for this parameter). To enter a list, type the first value, type a plus sign (+) on the next line, and press Enter. A second display is shown, containing multiple value lines. When you have entered all values, press Enter again to return to the command entry display. Once this list has been entered, it can be changed. 4. There are some parameters for which you must enter a value. These are called required parameters. You do not have to enter a value for other parameters, called optional parameters; the system can use a default value instead. In this visual, Object and Object type are required parameters. The other parameters, Detail and Output, are optional parameters (that is, the system will use the default values shown on the visual). 5. Function keys Not all of the available function keys are shown on each command entry display. (In fact, not all of the function keys shown on the visual are available on the DSPOBJD Command Entry display.) You might have to press F24 (Shift + F12) several times to view some of these functions keys. Even if the keys are not visible, they are active.




11-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Present as much or as little of the following information as you feel is needed to explain the features of a Command Entry display. The students will use some of these features in the accompanying exercise. There are a couple of ways to enter a command. Use command prompting to assist when entering commands. This visual shows the DSPOBJD command entry display. Using this display, point out the following characteristics of a command entry display: • A descriptive name (Display Object Description) and a command name (DSPOBJD) are shown at the top of the display. • The box on the right side of the display shows the valid parameter values for an entry field. The availability of further choices for a parameter is indicated by an ellipsis (...). To view more choices, you need to position the cursor on that parameter and press F4 or type a question mark (?) and at least one space and press Enter. • Some parameters can be lists. If a parameter can be a list, + for more values is shown on the command entry display (see the box in the middle of the display). To enter a list, type the first value, type a plus sign (+) on the next line, and press Enter. A second display is shown containing several value lines. When you have entered all values, press Enter again to return to the command entry display. • The system cannot assign a system-defined value to some parameters. You must specify a value before the system can act on the command. Such parameters are called required parameters. They are highlighted and are always listed first in the command. • Other parameters, called optional parameters, do not require you to specify a value; the system can use a default value instead. • There are a number of function keys available with a command entry display. - F3 = Exit exits the entry display and associated displays without running the command. F12 = Return returns you to the previous display without running the command. - F4 = Prompt displays all of the permissible values for a given parameter. - F5 = Refresh causes all parameters to be reset to their original system default value. Any values that have already been typed are lost. - F9 = All parameters during prompting, pressing F9 causes all parameters for a command, whether additional or conditional ones, to be displayed. - F10 = Additional parameters displays entry fields for the parameters that are not commonly used. - F16 = Command complete indicates that all values have been entered and requests that the command run without showing additional displays. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

F11: Keywords or choices IBM i

F11


Figure 11-4. F11: Keywords or choices

AS248.1

Notes: You can display either keywords (shown in the box in the top left-hand corner of the visual) or choices (shown in the box in the bottom right-hand corner of the visual) on a command entry display. Your user profile controls the format, either choices or keywords, that is used when you initially prompt for any command. After you have prompted for a command, F11 serves as a toggle from one format to the other. In the example on the visual, the choice format was specified in the user profile prior to the user signing on. When the user signed on and pressed F11 the first time, the keywords were displayed. When the user pressed F11 again, the choices were displayed. The commands used in the student exercises for this course are generally specified in choice format. If you would like to use the keyword format while performing your exercises, remember to use F11 after prompting for a command. You can also use the CHGPRF command to change your user profile's USROPT parameter and specify *CLKWD in addition to any user options you might already have or now want.




11-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There is another important function key: F11. It allows you to display either the keywords or choices on a command entry display. F11 is used as a toggle switch when a command prompt is displayed and controls which view is shown. If choices are displayed, pressing F11 displays keywords. If keywords are displayed, pressing F11 displays choices. To have all command entry displays appear initially in keyword format, you can change your user profile to include USROPT(*CLKWD). Point out that instructions for performing this task are included in the students' notes for this visual, since exercise instructions are presented in choice format. Additional information — Discontinue application share or live demo on this visual. Transition statement —





Uempty

Conditional parameters IBM i

Enter


Figure 11-5. Conditional parameters

AS248.1

Notes: Some commands have conditional parameters. These parameters are conditioned by the entry of certain predefined values for specific standard or additional parameters. The prompts for conditional parameters are displayed automatically but only after you type the conditioning parameter and press Enter. In this example, the file to receive output, member to receive output, and replace or add records parameters are displayed only after the output command is directed to a file when you specify *OUTFILE for the output parameter.




11-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Some commands have conditional parameters which are displayed during prompting only if needed because a value has been entered in another parameter. This visual shows the DSPOBJD command as an example of a command with conditional parameters. If you type *OUTFILE as the value for the OUTPUT parameter on the DSPOBJD command and press Enter, IBM i automatically prompts for the parameters OUTFILE and OUTMBR. The output file and member name are conditional parameters for the DSPOBJD command. These two parameters are needed to run the command only if the value of OUTPUT is *OUTFILE. At the beginning of this unit, we said there were two ways to enter commands. Command prompting, which we have just discussed, is one method. We will now discuss the second. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Free format method IBM i

Keyword form Command Entry Previous commands and messages: (No previous commands or messages)

Selection or command ===> DSPOBJD OBJ(account) objtype(*file) detail(*full) output(*print)

Positional form Command Entry Previous commands and messages: (No previous commands or messages)

Selection or command ===> dspobjd account *file *full *print © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 11-6. Free format method

AS248.1

Notes: There is another way to enter commands called the free format method. In this method, the command and its parameters are entered on a command line as a string of characters. If you use this method, you must be familiar with the commands and its parameters. There are two ways to use the free format method to enter a command. • You can enter the command on the command line, which is the first example in this visual. Or • You can call up the Command Entry display (call qcmd) and enter the command using that interface, which is the second example in this visual. You can enter the command with its keywords followed by the appropriate values. This is called the keyword format. If you use the keyword format, you can enter the keywords in any order. If you do not enter keywords, the parameters must be in the exact order that i expects. This is called positional form. Another option available to enter a command is covered on the next page. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



11-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — You might not need to use a command entry display for help with entering commands. If you use the same commands often, you can probably remember the commands and their parameters. Therefore, the system offers another method of entering commands called the free format method. In the free format method, the command and its parameters are entered on a command line as a string of characters. This visual shows two ways of entering a CL command by using the free format method. You can either enter the command name and the associated parameter and values or enter the command name and the correct value. When you use the first method, the keywords and accompanying parameters can be in any order. With the second method, the values must be in the right order. What do you do if you do not know how to spell all or part of a command? IBM i provides assistance to help you find the command. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Finding a command: Major Command Groups menu IBM i


Figure 11-7. Finding a command: Major Command Groups menu

AS248.1

Notes: If you do not know how to spell a command, you can use the Major Command Groups menu to search for it. To display this menu, do one of the following: • Position the cursor on a blank command line, and press F4. • Type only a question mark (?) on a command line, and press Enter. • Enter the command go major. Selecting any option on this menu brings up another, more specific menu. Options on the secondary grouping menus allow you to continually narrow your search until you find the command you need.




11-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Finding a command by category IBM i


Figure 11-8. Finding a command by category

AS248.1

Notes: You can also find a command by either verb or noun category, such as DSP or LIB. Enter the command GO CMDxxx, where xxx is the category of commands you want to be displayed. When the commands in the specified category are displayed, enter the option for the one you want to run. In this example, entering GO CMDLIB caused the Library Commands display to be shown. With this method, you are automatically prompted for the parameters of the command you select. Another way to find commands is to enter the command verb followed by an asterisk (*). For example, entering DSP* displays all commands beginning with DSP, entering DLT* displays all commands beginning with DLT, and so on.




11-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U11-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U11-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248U11-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty


1. True or False: On this system a user must memorize the format of a command since the system does not provide any help. 2. Which function key is used to provide prompt assistance with a command? a. b. c. d.

F1 F3 F4 F9

3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command? a. b. c. d.

F1 F3 F4 F9 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




11-19

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: On this system a user must memorize the format of a command since the system does not provide any help. The answer is False.

2. Which function key is used to provide prompt assistance with a command? a. F1 b. F3 c. F4 d. F9 The answer is F4.

3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command? a. F1 b. F3 c. F4 d. F9 The answer is F9. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty


4. True or False: The F9 and F10 keys show the same additional parameters. 5. Which menu provides assistance when looking for a command? a. b. c. d.

Main User Major Command

6. True or False: The F11 function key is used to switch between command keywords or Value choices.



AS248.1

Notes:




11-21

Instructor Guide



4. True or False: The F9 and F10 keys show the same additional parameters. The answer is False.

5. Which menu provides assistance when looking for a command? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Major.

6. True or False: The F11 function key is used to switch between command keywords or Value choices. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain where to enter a CL command Describe what command prompting is and how to use it Explain the use of command parameters and user values Explain what conditional parameters are and how these are used to customize a command List the different menus used to find commands



AS248.1

Notes: Menus and CL commands can take you almost anywhere you want to go and allow you to do what you want to do on the Power if you have the proper authority. Prompting helps you enter commands by reducing your dependency on memorization and reference manuals. When in doubt, use the GO CMDxxx or GO MAJOR commands.




11-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The combination of menus and CL commands makes the system very flexible and user-oriented. In summary, assure the students that they will use menus heavily only while still learning their way around the system. As time goes on, they will find themselves using the appropriate commands more and more. It is always natural to use prompting. Why memorize? The online help is always there to give them more information as they work with areas that are less familiar. Learning the item (LIB, OBJ, FLR, DIR, and so forth) and the action (WRK, DSP, CRT, RMV, and so forth) abbreviations offer rewards as they will find they can use GO CMDxxx to find new commands that help them accomplish new tasks. They can also use the GO MAJOR command to bring up the appropriate menu listing all the related commands. Additional information — Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Transition statement —





Uempty

Unit 12. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS Estimated time 00:25

What this unit is about This unit describes the concepts of objects, libraries, library lists, and the integrated file system (IFS).

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Explain what an object is on the Power i • Explain the difference between an object's simple and fully qualified name • Explain what a library is • Explain what a library list is and what purpose it serves • Explain how to display and change your library list • Explain what the integrated file system (IFS) is • List the different types of data supported by the IFS



Unit 12. Concepts: Object, library, and the IFS


12-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain what an object is on the Power i Explain the difference between an object's simple and fully qualified name Explain what a library is Explain what a library list is and what purpose it serves Explain how to display and change your library list Explain what the integrated file system (IFS) is List the different types of data supported by the IFS



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — You have learned about things that the Power i system makes available to help you do your job as a system operator: special keys and displays, help, and messages. In this unit, you will be introduced to terminology and concepts relating to IBM i objects. These objects have been mentioned in previous units, but you must understand them fully before continuing with the course. Additional information — Transition statement — What is an object? An object has a name, occupies storage, and is a member of a library. (Each object has a name and can be created and deleted with CL commands.) Files, programs, user profiles, and queues are just a few of the many types of objects.




12-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

12.1. Object concepts Instructor topic introduction In this topic, students learn what an object is and the difference between an unqualified (simple) and a qualified object name. They learn how to identify IBM-supplied objects and how to search for objects which begin with the same letters (a generic search).




12-5

Instructor Guide

Object-based architecture IBM i

IBM i defined object types: Each object type supports specific methods. Specific commands are used for each type of object.

Programs (*PGM) executed Files (*FILE) processed Library

Program

Job queue File

Command Data area © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 12-2. Object-based architecture

AS248.1

Notes: IBM i supports specifically defined object types: • There are specific operations that can be performed against each object type: - They are encapsulated with pre-defined interfaces - Only valid functions are allowed for each object • This improves data integrity • Specific commands are used to work with specific objects There are specific actions you can perform on different types of objects. For example: • Programs are type *PGM; these are executed on the system • Files are type *FILE: - Data on the system resides inside of a file - Files are processed by programs





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — On this page, you see some of the object types that can be found on your system. Remember that on the Power i, scatter loading of all objects is in effect, therefore these objects would be scatter loaded across multiple disk drives. This is a concept picture to show you some of the different types of objects that can be found on the system. Additional information — Transition statement —




12-7

Instructor Guide

Object: A definition IBM i

Library *LIB

File *FILE User profile *USRPRF

Program *PGM Output queue *OUTQ

Message queue *MSGQ Command *CMD Job description *JOBD

Job queue *JOBQ Subsystem description *SBSD


Figure 12-3. Object: A definition

AS248.1

Notes: An object is anything that exists in storage and on which operations can be performed. On the Power i, an object is a named storage space consisting of a set of characteristics that describes itself and, in some cases, data. Some examples of objects are listed on the visual. Characteristics of an object are that it has a name and occupies space in storage on the system. Each object type has a corresponding predefined value. The values for the object types, as well as the object types themselves, are shown on the visual; for example, the object type for file is *FILE, and for program it is *PGM.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Files, programs, user profiles, and queues are just a few of the many types of objects. Students are already familiar with some objects on the system: file, program, menu, message queue, and command. As we continue with the course, they will be introduced to other objects, such as library, output queue, job queue, user profile, and subsystem description. Additional information — Transition statement —




12-9

Instructor Guide

IBM: Supplied objects start with Q IBM i

QGPL

QSYS

QBATCH

QSYSOPR

QHLPSYS

QPRINT


Figure 12-4. IBM: Supplied objects start with Q

AS248.1

Notes: Some objects are provided by IBM as part of the operating system known as IBM i at V7R1. In previous version the OS was known as i5/OS and OS/400. Other objects are provided by IBM as part of the IBM licensed program products (LPPs). Still other objects are created by system users. For easy identification, most of the IBM-supplied objects begin with the letter Q. It is suggested, but not required, that user-created objects begin with a letter other than Q.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Most objects provided by IBM as part of i or the IBM LPPs begin with the letter Q. It is recommended, but not mandatory, that user objects begin with a letter other than Q. Additional information — Transition statement —




12-11

Instructor Guide

Working with an object IBM i

Simple name:

CALL EX1

versus

Qualified name:

CALL AS24xx/EX1 Library Object name name


Figure 12-5. Working with an object

AS248.1

Notes: Each object has a name. The name is usually made of up two parts: library name and object name. The object type sometimes makes up the third part of the name. When you are working with an object name you can either specify the object name (called a simple name) or a library name and object name (called a qualified name). Below is a description of the IBM-supplied objects shown on the visual. Note that the same object can have multiple identifiers. • QGPL (*LIB)

General purpose library

• QSYS (*LIB)

System library

• QBATCH - (*CLS)

Batch subsystem class

- (*JOBQ)

Batch subsystem queue

- (*JOBD)

Batch subsystem job description





Uempty

• QSYSOPR - (*USRPRF) System operator user profile - (*MSGQ)

System operator message queue

• QPRINT - (*OUTQ)

Default printer output queue

- (*FILE)

Default spool output print file for OUTQ (*JOB)

• QHLPSYS (*LIB)

System help library

The combination of name, type, and library must be unique.




12-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — An object can be referred to by its own name, such as EX1, a simple name, or an object can be referred to by both its name and the name of the library with which it is associated, a qualified name. When a qualified name is used, the library name is specified before the object name and the two parts are separated by a forward slash (/), such as MYLIB/MYFILE. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

12.2. Library and library list concepts Instructor topic introduction In this topic, the students learn what a library and a library list are and how the system uses a library list to find objects. The concept of a library list has little relevance to work being done on a workstation that uses System i Navigator as its interface; however, it is relevant to all the batch jobs and to workstations attached to the system through 5250 emulation.




12-15

Instructor Guide

What is a library? IBM i

MYLIB Obj COURSE CUSTMNU CUSTPRT PROG3 PRTCHECKS SETUP

Type *MSGF *MENU *CMD *PGM *FILE *PGM

PRTCHECKS CUSTPRT PROG3

SETUP

COURSE CUSTMNU


Figure 12-6. What is a library?

AS248.1

Notes: • A library is a system object that serves as a directory to other objects. • A library groups related objects and allows the user to find objects by name. • To identify a specific object to the system, a user needs to provide the object name, the object type, and the name of the library containing the object. You can create, delete, save, or restore a library.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A library is a directory to other objects. Each library contains, among other things, the name, type, and location of every object associated with it. As shown on the visual, the MYLIB library contains the object name, type, and location of six objects. Each object is stored in a different location on disk. An object can be associated with only one library. Thus, while it is possible to have two different objects with the same name and of the same type, they must be associated with different libraries. Also, two objects with the same name can be associated with the same library as long as they are of different types. Please refer to the information center (CL command finder) to find details on the CL commands that can be used to work with the libraries listed in the student notes. Additional information — Transition statement —




12-17

Instructor Guide

Purpose of libraries IBM i

Libraries are used to organize objects. For security reasons For backup reasons

APPLICATION

By application By owner

BACKUP

By object type: Program versus files By use: Production versus test

OWNER

SECURITY


Figure 12-7. Purpose of libraries

AS248.1

Notes: Libraries are used by IBM and Power implementers to organize objects. The idea is to group objects for easy access by those who should access them or by the manner in which they are accessed. Libraries can be set up based on: • Security You can ensure security by specifying which users have authority to use the library and what they are allowed to do with it. You can also simplify security by having an automatic authorization list and a public authority assignment for newly created objects based on the CRTAUT parameter value of the library. Auditing attributes for newly created objects can be set based on the create object audit (CRTOBJAUD) parameter value. • User You can group certain objects for individual users. For example, you might group all files used by a particular user in a particular library. This makes it easy for the users to 12-18 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

work with the files. When they work with the files, they have to add only one library to the library list. • Application You can group all objects used for an individual application. For example, you might associate all your order entry files and programs with an order entry library called OELIB. You have to add only one library to the library list to ensure that all your order entry files and programs are in the list. This is advantageous if you do not want to specify a library name every time you use an order entry file or program. • Save/restore You can simplify save and restore operations by associating objects that are saved and restored at the same time with the same library. You can then use the save library (SAVLIB) command instead of saving objects individually using the save object (SAVOBJ) command. This saves you a lot of time. • Object type You can group objects by type. For example, you might associate all programs with one library and all files with another. • Use You can group objects by how they are used. For example, you can associate all objects used for production with one library and those used for testing with another.




12-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — To get the students thinking and talking about libraries, ask them if they can think of other ways to set up libraries. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

IBM: Supplied libraries IBM i

Library

Description

QSYS

System library

QSYS2

System library for CPIs

QUSRSYS

System library for users

QHLPSYS

Online documentation for some system functions

QGPL

User's general purpose library

QTEMP

User's temporary library

QSPL

Spooling library

QDOC

Documents and folders filed by office users


Figure 12-8. IBM: Supplied libraries

AS248.1

Notes: There are a number of IBM-supplied libraries which are shipped either with IBM i or the IBM LPPs. This visual shows just a few of the more commonly used of these libraries. (Notice they all begin with Q.) You should not delete these libraries or the objects in them. QSYS is the library file system. This file system supports the library structure of your server. This file system provides access to database files and all of the other Power i server object types that the library support manages in the system and to basic user auxiliary storage pools (ASPs). QSYS2 library is a supplemental library for objects which do not begin with the letter Q. For example, objects for call program interfaces (CPIs) are included in QSYS2.




12-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — These are only a few of the many libraries supplied by IBM. Some are included as part of IBM i; others are present only if certain IBM LPPs are installed. Neither the IBM-supplied libraries nor the objects in these libraries should be deleted. If they are, IBM i and the IBM LPPs might not work as intended. Additional information — Transition statement — You now know what an object and a library are. Now let us look at how you can use a list of library names to locate an object.





Uempty

Native library structure IBM i

System library

QSYS File

System objects

Program

Job Queues Data Areas

User libraries

LIBA

User objects

LIBB

Data Areas

LIBC

Program

COMMAND

QTEMP QTEMP QTEMP

File

File

File

Job Queues

command

Program


command


Program

command

Compare

Hierarchical structure


Figure 12-9. Native library structure

AS248.1

Notes: This visual is used as a graphical representation of the hierarchical differences between IBM i versus windows. The top half of this visual shows how the operating system, IBM i or i5/OS or OS/400, is stored in the library named QSYS. From a windows perspective this is the root. All user and IBM LPP (licensed program product) libraries are stored as a first level off of QSYS. In this environment you do not create a library inside another library. The bottom half of this visual shows a graphical representation of how directories are stored in windows. In this environment a user can create a directory inside of another directory, etc. In this environment you can go 256 levels deep, completely opposite of what is supported by the System i operating system.




12-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — On this page, you see some of the object types that can be located on your system. Remember that on the Power i, scatter loading of all objects is in effect; therefore these objects would be scatter loaded across multiple disk drives. This is a concept picture to show you some of the different types of objects that can be found on the system. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Library list IBM i

DSPLIB

System libraries (15 maximum)

QSYS QSYS2 QHLPSYS QUSRSYS

Product libraries

QRPG QCBL

Current library

PAYLIB

User libraries

QGPL QTEMP PAYTSTLIB

*LIBL

*CURLIB *USRLIBL

(250 maximum)

One associated with every job © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 12-10. Library list

AS248.1

Notes: A library list is a list that indicates which libraries are to be searched for an object and the order in which they are to be searched. Sometimes a library list is referred to as a library search list. Every job on the system has its own library list. While the library lists for multiple jobs can be identical, each is used only by the job to which it belongs. Library lists are not objects and cannot be created or deleted. A library list for a job is automatically set up when the job begins and is deleted when the job ends. There are a number of ways to reference an object in a library list. You can use the simple name of the object, in which case the system searches each library named in the library list for a job until it finds the object. You can instruct the system to look only in a specific library, or you can use all or just a portion of the library list for the job to search for the object. The first part of a library list is the system part. This part can contain the names of up to 15 libraries. When the Power is shipped, the system value QSYSLIBL contains the names of the libraries that are to become the system part of the library list. The libraries named in this part of the library list for each job are normally specified by the programmer and are used © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



12-25

Instructor Guide

by all jobs on the system. Thus, while each job has its own separate library list, this part of each library list is usually identical for almost all jobs on a system. The second part of each library list, called product libraries, contains the names of up to two libraries associated with the use of particular program products. These library names are automatically added to and removed from a job's library list as the products are used within a job. A product library can be a duplicate of the current library or of a library in the user part of the library list. The next part of a library list is the current library of the job. This library should be the one containing the objects most frequently used by the job. This library name usually comes either from the user profile associated with the job or from a command run within the job. The last part of the library list for a job is called the user portion of the list. Up to 250 library names (this is the default from V5R2 on) can be contained in this part of the library list. The library names found in this part of a library list can come from: • The system value (QUSRLIBL) • The job description associated with the job (we will discuss this later) • Commands run from a command line • Commands run in a user's initial program





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Explain this visual in detail. The concept of a library search list is a difficult one to grasp and is more relevant to emulation jobs than it is to using GUI. While it might not be necessary to explain all of the following information to the students, they must understand that: • Each job has its own library list. • A library list for a job is used only when an object is referred to by its simple name. • A library list is not an object. It is automatically set up when a job begins and is deleted when the job ends. • When a library list is used, the libraries are searched in the order in which their names are specified in the list. It might be helpful to point out that i keeps a scratch pad of information about each job on the system and that the library list exists in this scratch pad along with other information that i needs to run and manage the job. The system needs to know which library (or libraries) it must search to locate an object. It would be very cumbersome if it were necessary to specify a library name on every reference to an object. To make referencing objects easier, each job has its own list of libraries that can be searched to find an object. When a simple name is used to reference an object, the library list associated with the job is used to search for the object. Additional information — Transition statement —




12-27

Instructor Guide

Finding an object IBM i

Simple name: Qualified name:

QSYS

INQLIB

QCWW

QCXXX

PAY77

AP60

QCZZZ

QCYYY

PAY1010

AP55

PAYTSTLIB

CALL PAY02 CALL PAYTSTLIB/PAY02

Job's library list QSYS QSYS2 QHLPSYS QUSRSYS

System libraries

QRPG QCBL

Product libraries

PAYLIB

Current library

PAYLIB

AP55

PAY02

PAY01

PAY04

PAY01

AP05

PAY02

PAY05

QGPL QTEMP PAYTSTLIB INQLIB

User libraries


Figure 12-11. Finding an object

AS248.1

Notes: If you include a library name when referencing an object, only that one library is searched for the object. The library named in the qualified reference to the object does not have to be in the library list for the job; however, if you do not specify a library name when searching for an object, the library list is used to search for the object. Look at the library list on the visual. Note which objects are associated with each library. Now answer the following questions about this library list. • Which libraries are searched to find the program PAY02? First QSYS and then QSYS2, QHLPSYS, QUSRSYS, QRPG, and QCBL. Finally, the program is found in PAYLIB. • If you use the simple name PAY02, will the object named PAY02 in PAYTSTLIB be found? No.





Uempty

There are a number of CL commands you can use to work with library lists. These commands do not affect libraries or the objects to which they point. They affect only the library list for the job. The following commands can be used from within a job to modify the library list for that job: • CHGLIBL LIBL(name name) CURLIB(name) completely replaces the library names currently specified in the user part of the library list for the job with the library names specified in the command. This command can also be used to change the current library of the job to one specified in the command. • EDTLIBL displays the user part of the current library list for the job and allows one or more library names to be added to or removed from the list. It also allows the sequence of library names to be changed. • ADDLIBLE LIB(name) POSITION(*FIRST/*LAST) adds the specified library name to the beginning or the end of the user part of the library list for the job. • ADDLIBLE LIB(name) POSITION(*AFTER/*BEFORE name) adds the specified library name immediately after or before a library name already on the user part of the library list for the job. • ADDLIBLE LIB(name) POSITION(*REPLACE name) places the specified library name on the user part of the library list for the job in place of a library name already on the list. The replaced library name is removed from the list. • RMVLIBLE LIB(name) removes the specified library name from the user part of the library list for the job. • CHGCURLIB CURLIB(name) changes the current library of the job to the one specified in the command. • DSPLIBL displays the names of all libraries in all parts of the library list for the job and identifies which part of the library list each library is in. Note The above commands simply allow the user to see and change a library list for a job. They have no effect on the libraries themselves.




12-29

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — In the example on this visual, both PAYTSTLIB and PAYLIB point to programs named PAY02. It is important for the student to remember that these programs are two separate and distinct objects. Qualified references using each of the three user library names would result in the following: • CALL PAYLIB/PAY02 : The PAY02 program associated with PAYLIB is run. • CALL PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 : PAY02 program associated with PAYTSTLIB is run. • CALL INQLIB/PAY02 : An error occurs because there is no PAY02 program associated with INQLIB. If the library list for the job is set up as indicated on the visual, an unqualified reference to PAY02 (CALL PAY02) would be handled by the system as follows: a. QSYS library would be searched, but no program named PAY02 would be found. b. QSYS2 library would be searched, but no program named PAY02 would be found. c. QHLPSYS library would be searched, but no program named PAY02 would be found. d. QUSRSYS, QRPG, and QCBL libraries would be searched in turn, but no program named PAY02 would be found. e. PAYLIB library would be searched, and when the program named PAY02 was found, it would be run. What if the user wanted to run the program PAY02 associated with library PAYTSTLIB? Could the system ever find it? The answer is: only if the program name were qualified or if the order of the library names in the library list for the job was changed so that PAYTSTLIB preceded PAYLIB. Additional information — Transition statement — Remind the students that each library list is associated with a single job and that any changes they make to a job's library list are lost when the job ends. If they need a library list set up in the same way in a subsequent job, they must make the same changes to the library list for that job.





Uempty

Quiz IBM i

Which library does each of the following commands use?

DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) DSPOBJD PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) DSPOBJD *CURLIB/PAY02 TYPE (*PGM) DSPOBJD *ALLUSR/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) DSPOBJD *ALL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)


Figure 12-12. Quiz

AS248.1

Notes: Answer these questions.




12-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Answers IBM i

DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYTSTLIB

Qualified name PAYLIB

DSPOBJD PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)

Library list for a job DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) PAYLIB

User portion of library list, including current library DSPOBJD *CURLIB/PAY02 TYPE (*PGM)

PAYLIB

Current library DSPOBJD *ALLUSR/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)

PAYLIB

Searches all non-system libraries DSPOBJD *ALL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM)

PAYLIB

Search all libraries © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 12-13. Answers

AS248.1

Notes: Note If you specify an object name and *ALL or *ALLUSR for the library name, the system searches for multiple objects, and the search returns objects of the indicated name and type to which you have authorized access.




12-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Review the solutions with the students. Have them explain why the system searches the libraries in the order it does. • DSPOBJD PAYTSTLIB/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) - Command specifies which library is to be used. • DSPOBJD PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) - This command is a simple name, the library list will be used. • DSPOBJD *USRLIBL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) - this command specified that the user portion of the library list is to be searched • DSPOBJD *CURLIB/PAY02 TYPE (*PGM) - this command specified to search only in the current library • DSPOBJD *ALLUSR/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) - This command specifies all user libraries are to be searched. When you specify all libraries then they will be searched in alphabetical order. • DSPOBJD *ALL/PAY02 TYPE(*PGM) - This command specifies all libraries are to be searched. When you specify all libraries then they will be searched in alphabetical order. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

12.3. Integrated file system concepts Instructor topic introduction In this topic, the students learn what the IFS is and how it is structured, what a file Power is, the difference between database and stream files, and how to locate objects in the IFS.




12-35

Instructor Guide

What is the integrated file system? IBM i

Integrated file system Directories Folders

Libraries Database files

Stream files

Documents

Objects


Figure 12-14. What is the integrated file system?

AS248.1

Notes: The key features of the integrated file system (IFS) are as follows: • Support for storing information in stream files that can contain long, continuous strings of data, for example, the text of a document or the pixels in a picture. The stream file support is designed for efficient use in client/server applications. • A hierarchical directory structure that allows objects to be organized in a branch-like structure. Specifying the path through the directories to an object accesses the object. • A common interface that allows users and applications to access not only the stream files but also database files, documents, and other objects that are stored in your server. • A common view of stream files that are stored locally on your server, an Integrated xSeries Server for Power i, or a remote Windows NT server. Stream files can also be stored remotely on a local area network (LAN) server, a Novell NetWare server, another remote Power i server, or a network file system server.





Uempty





12-37

Instructor Guide

File system concept IBM i

UNIX, Power i, or PC clients

PC clients

Power i Users

Applications

IFS menus/commands

APIs

NFS server

IBM i file server

OS/2 Warp server

Novell NetWare server

IFS interface

Root file system

QOpenSys file system

QSYS.LIB file system

QDLS file system

QOPT file system

QFileSvr.400 file system

UDFS file system

NFS file system

QNetWare file system

Integrated xServer Series for Power i

QNTC file system


Figure 12-15. File system concept

AS248.1

Notes: A file system provides you with the support to access specific segments of storage that are organized as logical units. On your server, these logical units are files, directories, libraries, and objects. Each file system has a set of logical structures and rules for interacting with information in storage. These structures and rules can be different from one file system to another. In fact, from the perspective of structures and rules, IBM i support for accessing database files and various other object types through libraries can be thought of as a file system. Similarly, IBM i support for accessing documents (which are really stream files) through the folder structure can be thought of as a separate file system.





Uempty





12-39

Instructor Guide

Overview of the IFS IBM i

Support for storing unstructured data (stream files): Files that contain long, continuous strings of data Designed for efficient use in client/server applications

Hierarchical directory structure: Allows tree-like organization of objects Allows access of objects through directory path

Common Access Interface for all objects stored on Power i: Stream files Library objects


Figure 12-16. Overview of the IFS

AS248.1

Notes: Support for storing unstructured data (stream files). • Files that contain long, continuous strings of data: - Text documents - Picture elements - PC file systems - Other platform file systems: • Linux • AIX • Windows • Designed for efficient use in client/server applications Hierarchical directory structure. • Allows tree-like organization of objects • Allows access of objects through directory path





Uempty

Common Access Interface. • All objects stored on Power i - Stream files • Unstructured data - Library objects: • Programs • Database table • Data areas • Message queues • And so forth




12-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

File systems supported by the IFS IBM i

root (/) QOpenSys UDFS QSYS.LIB Independent ASP QSYS.LIB QDLS QOPT QNetWare QNTC QFileSvr.400 NFS


Figure 12-17. File systems supported by the IFS

AS248.1

Notes: • root (/): The root (/) file system, which takes full advantage of the stream file support and hierarchical directory structure of the IFS. The root file system has the characteristics of the disk operating system (DOS) and OS/2 file systems. • QOpenSys: The open systems file system, such as POSIX and XPG. Like the root file system, this file system takes advantage of the stream file and directory support that is provided by the IFS. In addition, it supports case-sensitive object names. • UDFS: The user-defined file system, which resides on the auxiliary storage pool (ASP) or independent ASP of your choice. You create and manage this file system. • QSYS.LIB: The library file system, which supports the library structure on your server. This file system provides access to database files and all of the other Power i server object types that the library support manages in the system as well as basic user ASPs. • Independent ASP QSYS.LIB: The independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system, which supports your server library structure in any independent ASPs you create and define.




12-43

Instructor Guide

This file system provides access to database files and all of the other Power i server object types that the library support manages. • QDLS: The document library services file system. This file system provides access to documents and folders. • QOPT: The optical file system, which provides access to stream data that is stored on optical media. • QNetWare: The QNetWare file system, which provides access to the following: - Local or remote data - Objects that are stored on a server that runs Novell NetWare 4.10 or 4.11 - Stand-alone PC servers running Novell NetWare 3.12, 4.10 4.11 or 5.0 You can dynamically mount NetWare file systems on top of existing local file systems. • QNTC: The Windows NT Server file system, which provides access to data and objects that are stored on a server running Windows NT 4.0 or higher. It allows Power i server applications to use the same data as Windows NT clients. This includes access to the data on a Windows NT Server that is running on an integrated PC server. See OS/400-AS/400 Integration with Windows NT Server, SC41-5439-01 (SC41-5439) for details. • QFileSvr.400: This file system provides access to other file systems that reside on remote Power i servers. • NFS: Network File System (NFS), which provides you with access to data and objects that are stored on a remote NFS server. An NFS server can export an NFS that NFS clients then mount dynamically.





Uempty





12-45

Instructor Guide

IFS accessed with Windows browser IBM i

Tree-like Hierarchical organization User view from desktop Single drive represents entire Power i PC style directories

Folders and documents

POSIX compliant name space

Native i objects


Figure 12-18. IFS accessed with Windows browser

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





12-47

Instructor Guide

Stream files versus database files IBM i

Database files field-a

field-b

field-c

field-d

record 1

field-a

field-b

field-c

field-d

record 2

field-a

field-b

field-c

field-d

record n

Stream files ......................................................................... ......................................................................... .........................................................................


Figure 12-19. Stream files versus database files

AS248.1

Notes: Database files are those that are traditionally created on the Power i. They have predefined subdivisions that consist of records and fields. They have a specific layout that consists of records and, within a record, a fixed number of fields. The IFS provides support for storing and operating on information in the form of stream files. A stream file is a file that contains a continuous stream of data. Documents that are stored in Power i folders are stream files. Other examples of stream files are PC files and the files in UNIX systems. An IFS stream file is a system object that has an object type of *STMF.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — To better understand stream files, contrast them with Power i database files. The different structure of stream files and record-based files affects how an application uses them. It also affects where each type of file is best used in an application. • A record-based file, for example, is well suited to storing customer details, such as name, address, and account balance. These predefined fields can be individually accessed and manipulated through the use of the extensive programming facilities of the system. • A stream file is better suited to storing information, such as a customer's picture, which is composed of a continuous string of bits that represent variations in color. Additional information — Transition statement —




12-49

Instructor Guide

IFS structure IBM i

root

\QSYS.LIB

\QDLS

\QNTC

\DIR1

DOMAIN1

LIB1

DIR1

LIB1

FLR1

SERVERS

DIR1

FLR1 ALIAS1 ALIAS2 IPCS1 DIR3

DIR4

SERVER1

NET1

NET2

DIR5

DIR5


Figure 12-20. IFS structure

AS248.1

Notes: A directory is a special object that uses names you specify to locate other objects within it. Each directory contains a list of objects, including other directories, that are attached to it. The IFS provides a hierarchical directory structure that allows you to access all objects in your server. You might think of this directory structure as an upside-down tree with roots at the top and branches below. The branches represent directories in the directory hierarchy and have subordinate branches called subdirectories. Attached to the various directory and subdirectory branches are objects, such as files. Locating an object requires specifying a path through the directories to the subdirectory to which the object is attached. Objects that are attached to a particular directory are sometimes described as being in that directory. A particular directory branch, along with all of its subordinate branches (subdirectories) and all of the objects that are attached to those branches, is referred to as a subtree. Each file Power is a major subtree in the IFS directory structure. In the library file system (QSYS.LIB subtree), a library is handled in the same way as a subdirectory. Objects in a library are handled like objects in a subdirectory. Because database files contain objects (database file members), they are handled like subdirectories rather than objects. In the document 12-50 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

library services file system (QDLS subtree), folders are handled like subdirectories, and documents in folders are handled like objects in a subdirectory. Because of differences between file systems, the operations you can perform in one subtree of the directory hierarchy might not work in another subtree. The IFS directory support is similar to the directory support that is provided by the DOS file system. In addition, it provides features typical of UNIX systems, such as the ability to store a file only once but to access it through multiple paths using links.




12-51

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — We must distinguish between current directory and home directory. • The current directory is similar in concept to current library. • The home directory is the current directory provided to you when you sign on. When you request that an operation be performed on an object, such as a file, the system looks for the object in the current directory unless you specify a different directory path. The current directory is similar to a current library. It is also called the current working directory or just working directory. The home directory is used as the current directory when you sign on to the system. The name of the home directory is specified in the user profile. When a job is started for a user, the system looks in the user profile for the name of the user's home directory. If a directory by that name does not exist on the system, the home directory is changed to the root (/) directory. Typically, the system administrator who creates the user profile for a user would also create the user's home directory. There is a subdirectory called home under the root directory that contains the home directory for each user. The system default is to use the user profile name to identify the home directory for that user. Users can specify a directory other than the home directory as their current directory at any time after they sign on. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Locating objects in the IFS IBM i

Root

/

Absolute path name /Dir1/Dir2/File

Dir 1

Dir 2

Relative path name Dir2/File

File


Figure 12-21. Locating objects in the IFS

AS248.1

Notes: A path name (also called a pathname on some systems) tells the system how to locate an object. The path name is expressed as a sequence of directory names followed by the name of the object. Individual directories and the object name are separated by a forward slash (/), for example: directory1/directory2/file For the convenience of PC users, the back slash (\) can be used instead of the forward slash in IFS commands. There are two ways of indicating a path name. • An absolute path name begins at the highest level, or root directory, which is identified by the forward slash (/). /Dept2/Photo/Smith • If the path name does not begin with the forward slash (/), the system assumes that the path begins at the user's current directory. This type of path name is called a relative




12-53

Instructor Guide

path name. For example, if a user's current directory is Dept2 and it has a subdirectory named Photo containing the file Smith, the relative path name is: Photo/Smith Notice that the path name does not include the name of the current directory. The first item in the name is the directory or object at the next level below the current directory.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss directory structure concepts so that students understand how to locate a specific object. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U12-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U12-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248U12-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




12-55

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: An object is anything that exists in storage and on which operations can be performed. 2. A _____ is a special object that has a named set of objects associated with it and is used to group objects. (Select all that apply.) a. b. c. d.

Directory Link Library File system

3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in the IFS? a. b. c. d.

Root QDLS QSYS.LIB QOPT © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: An object is anything that exists in storage and on which operations can be performed. The answer is True.

2. A _____ is a special object that has a named set of objects associated with it and is used to group objects. (Select all that apply.) a. Directory b. Link c. Library d. File system The answers are Directory and Library.

3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in the IFS? a. Root b. QDLS c. QSYS.LIB d. QOPT The answer is Root. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





12-57

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: A library list is used by the system when you use simple naming to work with an object. 5. The IBM i operating system is stored in the _______ system library. a. b. c. d.

QUSRSYS QGPL QSPL QSYS

6. True or False: All libraries on the system are in the system library QGPL.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. True or False: A library list is used by the system when you use simple naming to work with an object. The answer is True.

5. The IBM i operating system is stored in the _______ system library. a. b. c. d.


The answer is QSYS.

6. True or False: All libraries on the system are in the system library QGPL. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





12-59

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain what an object is on the Power i Explain the difference between an object's simple and fully qualified name Explain what a library is Explain what a library list is and what purpose it serves Explain how to display and change your library list Explain what the integrated file system (IFS) is List the different types of data supported by the IFS



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Use this visual to summarize this unit. Ensure the students understand the following: • An object is anything that exists in and occupies space in storage and on which operations can be performed. • A library is a directory to other objects. • A library list (or a library search list) is a list of libraries that is used to search for an object. • The IFS is a part of i that supports stream input/output and storage management. Explain that either a simple name (object name) or qualified name (library name/object name) can be used to find an object. When a simple name is referred to, the system uses the library list for a job to find the object. Additional information — Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Transition statement —




12-61

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 13. Object management using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:25

What this unit is about This unit describes how to work with objects, libraries, the library list and the IFS when using a 5250 emulation session. Commands and menus relating to these will also be discussed.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • • • • • • •

Use the correct commands to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use the correct commands to create a duplicate object Use the correct command to copy a file Use the correct command to create a library Use the correct command to display the contents of a library Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the library list • Use the correct command to display the IFS



Unit 13. Object management using 5250 emulation


13-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use the correct commands to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use the correct commands to create a duplicate object Use the correct command to copy a file Use the correct command to create a library Use the correct command to display the contents of a library Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the library list Use the correct command to display the IFS



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





13-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

13.1. Objects For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual you should perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the remainder of topic 1 and topic 2 covering the details covered in the student and instructor notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the remainder of topic 1 and topic 2 covering the details covered in the student and instructor notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.




13-5

Instructor Guide

The DATA and FILE menus IBM i


Figure 13-2. The DATA and FILE menus

AS248.1

Notes: You can use the DATA menu to work with the different types of objects on the system. You can navigate to this menu by using the GO DATA command or, from the main Help menu, select option 4. Use the FILE menu to work with files on the system. You can navigate to this menu by selecting option 1 from the DATA menu or use the GO FILE command.





Uempty





13-7

Instructor Guide

Work with Objects command IBM i


Figure 13-3. Work with Objects command

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Objects (WRKOBJ) command shows a list of objects from one or more libraries. To locate an object on the system, you must specify the following: • Name of the object • Library where this object is stored • Type of object that you are searching for Place your cursor on the Object type parameter and press F4 to see a full list of all the different types of objects that can exist on your system.





Uempty





13-9

Instructor Guide

Work with Objects display IBM i


Figure 13-4. Work with Objects display

AS248.1

Notes: This is the display shown when you specify the command on the previous page and specify *ALL for both the name and type parameter. In this case, we specified the AS2401 library. This display will show all of the objects located in a specific library. Notice the columns and the different types of information it shows you on this first display. You can also use the function keys to see additional information. Also notice the actions (using the option column) that you can perform for these objects, assuming you have the correct authority to perform these actions.





Uempty





13-11

Instructor Guide

Display Object Description command IBM i


Figure 13-5. Display Object Description command

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Object Description (DSPOBJD) command shows the names and attributes of specified objects in the specified library or libraries. • Place your cursor on the Library parameter and use the F4 prompt key to see a list of the values you can specify for this parameter. • Use the Detail parameter to specify what level of detailed information you wish to display for your object. Use the Help key on this parameter, and play with it to see exactly what the system will show you depending on which value you specify. You can display object description information for any object on which you have authority other than *EXCLUDE authority. Libraries for which you do not have execute (*EXECUTE) authority cannot be shown, even if they are specified in the command. If only one object is to be shown, you can specify it by entering the object name, object type, the name of the library where it is located, and the ASP device where the library is located.





Uempty





13-13

Instructor Guide

Display Object Description details (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 13-6. Display Object Description details (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Object Description - Full display presents the names and attributes of selected objects in a requested library or libraries. Pressing Enter will return you to the previous display or, when more than one library is displayed, take you forward through the libraries, for example, library one of four. If you see More... on the lower right side of your display, there is more information to view. Press Page Down (or Roll Up) to move toward the end of the information. Press Page Up (or Roll Down) to move toward the beginning of the information.





Uempty





13-15

Instructor Guide

Display Object Description details (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 13-7. Display Object Description details (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: If you see Bottom instead of More..., you are at the end of the list.





Uempty





13-17

Instructor Guide

Create Duplicate Object command IBM i


Figure 13-8. Create Duplicate Object command

AS248.1

Notes: The Create Duplicate Object (CRTDUPOBJ) command copies a single object or a group of objects: • The new object must be renamed if it is created in the library that contains the original object. • The newly created object can retain the name of the original object if it is created in a library different than the one that contains the original object. • You can copy a group of related objects by specifying a generic object name or by specifying *ALL or more than one object type. When copying a group of related objects, you must specify a different library in which the new objects are created. • The Duplicate data (DATA) parameter specifies whether the data records in database physical file or save files are copied to the new object. Members of database physical files are copied whether or not the data contained in them is copied.





Uempty





13-19

Instructor Guide

Copy File command IBM i


Figure 13-9. Copy File command

AS248.1

Notes: The Copy File (CPYF) command copies all or part of a file from the database or from an external device to the database or to an external device.





Uempty





13-21

Instructor Guide





Uempty

13.2. Libraries and library lists Instructor topic introduction In this topic, the students learn what a library and a library list are and how the system uses a library list to find objects. The concept of a library list has little relevance to work being done on a workstation that uses System i Navigator as its interface; however, it is relevant to all the batch jobs and to workstations attached to the system using 5250 emulation.




13-23

Instructor Guide

Library and Library Commands menu IBM i


Figure 13-10. Library and Library Commands menu

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Go Library command to see the menu displayed in the upper left on the visual on this page. This menu will display the actions you can perform for a library. The screen on the lower right side of this visual is the Library Commands menu. To display the Library Commands menu you can either: • Use the GO CMDLIB command, or • Select option 70 - Related commands from the Libraries menu





Uempty





13-25

Instructor Guide

Work with Libraries command IBM i


Figure 13-11. Work with Libraries command

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Libraries (WRKLIB) display shows a list of libraries that you have authority to use. You can use this list to do some common tasks related to libraries. The list of libraries presented is based on the value you enter for the Library (LIB) parameter. For example, if you type AS24*, a list of all the libraries starting with AS24 is displayed.





Uempty





13-27

Instructor Guide

Create Library command IBM i


Figure 13-12. Create Library command

AS248.1

Notes: The Create Library (CRTLIB) command adds a new library to the system. Before any objects are placed into a library, the library must be created. When the library is created, it appears as though it exists in the QSYS (system) library within the IFS.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an application share or live demo you do not need to create a library. One for the class already exists on the system. Additional information — Transition statement —




13-29

Instructor Guide

Display Library List command IBM i


Figure 13-13. Display Library List command

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Library List (DSPLIBL) command displays the library list for the current thread, including the system portion, and, if they exist, the product libraries, the current library entry, and the user portion.





Uempty





13-31

Instructor Guide

Library List: Add and Remove IBM i


Figure 13-14. Library List: Add and Remove

AS248.1

Notes: The Add Library List Entry (ADDLIBLE) command adds a library name to the user portion of the library list for the current thread. The user portion is the last portion of the library list. It follows the system portion and, if they exist, any product libraries and the current library entry. You can specify where the library should be placed in the user portion of the library list. The Remove Library List Entry (RMVLIBLE) command removes a library from the user portion of the library list for the current thread. The user portion is the last portion of the library list. It follows the system portion and, if they exist, any product libraries and the current library entry.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — You can discontinue the application share or live demo after this visual. Additional information — Transition statement —




13-33

Instructor Guide





Uempty

13.3. IFS concepts Instructor topic introduction In this topic, the students learn what the IFS is and how it is structured, what a file Power is, the difference between database and stream files, and how to locate objects in the IFS.




13-35

Instructor Guide

IFS access using 5250 emulation IBM i


Figure 13-15. IFS access using 5250 emulation

AS248.1

Notes: From the Main menu, select option 4 to see the Data menu in the upper left. Select option 5 to see the Integrated file system menu, which is displayed in the middle screen capture. Select Object commands to see the Object commands menu in the lower right. Select option 1 - Work with object links to see the screen on the next page in the guide. • Specify this option to display a list of objects in directories and options to work with them. • To perform operations on the objects, you must have *USE authority to the command used by the operation and appropriate authority to the objects on which the command is being performed.





Uempty





13-37

Instructor Guide

Work with Object Links display IBM i


Figure 13-16. Work with Object Links display

AS248.1

Notes: This display shows a list of names of objects in a directory and provides options for performing operations on those objects. You can type an option number next to one or more object links. When you press Enter, the function associated with the selected number is performed for that link. For most options, you can get assistance in using the option by typing the option number and pressing F4 (Prompt) instead of Enter.





Uempty





13-39

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Object management using 5250 emulation




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





13-41

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: The Create Duplicate Object command can copy a file. 2. Which command is used to show a list of objects based on your search criteria? a. b. c. d.

DSPOBJ LSTOBJ SHWOBJ WRKOBJ

3. The command used to display an objects description is? a. b. c. d.

DSPOBJD LSTOBJD SHWOBJD WRKOBJD © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: The Create Duplicate Object command can copy a file. The answer is True.

2. Which command is used to show a list of objects based on your search criteria? a. DSPOBJ b. LSTOBJ c. SHWOBJ d. WRKOBJ The answer is WRKOBJ.

3. The command used to display an objects description is ______? a. DSPOBJD b. LSTOBJD c. SHWOBJD d. WRKOBJD The answer is DSPOBJD. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





13-43

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: You cannot see a list of the directories on your system when using a 5250 emulation session. 5. The __________ command is used to copy a single object or a group of objects. a. b. c. d.

DSPOBJD RSTOBJ CRTDUPOBJ WRKOBJ

6. True or False: The WRKLIB command will show you a list of all the libraries that you have authority to use.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. True or False: You cannot see a list of the directories on your system when using a 5250 emulation session. The answer is False.

5. The __________ command is used to copy a single object or a group of objects. a. b. c. d.


The answer is CRTDUPOBJ.

6. True or False: The WRKLIB command will show you a list of all the libraries that you have authority to use. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





13-45

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use the correct commands to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use the correct commands to create a duplicate object Use the correct command to copy a file Use the correct command to create a library Use the correct command to display the contents of a library Use the commands to add or remove a library to or from the library list Use the correct command to display the IFS



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Use this visual to summarize this unit. Ensure the students understand the following: • An object is anything that exists in and occupies space in storage and on which operations can be performed. • A library is a directory to other objects. • A library list (or a library search list) is a list of libraries that is used to search for an object. • The IFS is a part of i that supports stream input/output and storage management. Explain that either a simple name (object name) or qualified name (library name/object name) can be used to find an object. When a simple name is referred to, the system uses the library list for a job to find the object. Additional information — Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Transition statement —




13-47

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 14. Object management using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:25

What this unit is about This unit describes how to work with and administer objects, libraries, and user profiles, run commands, and duplicate objects when working with System i Navigator.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • • • • • •

Use System i Navigator to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use System i Navigator to create a duplicate object Use System i Navigator to copy a file Use System i Navigator to create a library Use System i Navigator to display the contents of a library



Unit 14. Object management using System i Navigator


14-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use System i Navigator to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use System i Navigator to create a duplicate object Use System i Navigator to copy a file Use System i Navigator to create a library Use System i Navigator to display the contents of a library



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — You have learned about things that the Power i makes available to help you do your job as a system operator, including special keys and displays, help, and messages. In this unit, you will be introduced to terminology and concepts relating to IBM i objects. These objects have been mentioned in previous units, but you must understand them fully before continuing with the course. Details — Additional information — Transition statement — What is an object? An object has a name, occupies storage, and is a member of a library. (Each object has a name and can be created and deleted with CL commands.) Files, programs, user profiles, and queues are just a few of the many types of objects.




14-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

14.1. User profiles




14-5

Instructor Guide

User Profile: Properties IBM i


Figure 14-2. User Profile: Properties

AS248.1

Notes: Assuming your user profile has been granted the correct authority, you can create, change, or delete user profiles using System i Navigator. In this class, your user profile AS24xx has been granted security administrator (*SECADM) authority. This authority allows you to create user profiles or make changes to those profiles that you are authorized to administer. • Expand Users and Groups, and click All Users. This will update the pane in the right with a listing of the user profiles that you have authority to change or delete. Right-click your profile to see the actions you are allowed to perform. Click Properties to see the visual on the next page.





Uempty





14-7

Instructor Guide

User Profile: Jobs > Session startup IBM i


Figure 14-3. User Profile: Jobs > Session startup

AS248.1

Notes: Click Jobs to see the window on the right. There are different parameters available on the different tabs. Click OK then OK again to implement any changes. Security will be covered in a unit later in class. Right now, we just want to show how to work with objects; in this case, user profiles when using System i Navigator.





Uempty





14-9

Instructor Guide





Uempty

14.2. Running commands




14-11

Instructor Guide

Run a command IBM i


Figure 14-4. Run a command

AS248.1

Notes: There are some functions that do not have a graphical equivalent, thus they can not be done from System i Navigator. For those functions that are not supported, it is possible to run a command from System i Navigator. This is equivalent to submitting a command to run in batch mode. Even for those functions that are supported with a GUI equivalent, like changing a user profile, you can submit a command or perform the function. Running a command using System i Navigator requires that Management Central is started and a connection is established to the central server. Right-click your system and select Run Command. You will receive a prompt to start a Management Central connection. You might be prompted to enter your user ID and password. Once that connection is started, you will see the window on the next page.





Uempty





14-13

Instructor Guide

Run a command using prompting IBM i


Figure 14-5. Run a command using prompting

AS248.1

Notes: If you know the format for the command, you can enter the command in the window presented. If you are not sure of the format, or if you require assistance, you can use the Prompt button to view the window on the right. Once on the prompt window, you can press the Help key for additional assistance for any of the parameters. When you are on this window, click the Options tab to review the other functions that can be set for commands that will be submitted through this interface. Click OK to submit the command. Security will be covered in greater deal in an upcoming unit later in this class.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Once again, we are using this interface to show how to run a command when using this interface. Security will be covered later in this class, do not explain any specific parameters for this command. Additional information — Transition statement —




14-15

Instructor Guide

Management Central IBM i


Figure 14-6. Management Central

AS248.1

Notes: Management Central is a powerful suite of systems management functions that make managing multiple systems as easy as managing a single system. When you run a command using System i Navigator, it will be run using the Management Central server. The status for this job will show under the Task Activity task under Commands. The commands that you have run using this interface will be listed. You can right-click a command to perform the actions listed on the pop-up in the visual. If you select Status, it will show the window captured in the lower right part of the visual. To learn more about the capabilities of Management Central: Click Help > Help topics > Navigator > Management Central.





Uempty





14-17

Instructor Guide

System groups: Run Command IBM i


Figure 14-7. System groups: Run Command

AS248.1

Notes: Management Central can be used to manage a network of TCP/IP connected Power i servers. Under Management Central, you can define a logical grouping of your systems. You decide on a name for your grouping, and then you identify which of your systems will be member of which group. An individual system can be a member of multiple groups. As depicted in the visual, you then turn around and define a command to be run; then you choose the system group where this command will run. In this way, you can greatly improve your productivity when managing more than one system.





Uempty





14-19

Instructor Guide





Uempty

14.3. Creating a library




14-21

Instructor Guide

Database: New library IBM i


Figure 14-8. Database: New library

AS248.1

Notes: One way to create a library is by using the Database branch. • Expand Database, and then expand the next branch. Right-click Schemas, and select New > Schema to see the New Schema window. Fill in the parameters as follows: • Name: Specify a unique name for the new schema (library). • Add to displayed list of schemas: Click this option to add the schema to your list of displayed schemas. The default is to display the new schema in your list of schemas. • Create as a standard library: Check this option if you want to create a standard library. • Create in: Specifies where the schema will be created. It can be created in the system disk pool, in disk pools (2-32), or in an independent disk pool group. • Text: Specify a description for the schema.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If the customer will be using SQL to create the database, they will be familiar with creating schemas, which is equivalent to creating a library. This function is equivalent to submitting the create schema SQL statement. Additional information — Transition statement —




14-23

Instructor Guide

File Systems: New library IBM i


Figure 14-9. File Systems: New library

AS248.1

Notes: A second way to create a library is by way of the File Systems branch. To see the windows in the visual: • Expand File Systems > IFS. Right-click QSYS.LIB, and select New Folder. The library name must be a unique name. The last way to create a library is by submitting a Create Library (CRTLIB) command.





Uempty





14-25

Instructor Guide

Display libraries on the system IBM i


Figure 14-10. Display libraries on the system

AS248.1

Notes: To display a list of the libraries on the system: • Expand File systems > IFS; then click QSYS.LIB. By default, System i Navigator will display a list of all of the libraries on the system. To show a more customized list, you can: • Right-click QSYS.LIB, and then click Customize > Include; then specify your choice. - For example, you could specify AS24*.LIB, which would only display those libraries that begin with these characters. - Notice the naming convention used in this interface. Not only do you specify the name (AS24), but you must also specify the type of object (LIB).





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of System i Navigator covering the details outlined in the student notes for the next four visuals. To perform an application share: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID. 1. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 1. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator covering the details outlined in the student notes for the next four visuals. To perform a live demo: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID.




14-27

Instructor Guide

Display contents of your team library IBM i


Figure 14-11. Display contents of your team library

AS248.1

Notes: To display the contents of your library, you can: • Expand your library to see the files in your library. • Click your library to update the right pane and see a list of all the objects in your library.





Uempty





14-29

Instructor Guide





Uempty

14.4. Object properties




14-31

Instructor Guide

Supported actions by object type IBM i


Figure 14-12. Supported actions by object type

AS248.1

Notes: The actions that you can perform on an object are determined by what type of object it is. • In the left window in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you right-click an object type of program. • In the right window in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you right-click an object type file.





Uempty





14-33

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: This is the notebook displayed when you click Properties on the previous visual. You can see the information displayed on the different tabs in this notebook.





Uempty





14-35

Instructor Guide

File Systems: Copy and Paste IBM i


Figure 14-14. File Systems: Copy and Paste

AS248.1

Notes: System i Navigator supports the copy and paste function for the File Systems branch. In the example in the visuals, expand File Systems > IFS > QSYS.LIB; then do the following: Click the AS24 library in the left window to see a list of objects; then right-click and select Copy on the SAMPLEF file. Next, in the window on the right go to the target library (AS2401D), right-click, and select Paste. The system recognizes the type of object being copied and, in this case, processes the copy file command on the system to copy the file from one library to the other. You can also locate other types of objects, for example, a program, and do a copy and paste, in which case the system will process the create duplicate object command.





Uempty





14-37

Instructor Guide

Database: Copy and Paste IBM i


Figure 14-15. Database: Copy and Paste

AS248.1

Notes: System i Navigator also supports the copy and paste function for the Database branch; however, this case you can only copy and paste database objects, such as a file. In the example in the visual, expand Databases and expand the next branch (your database). Right-click Schemas, and choose the schemas (libraries) that are to be displayed. In the window on the left, click AS24, and then click Tables to see a list of files. Right-click and select Copy on the SAMPLEF file. Next, in the window on the right, go to the target library (AS2401E) and right-click and select Paste. The system recognizes the type of object being copied and, in this case, processes the copy file command on the system to copy the file from one library to the other.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Through the Database branch, you can only copy and paste database objects, such as a file. Additional information — Transition statement —




14-39

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the lab exercises. Exercise: Object Management using System i Navigator




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U14-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U14-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248U14-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




14-41

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to duplicate an object. 2. Assuming you have the correct authority, which option allows you to create, change or delete user profiles? a. b. c. d.

Basic operations Work management Configuration and service Users and groups

3. Which of the following does not provide an option to create a library? a. b. c. d.

Right-click your system Work management Integrated file systems Database © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: System i Navigator GUI allows you to duplicate an object. The answer is True.

2. Assuming you have the correct authority, which option allows you to create, change or delete user profiles? a. Basic operations b. Work management c. Configuration and service d. Users and groups The answer is Users and groups.

3. Which of the following does not provide an option to create a library? a. Right-click your system b. Work management c. Integrated file systems d. Database The answer is Work management. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





14-43

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: Management Central allows you to issue a command once, and it can be run on multiple systems. 5. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to run the equivalent of the WRKLIB command to see a list of libraries on the system. 6. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to prompt a command.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. True or False: Management Central allows you to issue a command once, and it can be run on multiple systems The answer is True.

5. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to run the equivalent of the WRKLIB command to see a list of libraries on the system. The answer is True.

6. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to prompt a command. The answer is False.






14-45

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use System i Navigator to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use System i Navigator to create a duplicate object Use System i Navigator to copy a file Use System i Navigator to create a library Use System i Navigator to display the contents of a library



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





14-47

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 15. Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit describes how to work with and administer objects, libraries, and user profiles, run commands, and duplicate objects when working with Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to work with objects • Display the attributes of an object • Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a duplicate object • Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to copy a file • Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a library • Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to display the contents of a library



Unit 15. Object management using Systems Director Navigator for


15-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a duplicate object Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to copy a file Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a library Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to display the contents of a library



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — You have learned about things that the System i system makes available to help you do your job as a system operator: special keys and displays, help, and messages. In this unit, you will be introduced to terminology and concepts relating to IBM i objects. These objects have been mentioned in previous units, but you must understand them fully before continuing with the course. Details — Additional information — Transition statement — What is an object? An object has a name, occupies storage, and is a member of a library. (Each object has a name and can be created and deleted with CL commands.) Files, programs, user profiles, and queues are just a few of the many types of objects.




15-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

15.1. User profiles Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




15-5

Instructor Guide

Users and Groups task: Users IBM i


Figure 15-2. Users and Groups task: Users

AS248.1

Notes: Click the Users and Groups task, and then click Users to see the visual on the next page.





Uempty





15-7

Instructor Guide

Users: Click arrow for a User IBM i


Figure 15-3. Users: Click arrow for a User

AS248.1

Notes: From this view, you can click the arrow for a specific user to see the options on the first drop-down menu: • • • • •

User object - which will show a second drop down menu Delete... Send message... Application administration... Properties...

If you click or select the User objects, it will show a second drop-down menu with options to work with that user’s: • • • • •

printer output jobs server jobs messages owned objects





Uempty





15-9

Instructor Guide

Users: Create a new user based on IBM i


Figure 15-4. Users: Create a new user based on

AS248.1

Notes: When you click the arrow for a user, one of the options on the drop-down menu is New which then allows you to create a new user based on an existing user profile.





Uempty





15-11

Instructor Guide

Users: Other profile data displayed IBM i

Important


Figure 15-5. Users: Other profile data displayed

AS248.1

Notes: Notice the other data that is displayed on the web page: • • • •

Description Privilege class Previous sign on Storage used





Uempty





15-13

Instructor Guide

Users: Properties IBM i


Figure 15-6. Users: Properties

AS248.1

Notes: Assuming your user profile has been granted the correct authority, you can create, change, or delete user profiles using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. In this class, your user profile (AS24xx) has been granted security administrator (*SECADM) authority. This authority allows you to create user profiles or make changes to those profiles that you are authorized to administer. • Click the Users task on the previous page; then click Users, and click the arrow for AS24xx > Properties This will show the window on the next page.





Uempty





15-15

Instructor Guide

Jobs: Session startup IBM i


Figure 15-7. Jobs: Session startup

AS248.1

Notes: The actions on the previous page shows the User properties tab for the specific user profile. Click the Jobs link to see the window on the lower right. • There are parameters associate with user profile (this same parameters like you can see with WRKUSRPRF command) available on the different tabs. • Explore the options, but do not make any changes. • Click OK then OK again to implement your changes.





Uempty





15-17

Instructor Guide





Uempty

15.2. Running commands Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




15-19

Instructor Guide

System: Run a command IBM i


Figure 15-8. System: Run a command

AS248.1

Notes: There are some functions that do not have a graphical equivalent, thus they cannot be done from Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. • For those functions that are not supported, it is possible to run a command from Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. This is equivalent to submitting a command to run in batch mode. • Even for those functions that are supported with a GUI equivalent, like changing a user profile, you can submit a command or perform the function. Click the System task, and then select Run a Command to see the window on the next page.





Uempty





15-21

Instructor Guide

Run a command IBM i


Figure 15-9. Run a command

AS248.1

Notes: The usage buttons on this Web page are: IBM i Option

Allows to set job log parameters or inquiry messages.

Prompt

Provides the same functionality as the F4 function key in a 5250 screen.

Previous Command

Provides the same functionality as the function F9 key in a 5250 screen.

Run Command

Equal to the Enter key.





Uempty





15-23

Instructor Guide

Run a command using prompting IBM i


Figure 15-10. Run a command using prompting

AS248.1

Notes: If you know the format for the command, you can enter the command in the window presented in the upper right on this visual. If you are not sure of the format, or if you require assistance, you can use the Prompt link to view the window on the right. • Once on the prompt window, you can press Help for additional assistance for any of the parameters. • Click OK to submit the command. Note Security will be covered in greater deal in an upcoming unit later in this class. On this visual, we are only showing this Web page to show how prompting works when using this GUI.





Uempty





15-25

Instructor Guide





Uempty

15.3. Creating a library Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




15-27

Instructor Guide

Databases: Your database (i520BL2) IBM i


Figure 15-11. Databases: Your database (i520BL2)

AS248.1

Notes: One way to create a library is by using the Databases task. • Click Databases link then click Databases. • This will show you the page on the right. • Click your database (in this example, it is the value that is circled - i520bL2; normally, the name of database is this same as name of IBM i server/partition) to see the Web page on the next page in the guide.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If the customer will be using SQL to create the database, they will be familiar with creating schemas, which is equivalent to creating a library. This function is equivalent to submitting the create schema SQL statement. There are some more terms equivalent non-SQL versus SQL. Note that sometimes is not only difference in name but in functionality. Schema

Library

Table

Physical File

View

Logical File Not Keyed

Row

Record

Column

Field

Index

Logical File Keyed





15-29

Instructor Guide

Schemas: New Schema IBM i


Figure 15-12. Schemas: New Schema

AS248.1

Notes: Click the arrow for Schemas, and then click New > Schema to see the tab on the right. Fill in the parameters as follows: • Name: Specify unique name for the new schema (library). • Add to displayed list of schemas: Click this option to add the schema to your list of displayed schemas. The default is to display the new schema in your list of schemas. • Create as a standard library: Check this option if you want to create a standard library. • Create in: Specifies where the schema will be created. It can be created in the system disk pool, in disk pools (2-32), or in an independent disk pool group. Click the down arrow to make your selection. • Text: Specify a description for the schema. Click OK to create your new schema (library).





Uempty





15-31

Instructor Guide

File systems: New Folder (library) IBM i


Figure 15-13. File systems: New Folder (library)

AS248.1

Notes: A second way to create a library is by way of the File Systems task. To see the windows in the visual: • Click the File Systems task; then click IFS, and click the arrow for QSYS.LIB > New folder. The library name must be a unique name.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The last way to create a library is by submitting a create library (CRTLIB) command. Additional information — Transition statement —




15-33

Instructor Guide

IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 15-14. IFS: Display list of libraries (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: To display a list of the libraries on the system: • Click the File systems task • Click Integrated file system • Click the arrow for QSYS.LIB. and click Open to see the Web page on the next page in the guide





Uempty





15-35

Instructor Guide

IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 15-15. IFS: Display list of libraries (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Performing the action on the previous page will display a list of libraries in the QSYS.LIB file system. To narrow down this list, you can click the down arrow for Select action, then select Include from the drop-down menu to specify the list of libraries being displayed. For example, to see your libraries, you could request all of the libraries named AS24xx* be displayed.





Uempty





15-37

Instructor Guide

Databases: Display list of libraries (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 15-16. Databases: Display list of libraries (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Another way to display a list of libraries is: • Click DATABASE link • Next click the arrow for SCHEMAS • Then select Schemas to Display





Uempty





15-39

Instructor Guide

Databases: Display list of libraries (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 15-17. Databases: Display list of libraries (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: This page allow you to specify and add library to which will be displayed. You can also search library looking at list of all libraries or specify name or part of name with wild cards * or %. Note asterisk * sign in library name is allowed both Systems Director Navigator and emulator 5250% is not allowed in emulator 5250.





Uempty





15-41

Instructor Guide

Display contents of your team library IBM i


Figure 15-18. Display contents of your team library

AS248.1

Notes: To display the contents of your library: • Right-click the arrow for your library, and click Open to see the page in the lower right.





Uempty





15-43

Instructor Guide





Uempty

15.4. Object properties Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




15-45

Instructor Guide

Supported actions by object type IBM i


Figure 15-19. Supported actions by object type

AS248.1

Notes: The actions that you can perform on an object are determined by what type of object it is. • In the left page in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you click the arrow on an object type of program. • In the right page in the visual, you see the actions that are supported when you click the arrow on an object type file.





Uempty





15-47

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: This is the notebook displayed for an object that is type file when you click Properties on the previous visual. You can see the information displayed on the different tabs on this page.





Uempty





15-49

Instructor Guide

File systems: Copy IBM i


Figure 15-21. File systems: Copy

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i supports the copy function for the File Systems task. In the example in the visuals: • Click File Systems link then click IFS link, next click the arrow for QSYS.LIB; then click Open. • Click the arrow for AS24, and then click Open (to see a list of objects in this library). • Locate and click the arrow for SAMPLEF file, and then click Copy. • In the window presented, specify the target library, AS2401J (you must specify the fully qualified path; in the example we used /QSYS.LIB/AS2401J.LIB). Click Copy. The system recognizes the type of object being copied and, in this case, processes the copy file command on the system to copy the file from one library to the other. You can also locate other types of objects, for example, a program, and do a copy and paste, in which case the system will process the create duplicate object command.





Uempty





15-51

Instructor Guide

Database: Copy File IBM i


Figure 15-22. Database: Copy File

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i also supports the copy function for the Database task; however, you can only copy and paste database objects, such as a file. Stepping through the graphical interface will present the graphical view of the copy file (CPYF) command. To get to the panel in this visual, perform the following: • Click the Databases link, and then click Databases and click the arrow for your database (in this example, i520bL2), and then click Open. • Click the arrow for Schemas, and then click Open. Click the arrow for your schema (library), and then click Open. • Click the arrow for Tables, and then click Open. Click the arrow for your file, and then click Data > Copy. These steps will present the copy file (CPYF) command screen. Fill in your parameters, and then click OK to process your command.





Uempty





15-53

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the lab exercises. Exercise: Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U15-checkpoint. • To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. • Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U15-checkpoint and click Play. • Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U15-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the board.




15-55

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator does not provide an option to manage users. 2. Which task in Systems Director Navigator provides the link to run a command? a. b. c. d.

System Work management Configuration and service Security

3. True or False: Prompting a command is not available with Systems Director Navigator.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator does not provide an option to manage users. The answer is False.

2. Which task in Systems Director Navigator provides the link to run a command? a. b. c. d.


The answer is System.

3. True or False: Prompting a command is not available with Systems Director Navigator. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





15-57

Instructor Guide



System Database File system Network

5. True or False: Systems Director Navigator provides a graphical version of the copy file command. 6. True or False: Systems Director Navigator does not display a list of libraries.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





The answer is Network.

5. True or False: Systems Director Navigator provides a graphical version of the copy file command. The answer is True.

6. True or False: Using Systems Director Navigator does not display a list of libraries. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





15-59

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to work with objects Display the attributes of an object Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a duplicate object Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to copy a file Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to create a library Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to display the contents of a library



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





15-61

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 16. Introduction to work management Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about This unit provides a brief introduction to work management. We look at the following work management terminology and concepts: • • • •

Power i job processing (interactive and batch) Job Types of jobs (including interactive, batch, and spooling jobs) subsystem

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • • • • •

Explain the difference between interactive and batch processing State the definition of a job List the different types of jobs that can be run on the system Explain what a job queue is and how it is used Describe what a job description does and how it controls work on the system • Explain what a subsystem is and how these are used on the system • Explain what a memory pool is



Unit 16. Introduction to work management


16-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain the difference between interactive and batch processing State the definition of a job List the different types of jobs that can be run on the system Explain what a job queue is and how it is used Describe what a job description does and how it controls work on the system Explain what a subsystem is and how these are used on the system Explain what a memory pool is



AS248.1

Notes: In this unit, you become familiar with work management concepts and terminology. We discuss the types of work (or processing) the Power i does (mainly interactive and batch), what a job is and some of its characteristics, the types of jobs that can run on the Power i and their characteristics, and what a subsystem is and the relationship between a job and subsystem.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Upon successful completion of this unit, the student should be able to explain: • The two types of work (or processing) done by the system (interactive and batch) Note Throughout the remainder of this unit, the term processing will be used when referring to work.

• What a job is and some of its characteristics • The different types of jobs that run on a Power i system (including interactive, batch, and spooling) and some of their characteristics • What a subsystem is and the relationship between a job and a subsystem To begin, let us look at the types of processing carried out by the Power i system. This unit lecture only covers the green screen emulator interface, while the exercise will cover both green screen and Navigator. There is no interface available using the Access for Web for this function. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-3

Instructor Guide

Methods of processing IBM i

Interactive processing Sign on 1

Menu displayed 2

Enter menu option 3

Menu displayed

4

Batch processing Submit job 1

2

System runs program

User free to do other work on system © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 16-2. Methods of processing

AS248.1

Notes: The system performs two types of processing: interactive and batch. Interactive processing requires continual two-way communication between a display station user and the system. It is similar to a conversation. First the user says (types) something to the system, and then the system replies. Batch processing requires only that the user send information to the system for processing. After that, the system can usually complete the processing on its own. This leaves both the user and the display station free to do other work. The Power i system is designed to handle both interactive and batch processing simultaneously.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Interactive processing is conversational in nature. There is a need for an ongoing operator action/system response type of communication. System response time to an operator's requests is very important. Batch processing needs no ongoing communication between an operator and the system. Response time is not critical; the system performs the required tasks when time is available. Running a monthly payroll program is an example of batch processing. Normally, an operator puts the pre-printed checks in the printer and runs the payroll command (for example, by entering a menu option or calling a program (CALL PAYROLL)). The system runs the payroll job and prints the checks without any further interaction between it and the user at the display station. The user is free to do other work on the system while it runs the payroll program. Work management handles both interactive and batch processing simultaneously. For example, let us assume five users are signed on to the system. Work management performs interactive processing for each while also carrying out batch processing to run a monthly accounts receivable program and a weekly update program requested by two display station users. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-5

Instructor Guide

What is a job? IBM i

A job is an environment that enables work to be performed on the system. COMMAND Display Library List

===>

DSPLIBL

Process request

Opt __ __ __

Library QSYS QSYS2 QHLPSYS

Type Text SYS System library SYS System library for CPI's SYS

Menu option

===>

User Tasks

Process request

1

Select one of the following: 1. Display or change your job 2. Display messages 3. Send a message 4. Submit a job

RUN PROGRAM

CALL PROG1

===>

Customer Inquiry

Process request

Enter customer no. _______


Figure 16-3. What is a job?

AS248.1

Notes: All work done on a Power i is performed through a job. Each active job contains at least one thread (the initial thread) and can contain additional secondary threads. Threads are independent units of work. Job properties are shared among threads of the job, but threads also have some of their own properties, such as a call stack. The job serves as the owner for properties that are shared among threads within the same job. Work management provides a way for you to control the work done on your system through the properties of a job. The general properties of a job determine how the system runs each job. Some of the properties are grouped together in the job description for easier multiple job management. Based on how the job properties are specified, the system knows what properties to get and when. The system runs different types of jobs to serve various needs.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A job is an environment that enables work to be done on a Power i system. From within a job, you can: • Type a command • Enter a menu option • Run a program This visual shows a job. From within this job, you: 1. Enter the Display Library List (DSPLIBL) command on a command line or on the Command Entry display. This causes the system to process a request to show the Display Library List display. 2. Enter 1 on the command line, which corresponds to menu option 1 on the IBM i Main Menu. This causes the system to process a request which displays the User Tasks menu. CALL is a common command that can be used to process a program. 3. Enter the CALL PROG1 command on either a command line or the Command Entry display. This runs a customer inquiry program. When a user enters a command, selects a menu option, or runs a program, the system processes one instruction or a series. Compare this with the work done in a typical business. A piece of work in a business might involve answering the phone, typing a letter, or attending a meeting. Each of these could be a single step, also called an instruction, but could also consist of several steps. For example, if, after answering the phone, a financial officer determines that a customer has a concern with a bill. The financial officer might have to search for the customer's bill, talk with someone in accounts receivable, and fax the customer a revised bill. In this case, the job contains several instructions. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-7

Instructor Guide

Types of jobs IBM i

System jobs

Q...

User jobs Spooling Interactive

Autostart Batch

Communication © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 16-4. Types of jobs

AS248.1

Notes: All jobs on the system fall into one of two very broad categories: system jobs and user jobs. System jobs are created by the IBM i operating system. User jobs are created by users. Most jobs that a system operator works with fall into the user job category. Interactive jobs are workstation or 5250 emulation jobs. All work performed between sign on and the corresponding sign off, regardless of what type of work, is part of one interactive job. Interactive jobs are sometimes incorrectly called sessions. A session refers to everything that transpires at the workstation. Traditionally, batch jobs are run by submitting requests for data processing by programs that do not need to interact with the user. These requests are placed on a job queue and run when system resources become available. A communication job is an interactive or batch job that is started by a program request from a remote system over tele-communications. An autostart job is similar to a batch job. It does repetitive work or one-time initialization work that is associated with a particular subsystem. 16-8 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There are also a couple of other system job types which are not shown on the visual because the students will probably not work with them. They are: • A group job, which allows a user to start up to 16 jobs for each sign-on at a workstation (32 total when there is a secondary interactive job). At any one time, only one group job can be active; the others are suspended. • A prestart job, which is a batch job that starts running before a program on a remote system sends a program start request. For further information on group and prestart jobs, refer to the Work Management manual. Every job has certain characteristics. For example: • It has certain steps it must go through, and it has a unique name. • It must be associated with two objects: a job description and a user profile. • The job description tells the system, among other things, how to run the job and what resources to use. • The user profile contains information on how the user can run jobs. • In addition, every job starts and ends. In the next few visuals, we will look at the steps a job goes through, the structure of a job name, the information contained in a job description and a user profile, and how this information relates to work management. Finally, we will look at how various jobs are started and ended. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-9

Instructor Guide

The life cycle of a job IBM i

Batch job Submit

Job queue

Subsystem

Memory pool

Output

Memory pool

Output

Interactive job User starts interactive job

Subsystem


Figure 16-5. The life cycle of a job

AS248.1

Notes: To understand the basics of Power i work management, follow a simple batch job as it moves through the system. The life of a simple batch job begins when you submit it to the system. The job is then sent to a job queue where it waits to enter a subsystem where it can run. Once the job moves to the subsystem, it is allocated memory in which to run. The printer output file (also called the spooled file) is then sent to the output queue to await further instruction on what to do (for example, printing). Not every job follows this exact path; however, you can better understand how other work is completed on the system by learning about the following steps. 1. When a job is submitted to Power i, it is created and enters the system. At this time, the properties are given to the job. Once the job receives its job description (explained later in this unit) and determines its properties, it moves to the job queue, where it waits to enter the subsystem. 2. Job queues are work entry points through which batch jobs enter the system. They can be thought of as waiting rooms for a subsystem. A number of factors affect when the job is pulled off the job queue into the subsystem, such as the job priority on the job queue, 16-10 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

the sequence number of the job queue, and the maximum number of active jobs. When all of these factors work together, the job will be pulled off the job queue to start running in the subsystem. 3. When the job enters the subsystem, it becomes active. Until a job gets its activity level and memory from a memory pool, it cannot run. The job uses several pieces of information before it can receive memory to run. The subsystem description (explained later in this unit), like the job description, carries information, such as which memory pool to use, the routing entry, the maximum number of active jobs, and the number of active jobs currently in the subsystem. 4. Memory is a resource from the memory pool that the subsystem uses to run the job. The amount of memory from a memory pool, as well as how many other jobs are competing for memory, affects how efficiently a job runs. subsystems use different memory pools to support different types of jobs that run within them. The subsystem gives the memory pool the information it needs to process the order in which jobs are allocated memory, and the memory pool allocates memory for the job to run to completion. 5. Printer output for a job (spooled files) is sent to an output queue where it waits to be sent to a printer or file. The output queue is similar to the job queue in that it controls how the output is made available to the printer. The output queue allows the user to control what files are printed first. An interactive job is active from the time a user signs on to a display station until they sign off. While they are signed on, an interactive job typically goes through the following steps: 1. A user signs on to a display station. 2. IBM i runs this job and might generate printed output, which is placed in a spooled file and put on an output queue. 3. This spooled file waits on the output queue to be sent to a printer file. 4. The user either signs off, at which point the system ends the interactive job, or stays signed on, in which case the job keeps running.




16-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss the different steps that interactive and batch jobs go through. Point out to the students that these are typical steps. Not all interactive and batch jobs will go through all of these steps. For a new system user, the concept of a batch job (something that runs in the background) is new. Often a user will ask the system operator about the status of a job because the user chose an option on an application menu. The job appears to have run (no error messages), yet the user still does not have his or her printout. The user is not aware that the batch job must wait its turn on the job queue to process, and then the output must wait its turn on the print queue to print. Thus, it is very important that the system operator know how to find and monitor batch jobs. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of the next visual, play file AS248-U16-F06 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students a video demonstration of how the job queue functions. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U16-F06 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: In place of the next visual, play file AS248-U16-F06 on your PC to provide the students with a video demonstration of how the job queue functions.





Uempty

What is a job queue? IBM i

Job queue JOB1 JOB2 JOB3 JOB4 JOB5 JOB6

(2) (1) (4) (2) (1) (4)

Subsystem (2) 1 JOB2 JOB5 2

HIGH

JOB1 JOB4

3

4 . . .

JOB3 JOB6

LOW


Figure 16-6. What is a job queue?

AS248.1

Notes: A user profile identifies a user on the system and sets up the characteristics for all of the work that will performed by the user. One of the values assigned via the user profile is a job description. The job description specifies the job queue that will be used by a user when they submit jobs to run in batch, and the processing priority that will be assigned to those jobs. When a batch job is submitted, the job is placed on a job queue. A job queue is an object that contains a list of batch jobs waiting to be processed. Each job has a job queue priority (one through nine) assigned to it; where one is the highest and nine is the lowest priority. Work management will process jobs in a first-in first-out order according to their priority. The jobs will be sent to a subsystem when it is their turn to process. Each subsystem is set up to run a certain number of jobs concurrently, in this example two jobs are allowed to run.




16-13

Instructor Guide

There are six job queue commands. We will focus on one of the job queue commands, Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ), in this unit. The other commands can be run as options from the Work with Job Queue display or from a command line. • • • • • •

Clear Job Queue (CLRJOBQ) Create Job Queue (CRTJOBQ) Delete Job Queue (DLTJOBQ) Hold Job Queue (HLDJOBQ) Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ) Work with Job Queue (RKJOBQ)





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There is another job queue priority, zero, which is reserved for changing a job to move it to the top of the queue. This visual shows six jobs (JOB1 through JOB6) that have been submitted to a job queue. They were placed on the job queue in the order in which they were received. The jobs were submitted with different priorities (one through nine). A job queue priority determines the priority that work management will use to process the jobs. In this example: • JOB2 and JOB5 have a priority of one, therefore work management processes them in first-in first-out order. JOB2 was placed on the job queue first, therefore it is processed first, immediately before JOB5. • Next, work management processes JOB1 and JOB4, which have a priority of two, in first-in first-out order. • Finally, it processes JOB3 and JOB6, which have a priority of four, in first-in first-out order. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-15

Instructor Guide

Job name IBM i

Qualified job name

000578 AS24xx DSP01 Job number

User name

Job name


Figure 16-7. Job name

AS248.1

Notes: Each job has a unique name called a qualified job name, which consists of three parts (or qualifiers): a job number, which is a unique number assigned by the system that allows you to identify jobs; a user name, which is the name of the user profile under which the job was started; and a job name, which is the name of the workstation the user signed on to. When you search for a job, you can search for the entire qualified name if you know all of the qualifiers. For example: WRKJOB JOB(000578/AS24xx/DSP01) You can also search for the job using only some of the qualifiers. For example, you can search by user name and job name or by job name only: WRKJOB JOB(AS24xx/DSP01) WRKJOB JOB(DSP01)





Uempty

There are several commonly used commands for finding jobs on the Power i: Work with Active Job (WRKACTJOB) Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) Work with Submitted Job (WRKSBMJOB) After entering one of these commands, one of the Work with... displays appears, showing you a list of jobs.




16-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Just as each object has a qualified name, each job has a qualified name called a qualified job name. Object and job names are similar in that their syntax is similar. A job name consists of three parts (or qualifiers). Job number

Unique number which is assigned by the system so that you can identify jobs. Each job number contains six numeric digits.

User name

Name of the user profile under which the job is started. For interactive jobs, the user name is the name entered in the User field on the sign-on display. For batch jobs, the user profile can be specified under which the batch job is to run. The user name can be up to 10 characters long.

Job name

For interactive jobs, the job name is the same as the name of the workstation you are signed on to. For batch jobs, you can specify your own job name. This name can be up to 10 characters long.

Another similarity between job and object names is that when searching for a job name, like when searching for an object name, not all of the qualifiers have to be specified. For example, the job number for the job on the visual is 000578, the user name is AS24xx and the job name is DSP01. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Job/thread IBM i

Thread A unit of work managed by IBM i: Job-1

Job-2

Allocates system resource (processor cycles) Execution priority

Job-3

Job: Single threaded job

Job-4

Multithreaded job Each thread is an independent task-stream Job#

User request (left-click or Enter): Interacts with application thread Thread#1

Thread#n

Dispatched and managed separately Assigned processor cycles © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 16-8. Job/thread

AS248.1

Notes: Although an operating system gives the impression that it is concurrently executing a large number of tasks, each processor in a symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) traditionally executes the instruction stream of a single task at any moment. The QPRCMLTTSK system value controls whether to enable the individual SMP processors to concurrently execute multiple instruction streams. Each instruction stream belongs to separate tasks or threads. When enabled, each individual processor concurrently executes multiple tasks at the same time. The effect of its use will likely increase the performance capacity of a system or improve the responsiveness of a multithreaded application. Running multiple instruction streams at the same time does not improve the performance of any given task. Since this is the case with any performance recommendations, results vary in different environments. The way that multithreading is done depends on the hardware model, and therefore the performance capacity gains vary. Some of the models support this approach through a concept called simultaneous multithreading (SMT). © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



16-19

Instructor Guide

Older Power i processors use an approach called hardware multithreading (HMT). In the HMT approach, the hardware automatically switches between the tasks on any long processing delay event, for example, a cache miss. Some models do not support any form of multithreading, which means the QPRCMLTTSK system value has no effect on performance. Because the QPRCMLTTSK system value enables the parallel use of shared processor resources, the performance gains depend highly on the application and the model.





Uempty





16-21

Instructor Guide

What is a job description? IBM i

It is used to set specific job-related attributes, such as: Which job queue to use for your jobs What scheduling priority is assigned to your jobs Which output queue is used for your output What priority is assigned to your output jobs Specific routing data for your jobs The library list used for your jobs What level of error logging to do for your jobs It basically determines how and where a users job is run on the system. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 16-9. What is a job description?

AS248.1

Notes: A job description is an object that contains a set of information, also called attributes, that specifies how a job should be run. There are many job descriptions on every Power i. Each job must be associated with a job description. Each job description can have multiple jobs associated with it. The IBM-supplied default job description is QDFTJOBD, and it is located in the QGPL library.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Each job must be associated with a job description. A job description is an object that contains a great deal of information on how a job should be run on the system. Each job description can have many jobs associated with it. Several job descriptions are available as a part of IBM i. By default, all user jobs use an IBM-supplied job description named QDFTJOBD, which contains a generic set of job attributes. • The job queue and output queue that will be used for jobs and the priority of the printed output are specified in the job description. • The priority of the job (job priority) and printed output (output priority) on the queues are specified here. • The printer that will handle printed output (printer device) is specified in the job description. • Message logging is discussed in the problem determination unit; however, point out that the amount of information available for problem determination is controlled by this parameter in the job description. Every job, in addition to being associated with a job description, must also be associated with a user profile. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-23

Instructor Guide

How a user profile relates to a job description IBM i

A user profile will specify: The users password and when it will expire The classification (*USER, *SYSOPR, and so on) The job description assigned to this user Which output queue is used for this users jobs The name of the current library for this user And so forth


Figure 16-10. How a user profile relates to a job description

AS248.1

Notes: Some of the attributes for a user are set in the user profile. Others are set in the job description that will be used for the user’s jobs. There are some attributes, like output queue, that are specified in both places. The system will first check in the job description, and, if it does not find a value there, it will look for that value in the user’s profile. Therefore, the values in the job description take precedent and override the user profile. Security will be covered in greater detail later in this class.





Uempty





16-25

Instructor Guide

What is a subsystem? IBM i

SUBSYSTEM QBATCH

SUBSYSTEM QINTER

Interactive processing

Power i

Batch processing

Spooling

SUBSYSTEM QSPL © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 16-11. What is a subsystem?

AS248.1

Notes: From the earlier discussion about different types of jobs (interactive, batch, and spooling), you might correctly assume that any particular job would run most efficiently on a system designed to run only that specific type of job. The system can contain one or more operating environments called subsystems. A subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through which the system coordinates the work flow and system resources. Each job, as it starts, is assigned to a subsystem. By using different subsystems, each with its own unique operating characteristics, IBM i work management makes it appear to the jobs running in each subsystem that the entire system was designed to run only that type of job. Like jobs, subsystems have descriptions that carry important information needed to complete the work; this is the purpose of the subsystem description.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through which the system coordinates the work flow and resource use. The system can contain several subsystems, all operating independently of each other. subsystems manage resources. The runtime characteristics of a subsystem are defined in an object called a subsystem description. Each subsystem can run unique operations. For instance, you can set up one subsystem to handle only interactive jobs while another subsystem handles only batch jobs. subsystems can also be designed to handle many types of work. The system allows you to decide the number of subsystems and what types of work each subsystem handles. The system relies on subsystem descriptions when starting subsystems. Therefore, if you want to change the amount of work (number of jobs) coming from a job queue, for example, you only need to change the job queue entry in the subsystem description. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-27

Instructor Guide

Subsystem description IBM i

The subsystem description defines: The characteristics of a subsystem How much work can be initiated and where that work will be performed, including: Maximum number of concurrent jobs Memory pools used

The sources of work for a subsystem, such as: Autostart jobs Communication Job queues Prestart jobs Workstations © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 16-12. Subsystem description

AS248.1

Notes: The subsystem description is an object that defines the environment that the jobs that run in the subsystem need in order to run most efficiently. There are a number of commands used with the subsystem descriptions. Change subsystem Description (CHGSBSD) Create subsystem Description (CRTSBSD) Delete subsystem Description (DLTSBSD) Display subsystem Description (DSPSBSD) Print subsystem Description (PRTSBSDAUT) Work with subsystem Description (WRKSBSD) The most useful is the WRKSBSD command because from this display you can create, change, delete, display, or work with subsystem jobs, or you can start or stop a subsystem.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — All work within a subsystem is controlled by an IBM i program known as a subsystem monitor. All subsystem monitors are identical, regardless of the subsystem they control or the type of jobs run in that subsystem. What makes one subsystem any different from another? Each subsystem monitor uses a different subsystem description in performing its control functions. A subsystem description is an object that contains information defining the characteristics of an operating environment which can handle a specific type of processing, such as interactive, batch, spooling, or communications. It defines how many jobs the subsystem runs at one time, where and how those jobs run, where the subsystem looks for jobs to run, and which resources the subsystem uses to perform the work. A subsystem description can contain work entries or sources of work for one or more of the following: • Autostart jobs • Workstations (individually or by type) • Prestart jobs • Job queues • Communications A subsystem description also defines the amount of main storage that is available for jobs that run in the subsystem. The subsystem description is used by the subsystem monitor to establish the environment for the jobs that run in that subsystem. When a subsystem is started, it is known by the name of the subsystem description it uses. *SBSD is the object identifier for subsystems. Explain the commands used with the subsystem descriptions. The most useful is the WRKSBSD command because from this display you can create, change, delete, and display subsystem descriptions, work with subsystem jobs, and start or stop a subsystem. You can demonstrate this command with WRKSBSD *ALL. This shows the students the SBSDs on your system. Inform them that their systems might be different. We discuss why next. Additional information — Transition statement —




16-29

Instructor Guide

Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM IBM i

IPL starts only the subsystem named in QCTLSBSD system value Environment as shipped (default) - QCTLSBSD = QBASE Autostart job

QBASE

QSPL

Spooling

Console, interactive, batch, communications

QSYSWRK

System initiated functions

QUSRWRK

User initiated functions

QSERVER

File server

Complex environment - QCTLSBSD = QCTL Autostart job

QCTL Console

QSYSWRK

QINTER

Interactive

QBATCH

Batch

QSPL

Spooling

QCMN

Communication

QSERVER

File server

System functions

QUSRWRK System functions


Figure 16-13. Subsystem configurations shipped by IBM

AS248.1

Notes: The default subsystem configuration consists of a controlling subsystem called QBASE, a system function subsystem called QSYSWRK, and a spooling subsystem called QSPL. All jobs on the system run in this environment except for some system jobs and spooling jobs that are run under the control of the QBASE subsystem. Certain system jobs run under the control of QSYSWRK. Spooling jobs run under the control of the QSPL subsystem. A more complex subsystem configuration is also provided and can be used instead of the default QBASE/QSPL configuration. It consists of: • QCTL

Controlling subsystem

• QSYSWRK

Runs certain system jobs initiated by the OS

• QUSRWRK

Instituted in V5.1. subsystem used by the system for system jobs that are user-oriented

• QINTER

Subsystem for interactive jobs

• QBATCH

Subsystem for batch jobs





Uempty

• QSPL

Subsystem for spooling

• CMN

Subsystem used for communicating jobs

• QSERVER

Subsystem used for file serving jobs

• QHTTPSVR

Subsystem used for Web server jobs and programs




16-31

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — IBM ships several predefined subsystem descriptions. A system can be implemented through the use of these shipped subsystems. It is also possible for a Power implementer to implement a system by creating brand new subsystem descriptions. When it is shipped, every system has QBASE as its controlling subsystem; the controlling subsystem is the only one started by IBM i during IPL. QBASE is set up to handle all types of work on the system (which includes the console, interactive jobs, batch jobs, and communication jobs) except some system functions and spooling. In this environment, the QSYSWRK subsystem is responsible for some system functions, and the QSPL subsystem is responsible for all spooling jobs (output to printers). A more complex environment is also shipped and can be used instead of the default QBASE/QSPL environment described above. This environment is used if there are a lot of different types of jobs running on a Power i system. The system value QCTLSBSD (controlling subsystem) controls which subsystem configuration is used. IBM provides other subsystems, such as QSNADS, which supports jobs controlling the functions of the System Network Architecture distribution services (SNADS) network and IBM-supplied transaction programs, such as document interchange and object distribution. These subsystems are started and ended when the functions they support are started and ended. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Memory pools IBM i

Logical subdivisions of main storage: Machine Pool

Shared pools: Shared by multiple subsystems

User-Defined Pools

Used for system activity

Private pools: Assigned to a specific subsystem

*BASE

Not shared across subsystems

Up to 64 memory pools

Different from disk pools: Auxiliary storage pools (ASP) Independent auxiliary storage pools (IASP)


Figure 16-14. Memory pools

AS248.1

Notes: Logical subdivisions of main storage: • Shared pools: - Shared by multiple subsystems: • *Base • *INTERACT • *SPOOL • *SHRPOOL1-n - Used for system activity • *Machine • Private pools: - Assigned to a specific subsystem - Not shared across subsystems Up to 64 memory pools.




16-33

Instructor Guide

Different from disk pools: • Subdivision of disk space - Auxiliary storage pools (ASP) - Different from independent auxiliary storage pools (IASP) • Grouped by disk drives • Optional





Uempty





16-35

Instructor Guide

Work management overview IBM i

SBMJOB

Job queue

Subsystem pool

Output queue

Writer

Batch Printer

Sign-on

Interactive


Figure 16-15. Work management overview

AS248.1

Notes: There are many different types of jobs, and most move through many stages. A working knowledge of work management is absolutely necessary to effectively control jobs on the system. The flow for an interactive job is: 1. An interactive job does not place jobs in a job queue. This step is null in this environment. 2. An interactive job is started when a user signs on to the system. 3. The interactive job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run interactive jobs. - The QINTER subsystem is the default system for interactive jobs. - An administrator can create additional subsystems where interactive jobs will be run. 4. Work management determines how much memory is assigned to each subsystem. - This will determine how much memory gets assigned to run these types of jobs. 16-36 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

- The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated (into shared memory pools or private memory pools). 5. Output queue details will be covered later in the course. 6. Writer details will be covered later in the course. The flow for a batch job is: A batch job includes one additional step in the beginning. Once the job flows out of the subsystem, the steps are the same for both types of jobs. 1. A user will either choose a menu option that issues the command to submit a job or the user will manually issue the submit job command on the command line. 2. A batch job is placed in a job queue and awaits its turn to be processed. - Job queues are created by programmers or by administrators. - The job description in your user profile is used by work management to determine to which job queue your job will be sent. - Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs. - Jobs are processed in a FIFO (first-in first-out) order based on priority. 3. The batch job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run batch jobs. - The QBATCH subsystem is the default system for batch jobs. - An administrator can create additional subsystems where batch jobs will be run. 4. Work management determines how much memory is assigned to each subsystem. - This will determine how much memory gets assigned to run these types of jobs. - The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated (into shared memory pools or private memory pools). 5. Output queue details will be covered later in the course. 6. Writer details will be covered later in the course.




16-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty


1. True or False: A job is an environment that enables work to be performed on the system. 2. Which of the following is not considered a user job? a. b. c. d.

Interactive Batch Autostart Spooling

3. When a batch job is submitted, it is placed in a __________. a. b. c. d.

System memory Subsystem Job queue Output queue



AS248.1

Notes:




16-39

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: A job is an environment that enables work to be performed on the system. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not considered a user job? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Spooling.



The answer is Job queue. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty


4. True or False: The highest priority in a job queue is priority nine. 5. The system job that generates a print report runs in which of the following subsystems? a. b. c. d.

QHTTP QINTER QBATCH QSPL

6. True or False: An interactive job is placed in a job queue when it is submitted.



AS248.1

Notes:




16-41

Instructor Guide



4. True or False: The highest priority in a job queue is priority nine. The answer is False.

5. The system job that generates a print report runs in which of the following subsystems? a. b. c. d.


The answer is QSPL.

6. True or False: An interactive job is placed in a job queue when it is submitted. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain the difference between interactive and batch processing State the definition of a job List the different types of jobs that can be run on the system Explain what a job queue is and how it is used Describe what a job description does and how it controls work on the system Explain what a subsystem is and how these are used on the system Explain what a memory pool is © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




16-43

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 17. Work management using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit provides a brief introduction to work management. We look at the commands and screens, windows, and panes to display related information on the system.


Use the command to display a job description Identify which job description is used by a user profile List the subsystems that are active Use the command to display system status information



Unit 17. Work management using 5250 emulation


17-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use the command to display a job description Identify which job description is used by a user profile List the subsystems that are active Use the command to display system status information



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





17-3

Instructor Guide

Job description: What is it? IBM i


Figure 17-2. Job description: What is it?

AS248.1

Notes: The command used to display the screen capture on this visual is: DSPJOBD JOBD(QGPL/QDFTJOBD) Press the Page down or Page up keys to move through the initial three pages displayed when you run this command. Press the Enter key to move to the next screen, which is the visual on the next page. A job description is an object that contains a set of information, also called attributes, that specify how a job should be run. There are many job descriptions on your system. The IBM-supplied default job description is QDFTJOBD (in the QGPL library). Notice the information that can be specified in a job description on these initial three pages.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — This visual highlights some of the job description parameters that are used by work management. • Job date specifies the date the jobs associated with this job description are run. • The Job queue and Output queue that will be used for jobs and the priority of the printed output are specified in the job description. • In addition, the priority of the job (Job priority) and printed output (Output priority) on the queues are specified here. • Message logging is discussed in the problem determination unit; however, point out that the amount of information available for problem determination is controlled by this parameter in the job description. Every job, in addition to being associated with a job description, is also associated with a user profile. Additional information — Transition statement —




17-5

Instructor Guide

Job description: Library list IBM i


Figure 17-3. Job description: Library list

AS248.1

Notes: Press the Enter key on the previous page to see the screen capture on this page. On this screen, you can see the parameter that can specify either the list of libraries in the system library list or that can specify a system value that contains this information. The default library list is used for jobs that use this job description. The default library list contains the library names that are specified in the system value QUSRLIBL at the time a job using this job description is started.





Uempty





17-7

Instructor Guide

How a user profile relates to a job description IBM i


Figure 17-4. How a user profile relates to a job description

AS248.1

Notes: Use the work user profile (WRKUSRPRF *all) command to see a list of user profiles. From that screen, select the profile of interest and specify option 5 to display the information stored in that profile. Page down to get to the page captured in the visual. Notice the type of information stored in a user profile. Specifically, make note of the last parameter on this page where you specify the job description specified for this user.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The user profile is an object that contains a wealth of information about a user and how the jobs for that user are to be run. The highest scheduling priority parameter in the user profile determines the highest scheduling priority that is allowed for any job submitted by the user associated with this profile. The scheduling priority ranges from zero to nine, where zero is the highest priority. The job description, output queue, and printer device that the jobs for this user will use can also be specified here. For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Once you have finished this visual, you should play file AS248-U17-F04 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students a video demonstration of how to use the WRKUSRPRF command. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U17-F04 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Once you have finished this visual, you should play file AS248-U17-F04 on your PC to provide the students with a video demonstration of the LICPGM command. Additional information — Transition statement —




17-9

Instructor Guide

Work with Subsystems IBM i


Figure 17-5. Work with Subsystems

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with subsystems (WRKSBS) display shows the status of, and information about, each subsystem in the system. You can use this list to determine whether a specific amount of main storage has been assigned to a subsystem and, if so, which pool IDs within the subsystem were assigned that main storage. You can also see how many jobs are active in each subsystem.





Uempty





17-11

Instructor Guide

Work with System Status IBM i


Figure 17-6. Work with System Status

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with System Status (WRSYSSTS) command will display this screen that shows a group of statistics that depicts the current status of the system. It displays the number of jobs currently in the system, the total capacity of the system ASP, the percentage of the system ASP storage currently in use, the amount of auxiliary storage for temporary objects and machine data currently in use, the maximum amount of auxiliary storage space required for temporary objects and machine data since the last initial program load (IPL), the percentage of machine addresses used, and statistical and reference information related to each storage pool that currently has main storage allocated to it. Pressing the F24 function key will display the additional function keys displayed on the screen in the lower right. Those will be discussed on the next page. Remember to use the F1 - Help key to get an understanding of all of the information displayed on this screen.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss the information that is displayed when this command is processed on the system. Using the F24 key will show additional function keys that will be discussed on the next page. Before you can perform any disk management tasks with System i Navigator, you need to install the Configuration and Service component and enable the Disk Units folder. Additional information — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Once you have finished discussing this visual, play file AS248-U17-F06 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to provide the students a video demonstration of how to use the function keys to call up additional information in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U17-F06 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U17-F06 on your PC to provide the students with a video demonstration of how to use the function keys to call up additional information in place of the next visual. Transition statement —




17-13

Instructor Guide

Using the additional function keys IBM i

F14

F15

F16


Figure 17-7. Using the additional function keys

AS248.1

Notes: Using the F24 - Additional function keys from the Work with System Status display will allow you to process other commands that show the screens captured on this visual. Using the F14 - Work with subsystems function key will process the WRKSBS command to show the screen that was discussed earlier in this unit. Using the F15 - Work with active jobs function key will process the WRKACTJOB command. The Work with Active Jobs display shows the performance and status information for jobs that are currently active on the system. More detail about jobs will be covered later in this class. Using the F16 - Work with disk status function key will process the WRKDSKSBS command. The Work with Disk Status display shows performance and status information about the disk units on the system. It displays the number of units currently on the system, the type of each disk unit, the size of disk space, whether the disk is currently on the system, the percentage of disk space used, and other statistics about the disk drives.





Uempty





17-15

Instructor Guide

Exercises IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises.

Exercise: Work management using 5250 emulation Exercise: Work management using System i Navigator Exercise: Work management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i

Inform instructor when you have completed your exercises. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 17-8. Exercises

AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to your Student Exercise Guide and perform the lab Work management using 5250 emulation, and then perform the GUI exercise or exercises of your choice.





Uempty





17-17

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: The name of the default job description is QDFTJOBD. 2. The command used to display a job description is: a. b. c. d.

DSPUSRPRF WKRJOBD DSPJOBD DSPOBJD

3. True or False: The library list is one of the parameters specified in a user profile.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: The name of the default job description is QDFTJOBD. The answer is True.

2. The command used to display a job description is: a. b. c. d.


The answer is DSPJOBD.

3. True or False: The library list is one of the parameters specified in a user profile. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





17-19

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use the command to display a job description Identify which job description is used by a user profile List the subsystems that are active Use the command to display system status information



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





17-21

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 18. Job control using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the printed reports these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system operator's job.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Explain how to use Work with User Jobs command • Explain how to use the Work with Active Jobs command • Explain how to submit jobs and the commands used to display these jobs • Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and the options available for these jobs • Explain how to schedule jobs • Explain how and when to end a job abnormally • Explain how and when to disconnect a user job



Unit 18. Job control using 5250 emulation


18-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to use the Work with User Jobs command Explain how to use the Work with Active Jobs command Explain how to submit jobs and the commands used to display these jobs Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and the options available for these jobs Explain how to schedule jobs Explain how and when to end a job abnormally Explain how and when to disconnect a user job



AS248.1

Notes: Monitoring includes such functions as: • Locating information about a job, whether it is on a job queue, is active, or has spool files on an output queue • Determining the status of jobs and printed output • Displaying detailed information about a job Controlling includes such functions as: • • • • •

Changing the way a job is or will be processed Holding, ending, or releasing a job (active or on a queue) Holding, deleting, or releasing printed output Answering system messages sent to a job Moving printed output from one output queue to another





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens, select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.




18-3

Instructor Guide

Work with User Jobs command IBM i


Figure 18-2. Work with User Jobs command

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command allows you to work with a list of selected user jobs. Depending on the values you specify on the STATUS, ASTLVL, and JOBTYPE parameters, you can use this command to perform the following tasks: • From the Work with Signed-On Users display, you can select options to send messages to or sign off users who are signed on to the system. You can also select options to display messages or display details about signed-on users. To show the Work with Signed-On Users display, specify STATUS(*ACTIVE), ASTLVL(*BASIC), and JOBTYPE(*INTERACT). • From the Work with Jobs display, you can show the status of all batch jobs on the system. You can select options to hold, end, or release the jobs shown. You can also select options to work with printer output or display messages. To show the Work with Jobs display, specify any value for the STATUS parameter, ASTLVL(*BASIC), and JOBTYPE(*BATCH).





Uempty

• From the Work with User Jobs display, you can show the status of user jobs running on the system and the status of user jobs that are on job queues or output queues. You can select options to change, hold, end, work with, release, or disconnect the jobs shown. You can also select options to work with spooled files and display messages.




18-5

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Work with User Jobs display IBM i


Figure 18-3. Work with User Jobs display

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with User Jobs display shows the names and status information of user jobs running in the system and the status of user jobs that are on job queues or output queues. You can type an option next to one or more jobs. When the Enter key is pressed, the function associated with the number you typed is performed for that job. If you press the Enter key without typing any other data, you are returned to the previous menu or display. You can type parameters on the command line if you want to override the defaults for the options you typed. Typing parameters is valid only if you used one of the options. For example, you must type 4 next to one or more jobs and, if you want to, type OPTION(*IMMED) to change from the default, OPTION(*CNTRLD).




18-7

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Working with Signed-On Users IBM i


Figure 18-4. Working with Signed-On Users

AS248.1

Notes: To see the display in the visual, enter the command: WRKUSRJOB USER(*ALL) STATUS(*ACTIVE) JOBTYPE(*INTERACT) ASTLVL(*BASIC) An easy way to work with and control users who are signed on to the Power is by running the WRKUSRJOB command shown on the top of this visual. This command brings up the Work with Signed-On Users display. From this display, you can send a user a message, sign the user off the system, display details about the user (for example, user name and description and display station name and description), and display a message that requires a reply from a user. This display can make working with users a lot easier.




18-9

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Work with Active Jobs IBM i


Figure 18-5. Work with Active Jobs

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command allows you to work with performance and status information for the active jobs in the system. The sequence of jobs can be changed with the Sequence (SEQ) parameter or through operations on the display. Other parameters allow the selection of jobs to be shown on the display. The selection parameters can also be changed by operations on the display. The Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) display shows the performance and status information for jobs that are currently active on the system. All information is gathered on a job basis. The jobs are ordered on the basis of the subsystem in which they are running. Jobs that run in a subsystem (autostart jobs, interactive jobs, batch jobs, readers, and writers) are alphabetized by job name and indented under the subsystem monitor job field with which they are associated. subsystem monitors (with the jobs in the subsystem grouped under each monitor job) are alphabetized and presented before system (SYS) jobs. The system jobs (SCPF, QSYSARB, QLUS) are alphabetized by job name and presented following the subsystem monitors and jobs within the subsystems. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



18-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Option 5: Work with Job IBM i


Figure 18-6. Option 5: Work with Job

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Job and the Display Job menus allow you to select options to work with or to change information related to a user job. Information about the following options can be shown regardless of where the job is located in the system (on a job queue, on an output queue, or active): • Job status attributes • Job definition attributes • Spooled file information Information about the following options can be shown only when the job is active: • Job run attributes • Job log information • Call stack information • Job lock information © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



18-13

Instructor Guide

• Library list information • Open file information • File override information • Commitment control status • Communications status • Activation groups • Mutexes • Threads • Media library attributes Note A job is not considered to be in the system until all of its input has been completely read in. Only then is an entry placed on the job queue.





Uempty





18-15

Instructor Guide

Question IBM i

What are some scenarios where you might need to view active jobs in the system or currently signed on users?



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to use the type text on screen tool to list some scenarios where they would need to view active jobs or currently signed on users. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands and select two or three students to list some scenarios where they would need to view active jobs or currently signed on users. Sample Answers: • In order to perform a Power down of your system (to see who is active and to view what work is currently being done) • To perform system maintenance • Need to place Power in dedicated state • Need to perform a Backup / Restore of your system Additional information — Transition statement —




18-17

Instructor Guide

OL29C

Submitting a batch job IBM i


Figure 18-8. Submitting a batch job

AS248.1

Notes: You already know how to start an interactive job; all you do is sign on to a workstation. To start (or submit) a batch job, you use the Submit Job (SBMJOB) command; however, batch jobs are usually assigned to menu options for an application. There are several ways to assign characteristics to a batch job, such as which job queue it is submitted to, what priority it is assigned, to which output queue its associated files go to and at what priority, and which print device should be used. If you use the SBMJOB command, there are parameters for each of these characteristics. There is also a parameter to specify which job description to use. Unless specified explicitly on the command, the submitted job gets its characteristics from the job description. Which job description you should use might depend on the user profile of the user submitting the job. If nothing is specified, the system uses the job description specified in the user profile, QDFTJOBD. This default job description specifies that batch jobs should be submitted to the job queue, QBATCH in the QGPL library. This job queue runs its jobs in either the QBATCH or the QBASE subsystem, depending on how your Power is set up.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Mention that the job queue determines how many jobs can run at the same time. Additional information — Transition statement —




18-19

Instructor Guide

Work with Submitted Jobs IBM i


Figure 18-9. Work with Submitted Jobs

AS248.1

Notes: As the command name implies, the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command can be used only to display and work with batch jobs. It is easiest to use this command to check on the status of your batch jobs. The WRKSBMJOB command displays those jobs submitted from: *USER

The user ID associated with the job running the WRKSBMJOB command

*WRKSTN

The workstation running the WRKSBMJOB command

*JOB

The job running the WRKSBMJOB command

The following information is shown for each batch job: • The job name • The user profile of the person who submitted the job • The type and status of the job • The last system function that the job used 18-20 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command displays information and permits operator control of batch jobs. While this command provides considerably fewer selection criteria than the WRKUSRJOB command, which will be discussed later in this unit, it does have valid uses. Operators who merely need to work with their own batch jobs (regardless of where they were submitted) or with jobs submitted at their current workstation (regardless of who might have submitted those jobs) should generally use the WRKSBMJOB command with the appropriate value specified for the Jobs submitted from parameter. Additional information — Transition statement —




18-21

Instructor Guide

Work with Job Queue IBM i


Figure 18-10. Work with Job Queue

AS248.1

Notes: As a system operator, you can work with all submitted jobs. The names of all job queues on a system are displayed when you select the menu options illustrated in this visual or use the Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) command. For each queue listed, the number of jobs waiting in that queue, the status of the queue, and the subsystem that runs jobs placed on that queue are listed. An entire job queue (and all jobs on it) can be controlled from this display by entering the appropriate options. Option 3 holds a job queue. No new jobs are started from a job queue that has been held. Any jobs already started from the queue are not affected. Additional jobs can be submitted to the queue, but, like the ones already there, they do not run until the queue is released. The Hold Job Queue (HLDJOBQ) command can be used to perform the same function. Option 4 deletes the job queue. In order for this to happen, there can be no jobs on it. This option runs the Delete Job Queue (DLTJOBQ) command. Option 5 allows you to see and work with the individual jobs waiting to run from a job queue. This option runs the Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) command.





Uempty

Option 6 releases a held job queue and allows jobs to be restarted from that queue by the associated subsystem. The Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ) command can be used to perform this same function. Option 8: • Allows you to view job scheduled entries for a selected job queue. • Provides schedule information on future jobs that are to be submitted to this job queue. • Runs the Work with Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command. This option is discussed in more detail later in this unit. Option 14 clears all jobs from the job queue. This option causes the Clear Job Queue (CLRJOBQ) command to be run.




18-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — An entire job queue can be held and then released. The Hold Job Queue (HLDJOBQ) and Release Job Queue (RLSJOBQ) commands exist to perform each function directly and should usually be adequate. If several job queues need to be held or released at the same time, it might be easier to issue the WRKJOBQ *ALL command. When the Work with All Job Queues display appears, selecting option 3 or option 6 as appropriate allows the operator to control several job queues at once. The Work with All Job Queues display shown on this visual can also be useful if batch jobs that the operator thinks should be running are not. Because the status (held, released, or changed) of each queue is shown, the operator can easily determine if the reason for the jobs not running is because one or more job queues are held. Additional information — Transition statement — Choosing option 5 for an individual job queue on this display allows the operator to see and work with the jobs on that one job queue, as shown on the next visual.





Uempty

Working with jobs on a job queue IBM i

Work with Job Queue

Queue: QBATCH

Library: QGPL

Status: RLS/SBS

Enter

Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release Change Job (CHGJOB) Opt

Job

Type choices, press Enter. User Number

Priority

Status

Job name . . . . .020836 . . . . . . . . . >QDFTJOBD OPR016 5 User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . >AS2401 OPR016 5 Number . . . ..0208316 . . . . . . . . .>0208316 2 QDFTJOBD Job priority (on JOBQ) . . . . . 2 __ QDFTJOBD OPR016 020834 Output priority (on OUTQ) . . 5 5 Print device . . . . . . . . . . . . .PRT02 Output queue . . . . . . . . . . . .*DEV Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _______ Bottom Run priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . *SAME Parameters for options 2, 3 or command Additional Parameters ===> _______________________________________________________ Job queue job . . . F12=Cancel ........... *SAME F3=Exit F4=Prompt F6=Submit Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ______ Print text . . . . .F24=More . . . . . . . . keys ... *SAME F22=Work with job schedule entries

__ QDFTJOBD

Name, RLS * Name 000000-999999 RLS 0-9, *SAME HLD*SAME 1-9, Name, *SAME, *USRPRF... Name, *SAME, *USRPRF, *DEV... Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB 1-99, *SAME

Name, *SAME Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB More...

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 18-11. Working with jobs on a job queue

AS248.1

Notes: By selecting option 5 from the Work with All Job Queues display or specifying the name of a job queue on the WRKJOBQ command, you can display the status and selection priority of the jobs waiting from a specific job queue. Jobs are listed here in the order in which they were placed on the queue in priority sequence. This is the order in which they are run. Users with *JOBCTL rights in their profile can control the jobs in the queue from this display. As a system operator, you have authority to hold, release, change, or end jobs. To change the attributes for a job before it runs, select option 2. The CHGJOB command prompt is displayed. When the Change Job prompt appears, the full three-part job name is already filled in and cannot be changed. Change the attributes of the job as required, and press Enter. Note that F10 (Additional parameters) is available to allow access to additional attributes. From the Work with Job Queue display, individual jobs can also be held and released or ended. Use option 3 to indicate that a job is to be held. A job held on a job queue remains there but will not be started by the subsystem that is processing jobs on the queue. Use option 6 for a job that is being held to make that job once again eligible to be started. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



18-25

Instructor Guide

Use option 4 to end a job on a job queue. Ending a job means removing it from the system. Once ended, there is no way to restart the job. If you end a job by mistake, a new job with exactly the same attributes as the one that has been ended must be submitted. For that reason, when you end a job on a job queue, you must confirm your selection. Be aware that if you prompt for option 4 from this display, no confirmation display appears. The job is simply ended.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — To work with a job that has been submitted to batch but is not yet active, the operator must first determine which job queue the job was submitted to. If the name of the job queue is not known, you can search multiple queues (one at a time) with option 5 from the Work with All Job Queues display to bring up the upper display on this visual. If the name of the job queue is known, the operator can use system menu options as shown on the prior visual or request prompting for the WRKJOBQ command to display a list of jobs on just that one job queue. No matter how the WRKJOBQ command is prompted, the name of the job queue and, if necessary, the name of its associated library must be entered. Whether option 5 is selected for a particular queue on the Work with All Job Queues display or the WRKJOBQ command is run with a job queue name specified, the result is the same. That job queue, its status, all jobs currently on the queue, and the selection priority and status of each job are displayed. The jobs are listed in the order in which they will be selected to run. To change a job, the operator locates the job, types a 2 to the left of the job name, and presses Enter. The prompt for the CHGJOB command is displayed with the job name already filled in. Now the operator can change the attributes of the job as required. Point out that there are more attributes than are shown and that you should use F10 (Additional parameters) to see and change them. Also discuss holding, releasing, and ending jobs on a job queue. Additional information — Transition statement —




18-27

Instructor Guide

Working with job scheduler IBM i


Figure 18-12. Working with job scheduler

AS248.1

Notes: A standard Job Scheduler is included as part of the operating system. It provides basic scheduling options for your jobs. The Add Job Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command allows you to schedule batch jobs by adding an entry to the job schedule. You can use this command to schedule a batch job to be submitted once or to schedule a batch job to be submitted at regular intervals. The job schedule entry contains all of the information needed to submit the job, including the command the job runs, the job description and user profile under which the job is run, the job queue to which the job is submitted, and the message queue to which messages are sent. At the date and time you specify on this command, the job is submitted to the specified job queue. This command does not guarantee that the job will begin running at the scheduled time, however. The job will not begin running if the job queue is held, not attached to an active subsystem, or if the maximum number of active jobs allowed to run in the subsystem or on the system at one time has been reached.





Uempty

The Work with Job Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command allows you to work with an entry, entries, or generic entries in the job schedule. Each job schedule entry contains the information needed to automatically submit a batch job once or at regularly scheduled intervals. This command shows the Work with Job Schedule Entries display. From the display, you can select options to add, change, remove, hold, or release entries. You can display details of an entry or work with the last job submitted for an entry. You can also select an option to immediately submit a job using the information contained in the job schedule entry.




18-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Working with advanced job scheduler IBM i


Figure 18-13. Working with advanced job scheduler

AS248.1

Notes: The Advanced Job Scheduler, also knows as AJS, provides many more scheduling options than the standard Job scheduler. The AJS is a licensed program product that can be purchased by the customer. The Add Job using Job Scheduler (ADDJOBJS) command allows you to schedule batch jobs by adding an entry to the job schedule. Jobs can be a single job or a member of a group of jobs or an application. You can use this command to schedule a batch job to be submitted once, at a regular interval, and so on, based on the schedule code you specify. You can schedule jobs with user-defined calendars, holiday exception calendars, and fiscal year calendars. The Work with Jobs using Job Scheduler (WRKJOBJS) command allows you to work with a single job, groups of jobs, or all jobs that you have set up in the advanced job scheduler. You can sequence the display by job, by date, or by group. When you select jobs that you want to work with, you are taken to the Work with Jobs display. From this display, you can perform most job related functions.




18-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Ending a user job abnormally IBM i

Work with User Jobs I520DVL2 04/10/08 10:13:12 Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 16=Display message 8=Work with spooled files 13=Disconnect Opt __

Job DSP03

User QSECOFR

Type INTER

-----Status----SYSREQ END

Function PGM-QMNSYSRQ

End Job Abnormal (ENDJOBABN)

Parameters or command ===> ENDJOBABN

Type choices, press Enter.

F4

Job name...................................... User........................................... Number......................................

dsp03 qsecofr 020813

Name Name 000000-999999


Figure 18-14. Ending a user job abnormally

AS248.1

Notes: If you have tried to end a job immediately and it is still active after 10 minutes, you might have to use the End Job Abnormal (ENDJOBABN) command. This command is not available as an option on a list display. It must be entered as a command. You cannot use the ENDJOBABN command unless a user's job has been ended immediately and is still active after 10 minutes. In order to run the ENDJOBABN command, you must be signed on as QPGMR, QSYSOPR, or QSRV or have *ALLOBJ authority. You must also know the full three-part job name of the job you want to end. Use option 5 on the WRKUSRJOB display to determine the full job name. After ending the Work with Jobs menu, prompt for the ENDJOBABN command on any command line (on this visual, the ENDJOBABN command is in the process of being entered on the Work with User Jobs display) and enter the recorded job name.




18-33

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — It can happen, if rarely, that a job does not end no matter what the operator does. If you have tried to end a job immediately and it is still active after ten minutes, the End Job Abnormal (ENDJOBABN) command can be used to end it. The operator needs to find the three-part job name (job name, profile name, and six-digit sequential number) shown at the top of the Work with Jobs display and manually record it. The operator can find the three-part job name by entering option 5 on the Work with User Jobs display. After recording the job name, you must return to a display that allows command entry. Prompt for the ENDJOBABN command, type the full job name, and press Enter. It might still take some time for the job to end, but it does end. Point out to the students that on the next IPL, a message indicates that the last system termination was abnormal. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Disconnecting a user job IBM i

Order entry

User job

Sign on

Disconnect

User job

User... Password...

Reconnect automatically at sign-on

Order Entry

User job


Figure 18-15. Disconnecting a user job

AS248.1

Notes: Option 13 on the Work with User Jobs display runs the Disconnect Job (DSCJOB) command, which disconnects an interactive job that is not currently held. When you select option 13 for one or more jobs: • The job information is saved. • The sign-on display appears on the user's workstation. • The job is resumed if the same user later signs on to the same workstation. The DSCJOB command is not allowed for a pass-through job. In order to disconnect a pass-through job, the user must press the System Request key and return to the source system. To run option 13, you must have *JOBCTL authority.




18-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The disconnected job is ended if the time interval in the system value QDSCJOBITV (time interval before disconnected jobs end) is exceeded. The shipped value for QDSCJOBITV is 240 minutes. The following restrictions apply when you are working with the DSCJOB command: • A job being disconnected must be an interactive job. • A job which is being held cannot be disconnected. • A pass-through job cannot be disconnected unless you have used the system request to return the source system from the pass-through target. • You must have *JOBCTL authority to disconnect a job. • A job cannot be disconnected if PC Organizer is active. If the user of the disconnected job signs on to another workstation, a new interactive job is started. For the disconnected job to be resumed, the same user must sign back on to the same workstation. It might not seem important to your students at this point in their training, but it is still worth pointing out that if a disconnected job holds any locks when it is disconnected, those locks remain held either until the job is resumed and the locks are released or until the job is ended. We have talked about how to submit a job and how to monitor and control jobs. Now let us talk about the printed output of those jobs. Let us look at some commands to control printed output. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Job control using 5250 emulation




AS248.1

Notes:




18-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select which of the following types of jobs? a. b. c. d.

Active Job queue Output queue All of these

2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following options will show you all of the characteristics of a job? a. b. c. d.

Option 2 - Change Option 5 Work with Option 7 Display messages Option 8 Work with spool files

3. True or False: You can use option 3 Hold, on the Work with Active Jobs display, to hold a subsystem. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




18-39

Instructor Guide



1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select which of the following types of jobs? a. b. c. d.

Active Job queue Output queue All of these

The answer is All of these.

2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following options will show you all of the characteristics of a job? a. b. c. d. e.

Option 2 - Change Option 5 Work with Option 7 Display messages Option 8 Work with spool files The answer is Option 5 Work with.

3. True or False: You can use option 3 Hold, on the Work with Active Jobs display, to hold a subsystem. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to use the Work with User Jobs command Explain how to use the Work with Active Jobs command Explain how to submit jobs and the commands used to display these jobs Explain how to use the Work with Job Queue command and the options available for these jobs Explain how to schedule jobs Explain how and when to end a job abnormally Explain how and when to disconnect a user job



AS248.1

Notes:




18-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 19. Job control using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the printed reports these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system operator's job. This unit will detail the windows and navigation used to display these types of information when working with the System i Navigator interface.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Navigate to display your user jobs • Navigate to display all active jobs on the system • Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this interface • Navigate to display the properties for a job • Navigate to display information for the active subsystems • Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a scheduler



Unit 19. Job control using System i Navigator


19-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Navigate to display your user jobs Navigate to display all active jobs on the system Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this interface Navigate to display the properties for a job Navigate to display information for the active subsystems Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a scheduler



AS248.1

Notes: Monitoring includes such functions as: • Locating information about a job, whether it is on a job queue, is active, or has spool files on an output queue • Determining the status of jobs and printed output • Displaying detailed information about a job Controlling includes such functions as: • • • • •

Changing the way a job is or will be processed Holding, ending, or releasing a job (active or on a queue) Holding, deleting, or releasing printed output Answering system messages sent to a job Moving printed output from one output queue to another





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of System i Navigator for the next seven visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator for the next seven visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID.




19-3

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations > Jobs IBM i


Figure 19-2. Basic Operations > Jobs

AS248.1

Notes: In this example, Jobs under Basic Operations is selected. By default, this will show you a list of your jobs. You can work with your jobs on a specific Power i server. What can you do with jobs? • Tailor the Jobs display: -

Change whose jobs are displayed (Customize > Include) Change which columns are displayed (Customize > Columns) Size columns Sort a list or column

• Display the job log (right-click the job, and select Job Log) • Hold a job (right-click the job, and select Hold) • Delete a job (right-click the job, and select Delete)





Uempty





19-5

Instructor Guide

Work Management > Active Jobs IBM i


Figure 19-3. Work Management > Active Jobs

AS248.1

Notes: In this example, Active Jobs under Work Management, is selected. Active jobs refer to jobs that have started running but have not yet completed running. Active jobs do not include jobs that are on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that have completed processing but are waiting for a spooled file to be printed. Following are some characteristics of an active job: • • • •

Contains running code Has a call stack Has objects locked Has the status of an active job, for example, running or waiting for (x)

Controlling work in the Power is performed mainly at the job level. Most commands and APIs operate against the entire job. Inactive jobs are jobs on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that have completed processing but are waiting for a printer output file (spooled files) to be printed.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Note The columns being displayed on this panel have been customized for active jobs using the F12 key to customize columns function.





19-7

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Find IBM i


Figure 19-4. Active Jobs: Find

AS248.1

Notes: To search for a specific active job, click Active Jobs > Edit > Find... from the pull-down menu. Use the Find dialog to search a list for a string of characters. The Find dialog remains open and stays on top of the list being searched until you click Close. This allows you to do multiple searches. You can press F3 to do another search using the current Find options.





Uempty





19-9

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs > Customize this View IBM i


Figure 19-5. Active Jobs > Customize this View

AS248.1

Notes: You can monitor jobs on the system. If you are using 5250 emulation, type the Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command to display the active jobs. If you are using System i Navigator, right-click Active Jobs, and then click Customize this view > Columns. You can view Work Management panels and lists more easily and efficiently by customizing them. By taking advantage of these customization options, you can improve performance. For example, by subsetting the list of objects for a particular library using the Include dialog, you can limit the number of objects that must be retrieved from the host and displayed in System i Navigator. The methods for customizing Work Management panels are: • Sort: Specify how objects are sorted in the list using the Sort dialog. • Include: Limit the list of objects to those that meet the criteria you specify using the Include dialog. • Columns: Specify the columns of information that are displayed in the list and the order in which they are displayed using the Columns dialog. 19-10 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

• Shortcuts: Quickly access lists you have customized using Include and Columns. Note The columns that you select can affect the performance of displaying the list of jobs. While every single column displayed can have a slight performance effect, some columns have additional performance considerations that might result in a more noticeable performance difference, particularly when the list to be displayed contains a large number of jobs.




19-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Customize this View > Include (F11) IBM i


Figure 19-6. Customize this View > Include (F11)

AS248.1

Notes: Include specific objects in the list: For jobs and job queues, you can determine which objects should be displayed in a list. For example, you can change the Active Jobs list to include only the active jobs for a particular user. This action allows you to limit the list of objects displayed in System i Navigator to those that meet the criteria you specify. Use the Active Jobs list to find jobs and job queues more quickly and efficiently, especially for large systems with a large number of jobs. To customize the contents of a list: 1. Select the Work Management branch you would like to customize. In this example, it was Active Jobs. 2. From the View menu, select Customize this View > Include and so on. (The shortcut is to select the branch and press F11.) 3. In the Include window, specify the criteria for the objects you want to include in the list. 4. Click OK.




19-13

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Customize this View > Columns (F12) IBM i


Figure 19-7. Customize this View > Columns (F12)

AS248.1

Notes: Specify which columns to display: You can customize Work Management to specify which columns of information are displayed in a list and the order in which those columns are displayed. To customize columns: 1. Select the Work Management branch you would like to customize. In this example, we are working with Active Jobs. 2. From the View menu, select Customize this View > Columns. (The shortcut is to select the branch and press F12.) All of the columns that are currently displayed are listed under Current columns. Any additional columns that can be displayed are listed under Available columns. 3. Select the columns you want displayed, and use the Add Before and Add After buttons to add them to the Current columns list in the order you want them displayed. To remove or reorder a column from the Current columns list, select the column and click Remove. 4. Click OK. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



19-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Qualified job: Name, Current User, Number IBM i


Figure 19-8. Qualified job: Name, Current User, Number

AS248.1

Notes: The columns have been arranged from the default view to show the complete job identification, that is, the qualified job name, in the System i Navigator view of active jobs.




19-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — You can discontinue the application share or live demo after this visual. For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U19-F09 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next two visuals. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U19-F09 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U19-F09 on your PC place of the next two visuals while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.





Uempty

Job Properties (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 19-9. Job Properties (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Notice the actions you can take for an interactive job. Job attributes from the job description and user profile appear in the properties of a job. In order to display the job information in a green screen environment, type the WRKACTJOB command, and then the option 5 (Work with) in front of the job you are interested in.




19-19

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Job Properties (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 19-10. Job Properties (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: All of the attributes for a job can be displayed using this notebook. If you have the proper authority, you will be allowed to change some of the job attributes. • The General tab shows the name of the job description that the job is using and the subsystem that is controlling the job. • The Performance tab shows the memory pool that the job is using and job performance statistics. • The Printer Output tab allows you to view and change properties that affect the printing output for the job. • The Messages tab shows how messages that are sent to and from this job are to be handled. • The Job Log tab describes how much detail is to be kept in the job log. • The Server tab allows you to view information about server jobs. For each server job, you can see the type of server, the job user identity, and, if available, the client IP address. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



19-21

Instructor Guide

• The Security tab identifies the user profile for the job. • The Date/Time tab allows you to view and edit settings related to system time. • The International tab allows you to view or change properties related to text and character format and the language and country associated with the job. • The Threads tab allows you to view or change information related to threads for a job that is currently active or on a job queue. • Use the Resources tab to view information about system resources, such as memory pool and disk pool group for the job, as well as information on memory and processor affinity. • The Other tab allows you to view or change the accounting code, the decision to keep DDM connections active, the switch settings, and the device recovery action.





Uempty





19-23

Instructor Guide

Subsystems IBM i


Figure 19-11. Subsystems

AS248.1

Notes: The subsystem is where work is processed on the Power i server. All jobs, with the exception of system jobs, run within subsystems. A subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through which the system coordinates work flow and resource use. The system can contain several subsystems, all operating independently of each other. One subsystem can be set up to handle only interactive jobs, while another subsystem handles only batch jobs. subsystems can also be designed to handle many types of work. A subsystem can be either active or inactive. An active subsystem is one that has been started. An inactive subsystem is one that either has not yet been started or has been stopped. The controlling subsystem is the interactive subsystem that starts automatically when the system starts, and it is the subsystem through which the system operator controls the system during system startup. A subsystem job is a job created by the operating system to manage resources and start, control, and end jobs.





Uempty





19-25

Instructor Guide

Subsystems > Properties IBM i


Figure 19-12. Subsystems > Properties

AS248.1

Notes: The runtime characteristics of a subsystem are defined in an object called a subsystem description. A subsystem description acts as a set of instructions telling the subsystem how much work enters a subsystem, how and where it enters, and which resources the subsystem uses to perform the work. A subsystem is created when a subsystem description is defined or created. An active subsystem takes on the simple name of the subsystem description.





Uempty





19-27

Instructor Guide

Job queues IBM i


Figure 19-13. Job queues

AS248.1

Notes: To see the active job queues, drill down through Work Management > Job Queues > Active Job Queues. To see a specific job queue, such as Qbatch, right-click it and select Explore from the Context menu that appears.





Uempty





19-29

Instructor Guide

Explore Qbatch job queue IBM i


Figure 19-14. Explore Qbatch job queue

AS248.1

Notes: On the visual in this screen capture, you see jobs that are on the job queue Qbatch. • There are three jobs on this queue. • Highlight and right-click a job. • This will show you what you can do to manage jobs on a job queue. A job can be moved to another queue by selecting Move or by dragging and dropping.





Uempty





19-31

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Job control using System i Navigator




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





19-33

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which branch under Basic Operations will show details for your active jobs? a. b. c. d.

Messages Printer Output Printers Jobs

2. Which branch under Work Management will show details for all of the active jobs on the system? a. b. c. d.

Active Jobs Server Jobs Subsystems Memory Pools

3. True or False: The Active Jobs branch will basically show the same information as running the Work with Active Jobs WRKACTJOB command. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. Which branch under Basic Operations will show details for your active jobs? a. Messages b. Printer Output c. Printers d. Jobs The answer is Jobs.

2. Which branch under Work Management will show details for all of the active jobs on the system? a. Active Jobs b. Server Jobs c. Subsystems d. Memory Pools The answer is Active Jobs.

3. True or False: The Active Jobs branch will basically show the same information as running the Work with Active Jobs WRKACTJOB command. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





19-35

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Navigate to display your user jobs Navigate to display all active jobs on the system Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this interface Navigate to display the properties for a job Navigate to display information for the active subsystems Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a scheduler



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





19-37

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 20. Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the printed reports these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system operator's job. This unit will detail the windows and navigation used to display these types of information when working with the Systems Director Navigator for IBM i interface.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Navigate to display your user jobs • Navigate to display all active jobs on the system • Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this interface • Navigate to display the properties for a job • Navigate to display information for the active subsystems • Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a scheduler



Unit 20. Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


20-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Navigate to display your user jobs Navigate to display all active jobs on the system Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this interface Navigate to display the properties for a job Navigate to display information for the active subsystems Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a scheduler



AS248.1

Notes: Monitoring includes such functions as: • Locating information about a job, whether it is on a job queue, is active, or has spool files on an output queue • Determining the status of jobs and printed output • Displaying detailed information about a job Controlling includes such functions as: • Changing the way a job is or will be processed • Holding, ending, or releasing a job (active or on a queue) • Holding, deleting, or releasing printed output • Answering system messages sent to a job • Moving printed output from one output queue to another





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of Systems Director Navigator for the next two visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open a Web browser and enter the URL of the Systems Director Navigator logon screen. 2. Logon with your instructor ID and password. 3. Select the share applications or desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 4. Once the application share window opens, select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of Systems Director Navigator for the next two visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a Web browser and enter the URL of the Systems Director Navigator logon screen. 2. Logon with your instructor ID and password.




20-3

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations: User jobs IBM i


Figure 20-2. Basic Operations: User jobs

AS248.1

Notes: In this example, User Jobs under Basic Operations is selected. By default, this will show you a list of your jobs. You can work with your jobs on a specific System i server. What can you do with jobs? • Tailor the Jobs display: - Change whose jobs are displayed (by using Select Action * > Include) - Change which columns are displayed (by using Select Action > Table Actions > Columns) - Sizing columns - Sorting a list or column • Display the job log (right-click the job, and select Job Log) • Hold a job (right-click the job, and select Hold) • Delete a job (right-click the job, and select Delete) If you chose any action from Select Action menu like Include to execute, you have to click the Go button.





Uempty





20-5

Instructor Guide

User jobs: Include IBM i


Figure 20-3. User jobs: Include

AS248.1

Notes: On the jobs -include function pane, you can specify criteria like job name , user name or job number to specify what will be displayed. • For the user parameter, you can specify either: default Current signed-on user , a specific user name, or use the browse button to see all users and then choose from a list. • For the job parameter, you can include by either Active jobs or Jobs on job queues; which is the default). • You can also include only those jobs on a particular job queue. Note This filter will be active until you change it. What is being displayed is described on top of user jobs screen.





Uempty





20-7

Instructor Guide

Work Management: Active Jobs IBM i


Figure 20-4. Work Management: Active Jobs

AS248.1

Notes: In this example, Active Jobs under Work Management is selected. Active jobs refer to jobs that have started running but have not yet completed running. Active jobs do not include jobs that are on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that have completed processing but are waiting for a spooled file to be printed. Following are some characteristics of an active job: • Contains running code • Has a call stack • Has objects locked • Has the status of an active job, for example, running or waiting for (x) Controlling work in the system is performed mainly at the job level. Most commands and APIs operate against the entire job. Inactive jobs are jobs on a job queue waiting to be started or jobs that have completed processing but are waiting for a printer output file (spooled files) to be printed. 20-8 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





20-9

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Configure columns IBM i


Figure 20-5. Active Jobs: Configure columns

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Configure Columns from the Select Action pull-down menu to configure the columns being displayed on Active Jobs screen.





Uempty





20-11

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Filter IBM i


Figure 20-6. Active Jobs: Filter

AS248.1

Notes: This GUI allows you to search for a specific entry. In this example you could search for a specific active job. To invoke this function: 1. Click the Show filter row icon (it is the third icon from the left). Once this icon is selected and active, its function changes to Hide filter row. This is a toggle icon to turn on or off this function. - Turning on this function changes the screen. For each column displayed, you can now specify a filer to search the contents of that column. 2. Choose the column on which you will search, and click Filter for that column. In this example, we are searching the Current User column. 3. This will display the window captured in the visual. Click the down arrow for Condition and choose one of the following: - Contains - Starts with - Ends with 20-12 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

4. Fill in the text designating your search value. For example, you could specify Starts with AS24. (Notice you do not need to end with an asterisk (*).) - That will present an updated window with entries that meet your search criteria. 5. To return to the original window, click Clear all filters. Alternatively, you can click Close.




20-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — You can discontinue the application share or live demo after this visual. Additional information — Review student notes for detailed instructions on how to use this function. Transition statement —





Uempty

Active Jobs > Customize your window IBM i


Figure 20-7. Active Jobs > Customize your window

AS248.1

Notes: You can monitor jobs on the system. If you are using 5250 emulation, type the Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command to display the active jobs. If you are using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i, click the down arrow for Select action, choose your criteria, and click Go. You can view Work Management panels and lists more easily and efficiently by customizing them. By taking advantage of these customization options, you can improve performance. For example, by subsetting the list of objects for a particular library using Include, you can limit the number of objects that must be retrieved from the host and displayed. The methods for customizing Work Management panels are: • Columns: Specify the columns of information that are displayed in the list and the order in which they are displayed using the Columns dialog. • Sort: Specify how objects are sorted in the list using the Sort dialog.




20-15

Instructor Guide

• Include: Limit the list of objects to those that meet the criteria you specify using the Include dialog. Note The columns you select can affect the performance of displaying the list of jobs. While every single column displayed can have a slight performance effect, some columns have additional performance considerations that might result in a more noticeable performance difference, particularly when the list to be displayed contains a large number of jobs.





Uempty





20-17

Instructor Guide

Customize this view > Include IBM i


Figure 20-8. Customize this view > Include

AS248.1

Notes: Include specific objects in the list: For jobs and job queues, you can determine which objects should be displayed in a list. For example, you can change the Active Jobs list to include only the active jobs for a particular user. This action allows you to limit the list of objects displayed in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to those that meet the criteria you specify. Use the Active Jobs list to find jobs and job queues more quickly and efficiently, especially for large systems with a large number of jobs. To customize the contents of Active Jobs: 1. In this example, we have selected Work Management then Active Jobs. 2. Click the down arrow for Select function, click Include, and then click Go. 3. This will display the tab in the visual. 4. Fill in your criteria for the Include tab. 5. Click OK.





Uempty





20-19

Instructor Guide

Customize this view > Columns IBM i


Figure 20-9. Customize this view > Columns

AS248.1

Notes: Specify which columns to display: You can customize Work Management to specify which columns of information are displayed in a list and the order in which those columns are displayed. To customize columns: 1. In this example, we have selected Work Management then Active Jobs. 2. Click the down arrow for Select function, click Columns, and then click Go. All of the columns that are currently displayed are listed under Current columns. Any additional columns that can be displayed are listed under Available columns. 3. Select the columns you want displayed, and use the Add Before and Add After buttons to add them to the Current columns list in the order you want them displayed. To remove or reorder a column from the Current columns list, select the column and click Remove. 4. Click OK. 20-20 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





20-21

Instructor Guide

Customized to show qualified job name IBM i


Figure 20-10. Customized to show qualified job name

AS248.1

Notes: In this visual, the columns for Active Jobs have been arranged from the default view to show the fully qualified job name.





Uempty





20-23

Instructor Guide

Job properties (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 20-11. Job properties (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Notice the actions you can take for an interactive job when you click the arrow. Job attributes from the job description and user profile appear in the properties of a job. To display job information in a green screen environment, you would use the Work Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command and then option 5 (Work with) for the job of interest.





Uempty





20-25

Instructor Guide

Job properties (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 20-12. Job properties (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: All of the attributes for a job can be displayed using this notebook. If you have the proper authority, you will be allowed to change some of the job attributes. • The General tab shows the name of the job description that the job is using and the subsystem that is controlling the job. • The Performance tab shows the run priority, time slice, used CPU and temporary storage usage and job performance statistics. • The Printer Output tab allows you to view and change properties that affect the printing output for the job. • The Messages tab shows how messages that are sent to and from this job are to be handled. • The Job Log tab describes how much detail is to be kept in the job log. • The Server tab allows you to view information about server jobs. For each server job, you can see the type of server, the job user identity, and, if available, the client IP address. 20-26 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

• The Security tab identifies the user profile for the job. • The Date/Time tab allows you to view and edit settings related to system time. • The International tab allows you to view or change properties related to text and character format and the language and country associated with the job. • The Threads tab allows you to view or change information related to threads for a job that is currently active or on a job queue. • Use the Resources tab to view information about system resources, such as memory pool and disk pool group for the job, as well as information on memory and processor affinity. • The Other tab allows you to view or change the accounting code, the decision to keep DDM connections active, the switch settings, and the device recovery action.




20-27

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Subsystems IBM i


Figure 20-13. Subsystems

AS248.1

Notes: The subsystem is where work is processed. All jobs, with the exception of system jobs, run within subsystems. A subsystem is a single, predefined operating environment through which the system coordinates work flow and resource use. The system can contain several subsystems, all operating independently of each other. One subsystem can be set up to handle only interactive jobs, while another subsystem handles only batch jobs. Subsystems can also be designed to handle many types of work. A subsystem can be either active or inactive. An active subsystem is one that has been started. An inactive subsystem is one that either has not yet been started or has been stopped. The controlling subsystem is the interactive subsystem that starts automatically when the system starts, and it is the subsystem through which the system operator controls the system during system startup. A subsystem job is a job created by the operating system to manage resources and start, control, and end jobs.




20-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Subsystems > Properties IBM i


Figure 20-14. Subsystems > Properties

AS248.1

Notes: The run-time characteristics of a subsystem are defined in an object called a subsystem description. A subsystem description acts as a set of instructions telling the subsystem how much work enters a subsystem, how and where it enters, and which resources the subsystem uses to perform the work. A subsystem is created when a subsystem description is defined or created. An active subsystem takes on the simple name of the subsystem description.




20-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Active Job Queues IBM i


Figure 20-15. Active Job Queues

AS248.1

Notes: To see the window on this visual, select Active Job Queues on the Work Management tab. To see the jobs in a specific job queue, such as Qbatch, click the arrow and select Jobs to see the window on the next page.




20-33

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Explore Qbatch job queue IBM i


Figure 20-16. Explore Qbatch job queue

AS248.1

Notes: On the visual in this screen capture, you see jobs that are on the job queue Qbatch. • In this example, there is one job on this queue. • Click the arrow for your job to see the drop-down menu. This will show you what you can do to manage jobs on a job queue.




20-35

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i


Exercise: Job control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM I



AS248.1

Notes:




20-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display information relating to your jobs on the system. 2. The Active Jobs link is available under which of the following tasks in Systems Director Navigator? a. b. c. d.

Basic Operations Work Management Configuration and Service Users and Groups

3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems running on your system? a. b. c. d.

Basic Operations Work Management Configuration and Service Users and Groups © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




20-39

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display information relating to your jobs on the system. The answer is True.

2. The Active jobs link is available under which of the following tasks in Systems Director Navigator? a. Basic Operations b. Work Management c. Configuration and Service d. Users and Groups The answer is Work Management.

3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems running on your system? a. Basic Operations b. Work Management c. Configuration and Service d. Users and Groups The answer is Work Management. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Navigate to display your user jobs Navigate to display all active jobs on the system Customize the windows and data displayed as you navigate this interface Navigate to display the properties for a job Navigate to display information for the active subsystems Navigate to display information about jobs that have been put on a scheduler



AS248.1

Notes:




20-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 21. Print concepts Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about Monitoring and controlling the printed reports known as spool files on the Power is one of the most important aspects of a system operator's job. In this unit, we will discuss the concepts you need to know to understand how printing works on this system.


Describe how the printing process works Explain what an output queue is Explain how an output queue is created Explain the decision process the system uses to determine where to send your printed output • List what you can do with your output • Explain what a print writer is and the function it performs



Unit 21. Print concepts


21-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Describe how the printing process works Explain what an output queue is Explain how an output queue is created Explain the decision process the system uses to determine where to send your printed output List what you can do with your output Explain what a print writer is and the function it performs



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — You should create a printer emulation session for the students to use in the exercise. Name the printer “AS24PRT” and give the printer name to the students before starting the exercise. Additional information — Instructor should create a printer emulation session named AS24PRT. This emulation session will be used by the students in the next exercise. Inform the students of this name that they can use in the exercise. Transition statement —




21-3

Instructor Guide

IBM i printing process IBM i

Application program

Overrides Printer file Job description User profile Device description System values

Output data Spooled file

Output queue

Print writer Data stream

Device description

Printer © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 21-2. IBM i printing process

AS248.1

Notes: The following steps offer a high-level overview of the IBM i printing process: 1. The printing process starts when: a. An application program runs. The application program creates output data. The output data is based on the application program and information contained in the printer file. b. A user runs a command that generates output data and sends it to a spooled file instead of the display. 2. When performing work on the system, the end user can specify: a. If print spooling is selected, the output data is placed in a spooled file, and the spooled file is placed in an output queue. b. If direct printing is selected, the output data is sent directly to the printer. 3. The destination of the output data is based on values stored in several printing elements, such as overrides that may be in place, a print file, the job description, the 21-4 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

user profile, workstation description, or system values. Output queues are used to manage spooled files. 4. The printer writer program included in IBM i supports a variety of printer data streams. Print Services Facility for IBM i provides additional function that provides support for the Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS). Each printer must have a printer device description. The printer device description contains a configuration description of the printer. Printers can be attached by a variety of attachment methods. 5. A remote writer allows you to route spooled files from an output queue on your system to another system.




21-5

Instructor Guide






Uempty

How are output queues created? IBM i

Printer description is created PRT01

PRT01 output queue

CRTOUTQ command

QPPRINT QEZJOBLOG

User created

System supplied © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 21-3. How are output queues created?

AS248.1

Notes: An output queue is an object. An output queue contains printer output waiting to be printed. This printer output is also called a spooled file. There can be many output queues, each containing spooled files from many different jobs and users. An output queue can be created whenever: • A device description for a printer is created. An output queue is automatically created at the same time a printer description is created. An output queue is created for each printer configured on the system. The output queue name is the same as the printer name. • There are several output queues supplied as part of i. When the Power is configured for the first time, QPRINT, QEZJOBLOG, and so forth, are created. • User created output queues can be created by Power implementers with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command.




21-7

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Why did the output end up there? IBM i

(2) Printer device file SPOOL(*YES) OUTQ(name or *JOB) (1) Overrides command

(3) Job description OUTQ(*USRPRF)

(4) User profile OUTQ(*WRKSTN)

(5) Device description PRTDEV(*SYSVAL) OUTQ(*DEV)

(6) System value QPRTDEV(PRT01) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 21-4. Why did the output end up there?

AS248.1

Notes: Work management sets up and maintains information about each job. Among the many pieces of information kept for each job is what output queue will be used for printed output. This is the process used by the system to determine where a user’s output is sent. As each job is started, work management checks in the following order to determine where your printed output will be sent until an output queue is selected. 1. If overrides have been put in place by entering a command or through programming, this will determine the attributes for your printed jobs. The command used to implement overrides is the Override with Printer File (OVRPRTF) command. 2. A printer device file is an object created by the application programmer and is incorporated into the application. A printer device file is used by a programmer to identify the characteristics that will be used to generate a spooled file. It will define things like the printer device used and the spooling requirements; it does not contain data.




21-9

Instructor Guide

3. A job description is an object that specifies the attributes for a user’s job, such as how and where a user’s work will be processed. 4. A user profile identifies a user on the system. One of the values that can be set is where a user’s printed output will be sent. 5. A device description is used to identify the display device being used by the user. It can also specify which printer is used when a user is working from this display. 6. System values are used to define how things will work on your system. The system value QPRTDEV is used to define the system default printer.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — With so many output queues, how does the spool-intercept function determine which output queue is to be used to point to any given report? Each printed report must have an associated printer device file. • It is from this printer device file that IBM i determines the attributes of the printed report (lines per inch, characters per inch, form type, number of copies, and so on). One of the attributes that can be specified in a printer device file is the name of an output queue. This means that all reports produced in association with that printer device file will be routed to the same output queue. When an interactive job submits a batch job, the interactive default output queue for the job is used as the default queue for the batch job unless specifically overridden on the Submit Job command. Upon initiation of an interactive job, work management checks the printer device file, the job description, the user profile, and the workstation device description, in that order, looking for a named output queue. When a named output queue is found, it becomes the default output queue for the job, and the search for an output queue name ends. Point out to the students that the default values at each step point downward to the next step. If either the OUTQ or PRTDEV parameters in either a job description or a user profile are changed, the change has no effect on jobs already running that use those objects. The default output queues for those jobs were determined when the jobs were initiated, and no reference to the job description or the user profile is actually made (for an output queue) when the job runs. Additional information — Transition statement —




21-11

Instructor Guide

What can you do with a spool file? IBM i

Print them Keep as records Use as input to other applications Transfer to other output queues Send as email Use to create PDF files


Figure 21-5. What can you do with a spool file?

AS248.1

Notes: Spooled files in output queues can be: • Printed • Kept as records • Used as input to other applications • Transferred to other output queues • Sent as email • Used to create PDF files The printer writer program interacts between the output queue and the printer and can be used to convert the printer data stream.





Uempty





21-13

Instructor Guide

Start Printer Writer command IBM i

Spooled files ORDREG ORDER APSUM APCHECK *OUTQ (PRT01)

PAYCHECK ORDSUM INVOICE

APREG

Printer writer PRT01

PAYREG

Printer writer

*OUTQ (PRT02)

PRT02

EMPTY

WAITING

Printer writer

*OUTQ (PRT03)

PRT03 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 21-6. Start Printer Writer command

AS248.1

Notes: The Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command starts a spooling writer to the specified printer. The writer is a system job that takes spooled files from an output queue and produces (writes) the output on the printer device. This command specifies the name of the printer, the names of the output and message queues used, and the name of the writer. The spooled files on an output queue remain there until a printer writer is started. Normally, you have an output queue for each printer on your system, and the printer and output queue have the same name. For example, as shown on the visual, the PRT01 output queue is associated with the PRT01 printer, the PRT02 output queue is associated with the PRT02 printer, and so on. You can, however, use the printer writer to assign any output queue to any printer on the system. (For example, the PRT01 output queue could be associated with the PRT02 printer, while the PRT02 output queue could be associated with the PRT01 printer.) Once started, the printer writer program selects the next available entry from its associated output queue and prints the report on the named printer.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — This topic is probably the one that is of most interest to the majority of system operators. Controlling printing requires that the operator understand all the elements involved, so let's review them. This visual shows three output queues (PRT01, PRT02, and PRT03). Two of these queues (PRT01 and PRT02) contain spooled files waiting to be printed. Additional information — Transition statement —




21-15

Instructor Guide

Printer load balancing IBM i

APREG

STRPRTWTR DEV(_____) OUTQ(_____) 01) T R Q(P T U 1) O 0 T (PR V E D

ORDER APSUM APCHECK DEV(PRT02) OUTQ(PRT01) PAYCHECK ORDSUM D EV (P INVOICE R

T0 3)

*OUTQ (PRT01)

OU TQ (P RT 01 )

PRT01

PAYREG

PRT02

ORDREG

PRT03 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 21-7. Printer load balancing

AS248.1

Notes: In the previous visual, we talked about starting the writer for one printer from one output queue. Additional writers can be started (up to a maximum of 10 per output queue). This allows multiple printers to begin printing spooled output files from the same output queue. This could allow you to more easily balance the printing load among multiple printers.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check yes or no if they believe printer load balancing is something they would implement at their organization. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hand if they believe printer load balancing is something they would implement at their organization. Additional information — Transition statement —




21-17

Instructor Guide

Question IBM i

How would you use printer load balancing at your organization?



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





21-19

Instructor Guide

Set an expiration date for spool file IBM i

An expiration date can be set: At create time Using the Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command

File will expire at midnight on the specified date. Must run the Delete Expired Spool File (DLTEXPSPLF) command to actually remove the spool file from the system.


Figure 21-9. Set an expiration date for spool file

AS248.1

Notes: The Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command allows you to change attributes of a spooled file while it is on an output queue. These changes affect only the current processing of the file. The next time the job runs and the file is produced, the file attributes are derived from the device file description and the program. The Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command removes expired spooled files on the system or the ASP group specified by the user. A spooled file expires at 23:59:59 system local time on the date specified in the Expiration Date for File (EXPDATE) spooled file attribute. To automate the removal of expired spooled files, you can create a job schedule entry that runs the DLTEXPSPLF command once a day.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Note Student profiles for this class have been created with a classification of QSYSOPR. As a default, these types of users are not granted access to the DLTEXPSPLF command. Therefore, students in this class do not have authority to run or even prompt this command.





21-21

Instructor Guide

Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN IBM i

Spooled files can: Optionally be detached from a job and Managed independently of the job that created them.

X © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 21-10. Detach spooled files from jobs: QSPLFACN

AS248.1

Notes: Prior to V5R2, spooled files were attached to a job until they were deleted either as a result of being sent to the printer or explicitly by the user. Since V5R2, spooled files can be detached by doing the following: • Set the system value QSPLFACN to *DETACH. • Set the job description SPLFACN attribute: - To *DETACH to detach the spooled file - To *SYSVAL to use the value in QSPLFACN system value When *DETACH is used, spooled files are detached from the job when the job ends, allowing the job to leave the system and freeing up the job structures to be used by another job. The shipped/default value for these parameters is *KEEP, which will keep any jobs structures with at least one spooled file remaining when the job ends and the status of the job is updated to indicate that the job has completed (for spooled files in SYSBASE).





Uempty





21-23

Instructor Guide

Work management overview IBM i

SBMJOB

Job queue

Subsystem pool

Output queue

Writer

Batch Printer

Sign-on

Interactive

WRKJOBQ

WRKACTJOB

WRKOUTQ WRKSPLF

WRKWTR

WRKUSRJOB WRKSBMJOB © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 21-11. Work management overview

AS248.1

Notes: A working knowledge of work management is necessary to control jobs on the system. The flow for an interactive job follows: 1. An interactive job does not place jobs in a job queue. This step is null in this environment. 2. An interactive job is started when a user signs on to the system. 3. The interactive job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run interactive jobs. - The QINTER subsystem is the default system for interactive jobs. - An administrator can create additional subsystems where interactive jobs will be run. 4. Work management determines how much memory is assigned to each subsystem. - This will determine how much memory gets assigned to run these types of jobs. - The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated: into shared memory pools or private memory pools. 21-24 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

5. Most jobs will generate output, a printed report. -

Output is placed in an output queue. Several output queues are provided by the system, for example, QPRINT. Output queues can be created by a programmer or by an administrator. Work management will: • Go through the process outlined in this unit for the visual titled Why did the output end up there. • This process is used to determine which output queue will be used. • This will determine the characteristics for the print job, such as: - Form type - Number of copies - Expiration date - Print priority • Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs. - Jobs are processed in a first-in first-out (FIFO) order based on priority.

6. A writer program is started to assign an output queue to a printer. At this point the report will print and the job will end. The flow for a batch job is: A batch job includes one additional step in the beginning. Once the job flows out of the subsystem the steps are the same for both types of jobs. 1. A user will either choose a menu option that issues the command to submit a job or the user will manually issue the submit job command on the command line. 2. A batch job is placed in a job queue and awaits its turn to be processed. - Job queues are created by programmers or by administrators. - The job description in your user profile is used by work management to determine to which job queue your job will be sent. - Your job description defines what priority is assigned to your batch jobs. - Jobs are processed in an FIFO order based on priority. 3. The batch job is assigned to a subsystem designated to run batch jobs. - The QBATCH subsystem is the default system for batch jobs. - An administrator can create additional subsystems where batch jobs will be run. 4. Work management determines how much memory is assigned to each subsystem. - This will determine how much memory gets assigned to run these types of jobs. - The system administrator defines how the memory is allocated: into shared memory pools or private memory pools. 5. Most jobs will generate output, a printed report. The steps are the same as above. 6. A writer program is started to assign an output queue to a printer. At this point, the report will print and the job will end. Steps are the same as above.




21-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U21-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U21-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U21-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which of the following are created on the system when a printer is connected (Select all that apply)? a. b. c. d.

Device description Message queue Output queue Printer profile

2. What is the first place the system looks to determine where to send your output file? a. b. c. d.

Printer device file Job description User profile System value

3. True or False: The system administrator can create an output queue on the system with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




21-27

Instructor Guide



1. Which of the following are created on the system when a printer is connected (Select all that apply)? a. Device description b. Message queue c. Output queue d. Printer profile The answers are Device description and Output queue.

2. What is the first place the system looks to determine where to send your output file? a. Printer device file b. Job description c. User profile d. System value The answer is Printer device file.

3. True or False: The system administrator can create an output queue on the system with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Additional information — You should create a printer emulation session for the students to use in the exercise. Name the printer “AS24PRT” and give the printer name to the students before starting the exercise. Transition statement —





Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Describe how the printing process works Explain what an output queue is Explain how an output queue is created Explain the decision process the system uses to determine where to send your printed output List what you can do with your output Explain what a print writer is and the function it performs



AS248.1

Notes:




21-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 22. Print control using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the printed reports that these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system operator's job. In this unit, we will cover how to perform these functions using a 5250 emulation session.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Use a 5250 emulation interface to monitor and control: - Printer output - Output queues - Printers - Print writers • Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file • Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files



Unit 22. Print control using 5250 emulation


22-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use a 5250 emulation interface to monitor and control: Printer output Output queues Printers Print writers

Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.




22-3

Instructor Guide

Printer menu IBM i


Figure 22-2. Printer menu

AS248.1

Notes: Use the GO PRINTER command to display the menu in the visual. You can use this menu to monitor and control your spool files, your output queues, and any printers on your system.





Uempty





22-5

Instructor Guide

Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) IBM i


Figure 22-3. Work with All Spooled Files (WRKSPLF)

AS248.1

Notes: Select option 1 from the menu on the previous page to display the screen on the upper left in the visual. The Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) command is a powerful and flexible command that allows you to work with spooled files. By specifying selection criteria on the prompt display, you control which spooled files are displayed. In this example, only the spooled files produced by jobs that have been run by the current user, AS2401, have been selected. Note that spooled files associated with multiple output queues are shown. The status of each, the number of pages per copy, and the number of copies to be printed are displayed. Note that a spooled file that is currently being processed by a printer writer remains on the output queue and can be held from this display. This is unlike job queues, where a job is removed from the job queue as soon as it becomes active and can no longer be worked with from the WRKJOBQ display.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The power of this command lies in its flexibility. Selection criteria can be specified to control which spooled files are shown on the Work with display. This command displays a list of spooled files created by: • Jobs run by the user running the command (the default) • A named user • All users Additional selection criteria are available based on: • Print device: Only the spooled files on the output queue currently linked by a printer writer to a named printer are shown. • If *OUTQ is specified, all spooled files on all output queues not currently linked to any printer are shown. • Form type: Only the spooled files specified to be printed on the specified form type are shown. • User data: Only the spooled files having the specified user data are shown. This can be the name of the program producing a report or identifying information from the printer device file used to create a report. The defaults for the command are illustrated in this visual, but the selection criteria can be changed to suit any situation. Make sure the students understand the following point, which is in their notes. A spooled file which is currently being processed by a printer writer remains on the output queue and can be held from this display. This is unlike job queues; a job is removed from a job queue as soon as it becomes active and can no longer be worked with from the WRKJOBQ display. Additional information — Transition statement —




22-7

Instructor Guide

Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files IBM i


Figure 22-4. Work with User Jobs: Spooled Files

AS248.1

Notes: If you know the user and job that produced the spooled files that need to be controlled, consider specifying option 8, Work with spooled files, on the Work with User Jobs display. The Work with Job Spooled Files display will appear, showing a list of all spooled files produced by a user’s job. From this list display, you can easily change the attributes of one or more spooled files of a job. You can also hold, end (delete), display, or release one or more of these files by using the same options for each as on the Work with Spool File command just discussed.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — This approach should be used when there is a need to check on the printed output for one or more specific users but the operator is not sure that the job which produces the output has even started yet. It could still be waiting on a job queue. This approach could also be used if the operator were already using the Work with User Jobs display for some other reason. The Work with Job Spooled Files display can be displayed by selecting option 8 for a specific job on the Work with User Jobs display. From this list display, the operator can easily change the attributes of hold, end (delete), display, or release one or more of a job's spooled files. To do this, the operator will use the same options that were discussed on the Work with All Spooled Files display on the previous visual. Additional information — Transition statement —




22-9

Instructor Guide

Change Spooled File Attributes IBM i


Figure 22-5. Change Spooled File Attributes

AS248.1

Notes: Selecting option 2, Change, from the screens displayed on either of the two previous pages in this guide will call the Change Spool File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) command, which is the command being displayed on this page. Notice all of the attributes that can be changed for your spooled file: printer, forms type, number of copies, output queue, expiration date, and so forth. An expiration date is a value that can be specified at creation time by the application that generates the output or by processing this command for a specific spool file. The parameter Expiration date for file (EXPDATE) specifies the expiration date for the spooled file. The spooled file will expire at 23:59:59 system local time on the date specified.





Uempty





22-11

Instructor Guide

Delete Expired Spooled files IBM i


Figure 22-6. Delete Expired Spooled files

AS248.1

Notes: The Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command removes expired spooled files on the system or the ASP group specified by the user. To automate the removal of expired spooled files, you can create a job schedule entry that runs the DLTEXPSPLF command once a day. See the examples below for an example using the Add Job Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command. Restriction: You need spool control (*SPLCTL) special authority to use this command. Note Setting the expiration of spooled files by way of the printer file and spooled file attributes will not cause the system to remove expired spooled files. Files will not be removed until the DLTEXPSPLF command is used to remove expired spooled files.





Uempty

The Operational Assistant provides automatic cleanup of spooled files (job logs) only in output queues QEZJOBLOG and QEZDEBUG. The DLTEXPSPLF command deletes spooled files (if expired) located in any output queue on system or in ASPs. Examples for DLTEXPSPLF Example 1: Deleting all expired spooled files DLTEXPSPLF

ASPGRP(*ALL)

This command deletes all expired spooled files on the system. Example 2: Deleting all expired spooled files in the system ASP (ASP 1) and all defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32) DLTEXPSPLF

ASPGRP(*SYSBAS)

This command deletes all expired spooled files in the system ASP (ASP 1) and all defined basic user ASPs (ASPs 2-32). Example 3: Creating a job schedule entry to remove expired spooled files ADDJOBSCDE JOB(DLTEXPSPLF) CMD(DLTEXPSPLF ASPGRP(*ALL)) FRQ(*WEEKLY) SCDDATE(*NONE) SCDDAY(*ALL) SCDTIME(010000) JOBQ(QSYS/QSYSNOMAX) TEXT('DELETE EXPIRED SPOOLED FILES SCHEDULE ENTRY') This command creates a job schedule entry which causes the DLTEXPSPLF command to run daily at the time specified in the SCDTIME parameter in the job queue specified in the JOBQ parameter. Using the FRQ(*WEEKLY) and SCDDAY(*ALL) parameters will schedule the job to run every day of the week.




22-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Note Student profiles for this class have been created with a classification of QSYSOPR. As a default, these types of users are not granted access to the DLTEXPSPLF command. Therefore, students in this class do not have authority to run or even prompt this command.






Uempty

Work with Output Queue IBM i


Figure 22-7. Work with Output Queue

AS248.1

Notes: From the Printer menu, use option 5, Work with output queues, or enter the WRKOUTQ command directly to see the screen captured in the upper left on the visual. Use this method to work with spooled files if you know that all the spool files you want to work with are in the same output queue. The type of information displayed and the options available should look quite familiar by now. Whereas we viewed spooled files for only one user and only one job in prior examples, here we see all spooled files on a specific output queue, regardless of which user or job produced the output. In addition to the options available through the two prior methods, option 7 on this display shows messages relating to the printing status of a spooled file.




22-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Work with Writers IBM i


Figure 22-8. Work with Writers

AS248.1

Notes: From the Printer menu, select option 2, Work with printer, or enter the Work with Writers (WRKWTR) command to determine whether a writer has been started for a particular printer. The status of each writer is shown. The status can be END (ended), STR (started), HLD (held), MSG (message waiting), or JOBQ (job queue). Most of the options available on this display allow you to perform familiar functions but with a printer writer instead of a user job or queue.




22-17

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Restarting a printer IBM i

Work with All Printers

F21

Type options, press Enter. 1=Start 2=Change

Basic assistance level

3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release

7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt

Device

Sts

_

PRT01

END

_

PRT02

STR

Sep

Form Type File User Work with Printers

User Data System: I520DVL2

*FILE

*ALL

Type options below, then press Enter. 1=Start 4=Stop 7=Message 8=Display output for printer 11=Restart Opt Printer __ PRT00 11 PRT01

Enter

Form Type Status Stopped (use Opt 1) Stopped (use Opt 1)

Restart Printer

Printer...........................: PRT01 Output........................: QBASE User..............................: QSYS Formtype.......................: *STD

Date.............................: 04/14/08 Time.............................: 11:29:06 Pages...........................: 37

Type choices below, then press Enter. Restart on page....................................: 1 Save printer output...............................: N

Number Y=Yes, N=No


Figure 22-9. Restarting a printer

AS248.1

Notes: The basic assistance level version of the Work with Printers list display looks quite similar to the intermediate assistance level display. But the options, status, and function keys are slightly different. Notice that you cannot change, hold, release, or work with a writer at the basic assistance level. One feature that you can perform more easily from the basic assistance level display is the restart function, option 11. If you need to stop printing a report and restart on another page or if you have had a printer device error (such as a paper jam) and need to reprint a portion of a report, option 11 from the basic assistance level display simplifies the task for you. This option combines the functions of hold and release, which are available when you are using the intermediate assistance level.




22-19

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Start Printer Writer command IBM i


Figure 22-10. Start Printer Writer command

AS248.1

Notes: The Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command starts a spooling writer to the specified printer. The writer is a system job that takes spooled files from an output queue and produces (writes) the output on the printer device. This command specifies the name of the printer, the names of the output and message queues used, and the name of the writer.




22-21

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Print control using 5250 emulation



AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the job and print control exercise.




22-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Instructor should create a printer emulation session named AS240PRT. This emulation session will be used by the students in the next exercise. Inform the students of this name that they can use in the exercise. Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U22-F12 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. You can still add your commentary while the students are playing the file. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U22-F12 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U22-F12 on your PC place of the next visual, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.





Uempty

The flow of a job IBM i

SBMJOB

Job queue

Subsystem pool

Output queue

Writer

Batch Printer

Sign-on

Interactive

WRKJOBQ

WRKACTJOB

WRKOUTQ WRKSPLF

WRKWTR

WRKUSRJOB WRKSBMJOB © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 22-12. The flow of a job

AS248.1

Notes: There are many different types of jobs, and most move through many stages. A working knowledge of work management is absolutely necessary to effectively control the jobs on your system. The commands listed at the bottom of this visual are positioned relative to the stage of a job, where each command will be used.




22-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — This illustration should help you tie together the following work management functions that have been discussed: • Submitting a batch job to a job queue • Starting an interactive job by signing on to a workstation • Running those jobs in a subsystem • Producing printed output that is tracked on an output queue until it is actually printed by a printer writer Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U22-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U22-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U22-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which command is used to work with your spool files? a. b. c. d.

WRKPRTF WRKSPLF WRKJOBF WRKPRT

2. Which option is used to delete an individual report (a spooled file) on the Work with Output Queues screen? a. b. c. d.

Option 2 - Change Option 4 - Delete Option 5 Display Option 8 Attributes

3. True or False: Changing the spool file attributes is all you have to do for an expired file to be deleted on the system. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




22-27

Instructor Guide



1. Which command is used to work with your spool files? a. WRKPRTF b. WRKSPLF c. WRKJOBF d. WRKPRT The answer is WRKSPLF.

2. Which option is used to delete an individual report (a spooled file) on the Work with Output Queues screen? a. Option 2 - Change b. Option 4 - Delete c. Option 5 Display d. Option 8 Attributes The answer is Option 5 Display.

3. True or False: Changing the spool file attributes is all you have to do for an expired file to be deleted on the system. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use a 5250 emulation interface to monitor and control: Printer output Output queues Printers Print writers




AS248.1

Notes:




22-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 23. Print control using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the printed reports that these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system operator's job. In this unit, we will cover how to perform these functions using System i Navigator.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Use System i Navigator to monitor and control: - Printer output - Output queues - Printers - Print writers • Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file • Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files



Unit 23. Print control using System i Navigator


23-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use System i Navigator to monitor and control: Printer output Output queues Printers Print writers




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





23-3

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations: Printer Output IBM i


Figure 23-2. Basic Operations: Printer Output

AS248.1

Notes: System i Navigator allows you to find and manage printer output. Perform the following steps to display all spooled files associated with the current user: 1. Expand your system. 2. Expand Basic Operations. 3. Click Printer Output. This will show all of your output. This is the equivalent of running the Work with Spool (WRKSPLF) command on a 5250 emulation session.





Uempty





23-5

Instructor Guide

Customize: Include (F11) IBM i


Figure 23-3. Customize: Include (F11)

AS248.1

Notes: You can customize the Printer Output folder to display printer output files according to user, location, form type, status, and the date and time they were created. If you have a large number of printer output files on your system, this can help you more quickly locate the files you need to see. To customize what is included in the printer output folder, follow these steps: 1. Click Printer Output. 2. To customize what is going to be displayed, you can either: a. Press the F11 key. b. From the View menu, select Customize this View, and then select Include. 3. Use the Include dialog to specify settings for the folder.





Uempty





23-7

Instructor Guide

Customize: Columns (F12) IBM i


Figure 23-4. Customize: Columns (F12)

AS248.1

Notes: You can also determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by: 1. Expand Basic Operations. 2. Click Printer Output. 3. From the View menu, select Customize this View, and then select Columns. 4. Use the Columns dialog to specify settings for the folder.





Uempty





23-9

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Individual report IBM i


Figure 23-5. Printer Output: Individual report

AS248.1

Notes: Expand Basic Operations > Printers, and then click your printer to see the spool files for that printer. Right-click a spooled file to see the context menu displayed. Notice the different actions that you can perform on the selected spooled file.





Uempty





23-11

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Open IBM i


Figure 23-6. Printer Output: Open

AS248.1

Notes: If you open a spooled file, its content is displayed.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U23-F07 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the nest two visuals. • To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. • Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U23-F07 and click Play. • Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U23-F07 on your PC place of the next two visuals while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




23-13

Instructor Guide

Properties: General and Printer/queue IBM i


Figure 23-7. Properties: General and Printer/queue

AS248.1

Notes: Use the General tab of the Properties window for the spooled file to view the basic properties of the printer output, which include information that identifies the printer output. Under the General tab of the Properties window, you can change only the user-specified data which describes the printer output. Use the Printer/Queue tab to view information about the printer device and the output queue associated with the printer output. You can click Move to move the printer output to a different printer device or output queue. You can click Manage Output Queue to work with the current output queue for the printer output.





Uempty





23-15

Instructor Guide

Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms IBM i


Figure 23-8. Properties: Copies/Pages and Forms

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Copies/Pages tab to display or to change the copy and page properties for the printer output. Use the Forms tab to display or change the properties that control the type of forms and how the printer output should print.





Uempty





23-17

Instructor Guide

Properties: Layout and Staples IBM i


Figure 23-9. Properties: Layout and Staples

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Layout tab to display or to change the properties that control the layout of the printer output. For example, you can specify whether to print on both sides of the paper or whether to rotate the text on the paper. Use the Staples tab to display or to change the properties that control stapling of the printer output.





Uempty





23-19

Instructor Guide

Properties: Overlay and Font IBM i


Figure 23-10. Properties: Overlay and Font

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Overlay tab to display or to change the properties that control the overlay information for the printer output. An overlay is a collection of predefined data, such as lines, shading, text, boxes, or logos, that can be merged with variable data on a page while printing. Use the Font tab to display the font information used for the printer output.





Uempty





23-21

Instructor Guide

Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined IBM i


Figure 23-11. Properties: Origin/Expiration and User-defined

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Origin/Expiration tab to display information about how and when the printer output originated. The expiration parameter displays information about the expiration date for the printer output file. The expiration date is the date that the printer output file is eligible to be removed from the system. Expired printer output files can be removed by running the Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command interactively from a command line or from System i Navigator or by running a control language (CL) program that contains that command. Use the User-defined tab to display information about user-defined objects, user-defined data, and user-defined options related to the printer output.





Uempty





23-23

Instructor Guide

Properties: Other 1 and Other 2 IBM i


Figure 23-12. Properties: Other 1 and Other 2

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Other 1 tab to display or change additional information used for printing. Use the Other 2 tab to display or change additional information used for printing.





Uempty





23-25

Instructor Guide

Drag and drop output to Windows desktop IBM i


Figure 23-13. Drag and drop output to Windows desktop

AS248.1

Notes: System i Navigator allows you to transfer or download printer output directly to your Desktop as a text file. Perform the following steps: 1. Expand your system. 2. Expand Basic Operations. 3. Click Printer Output. 4. Click the output file you want to save. 5. Drag the output file to your Desktop. The output file will be transferred to your Desktop and appear as a text file.





Uempty





23-27

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Right-click job> Printer Output IBM i


Figure 23-14. Active Jobs: Right-click job> Printer Output

AS248.1

Notes: This multipane dialog window is displayed if you select Properties for a specific job.





Uempty





23-29

Instructor Guide

Work Management: Output Queues IBM i


Figure 23-15. Work Management: Output Queues

AS248.1

Notes: You can display all of the output queues on the system by: • Expanding Work Management, and then clicking Output Queues.





Uempty





23-31

Instructor Guide

Printers: Customize > Columns (F12) IBM i


Figure 23-16. Printers: Customize > Columns (F12)

AS248.1

Notes: System i Navigator allows you to find and manage printers. To see a list of printers: • Expand Basic Operations, and then click Printers. You can determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by clicking: • View > Customize this View > Columns (or by pressing F12) as shown in this visual.





Uempty





23-33

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Convert to PDF IBM i


Figure 23-17. Printer Output: Convert to PDF

AS248.1

Notes: Right-click the printer name.





Uempty





23-35

Instructor Guide

Printers: Printer output IBM i


Figure 23-18. Printers: Printer output

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Convert to PDF dialog to convert printer output files to PDF and send them as email, save them as stream files in the integrated file system (IFS), or save them as printer output files. The following licensed program products (LPPs) are required to use this output method: • Infoprint Server for Power i (5770-IP1)





Uempty





23-37

Instructor Guide

System Values: Detach printer output IBM i


Figure 23-19. System Values: Detach printer output

AS248.1

Notes: The Detach printer output after jobs have ended check box specifies whether or not printer output is kept with a job or detached from the job. Keeping printer output with jobs allows you to display printer output when you select Printer Output on jobs that have ended. The ended jobs will still count toward the limit of jobs defined by the maximum jobs system value. The job status becomes Completed (OUTQ) when the job ends. Detaching printer output from a job means that the job is removed from the system when the job ends. This reduces the use of system resources by allowing job structures to be recycled when the job ends. Because the job is removed from the system, the job interfaces can no longer be used to work with the printer output for the job; however, this option does not delete the printer output. To view the printer output for a job that is removed from the system, open System Navigator and select Basic Operations; then select Printer Output.





Uempty





23-39

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Print control using System i Navigator




AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the job and print control exercise.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Upon successful completion of the exercise, the student should be able to start a batch job and monitor and control interactive, batch, and spooled jobs. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U23-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U23-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U23-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




23-41

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: System i Navigator provides an option that allows you to see the output generated by another user. 2. Under which of the following is the Printer Output branch found? a. b. c. d.

Basic Operations Work Management Users and Groups File Systems

3. Which of the following actions cannot be performed for a printer from the Printers branch? a. b. c. d.

Start Stop Create Change which output queue is assigned © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: System i Navigator provides an option that allows you to see the output generated by another user. The answer is True.

2. Under which of the following is the Printer Output branch found? a. Basic Operations b. Work Management c. Users and Groups d. File Systems The answer is Basic Operations.

3. Which of the following actions cannot be performed for a printer from the Printers branch? a. Start b. Stop c. Create d. Change which output queue is assigned The answer is Create. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011 Additional information — Transition statement —




23-43

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use System i Navigator to monitor and control: Printer output Output queues Printers Print writers




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





23-45

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 24. Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about Monitoring and controlling the jobs that run on the system and the printed reports that these jobs generate are the most important aspects of a system operator's job. In this unit we will cover how to perform these functions using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to monitor and control: - Printer output - Output queues - Printers - Print writers • Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file • Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files



Unit 24. Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


24-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to monitor and control: Printer output Output queues Printers Print writers Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





24-3

Instructor Guide

Basic Operations: Printer Output IBM i


Figure 24-2. Basic Operations: Printer Output

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to find and manage printer output. Perform the following steps to display all spooled files associated with the current user. 1. Expand your system. 2. Click the Basic Operations task. 3. Click Printer Output. This will show all of your output. This is the equivalent of running the Work with Spool (WRKSPLF) command on a 5250 emulation session.





Uempty





24-5

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Include IBM i


Figure 24-3. Printer Output: Include

AS248.1

Notes: You can customize the Printer Output tab to display printer output files according to user, location, form type, status, and the date and time they were created. If you have a large number of printer output files on your system, this can help you more quickly locate the files you need to see. To customize what is included in the Printer Output tab, follow these steps: 1. Once you are on the Printer Output tab, click the down arrow for Select Action. 2. On the pull-down menu, select Include, and then click Go. 3. This will display the Include tab. Review the options available to specify your preferred settings.





Uempty





24-7

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Columns IBM i


Figure 24-4. Printer Output: Columns

AS248.1

Notes: You can also determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by: 1. Once you are on the Printer Output tab, click the down arrow for Select Action. 2. On the pull-down menu, select Columns, then click Go. 3. This will display the Columns tab. Review the columns available to display and specify your preferred settings.





Uempty





24-9

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Individual report IBM i


Figure 24-5. Printer Output: Individual report

AS248.1

Notes: Click the arrow for a spooled file to see the context menu displayed. Notice the different actions that you can perform on the selected spooled file. Use the Export as > PDF options to convert printer output files to PDF and send them as email, save them as stream files in the IFS, or save them as printer output files. The following LPP are required to use this output method: • Infoprint Server for System i (5770-IP1)





Uempty





24-11

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Open IBM i


Figure 24-6. Printer Output: Open

AS248.1

Notes: If you open a spooled file, its content is displayed.





Uempty





24-13

Instructor Guide

Options for a spool file IBM i


Figure 24-7. Options for a spool file

AS248.1

Notes: For a spooled file, you can click the arrow to see the drop-down menu displayed in the visual. Choosing advanced will show a secondary drop-down menu to navigate to Manage Output Queue or Printers.





Uempty





24-15

Instructor Guide

Spoolfile Properties IBM i

Selected spoolfile properties


Figure 24-8. Spoolfile Properties

AS248.1

Notes: From Content menu, you can also chose Properties for selected spoolfile to see the Web pages on the next page in the guide.





Uempty





24-17

Instructor Guide

Properties: General IBM i


Figure 24-9. Properties: General

AS248.1

Notes: Use the General tab of the Properties window for the spooled file to view the basic properties of the printer output, which include information that identifies the printer output. Under the General tab of the Properties window, you can change only the user-specified data which describes the printer output.





Uempty





24-19

Instructor Guide

Properties: Printer/Queue IBM i


Figure 24-10. Properties: Printer/Queue

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Printer/Queue tab to view information about the printer device and the output queue associated with the printer output. You can click Move to move the printer output to a different printer device or output queue. You can click Manage Output Queue to work with the current output queue for the printer output.





Uempty





24-21

Instructor Guide

Properties: Copies/Pages IBM i


Figure 24-11. Properties: Copies/Pages

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Copies/Pages tab to display or to change the copy and page properties for the printer output.





Uempty





24-23

Instructor Guide

Properties: Forms IBM i


Figure 24-12. Properties: Forms

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Forms tab to display or change the properties that control the type of forms and how the printer output should print.





Uempty





24-25

Instructor Guide

Properties: Layout IBM i


Figure 24-13. Properties: Layout

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Layout tab to display or to change the properties that control the layout of the printer output. For example, you can specify whether to print on both sides of the paper or whether to rotate the text on the paper.





Uempty





24-27

Instructor Guide

Properties: Staples IBM i


Figure 24-14. Properties: Staples

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Staples tab to display or to change the properties that control stapling of the printer output.





Uempty





24-29

Instructor Guide

Properties: Overlay IBM i


Figure 24-15. Properties: Overlay

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Overlay tab to display or to change the properties that control the overlay information for the printer output. An overlay is a collection of predefined data, such as lines, shading, text, boxes, or logos, that can be merged with variable data on a page while printing.





Uempty





24-31

Instructor Guide

Properties: Font IBM i


Figure 24-16. Properties: Font

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Font tab to display the font information used for the printer output.





Uempty





24-33

Instructor Guide

Properties: Origin/Expiration IBM i


Figure 24-17. Properties: Origin/Expiration

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Origin/Expiration tab to display information about how and when the printer output originated. The Expiration parameter displays information about the expiration date for the printer output file. The expiration date is the date that the printer output file is eligible to be removed from the system. Expired printer output files can be removed by running the Delete Expired Spooled Files (DLTEXPSPLF) command interactively from a command line or from Systems Director Navigator for IBM i or by running a CL program that contains that command. Note that here you can set expiration for the spooled file by specify date or by set how many days to expiration.





Uempty





24-35

Instructor Guide

Properties: User-defined IBM i


Figure 24-18. Properties: User-defined

AS248.1

Notes: Use the User-defined tab to display information about user-defined objects, user-defined data, and user-defined options related to the printer output.





Uempty





24-37

Instructor Guide

Properties: Other 1 IBM i


Figure 24-19. Properties: Other 1

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Other 1 tab to display or change additional information used for printing.





Uempty





24-39

Instructor Guide

Properties: Other 2 IBM i


Figure 24-20. Properties: Other 2

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Other 2 tab to display or change additional information used for printing.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U24-F21 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U24-F21 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U24-F21 on your PC place of the next visual, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




24-41

Instructor Guide

Printer Output: Export as ASCII Text IBM i


Figure 24-21. Printer Output: Export as ASCII Text

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to export printer output as ASCII text files to your Desktop. Perform the following steps to export printer output as ASCII text. 1. Expand your system. 2. Click the Basic Operations task. 3. Click Printer Output. 4. Click the arrow of the printer output file. 5. Select Export as and then ASCII Text. As you see on the screen, you can also transform printer output to PDF or RAW format: • For PDF format you can chose destinations: -

To client file system To output queue To IFS To e-mail





Uempty





24-43

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Printer Output IBM i


Figure 24-22. Active Jobs: Printer Output

AS248.1

Notes: A user can also display the output for a specific job by doing the following: • Click the Work Management task, and then click Active Jobs. • Page down to find your job, click the arrow, and select Printer Output on the drop-down menu.





Uempty





24-45

Instructor Guide

Work Management: Output Queues IBM i


Figure 24-23. Work Management: Output Queues

AS248.1

Notes: You can display all of the output queues on the system by: • Clicking Work Management, and then click Output Queue.





Uempty





24-47

Instructor Guide

Add a Printer wizard IBM i


Figure 24-24. Add a Printer wizard

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to create a printer device. After pressing the Add Printer link, you will see the first window of the Add a Printer wizard.





Uempty





24-49

Instructor Guide

Printers: Columns IBM i


Figure 24-25. Printers: Columns

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i allows you to find and manage printers. To see a list of printers: • Click the Basic Operations task, and then click Printers. You can determine which columns are displayed and the sequence they appear in by clicking: The down arrow for Select Action. • Columns > Go (as shown in this visual). • Customize the columns, and specify the order for them to be displayed.





Uempty





24-51

Instructor Guide

Printers: Printer Output IBM i


Figure 24-26. Printers: Printer Output

AS248.1

Notes: Click the arrow for your printer, and observe the options on the drop-down menu.





Uempty





24-53

Instructor Guide

System Values: Detach printer output IBM i


Figure 24-27. System Values: Detach printer output

AS248.1

Notes: The Detach printer output after jobs have ended check box specifies whether printer output is kept with a job or detached from the job. Keeping printer output with jobs allows you to display printer output when you select Printer Output on jobs that have ended. The ended jobs will still count toward the limit of jobs defined by the maximum jobs system value. The job status becomes Completed (OUTQ) when the job ends. Detaching printer output from a job means that the job is removed from the system when the job ends. This reduces the use of system resources by allowing job structures to be recycled when the job ends. Because the job is removed from the system, the job interfaces can no longer be used to work with the printer output for the job; however, this option does not delete the printer output. To view the printer output for a job that is removed from the system, open System Navigator and select Basic Operations; then select Printer Output.





Uempty





24-55

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i


Exercise: Print control using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i




AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the print control exercise.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Upon successful completion of the exercise, the student should be able to start a batch job and monitor and control interactive, batch, and spooled jobs. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U24-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U24-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U24-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




24-57

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: You can export printer output as a PDF in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. 2. Which Properties option would display which system the printer output came from? a. b. c. d.

Origin/Expiration Layout Other 1 Other 2

3. True or False: You can view the output for a specific job by clicking Work Management and then clicking Active Jobs.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: You can export printer output as a PDF in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. The answer is True.

2. Which Properties option would display which system the printer output came from? a. b. c. d.

Origin / Expiration Layout Other 1 Other 2

The answer is Origin / Expiration.

3. True or False: You can view the output for a specific job by clicking Work Management and then clicking Active Jobs. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





24-59

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: You can email spool files or keep them as records. 5. When using printer load balancing, what is the maximum number of writers that can be attached to an output queue? a. b. c. d.

5 8 10 15

6. True or False: You can delete an expired spool file.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. True or False: You can email spool files or keep them as records. The answer is True.

5. When using printer load balancing, what is the maximum number of writers that can be attached to an output queue? a. 5 b. 8 c. 10 d. 15 The answer is 10.

6. True or False: You can delete an expired spool file. The answer is True.






24-61

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to monitor and control: Printer output Output queues Printers Print writers Discuss the attributes that can be changed for a spool file Explain how to set expiration dates for spool files



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





24-63

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 25. Starting and stopping the system Estimated time 00:35

What this unit is about This unit describes how to start (initial program load) and stop (power down) the Power i system.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Start the Power i: -

Perform unattended IPL Perform attended IPL (Change IPL options) Enable automatic IPLs Identify and work with system values that affect IPL

• Stop the Power i: - Use the Power Down System command - Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu - Use the Power push button



Unit 25. Starting and stopping the system


25-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Start the Power i: Perform unattended IPL Perform attended IPL (Change IPL options) Enable automatic IPLs Identify and work with system values that affect IPL

Stop the Power i: Use the Power Down System command Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu Use the Power push button



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Each system eventually needs to be powered down and back on again for normal maintenance (such as freeing up storage space, loading new software, or installing new hardware). This unit explains the various methods an operator can use to start and stop the system. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

25.1. Starting the system Instructor topic introduction In this unit, the students learn various methods for starting and stopping the system. A technique that seems to work very well from both a teaching and a scheduling standpoint is to demonstrate powering down the system as the last activity on day one. This allows the students to leave once the power-down sequence has started; they do not have to wait while the unattended IPL finishes. It also makes teaching the correct power-down steps easier the next morning. Just be sure, when you are powering down, to follow the steps listed both in this guide and in the Student Notebook. Make sure you point out to the students that, even though you briefly discuss how to use the Power push button to stop the system, this method is not recommended because of the errors that can affect data files. Caution the students that appearances can be deceiving. In the following discussions of the various types of IPLs, it might appear that after Enter is pressed, the next display appears immediately. In actual practice, there can be a considerable delay between when Enter is pressed and the appearance of the next display. An IPL can take longer after an abnormal power down because of the time it takes to rebuild access paths and locate damaged objects.




25-5

Instructor Guide

IPL overview IBM i

There are several reasons to power on the Power i system: Starting normal operation Starting a remote system Changing configuration options Recovering after a power failure

IPL

Several ways exist to power on (IPL) the Power i system: Normal (unattended) Manual (attended) Automatic Secure © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-2. IPL overview

AS248.1

Notes: Starting a Power is referred to as initial program load (IPL). During an IPL, system programs are loaded from the system auxiliary storage, and the system hardware is checked. In addition, the system recognizes changes to certain system characteristics. Use the operating mode to determine the number of options that are presented to the operator during and after the IPL. It can also secure (lock) the control panel to prevent an unauthorized or inadvertent IPL from the control panel. There are four operating modes: • Normal (unattended) After the power on, the Power in normal (unattended) mode requires no operator intervention during the IPL. When you turn on the Power in normal mode, it performs the IPL and presents the Sign On display on all available display stations. The operator cannot change the system during the IPL. Dedicated service tools (DST) and the operating system do not present any display during this IPL. 25-6 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

• Manual (attended) After power on, operating the Power i on manual (attended) mode means that an operator uses the control panel to direct the system for special needs. During manual mode IPL, DST and the operating system present menus and prompts that allow you to make changes to the internal system environment. This can include entering debug mode for service representatives to diagnose difficult problems. • Auto (automatic) Use auto mode for an automatic remote IPL, automatic IPL by date and time, and an automatic IPL after a power failure. • Secure Use secure mode to prevent use of the control panel to perform an IPL. This mode is a form of IPL, but it provides a means to prevent an unauthorized or inadvertent IPL from the control panel.




25-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to check yes or no using the polling options to indicate if they have ever powered a Power i up or down. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands if they have ever powered a Power i up or down. Select two or three students to briefly summarize their experience. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

IPL speed IBM i

The following factors influence the IPL speed: The number of attached disk drives and other peripheral devices The amount of main storage (memory) How much cleanup is needed since the last IPL The parameters specified on the PWRDWNSYS command Settings for IPL attributes: Possible values are: Fast: Used for routine operations Slow: Used for full diagnostics

The CHGIPLA command sets these attributes The control panel can temporarily override these settings © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-3. IPL speed

AS248.1

Notes: You can specify the type of IPL you need to perform from the system control panel. The Increment / Decrement buttons are used to change the IPL type and mode on servers without a mode button. Use Function 02 to select the IPL type (A, B, or D) and mode (Normal or Manual). To select IPL type and mode from the control panel, perform the following actions: 1. Use the Increment / Decrement buttons to select Function 02, and press Enter. 2. Use the Increment / Decrement buttons to select the IPL type and mode you want, and then press Enter to save. 3. You can also specify a fast or slow IPL that can only be set one time at the console panel when the server is turned off. Select Function 02, and press Enter twice. Use the Increment / Decrement buttons to select F (fast), S (slow), or V (value from IPL attributes). The IPL speed setting is stored in a system value. Use the Change IPL Attributes (CHGIPLA) command to set the system-defined speed. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



25-9

Instructor Guide

Use F (fast) to set the IPL speed for routine work. This setting causes the system to run only a minimum of self-diagnostic tests. Use S (slow) to set the IPL speed for special needs. When you select the slow speed, the system runs a full set of self-diagnostic tests. Use it when you: • Change hardware • Suspect intermittent hardware failures • First install your system You can use the control panel to set IPL speed; however, if you change (override) the IPL speed from the control panel, it affects only the next IPL. Subsequent IPLs use the system-defined speed. The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command can also affect IPL speed.





Uempty





25-11

Instructor Guide

Change IPL Attributes IBM i


Figure 25-4. Change IPL Attributes

AS248.1

Notes: The Change IPL Attributes (CHGIPLA) command allows you to change the settings of attributes that are used during the IPL. Restrictions: To run this command, the user must have security administrator (*SECADM) and all object (*ALLOBJ) special authorities. Restart Type (RESTART): Specifies the point from which the IPL restarts when RESTART(*YES) or RESTART((*YES *IPLA)) is specified on the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command. Specifying *SYS rather than *FULL can reduce the time required to restart the system. The initial (shipped) value for this parameter is *SYS. Keylock Position (KEYLCKPOS): Specifies the keylock position. A change to this attribute takes effect immediately. Hardware Diagnostics (HDWDIAG): Specifies whether certain hardware diagnostics should be performed during the IPL. The list of diagnostics is predetermined by the system and cannot be modified by the user.





Uempty

Compress Job Tables (CPRJOBTBL): Specifies when the job tables should be compressed to remove excess unused entries. Check Job Tables (CHKJOBTBL): Specifies when particular damage checks on the job tables should be performed. Rebuild Product Directory (RBDPRDDIR): Specifies when the product directory information should be fully rebuilt. Mail Server Framework Recovery (MSFRCY): Specifies whether mail server framework (MSF) recovery is done during abnormal IPLs. Display Status (DSPSTS): Specifies whether the status of IBM i IPL steps is displayed at the console during IPL. Start TCP/IP (STRTCP): Specifies whether the Start TCP/IP (STRTCP) command is automatically submitted at the completion of IPL and when the controlling subsystem is restarted to bring the system out of the restricted state. The STRTCP command is not submitted during install IPLs or when the Power is starting to the restricted state. Spooled File Recovery (SPLFRCY): Specifies what should be done with all spooled files during IPL when a job table is detected as damaged or if *YES is set for the following three IPL attributes: Clear Job Queues (CLRJOBQ), Clear Output Queues (CLROUTQ), and Clear Incomplete Job Logs (CLRINCJOB). Clear Job Queues (CLRJOBQ): Specifies whether to clear the jobs from all job queues. Clear Output Queues (CLROUTQ): Specifies whether to clear all output queues, thus removing all spooled output from the system. Clear Incomplete Job Logs (CLRINCJOB): Specifies whether to delete the job logs for jobs that were active at the time of the last system power down. Start Print Writers (STRPRTWTR): Specifies whether to print writers should be started at IPL time. Start to Restricted State (STRRSTD): Specifies whether the system should be started to the restricted state, which means that only the system console will be active.




25-13

Instructor Guide






Uempty

What can you do using the control panel? IBM i

Specify which type of IPL to perform: Normal Manual Auto Secure

Choose the IPL source: Disk (B or A) Alternate device: Tape/CD (D) System

Attention Service (C) used by service personnel

Display function code/data information: Selected function (IPL Type) System Reference Codes (SRC) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-5. What can you do using the control panel?

AS248.1

Notes: From the control panel, an operator or administrator can specify: • The mode or type of IPL to be performed on the system • If the system should do a normal IPL (using the disk image or off of a backup tape or a CD) • Use the Increment / Decrement keys (the up and down arrows) to display SRC information




25-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Control panel function codes IBM i

Function code

Function description

01

02

Displays the currently selected IPL type (and logical key mode on some system types). Displays the currently selected IPL speed override for the next IPL. Select the IPL type, the logical key mode, and the IPL speed.

03

Starts an IPL to load the system. The IPL uses the selected IPL options.

04

Tests all lamps on entire display; indicators will be switched on.

05

Displays an SRC on the control panel which corresponds to the system power control network (SPCN). Allows you to perform SPCN service functions.

07 08

Fast power off. To perform a fast power off, see Powering Down and Powering On the Power in the problem analysis information for your system.

023 through 10

Reserved.

11 through 123

Displays an SRC on the control panel.

20

Displays the machine type, model, processor feature code, processor class indicator, and IPL path description. Causes the DST display to appear on the system console. To exit the DST, select the Resume operating system display option.

21


Figure 25-6. Control panel function codes

AS248.1

Notes: Some control panel functions might not be available on all system types.

Function code

Function description Displays the currently selected IPL type (and logical key mode on some system types).

01

Displays the currently selected IPL speed override for the next IPL. Select the IPL type, the logical key mode, and the IPL speed. Starts an IPL to load the system. The IPL uses the selected IPL options. Tests all lamps on entire display; indicators will be switched on.

02 03 04




25-17

Instructor Guide

Function code

Function description Displays an SRC on the control panel which corresponds to the system power control network (SPCN). Allows you to perform SPCN service functions. Fast power off. To perform a fast power off, see Powering Down and Powering On the Power in the problem analysis information for your system. Reserved. Displays an SRC on the control panel. Displays the machine type, model, processor feature code, processor class indicator, and IPL path description. Causes the DST display to appear on the system console. To exit the DST, select the Resume operating system display option.

05 07

08 023 through 10 11 through 123 20

21





Uempty





25-19

Instructor Guide

Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps IBM i

System state

Running

Steps

1. Set mode to Normal. 2. ENDSYS or ENDSBS *ALL 3. PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES)

Not running

1. Set mode to Normal. 2. Turn on power for all devices. 3. Press Power push button to power on.

Note: Always set mode to Normal after IPL is finished. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-7. Overview of unattended (normal) IPL steps

AS248.1

Notes: The system value QIPLTYPE must be set to zero (unattended IPL). The IPL that you perform most often is an unattended IPL. An unattended IPL is easy; it consists of the steps shown in the visual. After the Power i performs the IPL, the sign-on display appears on all display stations you turned on. If you did not turn on a device, it is active once you do turn it on.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — In an unattended IPL, if the Power is running, the system operator only needs to make sure that the mode (C) is in the Normal position and that the QIPLTYPE system value is set to zero. The operator must then type the PWRDWNSYS command correctly on any command line and specify RESTART (*YES) on the PWRDWNSYS command so that the system automatically restarts after the IPL. In an unattended IPL, if the Power is not running, the system operator needs to make sure that the mode (C) is in the Normal position and that the QIPLTYPE system value is set to zero. The operator must then turn the power on for all devices that will be used. Finally, the operator presses the Power push button (B). When the system finishes an unattended IPL, no matter whether the system was or was not running when the IPL took place, 1) the system operator must set mode (C) to Normal and 2) all workstations that are powered on will have the Sign On display shown. The workstation designated as the console does not need to be powered on. If a workstation is not powered on, the Sign On display will appear on it when it is powered on. Additional information — Transition statement — What happens if you want to perform an unattended IPL in the middle of the night or on a weekend when few people will be affected? There is a function that allows you to plan for powering on and off the system while you are absent.




25-21

Instructor Guide

Power On and Off Tasks menu IBM i


Figure 25-8. Power On and Off Tasks menu

AS248.1

Notes: Use the GO POWER command to display the menu in the visual. Enter option 2 from the Power On and Off Tasks menu to display the Change Power On/Off Schedule display. • You can have i power your system on and off according to a schedule you set up on this display. • You can use F10 on the Change Power On/Off Schedule display to facilitate setting up daily defaults for on and off times.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Both options 3 and 4 assume that all activity on the system that might be adversely affected by ending jobs immediately has been terminated. When either of these options is selected, confirmation is required on a second display. Options 3 and 4 will be discussed later in this unit. To access the Power On and Off Tasks menu, type go power and press Enter. The following tips can help you solve problems with the automatic power schedule: • Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is part of your startup program, which is by default QSYS\QSTRUP. The automatic power scheduler uses a job called QSYSSCD to process the requests for schedule changes. The Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command must be run to start the QSYSSCD job. The IBM-supplied startup program includes the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command. If you have your own startup program from a previous release, it might not contain the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command. • Make sure that you specify Yes on the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command to allow automatic clean-up. The QSYSSCD job does not start if you do not allow automatic cleanup. • Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command submits the QSYSSCD job to the job queue specified in the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command. • Check to see whether the QSYSSCD job is running; it could be on a held job queue. • Make sure that the job queue to which the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is submitted has the maximum jobs parameter set to *NOMAX or to a number greater than one. Because the QSYSSCD job always runs, the other jobs that perform automatic cleanup and power-off functions cannot start if the maximum jobs parameter is set to one. To change the maximum jobs parameter, use the Change subsystem Description (CHGSBSD) command. • Make sure the mode is set to Normal or Auto. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-23

Instructor Guide

Schedule power on/off IBM i


Figure 25-9. Schedule power on/off

AS248.1

Notes: The Change Power On/Off Schedule display allows you to set up a schedule that meets your needs. It is not necessary to power on and off at the same time each day. Use the F10 function key to bring up the Change Power On/Off Defaults display. Also, the system automatically sends users a message telling them when the Power is to be powered off. You can indicate how many minutes before power-off you want the system to send this message in the Minutes before power off to send message field. When the system sends the power-off message, you can delay the scheduled time for powering off from 30 minutes to three hours in your reply to the message. The system waits the time specified before powering off. You do not have another chance to change this setting. Solve problems with the automatic power schedule If the power schedule is not working: • Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is part of your startup program.





Uempty

• The automatic power scheduler uses a job called QSYSSCD to process the requests for schedule changes. The Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command must be run to start the QSYSSCD job. The IBM-supplied startup program includes the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command. If you have your own startup program from a previous release, it might not contain the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command. • Make sure that you specify Yes on the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command to allow automatic cleanup. The QSYSSCD job will not start if you do not allow automatic cleanup. • Make sure that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command submits the QSYSSCD job to the job queue specified in the Change Cleanup (CHGCLNUP) command. • Check to see if the QSYSSCD job is running; it could be on a held job queue. • Make sure that the job queue that the Start Cleanup (STRCLNUP) command is submitted to has the maximum jobs parameter set to *NOMAX or a number greater than one. Because the QSYSSCD job always runs, the other jobs that perform automatic cleanup and power-off functions are not able to start if the maximum jobs parameter is set to one. To change the maximum jobs parameter on the job queue entry, use the Change Job Queue Entry (CHGJOBQE) command. • Make sure the mode is set to Normal or Auto.




25-25

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — You need to mention some considerations about the use of the power on/off schedule: • No control value (system value or otherwise) exists that can be used by i to determine whether the dates and times in the schedule should be honored. Once a power on/off schedule has been entered, it is honored. You must have proper authority to set up the schedule. (If anyone has to know, it takes both *SECADM and *ALLOBJ special authority and *USE authority to the PWRDWNSYS command.) • Once i determines that it is time to power off the system, it runs a PWRDWNSYS command with the delay parameter set to *IMMED. This means that if any jobs are active, they are ended immediately, and data files could be partially updated. • If the scheduled power-on time is too close to the power-off time, it is possible that power-off is not complete by the time power-on should occur. If this happens, no automatic IPL is performed, and a manual IPL is required. • In order for a scheduled power-on to complete, the keylock switch must be in either the Normal or Auto position. There are times when you have to perform an attended rather than an unattended IPL. In the following visuals, we look at when and how you should perform an IPL. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

When to perform an attended (manual) IPL IBM i

You must perform an attended IPL when: Installing the operating system Using DST Working with existing or setting up partitions Recovering from a system failure Changing IPL options Upgrading to a new version of the i


Figure 25-10. When to perform an attended (manual) IPL

AS248.1

Notes: An attended IPL brings up displays on the system console that require a response before the IPL can continue. An attended IPL is required when you: • Change IPL options (such as date and time, whether the system will automatically configure itself, and the environment (S/36 or none) in which the system will run) • Install a new release of the operating system • Must access DST to define or change your disk configuration (DSTs is used to service the system when the operating Power is not running) • Recover from a system failure In other cases, you should perform an unattended IPL.




25-27

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Note If the Power i has a Hardware Management console (HMC), it is not required to do a manual IPL in order to work with or set up partitions.






Uempty

Attended (manual) IPL steps IBM i

System state

Steps

Running

1. Power on devices. 2. Type ENDSYS or ENDSBS *ALL on any command line, and press Enter. 3. Set mode to Manual. 4. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES) on any command line, and press Enter. Note: If you cannot enter commands, do the following: a. Press the Power push button to turn the system off. b. Press the Power push button to start an IPL. 5. Follow the displays on the console to complete the IPL. 6. Set the mode to Normal.

Not Running

1. Power on devices. 2. Set mode to Manual. 3. Press the Power push button to power on. 4. Follow the displays on the console to complete the IPL. 5. Set the mode to Normal.

Note: Always set mode to Normal after IPL is finished. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-11. Attended (manual) IPL steps

AS248.1

Notes: Use the following steps to perform an attended IPL when the Power i is running: 1. Turn on the power for the display station you are using as the system console. 2. Turn on the power for all of the display stations, printers, tape devices, and controllers you or others might need to use. 3. End any running subsystems (ENDSBS *ALL). 4. Make sure Manual mode has been selected. 5. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES) on any command line, and press Enter. 6. Follow the steps that appear on the displays on the system console to complete the IPL. 7. After the IPL has completed, make sure Normal mode has been selected.




25-29

Instructor Guide

Follow these steps to perform an attended IPL when the Power is not running: 1. Turn on the power for the display station you are using as the system console. 2. Turn on the power for all of the display stations, printers, tape devices, and controllers you or others might need to use. 3. Make sure Manual mode has been selected. 4. Press the Power push button to power on. 5. Follow the steps that appear on the system console displays to complete the IPL. 6. After the IPL has completed, make sure Normal mode has been selected.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — This visual shows an overview of the attended IPL steps. If you have not already done so, take the time now to discuss the different modes and ways of selecting them based on system unit, version, and model, and discuss how to select functions on the control panel. The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command is discussed in more detail later in this unit. Manual: Set the mode to Manual only when the system allows you to perform all manual IPLs, such as an operator-attended IPL from disk or tape, and manual control functions, such as selecting an IPL or displaying the kind of IPL that the Power is set to run; however, you cannot do a remote IPL, an IPL by date and time, or an IPL after a power failure. Note: You should only set the mode to Manual when necessary. This ensures that no one accidentally presses the Power push button and causes the system to stop. Normal: The Normal mode allows you to manually turn the power on and to perform each of the automatic operations. That is, you can start the system by doing a manual or remote IPL, an IPL by date and time, or an IPL after a power failure. If you want to stop the system when the mode is set to Normal, use the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command at any display station. You must have QSYSOPR authority to use the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command. Auto:

The Auto (automatic) mode allows a remote IPL, an IPL by date and time, or an IPL after a power failure. When the mode is set to Auto, you cannot: - Start the system by doing an IPL manually - Stop the system by using the Power push button - Select a different IPL type by using the Increment/Decrement buttons

Secure: The Secure mode locks the control panel on the system unit. You can stop the system from a display station only by using the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command. During an attended IPL, a number of displays appear (step five on the visual when the Power is running and not running) that you must enter information on or respond to. We will look at some of those displays now. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-31

Instructor Guide

Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System IBM i

IPL or Install the System System: i520BL2 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Perform an IPL Install the operating system Use Dedicated Services Tools (DST) Perform automatic installation of the operating system Save Licensed Internal Code

Selection 1


Figure 25-12. Attended IPL: IPL or Install the System

AS248.1

Notes: The first display that appears on the system console during an attended IPL is the IPL or Install the System menu. It might take quite a while for this display to appear depending on the model and size of your system. When this menu appears, select option 1 (Perform an IPL), and press Enter. Note If you select option 2 or 4, the system requires that you confirm your selection. If you select option 3, additional security clearance is required before you can proceed. If you select option 5, the Licensed Internal Code (LIC) will be saved to tape. (This save does not include QSYS.)

When you enter option 1, the IPL Steps in Progress display shows you the various IPL steps. This is an informational display only; you do not have to do anything.





Uempty





25-33

Instructor Guide

Attended IPL: Sign On display IBM i

I520BL2 QCTL DSP01


Figure 25-13. Attended IPL: Sign On display

AS248.1

Notes: After you select option 1 (Perform an IPL) on the IPL or Install the System display, the next display that you interact with is the Sign On display. You might have to wait a few minutes for this display to appear. Remember, the speed of the IPL process depends on the model and size of your processor. Sign on as the system operator. If you have another user ID that you use to perform system operator functions, make sure that the system operator message queue, QSYSOPR, is allocated to your job in break mode.





Uempty





25-35

Instructor Guide

Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs display IBM i

Select Products to Work with PTFs System: Position to .

.

.

.

.

.

.

. .

i520BL2

. ________Product

Type options, press Enter. Press F21 to select All. 1=Select

Opt __ __ __ __ __ __

Product 5770999 5770SS1 5770CM1 5770DG1 5770JV1 5770WD1

Option *BASE *BASE *BASE *BASE *BASE *BASE

Release V7R1M0 V7R1M0 V7R1M0 V7R1M0 V7R1M0 V7R1M0


Figure 25-14. Attended IPL: Select Products to Work with PTFs display

AS248.1

Notes: The Select Products to Work with PTFs display appears next. Select the product or products (one or more) to which you want to apply PTFs, and press Enter to continue. If you do not want to apply any PTFs, press F3 to exit from this display and continue with the IPL.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The Select Products to Work with PTFs display appears next. This is one of the functions that can be performed during an attended IPL. (PTFs are discussed later in this course.) To work with the PTFs for a particular product, select option 1. If the operator does not want to work with PTFs, the operator should press F3 to exit this display and continue the IPL. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-37

Instructor Guide

Attended IPL: IPL Options display IBM i

IPL

Options

Type choices, press the Enter key. System date .................................XX / XX / XX System time .................................XX : XX : XX Clear job queues.............................N Clear output queues..........................N Clear incomplete job logs....................N Start print writers..........................Y Start system to restricted state.............N Set major system options.....................Y Define or change system at IPL...............Y

MM / DD HH : MM Y=Yes, Y=Yes, Y=Yes, Y=Yes, Y=Yes, Y=Yes, Y=Yes,

/ YY : SS N=No N=No N=No N=No N=No N=No N=No


Figure 25-15. Attended IPL: IPL Options display

AS248.1

Notes: The IPL Options display appears next. Make any necessary changes to it, and press Enter. F1 (help) is available for this display. While the date and time can be changed at IPL, there is a much easier way to do this which we will discuss later in this unit. If you are working in the System/36 environment, the two blank lines following Start system to restricted state contain Run #STRTUPn procedure prompts. The default for these two parameters is Y (yes). When you perform an attended IPL, you almost always change one or both of the two bottom responses to Y because this is why you would normally perform an attended IPL. If you leave both of the bottom parameters set to N (no) and press Enter, the menu, program, or procedure you defined on the Sign On display or in your user profile appears.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The default for each of the last two options on the IPL Options display is N. The first time you perform an attended IPL, you want to change both to Y and review (without changing) the information on the displays that are shown. Unless one of the last two options on this display is changed to Y, the menu, program, or procedure you defined in the Sign On display or in your user profile is displayed next. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-39

Instructor Guide

Attended IPL: Set Major System Options IBM i

Set Major System Options Type choices, press Enter. Enable automatic configuration........Y

Y=Yes,

N=No

Device configuration naming...........*NORMAL

*NORMAL, *S36, *DEVADR

Default special environment............*NONE

*NONE, *S36


Figure 25-16. Attended IPL: Set Major System Options

AS248.1

Notes: If you enter a Y (yes) in the Set major system options field on the IPL Options display, the next display that appears is Set Major System Options. On this display, you can select automatic configuration, the type of device configuration naming, and the special environment in which you want to work. Enabling automatic configuration instructs IBM i to automatically describe, and make available for immediate use, new local workstation displays, printers, and tape drives as soon as they are cabled and powered on. You can either specify Y (automatically configure local devices) or N (no automatic configuration). You can specify one of the following for the device configuration naming parameter: • *NORMAL uses a naming convention unique to the Power i, for example, DSP01 and PRT01 for displays and printers and TAP01 and DKT01 for tape and diskette devices. • *S36 uses a naming convention similar to that for System/36, for example, W1 for workstations, P1 for printers, and T1 and l1 for tape and diskette devices.





Uempty

• *DEVADR uses a naming convention which is obtained from the device resource name, for example, DSP010203 for a display station, PRT010203 for a printer, and TAP01 and DKT01 for tape and diskette devices. All system users are placed in the default special environment when they sign on unless their user profile specifies otherwise. You can specify one of the following for this parameter: • *NONE indicates there is no special environment. • *S36 sets up the System/36 environment that is used if you are migrating from the System/36. You can change any of these options without performing an IPL. We will discuss how to do this later in this unit.




25-41

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Caution the students that any change to the Set Major System Options display changes the contents of the corresponding system value. (System values are discussed later in this unit.) Once changed, a system value retains the changed value until it is specifically changed again. Automatic configuration can be used to have IBM i automatically configure local workstation displays, printers, tape drives, and diskette drives. The QAUTOCFG system value controls whether automatic configuration is active. If automatic device configuration is active, the QDEVNAMING system value controls the naming of automatically configured devices. You can also select a system-wide default special environment now. The system value that controls the special environment is QSPCENV. If the System/36 environment is installed and all users are to work in that environment by default, this value should be set to *S36; otherwise, it should be left at *NONE. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL IBM i

Define or Change the System at IPL System: i520BL2 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Configuration commands Change user profile System value commands Network attribute commands General object commands Work with shared pools

Selection __ F3= Exit and continue IPL


Figure 25-17. Attended IPL: Define or Change the System at IPL

AS248.1

Notes: If you respond Y to the Define or change the system at IPL parameter on the IPL Options display, the Define or Change the System at IPL menu appears. From this display, you can select options that allow you to change the system configuration, system values, network attributes, user profiles, and objects or files. While you cannot run all commands at IPL time, many can be run by selecting the option for the category of command you need. When you have finished using the options on this display, press F3 (not Enter) to continue the IPL. Remember: When you have finished with the IPL, set mode (C) to Normal.




25-43

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Now that you know how to perform an attended and unattended IPL, let's look at the system values regarding IPLs. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

IPL types IBM i

There are four IPL types: IPL type A: When IPL type B fails Done when procedures direct you to perform this type When you suspect problems with temporary LIC fixes

IPL type B Use for routine work, for normal operations

IPL type C Reserved for hardware service representatives

IPL type D: When directed by an install or restore procedure When IPL type A and B have failed, for system recovery When directed by service to perform an alternate IPL © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-18. IPL types

AS248.1

Notes: There are four types of IPL. These are listed on this visual in the order in which they are typically used on your system. • IPL type A Use IPL type A when directed for special work, such as applying PTFs and doing diagnostic work. For example, use IPL type A in the following circumstances: - When IPL type B fails - When the procedures direct you to use IPL type A - When you suspect problems with temporary LIC fixes IPL type A uses an A copy of LIC during and after the IPL. This copy of LIC is the permanent copy. It resides in System Storage Area A. It contains no temporarily applied fixes.




25-45

Instructor Guide

• IPL type B Use IPL type B for routine work and when directed by a PTF procedure. This type of IPL runs the newest copy of LIC and is necessary when you permanently apply certain fixes. IPL type B uses the B copy of LIC during and after the IPL. This copy resides in System Storage Area B. This copy contains temporarily applied fixes. (See the section on keeping your software current with PTFs for more information about fixes.) • IPL type C Rochester development support reserves this type of IPL for hardware service representatives. Attention: Do not use this function. Severe data loss can occur with improper use of this function. • IPL type D Use IPL type D when directed for special work, such as installing and reloading programs. IPL type D loads the system programs from an alternate IPL load source, such as a tape drive or CD-ROM. Typically, an IPL uses programs that are stored on the primary IPL load source (typically a disk drive). Sometimes it is necessary to perform an IPL from another source, such as programs that are stored on tape. To do this, you must use IPL type D to load the system from the alternate IPL load source. Use IPL type D only during the following situations: - When install or restore procedures direct you to use IPL type D - When IPL type B and IPL type A fail (when the primary IPL load source cannot load the system properly) and only when directed by your support personnel - When service directs you to perform an alternate installation





Uempty





25-47

Instructor Guide

What is a system value? IBM i

System values control or change overall system operation A system value can be displayed and changed System values are grouped by type for reference: All Allocation Date and time

Default library list QSYSLIBL, QUSRLIBL

Editing Library list

Attended/unattended IPL QIPLTYPE

Message and logging Security

Automatic configuration QAUTOCFG

Storage System control

Current date QDATE


Figure 25-19. What is a system value?

AS248.1

Notes: A system value is controlled information for the operation of certain parts of the system. There are more than 130 system values provided as part of IBM i. System values are used to control a wide variety of system wide functions, as indicated by the categories shown on the visual. While almost anyone who can enter a command can display most system values, very few users have the authority required to change any of them. (To change system values, you must be signed on as QPGMR, QSYSOPR, or QSRV or have *ALLOBJ authority.) As a system operator, you might have this authority.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — System values are supplied as part of IBM i and are stored in the system value object. They cannot be created or deleted by any user. They contain control information used by IBM i to control many operations or supply system-wide default values. Even though they cannot be created or deleted, most system values can be changed. The students might have the opportunity to display IPL system values if there is time to perform the optional exercises accompanying this unit. They will also see many examples of other system values throughout the remainder of this course. Perhaps the clearest example of a system value is QDATE, the system date. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-49

Instructor Guide

System values and IPL IBM i

System value

Description

Default

QIPLDATTIM

IPL automatically on this day/time

*NONE

QIPLSTS

Previous IPL

(0)

QIPLTYPE

Unattended / attended

QPWRDWN LMT

Maximum amount of time to allow for system to power down

(0)

QPWRRSTIPL

Automatic IPL after power is restored

(0)

QSCPFCONS

Action to take when console problem occurs continue

QSTRUPPGM

Name of program called when the controlling subsystem is started

(0)

QSYS/ QSTRUP


Figure 25-20. System values and IPL

AS248.1

Notes: There are many system values that affect IPL. Some cannot be changed by anyone, for example, QIPLSTS, which indicates which one of the five possible types of IPL was last performed. Most of the other system values can be changed to reflect your operating environment. Changes to most system values take effect immediately. Others take effect after the next IPL. Following is an explanation of some of the more important system values which relate to IPL: QIPLDATTIM stands for date and time to automatically IPL. It specifies the date and time at which the system should perform an automatic IPL. The default is *NONE, which means that an automatic IPL will not be performed. QIPLSTS stands for IPL status indicator. It displays the way the system performed the last IPL. The default is zero, which means an IPL was performed from the control panel of the system unit.





Uempty

QIPLTYPE defines the type of IPL the system performs from the control panel: attended IPL, attended IPL with DST, or attended IPL in debug mode. The default is zero, which means an unattended IPL will be done. QPWRDWNLMT defines the maximum time for immediate shutdown. It specifies the maximum amount of time (in seconds) to wait for the system to power down normally after a user has requested an immediate power-down or when a user has requested a controlled power-down and the time specified on the delay parameter has expired. QPWRRSTIPL controls whether an automatic IPL is performed when utility power is restored after a power failure. The default is zero, which means that the system does not automatically perform an IPL when utility power is restored after a power failure. QSCPFCONS specifies the action for your system to take when a console problem occurs during an attended restart. QSTRUPPGM specifies the name of the program called from an auto start job when the controlling subsystem is started. This program performs setup functions, such as starting subsystems and printers.




25-51

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss the IPL-related system values that are part of the *SYSCTL (system control) category. Also discuss the system values QDATE and QTIME, which contain the system date and time. When set, they are constantly maintained by IBM i and need to be changed only when daylight saving time starts or ends. Review student notes or demo the help capability on the system for an explanation of the IPL system values shown on the visual and of the options that can be specified for each. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

System startup IBM i

01 B N

Power-on

QCTL QCTLSBSD (system value)

Normal IPL from "B" side

QSYS/QSTRUP QSTRUPPGM (system value)

CRTCLPGM

QSYS/QSTRUP *PGM editor

RTVCLSRC

*Library 9*File (QCLSRC) Source

File Member


Figure 25-21. System startup

AS248.1

Notes: The startup program (QSTRUPPGM) system value specifies the name of the program called from an autostart job when the controlling subsystem is started. This program performs setup functions, such as starting subsystems and printers. The program must exist in the system ASP or in a basic user ASP. A change to this system value takes effect the next time the Power is IPLed. The shipped value is QSYS/QSTRUP. The contents of this shipped CL program can be retrieved with the Retrieve CL Source (RTVCLSRC) command.




25-53

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Startup program IBM i

Program QSTRUP: Can be customized Starts subsystems: Starts subsystem monitor Allocates memory Allocates job structure space

Starts spool writers Starts TCP/IP support: STRTCP

(Starts TCP/IP support)

STRTCPSVR

(Starts TCP/IP application servers)

STRHOSTSVR

(Starts host server support)


Figure 25-22. Startup program

AS248.1

Notes:




25-55

Instructor Guide

The contents of this startup program QSTRUP are: /********************************************************************/ /* */ /* 5770SS1 V7R1M0 060210 RTVCLSRC Output 10/05/09 16:21:39 */ */ /* /* Program name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSTRUP PN*/ /* Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSYS PL*/ /* Original source file . . . . . . . . . . : S000040828 SN*/ /* Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : $BLDSS1 SL*/ /* Original source member . . . . . . . . . : S000040828 SM*/ /* Source file change */ /* date/time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 10/05/09 22:07:54 SC*/ /* Patch option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : *NOPATCH PO*/ /* User profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : *USER UP*/ /* Text . . . : TX*/ /* Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSYS OW*/ /* Patch change ID . . . . . . . . . . . . : PC*/ /* Patch APAR ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . : PA*/ /* User mod flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . : *NO UM*/ /* ED*/ /********************************************************************/ PGM DCL VAR(&STRWTRS) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(1) DCL VAR(&CTLSBSD) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(20) DCL VAR(&CPYR) TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(90) VALUE('5770-SS1 (C) COPYRIGHTIBM CORP 1980, 2009. LICENSED MATERIAL - PROGRAM PROPERTY OF IBM') QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSERVER) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QUSRWRK) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36MRT) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36EVOKE) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/STRCLNUP MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QCTLSBSD) RTNVAR(&CTLSBSD) IF COND((&CTLSBSD *NE 'QCTL QSYS ') *AND (&CTLSBSD *NE'QCTL QGPL ')) THEN(GOTO CMDLBL(DONE)) QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QINTER) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QBATCH) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QCMN) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) DONE: QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSPL) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QSTRPRTWTR) RTNVAR(&STRWTRS) IF COND(&STRWTRS = '0') THEN(GOTO CMDLBL(NOWTRS)) CALL PGM(QSYS/QWCSWTRS) MONMSG MSGID(CPF0000) NOWTRS: RETURN CHGVAR VAR(&CPYR) VALUE(&CPYR) ENDPGM





Uempty





25-57

Instructor Guide

Automatic IPLs IBM i

IPL after power failure: System automatically performs an IPL when utility power is restored after a power failure. Set QPWRRSTIPL to one. Remote IPL: Remote power on and IPL can be started using a telephone line and a modem. Set QRMTIPL to one. IPL by date and time: System automatically performs an IPL on a specified day and time. Set QIPLDATTIM to appropriate date and time. Access to control panel Operators can remotely access the control panel to power on a system. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-23. Automatic IPLs

AS248.1

Notes: There are three types of automatic IPLs, each of which is controlled by a different system value. The automatic IPLs and their associated system values are shown on the visual. Even if an automatic IPL is allowed, an automatic IPL of the Power is not performed unless the power is off and the mode is set to either Normal or Auto. • Starting a remote system To start the remote system automatically with a telephone and a modem, you need to set the system value QRMTIPL to one. Before you start: 1. Set the mode on the control panel to Normal or Auto, and turn the system off. 2. After the Power is turned off and is made ready for remote IPL, do not turn the modem on or off. Otherwise, the system might start unexpectedly, although it turns itself off in a few minutes.





Uempty

To start the remote system: 1. Dial the telephone number that is assigned to the electronic customer support modem and line of the remote system. If you hang up before the silence, the IPL might not complete. 2. Wait about 20 to 40 seconds while the telephone rings. You will hear a modem tone and then silence. At this time, the communication is being established from the modem to the control panel to start the IPL sequence. 3. Hang up the telephone. The system performs an IPL, and the Sign On display is shown. 4. Sign on to the system.




25-59

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System value using 5250 emulation IBM i


Figure 25-24. System value using 5250 emulation

AS248.1

Notes: Using a 5250 emulation session, you can use the Work with System Values (WRKSYSVAL) command to set the system values discussed in this unit. To display the screen captured in the upper left side of this visual, we have entered the WRKSYSVAL command, and then used F4 to prompt both the command itself and the system value parameter. From the resulting screen you can choose one of the categories displayed or you can page down and locate the specific system value of interest. Another alternative is to enter the WRKSYSVAL command and press the Enter key. That will display the screen captured in the lower right side of the display. From this screen, you page down to locate the specific system value of interest.




25-61

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System values using System i Navigator IBM i


Figure 25-25. System values using System i Navigator

AS248.1

Notes: System values can be set using System i Navigator. Once you are signed on to your system, expand Configuration and Service, and click System Values. This will update the right pane to show a list of the system value categories that can be set using this interface. In this example, we have clicked the Restart category to show the notebook displayed. Notice that there are multiple system values that can be set using the different tabs presented.




25-63

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System values using Systems Director Navigator IBM i


Figure 25-26. System values using Systems Director Navigator

AS248.1

Notes: System values can be set using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. Once you are signed on to your system, click Configuration and Service > System Values. This will show a list of the system values that can be set using this interface. Find the system value of interest, click the arrow, and choose Properties to change the specific system value.




25-65

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — An IPL can be performed in three other ways. All of these are automatic IPLs, which are controlled by system values. The operator can choose to have the system perform an automatic IPL when utility power has been restored after a power failure. An IPL can be initiated remotely or be performed at a specified date and time. Make sure the students understand that neither a remote nor a date/time IPL can be initiated unless the Power is powered off and the mode is either set to Normal or Auto. Now that you know how to start the system, let's look at ways you can stop it. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

25.2. Stopping the system




25-67

Instructor Guide

Stopping the system: Overview IBM i

The Power i can be stopped in different ways.

ZZzzzz

The PWRDWNSYS command The Power On and Off Tasks menu The Power push button


Figure 25-27. Stopping the system: Overview

AS248.1

Notes: Just as there are different ways to perform an IPL on a Power i, there are different ways to stop it. The method you use depends on what is happening on your system when you want to stop it. • The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command You can use this command to power off the Power in a controlled manner or immediately. Using this command is the recommended way to stop the system. • The Power On and Off Tasks menu The main purpose of the Power On and Off Tasks menu is to set up a power on and off tasks schedule; however, it can also be used to power off the Power immediately and then load it. • The Power push button If you are unable to stop the system by using either the PWRDWNSYS command or the Power On and off Tasks menu, you can use the Power push button (B) to stop it immediately. 25-68 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





25-69

Instructor Guide

Steps prior to power down IBM i

1

Allocate QSYSOPR to your job in *BREAK mode: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK

2

Make sure all users sign off of the system.

3

Check the status of any batch jobs.

4

Hold any job queues that have jobs waiting to run.

5

Check for removable media and remove them.


Figure 25-28. Steps prior to power down

AS248.1

Notes: To ensure the system ends normally, you should perform the following steps before powering it down: 1. Allocate QSYSOPR to your job in break mode. 2. Make sure all users sign off. Send a message that interrupts all users who are signed on telling them to sign off. Include both the current date and time and the time at which the power down occurs. a. Type go managesys and press Enter. Select option 12 (Work with signed-on users) on the Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu. If the Work with User Jobs display is shown, you need to switch to basic assistance level using F21 (Select assistance level). b. Press F10 (Send message to all) on the Work with Signed-On Users display; then type the message in the Message text field on the Send a Message display and press F10 (Send). Wait for the users to sign off. Check to make sure all users have signed off by pressing F5 (Refresh) on the Work with Signed-On Users display. 25-70 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

When everyone is signed off of the system, the display shows only your job. To sign someone off of the system, use option 4 (Sign off). If you have separate interactive subsystems other than the controlling subsystem, you might want to stop the interactive subsystems once the users have signed off. This prevents them from signing on again before you have stopped the system. To end your interactive subsystem, on the Work with subsystem Descriptions (WRKSBSD) display, select your interactive subsystem and use option 10 (End subsystem) to end it. On the End subsystem (ENDSBS) display, in the How to end field, type either *CNTRLD to end jobs after a user-specified delay or *IMMED to end jobs immediately. 3. Check the status of any batch jobs that might be affected if the Power is powered down. a. Type go managesys on any command line and press Enter. Select option 11 (Work with jobs) on the Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu. If the Work with User Jobs display is shown, use F21 to switch to basic assistance level (Select assistance level). b. Press F14 (Select other jobs) on the Work with Jobs display. Type *ALL in the User field and an N in every field except the Message waiting, Running, and Running job held fields. Press Enter. The Work with Jobs display is shown again with the batch jobs listed. 4. If any job queues have jobs waiting to run, press F22 (Work with job queues) to see the Work with Job Queues (WRKJOBQ) display. Hold any job queues that have jobs waiting to run on the Work with Job Queues display. Do not forget to release these job queues when you start the system again. Press F12 (Cancel) to return to the Work with Jobs display, then press F5 (Refresh) every few minutes until all batch jobs have completed processing. 5. Check for removable media, and remove them from the system.




25-71

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There are various ways to ensure that the users of a systems are signed off and that their jobs are ended gracefully. This is just one of the recommended methods. What is important is that the method used works successfully for your system. The next step is to issue the PWRDWNSYS command. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Using the Power Down System command IBM i

This command stops the system in an orderly manner. It does not cause damage to data files. This is the recommended way to stop the system.


Figure 25-29. Using the Power Down System command

AS248.1

Notes: The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command prepares the system too shut down and then starts the power-down sequence. All active subsystems are notified that the Power is being powered down; no new jobs or routing steps can be started by any subsystem. For example, jobs that are on a job queue as a result of a Transfer Job (TFRJOB) command are not allowed to complete. During the subsequent IPL, they are removed from the job queue and their job logs are produced. When the Power is powered down with the *CNTRLD option, a vary off of configuration objects is initiated but might not complete before the power-down completes. When the Power is powered down with the *IMMED option, no vary off of configuration objects is performed. Restrictions • To run this command, you must have job control (*JOBCTL) authority.




25-73

Instructor Guide

• You must have *USE authority to the image catalog specified by the IMGCLG parameter and *EXECUTE authority to the QUSRSYS library containing that image catalog. Note Do not precede an entry with an asterisk (*) unless that entry is a special value that is shown (on the display or in the help information) with an asterisk.

The following parameters are associated with the PWRDWNSYS command: - OPTION (how to end): Specifies whether the system allows the active subsystem to end processing of active jobs in a controlled manner (which lets the application program perform end processing) or whether the system ends the jobs immediately. In either case, the system does perform certain job cleanup functions. - DELAY (delay time if *CNTRLD): Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the system allows a controlled end to be performed by the active subsystems. If the end of job routines are not finished in the specified delay time, any remaining jobs are ended immediately. - RESTART (restart after power-down): Specifies whether the system ends and powers down or whether the system ends and then starts again in unattended mode. - IPLSRC (IPL source): Specifies whether an IPL is started from the A source, B source, or D source of the system. This parameter allows you to control which LIC storage source of the system to load. Also, the source of the system determines where LIC program temporary fixes (PTFs) are applied. This parameter also allows the system to be upgraded to a new release from an install image on the direct access storage device (DASD). - ENDSBSOPT (end subsystem option): Specifies the options to take when ending the active subsystems. In general, specifying these options will improve the performance of the PWRDWNSYS command. Each option has certain side effects that you need to analyze before using that option. This parameter has no effect on jobs that are already in the ending status. - TIMOUTOPT (timeout option): Specifies the option to take when the system does not end within the time limit specified by the QPWRDWNLMT system value. If this time limit is exceeded, the subsequent IPL will be abnormal regardless of the value specified for this parameter. - CONFIRM (confirm): Specifies whether the request should be confirmed before the Power is powered down.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U25-F32 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U25-F32 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U25-F32 on your PC place of the next visual, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




25-75

Instructor Guide

Controlled power-down with time limit IBM i

The PWRDWNSYS command with time delay can be issued from a CL jobstream, from a CL program, or by the system operator.

PWRDWNSYS OPTION (*CNTRLD) DELAY(120)

No

If no jobs are active or if all are completed before the delay time expires, the power-down sequence begins as soon as the last job of any still running has finished.

ANY JOB STILL ACTIVE?

Yes No

120 SECOND TIME-OUT?

The DELAY parameter allows you to enter how long, in seconds, you want processing to continue before canceling active jobs.

Yes SYSTEM CANCELS ALL ACTIVE JOBS SYSTEM INITIATES POWER -DOWN SEQUENCE

If jobs are canceled because the time has expired, the job files might be partially updated. The system initiates the power-down sequence after all jobs have been completed or canceled.

END © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-30. Controlled power-down with time limit

AS248.1

Notes: If you follow the steps shown on the Steps prior to power down visual you saw a few moments ago, using the PWRDWNSYS command is the preferred way to power down your system. When you run the PWRDWNSYS command, specify a controlled end and a delay of at least 30 seconds (this gives you time to sign off). After you issue the PWRDWNSYS command, you should immediately sign off from your workstation. The power-down sequence will begin.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Of all the options available, the one shown in this visual is the preferred method of powering down the system. Even with this method, the operator should take the steps shown on the Steps prior to power down visual before issuing the PWRDWNSYS command. When the PWRDWNSYS command has been started, no new jobs can be started by any user on the system. You cannot cancel the PWRDWNSYS command. You must be absolutely sure that you want to power the system down before entering this command! If the PWRDWNSYS command is run with the OPTION parameter set to *CNTRLD, the DELAY parameter controls how long active jobs are given to end on their own. IBM i waits up to the delay time specified for all active jobs on the system to end. If all active jobs end within the delay period, the system begins the power-down process immediately. If the delay time expires before all active jobs have ended, an immediate power-down sequence begins. There is another way to stop your Power i system: from the Power On and Off Tasks menu discussed previously in this unit. While you discuss this menu, you can use the Power On and Off Tasks menu visual in this unit, have the students turn to that visual, or both. You can use option 3 on this menu to power off the Power immediately and option 4 to power off the Power immediately and then power it on. Both of these options assume you have terminated all activity on the system that might be adversely affected by ending jobs immediately. When you select either of these options, you must confirm your choice on a second display. If you cannot use the PWRDWNSYS command or Power On and Off Tasks menu to stop the Power i system, you can still power down the system with the Power push button. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-77

Instructor Guide

Using the Power push button IBM i

Unpredictable results can occur in data files. Next IPL might take longer to complete. WARNING

Use the Power push button only if you cannot use the PWRDWNSYS command or the Power On and Off Tasks menu.

1

Make sure there is no tape in any tape device.

2

Make sure mode is set to Manual.

3

Press the Power push button.

4

To confirm, press the Power push button again. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 25-31. Using the Power push button

AS248.1

Notes: When you press the Power push button twice in a row, the system turns the power off almost immediately. When the power off is complete, the Power on light goes on. To turn the power off using the Power push button, do the following: 1. Press the Power push button (or option 8 on the control panel for fast power off). The Function/Data display blinks O? (the international power off symbol). 2. Press the Power push button again. The light continues to blink as the Power is being powered off. When power off is complete, the light goes off. You can cancel the power-off operation after you press the Power push button the first time. To do this, simply press any other push button on the control panel.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Unpredictable results can occur in data files using this method, and the next IPL might take longer to complete. If the system does not turn the power off within 30 minutes after you press the Power push button twice, wait for the System Attention light to come on. When this light comes on, this means there is a system problem. Refer to system problem documentation. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-79

Instructor Guide

Exercises IBM i


Exercise: System values using 5250 emulation Exercise: System values using System i Navigator Exercise: System values using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Basically, use the same values using a different interface.

Inform instructor when you have completed your exercises. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes: If your instructor tells you to, please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the System values and IPL exercise. This is an optional exercise.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If you have enough classroom time to do it, refer the students to the Student Exercise Guide and have them perform the System values and IPL exercise. This is an optional exercise. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U25-checkpoint. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U25-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248U25-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




25-81

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: You can use the Change IPL Attributes command to control the time it takes for your system to perform an IPL. 2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the power on process? a. b. c. d.

Attended Unattended Automatic Restart

3. Which type of IPL is used to reload your system from tape after a disk failure? a. b. c. d.

A B C D © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: You can use the Change IPL Attributes command to control the time it takes for your system to perform an IPL. The answer is True.

2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the power on process? a. b. c. d.

Attended Unattended Automatic Restart

The answer is Attended.


A B C D

The answer is D. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





25-83

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Start the Power i: Perform unattended IPL Perform attended IPL (Change IPL options) Enable automatic IPLs Identify and work with system values that affect IPL

Stop the Power i: Use the Power Down System command Use the Power On and Off Tasks menu Use the Power push button



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Summarize by comparing a typical day (IPL and power off the system) with the exception situations (a required change to the system, such as PTF installation, new version of the operating system, or an emergency shutdown). Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Additional information — Transition statement —




25-85

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 26. System security concepts Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit discusses the concepts of IBM i security, including user security and user profiles, security controlled via system values, the authorization of objects, authorization lists, and group profiles.


List the types of security you can set for your system Explain the purpose served by a user profile Discuss the types of information stored in a user profile Explain the different types of users on the system List and discuss the different system privileges that can be assigned to a user • Explain the purpose served by group profiles • Explain the purpose served by authorization lists • Explain how authority is set for an object



Unit 26. System security concepts


26-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: List the types of security you can set for your system Explain the purpose served by a user profile Discuss the types of information stored in a user profile Explain the different types of users on the system List and discuss the different system privileges that can be assigned to a user Explain the purpose served by group profiles Explain the purpose served by authorization lists Explain how authority is set for an object



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss the objectives and remind the students that the purpose of this topic is to make them more comfortable with security, not to make them security experts. In this unit, students learn about security concepts and terminology. Additional information — Transition statement —




26-3

Instructor Guide

1111111111111

Types of security IBM i

Physical security

User security

Resource security


Figure 26-2. Types of security

AS248.1

Notes: There are three types of security on the system. Each type builds on the preceding one. Physical security is about securing physical access to the system, devices (terminals), device output (printers), and media on which data is stored from accidental or deliberate loss or damage. User security limits who can sign on to the system and what they can do once they have signed on to the system. This is accomplished through user profiles and enhanced with the use of group profiles. Object security is also known as resource authority. This is an additional type of security that provides protection for system objects (for example, files, programs, and libraries) and the data within these objects. In this class we will discuss user and resource security concepts.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Physical security helps protect the system and other devices from accidental or deliberate loss or damage. Most measures taken to ensure the physical security of a system are external to the system; however, the Power is equipped with a keylock that prevents unauthorized use of functions at the system unit. User profiles are used to control who can sign on to the system. Menus and programs provide a means of controlling what users have access to when they sign on. Object (resource) security is an additional type of security that helps protect a company's data by limiting access to objects (files, programs, libraries, and so on). Point out to the students that each security type provides a higher level of security than the preceding one and that it is recommended that all types of security be implemented on each system. In this unit, we look at the tools provided with IBM i which control sign-on security and object authority. Physical security is not discussed in this unit since it is external to the system. Additional information — In an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark next to any of these that they use in their company or organization. In a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask to the students to raise their hand for each of these that they use their company or organization. Transition statement —




26-5

Instructor Guide

Types of security control IBM i

U ser rol cont

Ob co ject ntr ol

System control


Figure 26-3. Types of security control

AS248.1

Notes: Security is always active on your system. There are several tools available with IBM i that allow you to control security. These tools are: • User control User profiles and group profiles are used to identify who can sign on to the system and to control what they can do once they are signed on. A user profile identifies an individual user. A group profile is used to grant authority to a group of users. • System control System values are provided as part of the system. They are used to control certain operations in the operating system and to communicate the status of certain conditions. Changes to some system values take effect immediately, some do not take effect until new jobs are started, and others do not take effect until the next IPL. • Object control Also known as resource security. Through the use of CL commands, menu options, and Navigator, users can be granted or denied access to objects and the data they contain. 26-6 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There are a number of tools built into the IBM i that help you control security. These are not separate products you have to buy; they are provided as part of IBM i. Additional information — Transition statement —




26-7

Instructor Guide

Setting up a new user IBM i

User information:

User profile

Password Special authority User class Password expiration level Initial menu or program

List of objects owned

Object authorizations


Figure 26-4. Setting up a new user

AS248.1

Notes: User profiles describe users to the system. A user profile contains general information about a user including security information. For example, it contains: • • • • • •

The user ID and password The privilege class for a user Any special authorities assigned to this user The limits and defaults set for a user A list of all the objects a profile owns A list of all the objects a profile has specifically been authorized to use (or barred from using)





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Inform the students that although the phrase has authority to might be bad English, it is the term used in any description in the online help on the Power i system. The phrase clearly means has authorized access to. Stress that the user profile is the most important type of security object. Additional information — Transition statement —




26-9

Instructor Guide

Type of user: Privilege class IBM i

Privilege class: A user can be defined as one of the following: User Programmer System operator Security administrator Security officer


Figure 26-5. Type of user: Privilege class

AS248.1

Notes: When creating a user profile, you will specify which class of user this person will be. Each privilege class has a default set of system privileges (these are defined on the next page). The authorities specified under system privileges override the default privileges for this user or group. When you are working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the group. The options for the privilege class parameter and their associated privileges are: User

On systems running at security level of 10 or 20, the user’s default privileges are save/restore and all object access. On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50, the user has no privileges.

Programmer

On systems running at security level 10 or 20, the user’s default privileges are save/restore, job control, and all object access.





On a system running at a security level of 30,40, or 50, the user has no privileges.

Uempty

System operator

On systems running at security level 10 or 20 the user’s default privileges are save/restore, job control, and all object access. On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50, the user has save/restore and job control.

Security administrator

On systems running at security level 10 or 20, the user’s default privileges are save/restore, job control, security administration, and all object access. On a system running at a security level of 30, 40, or 50 the user has security administration.

Security officer

The user’s default is to include all of the privileges. These are all object access, save/restore, auditing control, security administration, system configuration, system service access, job control, and spool control.

The recommendation is to set privilege class to User if the user does not need to perform system functions. Privileges are described in more detail on the next page.




26-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System privileges IBM i

Users can be assigned the following privileges: All object access Auditing control Job control Save/restore Security administration Spool control System configuration System services access


Figure 26-6. System privileges

AS248.1

Notes: When creating a user profile, the system privileges parameter is used to specify the system privileges for this user or group. Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. When you are working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the group. The privileges that can be assigned to a user or group profile are: All object access

The user can access any system resource whether the user has private authority or not.

Auditing control

The user has authority to perform auditing functions. This authority is granted to users who turn auditing on or off for the system and control the level of auditing on an object or user.




26-13

Instructor Guide

Job control

The user has authority to change, display, hold, release, cancel, and clear all jobs running on the system, job queue, or output queue that is operator-controlled. The user also has the authority to start writers and to stop active subsystems. This authority is usually granted to a system operator.

Save/restore

The user has the authority to save, restore, and free storage for all objects on the system, whether or not the user has authority to use the object. This authority is usually granted to a system operator.

Security administration The user can create, change, or delete user profiles if authorized to use those commands and the user profiles. Spool control

The user can perform all spool functions.

System configuration

The user has the authority to change Power i/O configurations.

System service access

The user can perform service functions.

If no system privileges are specified, the user has no default privileges.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U26-F07 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. • To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. • Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U26-F07 and click Play. • Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U26-F07 on your PC place of the next visual, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




26-15

Instructor Guide

Group profile IBM i

Group profile NAME: DEPTA GRPPRF: *none OBJOWN: OBJ1, OBJ3 OBJAUT: OBJ2, OBJ4

User profile

User profile

NAME: GRPPRF: OBJOWN: OBJAUT:

NAME: GRPPRF: OBJOWN: OBJAUT:

ART DEPTA

DICK DEPTA OBJ5 OBJ6

User profile NAME: PAT GRPPRF: DEPTA OBJOWN: OBJAUT: *EXC OBJ1


Figure 26-7. Group profile

AS248.1

Notes: A group profile is a special type of user profile. • When using a group profile, you can define authority for a group of users rather than give authority to each user individually. • A group profile can own objects on the system. • A user can be a member of up to 16 group profiles. • A group profile cannot be a member of another group. This technique: • Allows authority to be defined once at the group level rather than several times at the individual profile level. • Gives all members of a group exactly the same authority to use a single set of objects unless additional grants of authority are made at the member level. Authorities that are specified at the individual user level override, for that user, those specified at the group level. 26-16 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Group profiles provide the second method of grouping authorities. A group profile is a profile whose authority to work with objects can be used by several individual users. All members of a group have all the authority of the group profile unless this is overridden at the member (individual user) level. All members of a group profile still have their own user profile. In the terminology of the group profile function, these individual user profiles are called member profiles. The member profiles identify each user and specify the name of the group profile to which the user belongs. The group profile contains most of the authorizations to objects, thereby greatly reducing the need for specific assignments of authority to individual members of the group. A group profile can also be used as a pattern for creating individual user profiles. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U26-F08 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U26-F08 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U26-F08 on your PC place of the next visual, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




26-17

Instructor Guide

Authorization list IBM i

NAME: OWNER:

AUTL1 PATRICIA

List of authorized users: FRED WILMA BILL JOHN *PUBLIC

FILE A

FILE B

NEW USER *USE

*ALL *EXCLUDE *USE *CHANGE *EXCLUDE

PGM A

NEW OBJECT


Figure 26-8. Authorization list

AS248.1

Notes: An authorization list references both user profiles and objects. An authorization list is populated with a list of users who will be authorized to work with those objects that are secured using this list. Each user has a different authority assigned. Next, search for individual objects and secure them using this authorization list. Each of the users named in the list will have the specified authority to that object. An object can only be secured by one authorization list. When a new object is created, it can be secured using this authorization list. Each user named in the list will have the specified authority to that object. A new user can be added to an authorization list. A specific authority will be granted to this new user. This new user will now have the specified authority to all of the objects that are secured using this list.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Individually controlling access to objects on an object by object or user by user basis quickly becomes an almost completely unmanageable task. For that reason, there are two ways to allow the grouping of authorities. The first of these is the use of authorization lists. An authorization list can be used to control access to one or many objects. As shown on the visual, the AUTL1 authorization list controls access to three objects (FILE A, FILE B, and PGM A). An authorization list also contains a list of user profile names. Each user on an authorization list can access all objects secured or protected by the list, but users can be granted different levels of access to the objects controlled by the list. In this visual: • FRED has *ALL authority to use the three objects. • WILMA and the PUBLIC have *EXCLUDE authority. • BILL has *USE authority to the objects. • JOHN has *CHANGE authority to the objects. Additional information — Transition statement —




26-19

Instructor Guide

Public versus private authority IBM i

LFILEB OBJECT

OWNER - USER1 PUBLIC AUTHORITY - *CHANGE Example: CRTLIB............. CRTDTAARA.......... CRTPF..............

AUT(*USE) AUT(*ALL) AUT(*EXCLUDE)


Figure 26-9. Public versus private authority

AS248.1

Notes: There are many ways to give an individual user specific authority to use a specific object. Once a user has been given any specific authority to use an object, that user has private authority to use that object. The authority that the public has to an object is normally set when the object is created and is kept only in the object. Private authority is stored both in the object and in the user profiles of the users who have been given specific authority to use that object.





Uempty





26-21

Instructor Guide

Object authority IBM i

User that creates an object is the object owner Owner or security officer can grant authority to another user Authority can be granted to an object and to the data One of the private authorities that can be granted is *EXCLUDE Ownership of an object can be transferred All users are members of *PUBLIC Public authority to an object is set at create time


Figure 26-10. Object authority

AS248.1

Notes: • The user that creates an object is the object owner. • The owner of an object or a security officer can grant another user authority to work with an object. This is known as private authority. • Authority can be granted to an object as well as the data within the object. For example, you can grant authority to a file, and you can grant authority to the data within that file. • One of the private authorities that can be granted is *EXCLUDE. • Ownership of an object can be granted to another user or a group profile. • All users on a system are member of *PUBLIC. • Public authority to an object is set at create time.





Uempty





26-23

Instructor Guide

System values IBM i

Are used to control or change overall operations to the system Can be set by users with sufficient authority You can search alphabetically for a system value You can search for a system value by category Some system value changes take effect immediately, while others are changed at the next IPL


Figure 26-11. System values

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





26-25

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Environment variables are used to control the operations of the system. 2. Which of the following is information that is not stored in a users profile? a. b. c. d.

Password User class List of owned objects System values

3. Which of the following user types is assigned all of the system privileges? a) b) c) d)

Programmer System operator Security administrator Security officer © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: Environment variables are used to control the operations of the system. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is information that is not stored in a users profile? a. Password b. User class c. List of owned objects d. System values The answer is System values.

3. Which of the following user types is assigned all of the system privileges? a. Programmer b. System operator c. Security administrator d. Security officer The answer is Security officer. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





26-27

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: List the types of security you can set for your system Explain the purpose served by a user profile Discuss the types of information stored in a user profile Explain the different types of users on the system List and discuss the different system privileges that can be assigned to a user Explain the purpose served by group profiles Explain the purpose served by authorization lists Explain how authority is set for an object



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





26-29

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 27. System security using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit shows you how to navigate the system using the different commands and screens to work with security on the system.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • • • • • • • •

Change your password Use system commands to identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Use the correct command to set new authority for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Work with and display system value



Unit 27. System security using 5250 emulation


27-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Change your password Use system commands to identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Use the correct command to set new authority for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Work with and display system value



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





27-3

Instructor Guide

Change Password: CHGPWD IBM i


Figure 27-2. Change Password: CHGPWD

AS248.1

Notes: The Change Password (CHGPWD) display allows you to change your own password. The password that you type will not be displayed as you type it. The system administrator for your system will set a system value (password expiration interval QPWDEXPTIV system value) that determines at what interval the users on this system must change their passwords.





Uempty





27-5

Instructor Guide

Display User Profile IBM i


Figure 27-3. Display User Profile

AS248.1

Notes: The Display User Profile (DSPUSRPRF) display shows you the current values of user attributes for the requested user. The alternative is to use the Work with User Profiles (WRKUSRPRF) command that will display a list of user profiles you are authorized to work with. This command will show the screen capture in the middle of this visual. These attributes in a user profile are used by the system to personalize the way the system functions for each individual user. If you see More on the lower right side of your display, there is more information to view. Press Page Down (or Roll Up) to move toward the end of the information. Press Page Up (or Roll Down) to display and explore the values that are set and stored in a user profile. Remember to use the F1- Help function for a description of any parameters that might be of interest. If you see Bottom instead of More, you are at the end of the information.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U27-F04 in the multimedia library of Elluminate after discussing this visual before you continue to the next topic. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U27-F04 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U27-F04 on your PC place after discussing this visual before you continue to the next topic, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




27-7

Instructor Guide

Enable a disabled user profile IBM i


Figure 27-4. Enable a disabled user profile

AS248.1

Notes: One of the most common duties that a system operator will be called on to perform is to enable a user’s profile. Use the Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) command to make this change. The system will disable a user profile when: • The user profile reaches the maximum number of password verifications. • The user profile expiration date is reached. • The STATUS parameter is set to *DISABLED for the profile. The status (STATUS) parameter specifies the status of the user profile. The values that you can specify for this parameter are: • *SAME: The value does not change. • *ENABLED: The user profile is valid for sign-on. • *DISABLED: The user profile is not valid for sign-on until an authorized user enables it again. Batch jobs can be submitted under a disabled user profile. 27-8 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





27-9

Instructor Guide

Work with Objects by Owner IBM i


Figure 27-5. Work with Objects by Owner

AS248.1

Notes: From the Work with User Profiles screen, you can use option 12 (Work with objects by owner) to display the Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN) display for the user profile selected. From this display, you can display or change authorizations, display the description, delete, rename, or change the ownership for any object to which you are authorized. The Work with Objects by Owner (WRKOBJOWN) display shows a list of all objects owned by a user profile. It also lists the library in which the object resides, the type of the object, the attributes of the object, and associated text.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A user must have authority to a user profile and to a specific object before that person would have authority to display a profile or change the authorization for an object. A user with SECOFR or SECADM authority is required before you can display or work with user profiles. Additional information — Transition statement —




27-11

Instructor Guide

Display Object Authority IBM i


Figure 27-6. Display Object Authority

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Object Authority (DSPOBJAUT) command displays: • The list of authorized users of an object and their assigned authority. • If the object is secured by an authorization list, the name of the authorization list is also displayed. • The public authority and primary group authority are also shown. Use the F11 key to scroll through three different versions of the object authority displays. • The Non display detail display shows system-defined authority subsets and USER DEF. • The Object authority display. • The Data authority display. If the user entering the command does not have object management (*OBJMGT) authority to the object, only that user's name and authorities are shown.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The following are shown for the specified object when you run the DSPOBJAUT command: • The object name • The name of the library containing the object • The name of the object owner • The object type • A list of all the users who are authorized to use the object • The authority that each user has for the object • The authorization list name (if the object is secured by an authorization list) Restrictions: You must have use (*USE) authority to the ASP device if one is specified. Additional information — Transition statement —




27-13

Instructor Guide

Grant Object Authority IBM i


Figure 27-7. Grant Object Authority

AS248.1

Notes: The Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) command grants specific authority for the objects named in the command to another user or group of users. Authority can be given to: • Named users • Users (*PUBLIC) who do not have specific authority to the object or the authorization list • Authorization lists This command can be used by an object's owner or by a user with object management authority for the specified object. A user with object management authority can grant to other users any authority that the user has except object management authority. Only the owner of the object or someone with all object special authority (*ALLOBJ), can grant object management authority to a user.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Some restrictions to be aware with the GRTOBJAUT command are: 1. The command must get an exclusive lock on a database file before read or object operational authority can be given to a user. 2. If a user requests authority for another specified user to a device currently in use by another authorized user, authority to the device is not given. 3. Object type *AUTL cannot be specified. 4. AUT(*AUTL) is valid only with USER(*PUBLIC). 5. A user must either be the owner of the object or have *ALL authority to use the AUTL parameter. 6. The user must have object management authority to use the object. 7. If the object is a file, the user must have object operational and object management authorities. 8. For display stations or for workstation message queues associated with the display station, if this command is not entered at the device for which authorities are to be granted, it should be preceded by the Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) command and followed by the Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) command. 9. You must have *USE authority to the ASP device if one is specified. Note For more information, refer to the Power i Security Reference SC41-5302 book.





27-15

Instructor Guide

Work with Authorization Lists IBM i


Figure 27-8. Work with Authorization Lists

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Authorization Lists (WRKAUTL) command shows a list of authorization lists from which you can display and change authorization lists. Restrictions • Only the authorization lists to which you have some authority will be shown on the display. • To perform operations on the authorization lists, you must have use (*USE) authority to use the command invoked by the operation and the appropriate authority to the authorization list on which the operation is to be performed.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — • Demo this command to the students in a class. Ask them to follow along on their screen. • Place the cursor on the authority parameter and press the F1=Help key. Ask the students to review the different values that can be set for this parameter. Additional information — Transition statement —




27-17

Instructor Guide

Display Authorization List IBM i

F15


Figure 27-9. Display Authorization List

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Authorization List display shows a list of users that have authority to objects secured by this authorization list and the users' authorities. The public authority is also shown. Note If a user in the authorization list is also specifically authorized to use an object that this list secures, the specific authority is used to determine the user's authorities. You can use the F11 key to scroll through three different versions of the object authority displays. • The Non display detail display, which shows system-defined authority subsets and USER DEF. • The Object authority display. • The Data authority display. 27-18 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





27-19

Instructor Guide

Security system values IBM i


Figure 27-10. Security system values

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with System Value (WRKSYSVAL) command allows you to work with a specified system value or a category of system values. The system values are provided as part of the system. They are used by the system to control certain operations in the operating system and to communicate the status of certain conditions. Changes to some system values take effect immediately; however, some do not take effect until new jobs are started, and others do not take effect until the next IPL. In this example, we have selected the Security category. Notice the system values that can be set that affect properties related to security. More system values can be displayed when you page up or page down to see all of the system values that fall into this category. More information about system values is available in the Work Management section of the Power i and IBM i Information Center located at: http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter





Uempty





27-21

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i


Exercise: System security using 5250 emulation




AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





27-23

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which of the following options do you need to take on the Work with User Profiles display to enable a users profile? a. b. c. d.

Option 1 - Create Option 2 - Change Option 5 - Display Option 12 Work with owned objects

2. When working with user profiles, which option will show all of the objects to which a user is authorized? a. b. c. d.

Option 1 - Create Option 2 - Change Option 5 - Display Option 12 Work with owned objects

3. True or False: The user who creates an object is automatically designated as the owner of an object. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. Which of the following options do you need to take on the Work with User Profiles display to enable a users profile? a. Option 1 - Create b. Option 2 - Change c. Option 5 - Display d. Option 12 Work with owned objects The answer is Option 2 Change.

2. When working with user profiles, which option will show all of the objects to which a user is authorized? a. Option 1 - Create b. Option 2 - Change c. Option 5 - Display d. Option 12 Work with owned objects The answer is Option 5 Display.

3. True or False: The user who creates an object is automatically designated as the owner of an object. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





27-25

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Change your password Use system commands to identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Use the correct command to set new authority for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Work with and display system value



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





27-27

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 28. System security using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about This unit shows you how to navigate the system using System i Navigator to work with security on the system.


Change your password Identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Display and work with system values



Unit 28. System security using System i Navigator


28-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Change your password Identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Display and work with system values



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss the objectives and remind the students that the purpose of this topic is to make them more comfortable with security, not to make them security experts. In this unit, students learn about security concepts and terminology; then, in the lab, they see how security is implemented on the system. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of System i Navigator for the next ten visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator for the next ten visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID.




28-3

Instructor Guide

Change Password IBM i


Figure 28-2. Change Password

AS248.1

Notes: To change your password with System i Navigator perform the following steps: 1. Right click on your system. 2. Click Connection to System on the drop down menu. 3. Click Change password on the second drop down menu. 4. These actions will display the Change IBM i Password panel. 5. Specify your current and the new password then click OK to perform this command. This is equivalent to running the change password (CHGPWD) command on a 5250 emulation green screen.





Uempty





28-5

Instructor Guide

User profile > Properties (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 28-3. User profile > Properties (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: In System i Navigator, you can manage users and groups by expanding the Users and Groups branch. New users can be created in different ways. • Click New User on the toolbar. • Expand the File menu, and select New User. • Right-click Users and Groups or All Users, and select New User. New users can be created based on existing users. • Drag and drop a profile name to Users and Groups or to All Users. • Right-click a user and select New Based On.





Uempty





28-7

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: Clicking Capabilities on the Properties panel for the selected user opens a Capabilities window for that user.





Uempty





28-9

Instructor Guide

Capabilities: Privilege class IBM i


Figure 28-5. Capabilities: Privilege class

AS248.1

Notes: Under the Privileges tab on the Capabilities window, one of the Privilege classes can be selected from a drop-down list. Each privilege class has a default set of system privileges. The authorities specified under System privileges override the default privileges for this user or group. When you are working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the group. Options for the Privilege class field and their associated privileges are: User

The user has no privileges on systems at security level 30 and above.

Programmer


System operator

The user has save/restore and job control on systems at security level 30 and above.





Uempty


The user has security administration on systems at security level 30 and above.

Security officer

The user’s default privileges are all object access, save/restore, auditing control, security administration, system configuration, system service access, job control, and spool control.

System privileges are described in more detail on the next page.




28-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Capabilities: System privileges IBM i


Figure 28-6. Capabilities: System privileges

AS248.1

Notes: Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. The privileges are: All object access


Auditing control

The user has authority to perform auditing functions. The authority is granted to users who turn auditing on or off for the system and control the level of auditing on an object or user.

Job control

The user has authority to change, display, hold, release, cancel, and clear all jobs running on the system, job queue, or output queue that is operator-controlled. The user also has the authority to start writers and to stop active subsystems. This authority is usually granted to users who operate the system.

Save/restore

The user has the authority to save, restore, and free storage for all objects on the system, whether the user has authority to use




28-13

Instructor Guide

the object. This authority is usually granted to users who operate the system. Security administration The user can create, change, or delete user profiles if authorized to use those commands and the user profiles. Spool control



The user has the authority to change Power i/O configurations.








Uempty





28-15

Instructor Guide

Capabilities: Applications IBM i


Figure 28-7. Capabilities: Applications

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Applications tab to identify which functions a user or group can access. You can limit access for a user or a group to specific functions. For more information, refer to Application Administration in the Power i Information Center. Access for allows you to select one of the following categories of applications: System i Navigator

Includes System i Navigator and any plug-in extensions.

Client Applications

Includes all client applications providing functions on clients that can be administered through application administration.

Host Applications

Includes all applications that reside entirely on the Power i and provide functions that can be administered through application administration.

Function list displays a list of defined functions and the access settings for the user or group. For System i Navigator, plug-in applications must be administered from their respective first-level folders in the function tree. Management central functions, such as





Uempty

fixes and inventory and collection services, must be administered on the central server. The values displayed in the function list are: • Function: Displays the products and functions defined on the Power i. • Access: Indicates the access setting the user or group has to the corresponding function. If Access is selected, the user or group is granted access to the corresponding function. If Access is not selected, the user or group is denied access to the corresponding function. If the box is grayed and selected, the user or group has access to at least one, but not all, of the contained functions. A user with security administration system privilege can change the access setting for users or groups. • Access derived from: Specifies the source of the user’s or group’s access setting. This column is empty for functions that contain other functions. Possible values are: • All object system privilege: The user or group obtains its access setting from the all object system privilege. A user or group with all object system privilege has access to the corresponding function. • Default access: The user or group obtains its access setting from the default access setting of the corresponding function. • User name: The user or group is explicitly granted or denied access to the corresponding function. • Group access: The user obtains the access setting from one of its groups.




28-17

Instructor Guide






Uempty

User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 28-8. User profile: Owned Objects (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: When you are working with the System i Navigator GUI, perform the following steps to display the objects that are owned by a user: 1. Click and expand Users and Groups. 2. Click on All users. This will display the list of users that your user id is allowed to manage. These users are displayed on the pane in the right half of the window. 3. Locate and right click on the user whose owned objects you wish to list. 4. Click User objects on the drop down menu. 5. Click Scan for owned objects on the secondary drop down menu. 6. This will display the Scan for owned objects window. - In the Profiles field you can specify a user profile. - In the Maximum number of objects field you can set a maximum number of objects to be displayed.




28-19

Instructor Guide

- Click OK to see the results window displayed on the next page of the student guide.

Note

1. These steps can only be performed by a user who has the correct authority to perform these actions. 2. You can perform these steps for an individual system which will show the objects that are owned by a user on this individual system. Optionally, using Management Central, you can click on a system group which will show the objects that are owned by a user on all of the systems in this System group.





Uempty





28-21

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: The Scan for owned objects window is displayed as a result of performing the steps detailed on the previous page in the student guide. The top half of this window will allow you to choose the system on which the user's objects are stored. If you specify a system group on the previous page you will see a list of the systems in the System group. The bottom half of the window shows the objects owned by the user. You may need to scroll down or page down to see the complete list.





Uempty





28-23

Instructor Guide

Password System Values (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 28-10. Password System Values (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: In Navigator: 1. Select your server. 2. Expand Configuration and Service. 3. Click System Values to display the system values categories. 4. Right-click Password. 5. Select Properties to see the window on the next page in the student guide.





Uempty





28-25

Instructor Guide

Password System Values (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 28-11. Password System Values (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: In Navigator: 1. Select your server. 2. Expand Configuration and Service. 3. Click System Values to display the system values categories. 4. Right-click Password. 5. Select Properties. In the example, in the visual, we are displaying: • The Validation 2 tab in the upper right capture. • Then in the capture in the middle, scroll down to see the remaining system values specified on the Validation 2 tab. • And the Expiration tab in the lower right capture. • Notice the different system values that can be set using these two tabs that control password properties on your system. 28-26 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





28-27

Instructor Guide

Authorizing objects: Permissions IBM i


Figure 28-12. Authorizing objects: Permissions

AS248.1

Notes: Authorizing objects is a third way to control security. Since all IBM i data structures (system and user) are objects, the security Power is primarily concerned with protecting objects. All objects have some invisible common structures in their control blocks. This allows a unified approach to security since all objects interface the same way to the security routines. You can use System i Navigator to manage authorization on objects. Expand the File Systems branch of your server, click Integrated File System, right-click any object, and select Permissions.





Uempty





28-29

Instructor Guide

Permissions: Basic IBM i


Figure 28-13. Permissions: Basic

AS248.1

Notes: The columns visible under the Authorities view selection of Basic are: • Use: Allows access to the object attributes and use of the object. The public can view, but not change, the objects. • Change: Allows the contents of the object (with some exceptions) to be changed. • All: Allows all operations on the object except those that are limited to the owner. The user or group can control the existence of the object, specify the security for the object, change the object, and perform basic functions on the object. The user or group can also change ownership of the object. • Exclude: All operations on the object are prohibited. Users and groups with this permission setting to an object are not allowed to access or perform any operation on it. The public is not allowed to use the object.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — An authority is the permission to access an object. The object owner and the security officer (or other *ALLOBJ users) can grant or revoke authority to an object with the Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) and Revoke Object Authority (RVKOBJAUT) commands. It is important to understand the difference between the authority to work with an object and the authority to access the data in the object. A user can be granted the authority to move, rename, save, or delete the object without having access to the data stored in the object. Similarly, a user can have full access (read, write, update, delete, and execute) to the data in the object without having the authority to manipulate the entire object. Additional information — Transition statement —




28-31

Instructor Guide

Permissions: Details (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 28-14. Permissions: Details (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Permissions include all types of access a user has to an object. The system uses the following order to check for a user’s authorization to an object: • The authority of an individual profile to access the object. • The authority of an individual profile to access an object’s authorization list. • The authority of a group profile to access the object. • Public authority to access either the object or the authorization list of the object. The system stops checking once proper authority is found. The users who make up the public depends on the object in question. For a given object, the public consists of all users who have no private authority to that object. Object permissions (from column Operational to column Reference, as listed below) define what operations can be performed on the object as a whole. Your choices of which object permissions to select vary, depending on whether you are defining authority for Qsys.lib, Qdls object, or a different type of object. 28-32 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

• Operational: Provides the permission to look at the description of an object and use the object as determined by the data permission that the user or group has to use the object. • Management: Provides the permission to specify the security for an object, to move or rename the object, and add members to database files. • Existence: Provides the permission to control the existence of the object and ownership. The user or group can delete the object, free storage of the object, perform save and restore operations for the object, and transfer ownership of the object. If a user or group has special save system permission, the user or group does not need object existence permission. • Alter (used only for database files and SQL packages): Provides the permission needed to alter the attributes of an object. With this permission on a database file, the user or group is allowed to add and remove triggers, to add and remove referential and unique constraints, and to change the attributes of the database file. With this permission on an SQL package, the user or group is allowed to change the attributes of that SQL package. • Reference (used only for database files): Provides the permission needed to reference an object from another object such that operations on that object can be restricted by the other object. If the user or group has this permission on a physical file, the user or group can add referential constraints in which the physical file is the parent.




28-33

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Permissions: Details (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 28-15. Permissions: Details (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Data permissions (from the Read to the Execute column, as listed below) define what operations can be performed on the contents of the object. Your choices of which object permissions to select vary, depending on whether you are defining authority for Qsys.lib, Qdls object, or a different type of object. • Read: Provides the authority needed to get the contents of an entry in an object and display the contents of the object, such as viewing records in a file. • Add: Provides the permission to add entries to an object, such as adding messages to a message queue or adding records to a file. • Update: Provides the permission to change the entries in an object, such as changing records in a file. • Delete: Provides the permission to remove entries form an object, such as removing messages from a message queue or deleting records from a file. • Execute: Allows the user or group to run a program or procedure or to search a library or directory. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



28-35

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Permissions: Columns IBM i


Figure 28-16. Permissions: Columns

AS248.1

Notes: The Columns selection under the Authorities view drop-down list displays checkboxes for permission values on columns within an SQL table or view. Each permission value is checked based on the user's or group's permission. This option is only available for SQL table and view objects that reside on a server running OS/400 Version 4 Release 2 or later. Making changes to Columns permissions can cause related changes to appear in the Basic and Details views. For example, granting a permission to a column for which the user does not have permission at the object level will cause the object level permission to be granted. The change is immediately reflected in the Basic and Details views. Likewise, changes made in the Basic and Details views can cause changes in the Columns permissions that are displayed. Current permissions are indicated by a check mark in the checkboxes. The Name column displays a list of authorized users and groups.




28-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty

New Authorization List IBM i


Figure 28-17. New Authorization List

AS248.1

Notes: You can use the System i Navigator to create a new authorization list. Expand the Security branch of your server, right-click Authorization Lists, and select New Authorization List.




28-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty

New Group profile IBM i


Figure 28-18. New Group profile

AS248.1

Notes: A user can be a member of a group. A group gives the same authority to all its members. A group usually consists of people who work in the same department, have similar jobs, and who need to use the same applications in the same way. To create a new group profile, right-click Groups under the Users and Groups branch of your server, and select New Group. You can specify the group’s name, description, and the users included in the group. From this dialog, you can continue specifying information about the group’s security and network options.




28-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i


Exercise - System security using System i Navigator



AS248.1

Notes:




28-43

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: A user can change their password using System i Navigator. 2. Which of the following system privileges are automatically assigned to a system operator? a. b. c. d.

Auditing and Job control Job control and Save/Restore Save / restore and Security administration Security administration and Auditing

3. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to display who is authorized to work with an object.



AS248.1

Notes:




28-45

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: A user can change their password using System i Navigator. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following system privileges are automatically assigned to a system operator? a. b. c. d.

Auditing and Job control Job control and Save / restore Save / restore and Security administration Security administration and Auditing

The answer is Job control and Save / restore. 3. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to display who is authorized to work with an object. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Change your password Identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Display and work with system values



AS248.1

Notes:




28-47

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 29. System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about This unit shows you how to navigate the system using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to work with security on the system.


Change your password Identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Display and work with system values



Unit 29. System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


29-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Change your password Identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Display and work with system values



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss the objectives and remind the students that the purpose of this topic is to make them more comfortable with security, not to make them security experts. In this unit, students learn about security concepts and terminology; then, in the exercise, they see how security is implemented on the system. Additional information — Transition statement —




29-3

Instructor Guide

Change Password IBM i


Figure 29-2. Change Password

AS248.1

Notes: To change your password when using Systems Director Navigator for IBM, i perform the following: 1. Open a browser tab, and start a connection to your system. 2. Expand IBM i Management. 3. Click the System task. 4. Click the Change Password link. This will present the tab captured in the lower left corner of this visual. Fill in the parameters as needed, scroll down, and click OK.





Uempty





29-5

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: To display the properties for a user’s profile when using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i, perform the following: 1. Open a browser tab, and start a connection to your system. 2. Expand IBM i Management. 3. Click the Users and Groups task. 4. Click the Users link. This will present the tab captured in the lower left on this visual. 5. Locate the user profile you want to display, and click the arrow. 6. Click Properties to see the screen capture on the next page.





Uempty





29-7

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: Click Capabilities on the Properties tab for the selected user to open the Capabilities tab for that user (screen capture seen on the next page).





Uempty





29-9

Instructor Guide

Capabilities: Privilege class IBM i


Figure 29-5. Capabilities: Privilege class

AS248.1

Notes: Under the Privileges tab on the Capabilities window, one of the privilege classes can be selected from a drop-down list. Each privilege class has a default set of system privileges. The authorities specified under System privileges override the default privileges for this user or group. When you are working with a group, the privileges specified apply to all users who are members of the group. Options for the Privilege class field and their associated privileges are: User


Programmer


System operator

The user has save/restore and job control on systems at security level 30 and above.





Uempty


The user has security administration on systems at security level 30 and above.

Security officer

The user’s default privileges are all object access, save/restore, auditing control, security administration, system configuration, system service access, job control, and spool control.

System privileges are described in more detail on the next page.




29-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Capabilities: System privileges IBM i


Figure 29-6. Capabilities: System privileges

AS248.1

Notes: Privileges are required to perform certain functions on the system. The privileges are: All object access


Auditing control

The user has authority to perform auditing functions. This authority is granted to users who turn auditing on or off for the system and control the level of auditing on an object or user.

Job control

The user has authority to change, display, hold, release, cancel, and clear all jobs running on the system, job queue, or output queue that is operator-controlled. The user also has the authority to start writers and to stop active subsystems. This authority is usually granted to users who operate the system.

Save/restore

The user has the authority to save, restore, and free storage for all objects on the system, whether the user has authority to use




29-13

Instructor Guide

the object. This authority is usually granted to users who operate the system. Security administration The user can create, change, or delete user profiles if authorized to use those commands and the user profiles. Spool control



The user has the authority to change system I/O configurations.








Uempty





29-15

Instructor Guide

Capabilities: Password IBM i


Figure 29-7. Capabilities: Password

AS248.1

Notes: The second tab for Capabilities shows the parameters in the user profile that relate to Password. Notice the values that can be set for a user.





Uempty





29-17

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: To display the objects that are owned by a user, perform the following: 1. Click the arrow for the user. 2. Select User Objects. 3. Select Owned Objects. 4. Choose which types of objects you want to display.





Uempty





29-19

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: The Users tab is displayed as a result of performing the steps detailed on the previous page in the student guide. This tab displays the objects that are owned by a user.





Uempty





29-21

Instructor Guide

System Values IBM i


Figure 29-10. System Values

AS248.1

Notes: To work with system values, perform the following: 1. Click the Configuration and Service task. 2. Click System Values task to display the System Values categories. 3. Click the arrow for Password category and select Properties to see the tabs displayed on the next page in the guide. Note that System Director Navigator for IBM i will show the system values the same as on the green screen.





Uempty





29-23

Instructor Guide

Password System Values IBM i


Figure 29-11. Password System Values

AS248.1

Notes: Notice all the system values that can be set. In this example, we can see the system values that can be set using the Validation 2 and the Expiration tabs that affect password properties.





Uempty





29-25

Instructor Guide

Authorizing objects: Permissions IBM i


Figure 29-12. Authorizing objects: Permissions

AS248.1

Notes: Authorizing objects is a third way to control security. Since all IBM i data structures (system and user) are objects, the security system is primarily concerned with protecting objects. All objects have some invisible common structures in their control blocks. This allows a unified approach to security since all objects interface the same way to the security routines. You can use Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to manage authorization on objects. To see the windows captured in the visual, perform the following: 1. Click the File Systems task. 2. Click Integrated File Systems. 3. Click the arrow for QSYS.LIB, and then click Open. 4. Locate the library where your object is stored, click the arrow, and select Open. 5. Locate the object of interest, and select Permissions.





Uempty





29-27

Instructor Guide

Permissions: Basic IBM i


Figure 29-13. Permissions: Basic

AS248.1

Notes: The column visible under the Authorities view selection of Basic are: • Use: Allows access to the object attributes and use of the object. The public can view, but not change, the objects. • Change: Allows the contents of the object (with some exceptions) to be changed. • All: Allows all operations on the object except those that are limited to the owner. The user or group can control the existence of the object, specify the security for the object, change the object, and perform basic functions on the object. The user or group can also change ownership of the object. • Exclude: All operations on the object are prohibited. Users and groups with this permission setting to an object are not allowed to access or perform any operation on it. The public is not allowed to use the objects.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — An authority is the permission to access an object. The object owner and the security officer (or other *ALLOBJ users) can grant or revoke authority to an object with the Grant Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) and Revoke Object Authority (RVKOBJAUT) commands. It is important to understand the difference between the authority to work with an object and the authority to access the data in the object. • A user can be granted the authority to move, rename, save, or delete the object without having access to the data stored in the object. • Similarly, a user can have full access (read, write, update, delete, and execute) to the data in the object without having the authority to manipulate the entire object. Additional information — Transition statement —




29-29

Instructor Guide

Permissions: Details IBM i


Figure 29-14. Permissions: Details

AS248.1

Notes: Permissions include all types of access a user has to an object. The system uses the following order to check for a user’s authorization to an object: • The authority of an individual profile to access the object. • The authority of an individual profile to access an object’s authorization list. • The authority of a group profile to access the object. • Public authority to access either the object or the authorization list of the object. The system stops checking once proper authority is found. The users who make up the public depends on the object in question. For a given object, the public consists of all users who have no private authority to that object. Object permissions (as listed below) define what operations can be performed on the object as a whole. Your choices of which object permissions to select vary, depending on whether you are defining authority for Qsys.lib, Qdls object, or a different type of object.





Uempty

• Operational: Provides the permission to look at the description of an object and use the object as determined by the data permission that the user or group has to use the object. • Management: Provides the permission to specify the security for an object, to move or rename the object, and add members to database files. • Existence: Provides the permission to control the existence of the object and ownership. The user or group can delete the object, free storage of the object, perform save and restore operations for the object, and transfer ownership of the object. If a user or group has special save system permission, the user or group does not need object existence permission. • Alter (used only for database files and SQL packages): Provides the permission needed to alter the attributes of an object. With this permission on a database file, the user or group is allowed to add and remove triggers, to add and remove referential and unique constraints, and to change the attributes of the database file. With this permission on an SQL package, the user or group is allowed to change the attributes of that SQL package. • Reference (used only for database files): Provides the permission needed to reference an object from another object such that operations on that object can be restricted by the other object. If the user or group has this permission on a physical file, the user or group can add referential constraints in which the physical file is the parent. • Read: Provides the authority needed to get the contents of an entry in an object and display the contents of the object, such as viewing records in a file. • Add: Provides the permission to add entries to an object, such as adding messages to a message queue or adding records to a file. • Update: Provides the permission to change the entries in an object, such as changing records in a file. • Delete: Provides the permission to remove entries form an object, such as removing messages from a message queue or deleting records from a file. • Execute: Allows the user or group to run a program or procedure or to search a library or directory.




29-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Permissions: Columns IBM i


Figure 29-15. Permissions: Columns

AS248.1

Notes: The Columns selection under the Authorities view drop-down list displays checkboxes for permission values on columns within an SQL table or view. Each permission value is checked based on the user's or group's permission. This option is only available for SQL table and view objects that reside on a System i server. Making changes to Columns permissions can cause related changes to appear in the Basic and Details views. For example, granting a permission to a column for which the user does not have permission at the object level will cause the object level permission to be granted. The change is immediately reflected in the Basic and Details views. Likewise, changes made in the Basic and Details views can cause changes in the Columns permissions that are displayed. Current permissions are indicated by a check mark in the checkboxes. The Name column displays a list of authorized users and groups.




29-33

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Permissions IBM i


Figure 29-16. Permissions

AS248.1

Notes: Change Object Permissions can be reached from Security menu.




29-35

Instructor Guide






Uempty

New Authorization List IBM i


Figure 29-17. New Authorization List

AS248.1

Notes: You can use the Systems Director Navigator for IBM i to work with existing or create a new authorization list. To create a new authorization list, perform the following: 1. Click the Security task. 2. Click Authorization Lists. 3. Click the down arrow for Select Action, select New, and then select Authorization List. 4. Click Go to see the tab in the lower left.




29-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Authorization List IBM i


Figure 29-18. Authorization List

AS248.1

Notes: After you create an authorization list: • You can change or see permissions • You can see secured which objects are secured, by type of object: - Objects in libraries - Objects in folders - Objects in directories




29-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty

New Group profile (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 29-19. New Group profile (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: A user can be a member of a group. A group gives the same authority to all its members. A group usually consists of people who work in the same department, have similar jobs, and who need to use the same applications in the same way. To create a new group profile, perform the following: 1. Click User and Groups task. 2. Click Groups link. 3. Click the down arrow for Select Action, select New Group, and then click Go. You can specify the group’s name, description, and the users included in the group. From this dialog, you can continue specifying information about the group’s security and network options.




29-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

New Group profile (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 29-20. New Group profile (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Notes: On the Group Properties page, you will see: • The user profiles that belongs to the group. • Click Capabilities to see the Privileges screen which will show privileges for the group.




29-43

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: System security using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i



AS248.1

Notes:




29-45

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display all of the objects owned by a user. 2. Under which of the following tasks do you find the link to change your password in Systems Director Navigator? a. b. c. d.

System Work Management Security Users and Groups

3. Which of the following is not one of the authority views you can display for an object? a. b. c. d.

Basic Details Columns Location © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




29-47

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display all of the objects owned by a user. The answer is True.

2. Under which of the following tasks do you find the link to change your password in Systems Director Navigator? a. System b. Work Management c. Security d. Users and Groups The answer is System.

3. Which of the following is not one of the authority views you can display for an object? a. Basic b. Details c. Columns d. Location The answer is Location. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Change your password Identify and display a user profile Enable a disabled user profile List all of the objects owned by a user Display the authority currently in place for an object Display and work with authorization lists on the system Display and work with system values



AS248.1

Notes:




29-49

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 30. System configuration overview Estimated time 00:10

What this unit is about Many different devices can be attached to the Power i, and you, the system operator, must manage them. You need to be able to determine when and if there is a problem and how to manage the devices should a problem arise. In this unit, we will discuss concepts of connecting different devices to the system.

What you should be able to do At the end of this topic, you should be able to: • • • •

Discuss what a typical configuration might look like Discuss the concepts of how twinax devices are connected Discuss how PCs can be connected Discuss the different types of consoles that are supported



Unit 30. System configuration overview


30-1

Instructor Guide

How you will check your progress


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Discuss what a typical configuration might look like Discuss the concepts of how twinax devices are connected Discuss how PCs can be connected Discuss the different types of consoles that are supported



AS248.1

Notes: • How does the system know when you have attached another device? • To what degree can the system sense problems with devices? To answer these questions, we look at device monitoring and discuss what you should do to understand and print your hardware configuration.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss the objectives and explain to the students that this topic should make them more comfortable with device menus and commands. Remind the students what a configuration is: the physical and logical arrangement of devices and programs that make up a data processing system. In this unit, we focus on the hardware configuration. Additional information — Transition statement —




30-3

Instructor Guide

Sample configuration IBM i

SDLC communication line

Power i (Montreal) Workstation controller Console

LAN adapter

Order entry

Token ring

Tape unit

CD-ROM unit

Shipping and receiving

Modem

Display

Controller (Paris)

Display Display

Display

Display

Accounting

Display

Printer

Printer

Printer

Printer © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 30-2. Sample configuration

AS248.1

Notes: There are several ways to attach devices. • Locally attached devices: CD-ROM, tape drives, workstation controllers • Local area network (LAN) attached devices: Token ring and Ethernet adapters • Remotely attached devices: Remote workstation controllers A description of each local and remote workstation (a display or a printer) must be given to the system. Tape drives, CD-ROM drives, and controllers (local and remote) must also be described to the system. Local workstations are attached by a cable, while remote workstations are attached by a communication line. Communication lines must also be described to the system.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Each communications line, local and remote controller, and device on the system must be identified to IBM i. This is done by creating a description for each line, controller, and device that is attached. The difference between local and remote devices is that a local device is attached directly by a cable. A remote device is attached by a communications (telephone) line. In the illustration of a sample configuration on this visual, both local and remote devices are attached to the system. Additional information — Transition statement —




30-5

Instructor Guide

Question IBM i

What types of devices are connected to your Power i?



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to use the type text on screen tool to list what types of devices are connected to their Power i. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands and select two or three students to list what types of devices are connected to their Power i. Possible Answers: • HVAC Equipment • ATM Machines • Point of Sale Equipment • Storage Solutions Additional information — Transition statement —




30-7

Instructor Guide

Locally attached: CD-ROM, tape drives, and controllers IBM i

Locally attached devices are usually auto-configured, but manual configuration is possible. When the system takes care of the configuration, a default naming convention is applied.


Figure 30-4. Locally attached: CD-ROM, tape drives, and controllers

AS248.1

Notes: The Power i ships with automatic configuration enabled. This means that your system recognizes and automatically creates the device descriptions for your CD-ROM and tape controllers or drives using default values. The naming convention for these devices depends upon your system's default naming convention. The IBM-shipped default naming convention for these devices would be OPT01, TAP01, and TAPCTL01, respectively. These devices can be manually configured (although this is not recommended). To monitor and manage these devices: 1. From the main menu, select option 3 (General System Tasks). 2. Select option 8 (Device Operations). 3. Choose the type of device you want to work with: Tape (option 4) or optical (option 7).





Uempty





30-9

Instructor Guide

Locally attached: Workstation controller (twinaxial) IBM i

Local workstations and printers Twinax workstation controller

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

DSP01 Switch setting = 0

Twinax cable attached workstations and printers

DSP02

Switch setting = 1

PRT01

Switch setting = 2


Figure 30-5. Locally attached: Workstation controller (twinaxial)

AS248.1

Notes: One way to attach local workstations (both display stations and printers) is by a twinaxial cable. A twinaxial cable consists of two twisted wires inside a shield that is used in the 5250 device family. This cable connects each device to a twinaxial workstation controller, an I/O controller card in the Power i, or on expansion unit that directly connects local workstations to the system. A twinaxial cable can be attached directly to a twinaxial workstation controller. A display station function called cable through can also be used. With cable through, multiple workstations can be attached to one cable path. Workstation devices can be cabled through with up to seven devices on one line (or port) on a controller. Each device on a port must have a unique switch setting (address) to identify its location. The twinaxial workstation controller can, depending on the system model, be two ports on the back of the system unit, a two-port cable that attaches to the back of the system unit, or an eight-port attachment that attaches to the back of the system unit (as shown on this visual).





Uempty





30-11

Instructor Guide

LAN attached IBM i

Local workstations and printers Power i

Communication controller Ethernet adapter or Token ring adapter

LAN

Ethernet adapter or Token ring adapter Printer Personal computer © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 30-6. LAN attached

AS248.1

Notes: Personal computers can be attached by an LAN. This LAN attachment can consist either of stand-alone token ring/Ethernet adapters or of an Integrated PC Server (IPCS).





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Personal computers can be attached to the system through an LAN connection. An LAN connection allows information to be transferred among devices located on the same premises. The physical connections can be: • IBM Cabling System • Shielded twisted-pair • Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) • Wireless Additional information — Transition statement —




30-13

Instructor Guide

Remotely attached: Remote workstation controllers IBM i

Remote workstations and printers Power i

SDLC communication line RMTLIN01

Controller RMTCTL01 0

Terminal multiconnector, midrange hub, or express hub

1

2

3

RMTDSP01

Display or printer © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 30-7. Remotely attached: Remote workstation controllers

AS248.1

Notes: A communications line connects the Power i to the remote controller in another location. From that controller, cables are used to attach the workstation displays and printers. The number of workstations that can be attached to a remote controller depends on the type of controller used.





Uempty





30-15

Instructor Guide

Personal systems attachment summary IBM i

Remote

Remote Remote controller

LAN Local

Ethernet


Figure 30-8. Personal systems attachment summary

AS248.1

Notes: Personal systems can connect locally through twinaxial cable with a twinax adapter card installed. They can also be a part of an Ethernet LAN with an appropriate LAN adapter card installed. Personal systems can be connected remotely through a remote workstation controller. Single systems can connect with a Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) adapter card and can coexist on the same line with other devices that use the SDLC protocol. Personal systems can also communicate with the Power i system by means of an asynchronous communication.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A summary of personal systems connectivity is appropriate. Additional information — Transition statement —




30-17

Instructor Guide

Power i consoles IBM i

The different console connections are: Twinaxial console Operations console Hardware Management Console (HMC) Systems Director Management Console (SDMC)


Figure 30-9. Power i consoles

AS248.1

Notes: Use either an operations console, a twinaxial console, or a Hardware Management Console (HMC) as system consoles to access and administer your server. An operations console is available with the Windows client, Power i Access for Windows. • Twinaxial console The twinaxial console uses a basic command-line interface to access and manage your server, and it does not require the use of a personal computer to act as a console. You access the server through a console screen, keyboard, and twinaxial cables. • Operations console An operations console allows you to use your PC to access and control the console and control panel locally and remotely. To access the server, a PC or local console must be configured. A local console configuration can be any of the following: a local console directly attached to the server, a local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed, a local console on a network, or a local console through dial-up support. Once you configure a local console directly attached to the server with remote 30-18 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

access allowed, you can establish connections from remote PCs or a remote console through the local console. • HMC HMC supports configuration and management of Power i servers. You can manage logical partitions, manage capacity on demand, power systems on and off, delete and report changes in hardware, and more. The HMC is used to manage Power5 systems and below. • SDMC SDMC supports configuration and management of Power i servers. You can manage logical partitions, manage capacity on demand, power systems on and off, delete and report changes in hardware, and more. The HMC is used to manage Power6 and Power7 systems. It will not manage that are below this level.




30-19

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: The system ships with automatic configuration turned off. 2. Which of the following is not considered locally attached hardware? a. b. c. d.

CD-ROM Tape systems Controllers LAN adapters

3. Which of the following is not a supported console type? a. b. c. d.

Twinax console Operations console HMC Wireless console © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




30-21

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: The system ships with automatic configuration turned off. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is not considered locally attached hardware? a. CD-ROM b. Tape systems c. Controllers d. LAN adapters The answer is LAN adapters.

3. Which of the following is not a supported console type? a. Twinax console b. Operations console c. HMC d. Wireless console The answer is Wireless console. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Discuss what a typical configuration might look like Discuss the concepts of how twinax devices are connected Discuss how PCs can be connected Discuss the different types of consoles that are supported



AS248.1

Notes:




30-23

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 31. Configuration using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about Many different devices can be attached to the Power i, and you, the system operator, must manage them. This unit will discuss the commands and menus used to manage the devices connected to your system.

What you should be able to do At the end of this topic, you should be able to: • Use the appropriate command to work with system control system values • Use the appropriate command to display the default system printer • Discuss how devices are named on your system and which system value controls this function • Use the appropriate command to work with hardware resources • Describe the options available to mange devices connected to your system • Discuss what service tools are and how these are accessed



Unit 31. Configuration using 5250 emulation


31-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use the appropriate command to work with system control system values Use the appropriate command to display the default system printer Discuss how devices are named on your system and which system value controls this function Use the appropriate command to work with hardware resources Describe the options available to mange devices connected to your system Discuss what service tools are and how these are accessed © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





31-3

Instructor Guide

System control system values IBM i


Figure 31-2. System control system values

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Work with System Values command, and specify the System control category. Specifically, the command to use is: WRKSYSVAL *SYSCTL Entering this command will show the system control system values that are shown in the screen captured in the lower right of this visual.





Uempty





31-5

Instructor Guide

Printer device system value IBM i


Figure 31-3. Printer device system value

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Work with System Values command and specify the printer device system value to see the screen captured in the lower right of this visual. Specifically, the command to enter is: WRKSYSVAL QPRTDEV This system value specifies the default printer for the system. If the specified device description exists, it must be a printer device description. Note You must have *ALLOBJ and *SECADM special authorities to change this system value.

A change to this system value takes effect for new jobs started in the system. The shipped value is PRT01.





Uempty





31-7

Instructor Guide

Creating device description automatically IBM i

Enable System value - QAUTOCFG 0=OFF 1=ON Device name System value - QDEVNAMING *NORMAL *S36 *DEVADR Default printer System value - QPRTDEV PRT01 or printer name


Figure 31-4. Creating device description automatically

AS248.1

Notes: Each device attached to the Power is described to the system through a device description. These descriptions contain a name that you can use to refer to each device and a description of the device for the system. Device descriptions for locally attached devices (displays, printers, workstation controllers, tapes, and optical drives) can be created automatically by IBM i or manually by using IBM i commands. Device descriptions for remote devices must be created manually by using IBM i commands. If you have PC devices (display stations and printers) using the workstation function attached to your system, some of the device descriptions are automatically created, and some must be created manually. Therefore, IBM i commands are available. There are several system values that affect the creation of device descriptions. Your Power i is shipped with the system value QAUTOCFG set to one. The system automatically creates and names local controller and device descriptions using generic settings. You can display or change this system value with the WRKSYSVAL command or through the interface of System i Navigator. You can also make changes to this setting during an attended IPL. The Set Major System Options display allows you to enable or disable automatic configuration. 31-8 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

When a local controller or device is automatically configured, IBM i determines the format of the name based on the contents of the QDEVNAMING system value. The following is an explanation of the possible values for this system value: • *NORMAL (default) Uses a naming convention unique to the Power i, for example, DSP01 for a display, PRT01 for a printer, CTL01 for a controller, TAP01 for a tape drive, OPT1 for a CD-ROM, and TAPCTL01 for a tape controller. • *S36 Uses a naming convention similar to that in System/36, for example, W1 for a display, P1 for a printer, CTL01 for a controller, T1 for a tape drive, OPT01 for a CD-ROM, and TAPCTL01 for a tape controller. • *DEVADR Uses a naming convention based on the device address. It uses the same name as the *NORMAL setting but appends the device address to the name. The address reflects the controller the device is attached to, the port on that controller, and the address of the device. For example, DSP010203 is a display on CTL01, using port 02, with device address 03.




31-9

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Creating device description manually IBM i

To manually create device descriptions, the following commands are the most important: CRTDEVDSP CRTDEVPRT CRTDEVTAP CRTDEVOPT


Figure 31-5. Creating device description manually

AS248.1

Notes: Following are some of the more frequently used commands used to configure devices manually: • Create Device Description (Display): CRTDEVDSP • Create Device Description (Printer): CRTDEVPRT • Create Device Description (Tape): CRTDEVTAP • Create Device Description (CD-ROM): CRTDEVOPT There are other commands you can use to configure devices. These are not covered in this course.




31-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If the students want (or need, as is the case for remote devices) to create their own device descriptions, some of the more frequently used commands are listed on this visual. Following are other Create Device Description commands that are less frequently used: • Create Device Desc (Advanced Program-to-Program Communication - APPC): CRTDEVAPPC • Create Device Desc (Asynchronous - ASYNC): CRTDEVASC • Create Device Desc (Binary Synchronous Communication - BSC): CRTDEVBSC • Create Device Desc (Finance): CRTDEVFNC • Create Device Desc (SNA Host): CRTDEVHOST • Create Device Desc (Intra): CRTDEVINTR • Create Device Desc (Media Lib): CRTDEVMLB • Create Device Desc (Network): CRTDEVNET • Create Device Desc (Retail): CRTDEVRTL • Create Device Desc (SNPT): CRTDEVSNPT • Create Device Desc (SNA Upline Facility - SNUF): CRTDEVSNUF Now that you know some of the devices that can be attached to the system, let us see how you can determine whether there is a problem with a device. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Work with messages IBM i


Figure 31-6. Work with messages

AS248.1

Notes: The system operator message queue QSYSOPR alerts you to situations that need your attention in relation to devices. The command to display the screen in the visual is: DSPMSG QSYSOPR When you receive a message in this message queue about a device, you can view the appropriate status displays and take action.




31-13

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Display Messages: Assistance level IBM i

Basic Assistance Level

Intermediate Assistance Level © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 31-7. Display Messages: Assistance level

AS248.1

Notes: When you are on the Display Messages screen, you can use the F21 function key to toggle between the basic and the intermediate assistance levels. • *BASIC - The Operational Assistant user interface is used. This user interface separates messages into two categories: (1) messages needing a reply and (2) messages not needing a reply. New messages are shown at the top of each list. • *INTERMED - The system user interface is used. The DSPMSG command online help information assumes the *INTERMED user interface is shown. If the *BASIC user interface is shown, see the online help information for the Work with Messages (WRKMSG) command.




31-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next four visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.





Uempty

Work with Hardware Resources IBM i


Figure 31-8. Work with Hardware Resources

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command allows you to specify the type of hardware resource with which you want to work. The possible values for the required parameter are: • *CMN: The Work with Communication Resources display is shown. • *CRP: The Work with Cryptographic Resources display is shown. • *CSA: The Work with Coupled Adapter Resources display is shown. • *LAN: The Work with LAN Adapter Information display is shown. • *LWS: The Work with Local Work Station display is shown. • *STG: The Work with Storage Resources display is shown. • *PRC: The Work with Processor Resources display is shown.




31-17

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Work with Hardware Resources: Processors IBM i


Figure 31-9. Work with Hardware Resources: Processors

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Hardware Resources (WRKHDWRSC) command allows you to add, change, remove, or show information about resources on the system. Specifically, the command used to display the screen capture in the lower right is: WRKHDWRSC *PRC The Work with Processor Resources display shows all processor and main storage cards installed in the system as well as an entry for the processing unit itself and the main card enclosure or system unit housing these cards.




31-19

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Managing devices IBM i


Figure 31-10. Managing devices

AS248.1

Notes: You can manage the devices on your system either from menus or the command line. The easiest method is using the option off of the Device Operations menu. From the Device Operations menu, you can manage all devices on your system. To access the Device Operations menu, you can either select option 8 (Device operations) on the General System Tasks menu or enter go device on a command line and press Enter. From the Device Operations menu, you can manage: • • • • •

Devices (option 1) Displays only (option 2) Printers only (option 3) Tape units only (option 4) Optical volumes, files, libraries, and devices only (option 7)




31-21

Instructor Guide






Uempty

The command used to manage devices IBM i


Figure 31-11. The command used to manage devices

AS248.1

Notes: Selecting option 1 (Work with device status) on the Device Operations menu brings up the Work with Configuration Status prompt display. If you leave *DEV in the Type field and the defaults for the remaining parameters and press Enter, all system devices are displayed. The Work with Configuration Status display shows the name of each device, its status (ACTIVE, VARIED ON, VARIED OFF, and so forth) and the job (if there is one) associated with the device. There are a number of options available that work with devices from this display: • Make a device available (or vary it on) (option 1) • Make the device unavailable (or vary it off) (option 2) • Display the Work with Job menu, which allows you to perform job control functions, such as canceling a job (option 5) • Work with the device description (option 8) • Show the mode status for the APPC device or mode (option 9)




31-23

Instructor Guide

Pressing F23 (More options) allows you to do the following: • • • • • •

Hold the communications device from transmitting or receiving data (option 3) End the automatic error recovery feature for the device (option 4) Release the communication device for transmitting and receiving data (option 6) Resume automatic error recovery for a device (option 7) Display the connection status of the network device (option 11) Work with the active adapters on a token ring or distributed data interface (DDI) line (option 12)

The Work with Configuration Status display can also be accessed with the Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) command. When you use this command, you need to prompt for the type of device you want to work with. The type of devices you can work with are: *NWS *NWI *LIN *CTL *DEV

Network server description Network interface description Line description Controller description Device description





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Explain the values the students will see most often, which are: ACTIVE

The device is in use.

ACTIVE/WRITER

The device is in use by a spool writer.

HELD

The device is being held.

SIGNON DISPLAY

The Power is performing sign-on processing or is displaying a sign-on prompt on the display.

VARY OFF PENDING

The device is in the process of being varied off.

VARIED OFF

The device is varied off (not available for use).

VARY ON PENDING

The device is in the process of being varied on.

VARIED ON

The device is varied on (available for use).

The job field is blank for network interfaces, lines, controllers, and modes or if no job is using the device. You should also point out that there is a function key on the display (F14 - Display device descriptions), which allows the device descriptions for all devices to be displayed. Even though F14 does not appear on the function key line, it can be pressed at any time. To display F14, press F24 (More keys). Additional information — You can discontinue the application share or live demo after this visual. Transition statement —




31-25

Instructor Guide

Menu to manage communications IBM i

General System Tasks

- or 9. Communications Selection or command ===> 9

GO CMNSTS Communications

1. Communication status

Selection or command ===> 1 CMNSTS

Communications Status System: I520DVL2

Select one of the following: 1. Work with line status 2. Work with controller status 3. Work with device status 4. Work with network interface status 70. Related commands © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 31-12. Menu to manage communications

AS248.1

Notes: If your system communicates with remote systems or workstations, you can use the Communications Status menu to monitor and manage communication lines, remote controllers, and remote devices. To display the Communications Status menu, you can enter either option 9 on the General System Tasks menu and then option 1 on the Communications menu, or enter go cmnsts on a command line. From the Communications Status menu, you can monitor the following: • Communication lines (option 1) • Remote controllers (option 2) • Remote devices (option 3)





Uempty





31-27

Instructor Guide

Command used to manage communications IBM i


Figure 31-13. Command used to manage communications

AS248.1

Notes: Using option 1 on the Communications Status menu displays an interim Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) prompt display. By pressing Enter on this display, you can view the status of all communications lines on your system as well as the network servers, network interfaces, controllers, and devices attached to those lines. In order for you to vary a line off manually using the Vary Configuration (VRYCFG) command, the vary off sequence must be: 1. Devices attached to each controller on the line 2. Each controller on the line 3. Finally, the line To manually vary a line on, the reverse sequence must be followed. If you use options 1 and 2 on the above display, all of these steps are automatically carried out for you.





Uempty

The options on this display allow you to perform the same functions as discussed previously with local devices. From the Communications Status menu, you can choose to work with controller or device status. The management options on those Work with Configuration Status displays are the same as those on the one on this visual.




31-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Printing device addresses IBM i

Device addresses for CTL01 Switch setting Port 0

Port 1

0 DSP01 *DSP 3487 HC DSP03 *DSP 3476 EA

1 DSP02 *DSP 3487 HC DSP04 *DSP 3487 HC

2

3

4

5

6 PRT01 *PRT *IPDS 0 PRT02 *PRT 4234 2

DSP05 *DSP 3487 HC

Port 2 Port 3

Port 4

DSP06 *DSP 3487 HC DSP07 *DSP 3487 HC

PRT03 *PRT 4234 2 DSP08 *DSP 3487 HC

Port 5 Port 6 Port 7

PRTDEVADR © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 31-14. Printing device addresses

AS248.1

Notes: As your system usage grows, you might have to add devices. To determine which controller has ports with available addresses, use the Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) command. This command must be run once for each local and remote controller on your system. This command prints a chart like the one shown on the visual. (The chart shown on the visual is for a local controller.) For each device attached to the workstation controller, named in the CTLD parameter of the PRTDEVADR command, the chart shows the device name, its port and switch setting, its type and model number, its shared session number (valid only if the device type is 3486 or 3487), and whether the device is a display station or a printer. It is a good idea to keep a current copy of this chart for each of your system's local and remote controllers in a control book. IBM i also provides a way to print the workstation addresses for all local controllers at one time. Here are the steps to follow. 1. Enter go assist. The Operational Assistant menu appears. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



31-31

Instructor Guide

2. Enter option 10 - Manage your system, users, and devices. The Manage Your System, Users and Devices menu appears. 3. Enter option 20 - Device status tasks. The Device Status Tasks menu appears. 4. Enter option 10 - Print local device addresses. The device addresses are printed, and a message appears on the message line indicating that the device addresses have been printed.





Uempty





31-33

Instructor Guide

Start System Service Tools IBM i

STRSST

System Service Tools (SST)

1 . Start a service tool Start a Service Tool

Selection 1

7. Hardware service manager Hardware Service Manager

Selection 7

2 . Logical hardware resources (buses, IOPs, controllers, ...) Selection Logical Hardware Resources 2 Select one of the following: 1. System bus resources 2. Processor resources 3. Main storage resources 4. High-speed link resources © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 31-15. Start System Service Tools

AS248.1

Notes: Service tools are used to configure, manage, and service models 5xx, models 8xx, and earlier, or the 8xx logical partitions (LPAR). To manage LPARs on models other than 8xx, you must use the HMC. Service tools can be accessed from dedicated service tools (DST) or system service tools (SST). Service tools user IDs are required if you want to access DST, SST, and use the System i Navigator functions for LPAR management and disk unit management. Service tools user IDs have been referred to as DST user profiles, DST user IDs, service tools user profiles, or a variation of these names. Warning Service tools should be used only under the direction of a service representative. Incorrect use of this service tool can damage both the configuration of your system and the user data in the system.





Uempty

The Start System Service Tools (STRSST) command can be used to determine all of the hardware that exists on the system. This command allows you to display the hardware located in the system bus, in the processor, or in main storage.




31-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The Start System Services Tools topic is included because students should be familiar with it if an IBM service representative asks them to use it. This topic might be difficult for beginning system operators to understand. Depending on your students’ background, you might want to briefly cover this topic. Information about all hardware installed on the system can be displayed by using the Start System Service Tools (STRSST) command. Take the students through the steps on the visual to display the Logical Hardware Resources menu. Depending on how security is implemented on your system, you might not be able to see the STRSST command because it allows hardware information to be added, changed, and deleted. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U31-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U31-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U31-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which system value is used to turn on the auto configuration of local hardware? a. b. c. d.

QSECURITY QPRTDEV QAUTOCFG *SYSCTL

2. Which system value is used to display the name of the system printer? a. b. c. d.

QSECURITY QPRTDEV QAUTOCFG *SYSCTL

3. Which command is used to display the status of your configuration? a. b. c. d.

WRKSYSSTS WRKDSKSTS WRKCFGSTS WRKHDWSTS



AS248.1

Notes:




31-37

Instructor Guide



1. Which system value is used to turn on the auto configuration of local hardware? a. QSECURITY b. QPRTDEV c. QAUTOCFG d. *SYSCTL The answer is QAUTOCFG.

2. Which system value is used to display the name of the system printer? a. QSECURITY b. QPRTDEV c. QAUTOCFG d. *SYSCTL The answer is QPRTDEV.

3. Which command is used to display the status of your configuration? a. WRKSYSSTS b. WRKDSKSTS c. WRKCFGSTS d. WRKHDWSTS The answer is WRKCFGSTS. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Use the appropriate command to work with system control system values Use the appropriate command to display the default system printer Discuss how devices are named on your system and which system value controls this function Use the appropriate command to work with hardware resources Describe the options available to mange devices connected to your system Discuss what service tools are and how these are accessed © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




31-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 32. Configuration using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit will discuss how to use this interface to manage and monitor the system and attached devices.

What you should be able to do At the end of this topic, you should be able to: • Display system values when using this interface • Display the system operator messages • Monitor and display details about the hardware connected to this system • Discuss some of the capabilities available when you start SST from this interface



Unit 32. Configuration using System i Navigator


32-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Display system values when using this interface Display the system operator messages Monitor and display details about the hardware connected to this system Discuss some of the capabilities available when you start SST from this interface



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of System i Navigator for the next nine visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of System i Navigator for the next nine visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open System i Navigator and logon with your instructor ID.




32-3

Instructor Guide

System Values: Devices IBM i


Figure 32-2. System Values: Devices

AS248.1

Notes: To work with system values using System i Navigator, perform the following: Expand Configuration and Service, click System Values, right-click a category, and select Properties. In the Devices System Values dialog, specify the following options related to automatic configuration: • Local controllers and devices specifies whether devices and controllers added to the system are configured automatically. • Device naming convention specifies the naming convention that is used when the system automatically creates device descriptions. • Remote controllers and devices specifies whether remote controllers and devices connected to the system are configured automatically. • Pass-through devices and TELNET specifies the number of virtual devices to automatically configure.





Uempty





32-5

Instructor Guide

System Values: Printing IBM i


Figure 32-3. System Values: Printing

AS248.1

Notes: To display what printer is set as the system default printer, perform the following: Expand Configuration and Service, click System Values, right-click the Printing category, and select Properties.





Uempty





32-7

Instructor Guide

System operator message queue (1 of 4) IBM i


Figure 32-4. System operator message queue (1 of 4)

AS248.1

Notes: To see system operator messages while using System i Navigator, perform the following: Expand Basic Operations, right-click Messages, and then click Customize this View > Include.





Uempty





32-9

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: Select System operator in the Messages for drop-down menu on the Messages-Include dialog.





Uempty





32-11

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: The heading in the right pane now indicates that these are messages for the system operator. To view the details of a message, right-click the message and select Properties. This displays the message details. On this page we see the information on the General tab. The next page will display the Details tab.





Uempty





32-13

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: On this page, we see the Details tab selected.





Uempty





32-15

Instructor Guide

Monitoring hardware status (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 32-8. Monitoring hardware status (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: To monitor the status of your system hardware, select Configuration and Service > Hardware. Hardware can be viewed by category, such as All Hardware or Workstation Resources.





Uempty





32-17

Instructor Guide

Monitoring hardware status (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 32-9. Monitoring hardware status (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Selecting All Hardware displays the list of all system hardware resources in the right pane.





Uempty





32-19

Instructor Guide

Hardware resource properties IBM i


Figure 32-10. Hardware resource properties

AS248.1

Notes: Right-click the hardware resource name you want, and select Properties.





Uempty





32-21

Instructor Guide

Start SST IBM i


Figure 32-11. Start SST

AS248.1

Notes: When you click or select Disk Units, you are prompted with the sign on screen for service tools. You must enter a service tools (DST or SST) user ID to see the information on the next page.





Uempty





32-23

Instructor Guide

SST: Display disk and graphical view IBM i


Figure 32-12. SST: Display disk and graphical view

AS248.1

Notes: The graphical view window allows you to see where all the disk units on your system are located. You can use the graphical view to perform any function that you can perform through System i Navigator Disk Units list view with the added benefit of being able to see a visual representation. You can right-click any object in the table, such as disk units, disk pools, parity sets, or frames, and receive the same options that you would get in the main window. You can choose how to view the hardware in the graphical view window. For example: • You can select to view by disk pools, and then select a disk pool in the list to display only those frames that contain the disk units that make up the selected disk pool. • You can select Show all frames to see all frames and whether or not they contain disk units in the selected disk pool. • You can also select Show device locations to associate disk unit names with the device position where they are inserted.





Uempty

• When you have selected the view you desire, you can also print it for your reference by selecting File > Print. You can right-click any highlighted blue disk unit in the graphical view and select from a list of actions to perform on the disk unit just as you would through System i Navigator Disk Units list view. For example: • You can select to start or stop compression on a disk unit, include the disk unit in a parity set (or exclude it), or rename the disk unit. • If the disk unit has mirrored protection (that is, it is one of a mirrored pair), you can suspend or resume mirroring on the disk unit.




32-25

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises

Exercise: Managing your system configuration



AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the monitoring devices exercise.




32-27

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Introduce the exercise as one that familiarizes the students with some of the menu options and displays used to monitor and control devices, controllers, and communication lines. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U32-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U32-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U32-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which of the following is not one of the options available when you click the All hardware branch in System i Navigator? a. b. c. d.

Communication LAN resources Processor information OS information

2. True or False: With System i Navigator you can access DST. 3. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to display the type, model and serial number of the hardware resources installed.



AS248.1

Notes:




32-29

Instructor Guide





The answer is OS information.

2. True or False: With System i Navigator you can access DST. The answer is True.

3. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to display the type, model and serial number of the hardware resources installed. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Display system values when using this interface Display the system operator messages Monitor and display details about the hardware connected to this system Discuss some of the capabilities available when you start SST from this interface



AS248.1

Notes:




32-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 33. Configuration using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:10

What this unit is about This unit will discuss how to use this interface to manage and monitor the system and attached devices.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Display system values when using this interface • Display the system operator messages using this interface • Discuss some of the capabilities available for disk configuration



Unit 33. Configuration using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


33-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Display system values when using this interface Display the system operator messages using this interface Discuss some of the capabilities available for disk configuration



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





33-3

Instructor Guide

System Values: Power control IBM i


Figure 33-2. System Values: Power control

AS248.1

Notes: To work with system values perform the following steps: 1. Open a browser tab, and start a connection to your system. 2. Expand IBM i Management. 3. Click Configuration and Service task. 4. Click System Values link. 5. This will present the list of system value categories in the upper left window. This is not the same list of system values you see on a 5250 emulation screen when using the WRKSYSVAL command. This interface will show you categories of system values. For example, the Power Control category contains all the system values for power control.





Uempty





33-5

Instructor Guide

System Values: Devices IBM i


Figure 33-3. System Values: Devices

AS248.1

Notes: From the System Values tab, right-click arrow for Devices, then click Properties. This will show the Devices system values page. On first tab, you see Automatic Configuration values, where you can specify the following: • Local controllers and devices specifies whether devices and controllers added to the system are configured automatically. • Device naming convention specifies the naming convention used when the system automatically creates device descriptions. • Remote controllers and devices specifies whether remote controllers and devices connected to the system are configured automatically. • Pass-through devices and TELNET specifies the number of virtual devices to automatically configure. • Maximum number of devices allows you set a limit for these type of devices.





Uempty

On the Recovery tab, you can specify parameters for action to taken when an error occurs on these devices.




33-7

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System Values: Printing IBM i


Figure 33-4. System Values: Printing

AS248.1

Notes: The Printing system values category allows you to set which printer device will be used as the default printer.




33-9

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: To see system operator messages, perform the following: 1. Click Basic Operations task. 2. Click Messages link. 3. Click the down arrow for Select Action and choose Include from the drop-down menu, then click Go. 4. This will display the Messages -include window pictured in the lower right in the visual. 5. To define who’s messages are to be viewed; click the Users button and click the down arrow and choose System operator, then click OK to see the visual on the next page.




33-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: Performing the action on the previous page will display the System Operator messages tab. • To view the details for a specific message, right-click the message and select Properties. • This displays the message details. • On the first page, you see the information on the General tab. • The next page will display the Details tab.




33-13

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Using SST functions IBM i


Figure 33-7. Using SST functions

AS248.1

Notes: IBM System Director Navigator does not have a link to manage hardware resources, but some System Service Tools (SST) functions can be performed with this GUI. 1. Click Configuration and Services task. 2. Click Disk Units link. Note This will display options that are equivalent to performing the SST disk function from a 5250 emulation session. This option allows you to configure your disk units. For this option to be active, the same user ID and password used to sign on to SST must be used to sign on to Systems Director Navigator for IBM i.




33-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i


Exercise: System values using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i



AS248.1

Notes:




33-17

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: The Local controller and devices system value is used to specify whether devices and controllers are configured automatically. 2. Which of the following can be configured with Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? a. b. c. d.

Processor Memory Disks units LPAR

3. True or False: With IBM System Director Navigator for IBM i you can manage all hardware resources in one place.



AS248.1

Notes:




33-19

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: The Local controller and devices system value is used to specify whether devices and controllers are configured automatically. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following can be configured with Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? a. b. c. d.

Processor Memory Disk units LPAR

The answer is Disk units.

3. True or False: With IBM System Director Navigator for IBM i you can manage all hardware resources in one place. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Display system values when using this interface Display the system operator messages using this interface Discuss some of the capabilities available for disk configuration



AS248.1

Notes:




33-21

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Unit 34. Save concepts Estimated time 00:25

What this unit is about Offline storage of data is extremely important as a means of recovery after a failure. There are several methods and commands you can use to save the data so that you can restore it to your Power if the need arises. Tape is the primary medium used on the Power i to store your company's information offline. For your backup process to be effective, you need to understand how to prepare and use this medium. In IBM i terminology, to save something means to make a copy of it somewhere else, usually on tape. The original remains unchanged, except that it now holds information that has been saved. The copy of the object is in a format that is unique to the Power i and cannot be directly restored to any other type of system.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Identify the different options available for save operations • List reasons for saving to tape • Explain the difference between labeled versus unlabeled tape and the uses for these • Explain the purpose served by a save file • Explain the purpose served by virtual tape • List some of the advantages for using virtual tape



Unit 34. Save concepts


34-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Identify the different options available for save operations List reasons for saving to tape Explain the difference between labeled versus unlabeled tape and the uses for these Explain the purpose served by a save file Explain the purpose served by virtual tape List some of the advantages for using virtual tape



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — All systems require some means of saving data offline. Let us examine the IBM i process of accomplishing this task and the different options available to save the data on the system. Additional information — Transition statement —




34-3

Instructor Guide

The save/restore facility IBM i

This facility offers three major functions:

Save

Saving data Restoring data Keeping data history Restore


Figure 34-2. The save/restore facility

AS248.1

Notes: The functions of saving information to, and restoring it from, offline media are an integral part of IBM i. All save/restore commands and facilities are available on each Power i running IBM i. When an object is saved, save information is updated in the object itself and saved with the offline copy. When an object is restored, restore information is updated in the object on the Power i.





Uempty





34-5

Instructor Guide

Information that can be saved and restored IBM i

The following information can be saved and restored: A single object in a library A group of objects identified by a generic name A group of objects identified by a generic name and an object type One or more entire libraries Office data (document library objects, documents, folders, mail, calendars) Objects in directories Changed objects System information (QSYS, configuration objects, security data, and LIC) All libraries other than the system library All user data Security data © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 34-3. Information that can be saved and restored

AS248.1

Notes: Everything on a Power i system running IBM i can be saved. This visual shows some of the information that can be saved. IBM i provides a number of save commands that can be used to save the information. Many of these commands are discussed in this topic.





Uempty





34-7

Instructor Guide

What you cannot save IBM i

The following information cannot be saved: The contents of queues (messages, jobs, and so forth) Damaged objects Objects in use for updates unless the SAVACT function is used


Figure 34-4. What you cannot save

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





34-9

Instructor Guide

What happens when an object is saved? IBM i

Object name

Date and time of save

A9LAB *LIB

Owner name Any public authority The object itself

Sys i5 FORUM

Object type

Storage required in the system

Text Description


Figure 34-5. What happens when an object is saved?

AS248.1

Notes: When an object is saved, its entire description is saved: • • • • • •

The object name and type The save date and time The owner name The storage required in the system The security information The description of the object





Uempty





34-11

Instructor Guide

Save considerations IBM i

A couple of issues need to be considered when saving. The save information is maintained by the system: This helps in locating the backup media that were used. The system warns when restoring an older version.

*EXCLRD

This lock is appropriate when you want to prevent any other job from doing any operation other than read.

SAVACT

This parameter allows an object to be changed while it is being saved.

There is no limit on the number of tapes used for a save/restore operation. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 34-6. Save considerations

AS248.1

Notes: The description on the system for each object is updated with: • The date and time of the save operation • The tape volume identifier and file name • The date and time of the save; which is also saved in the copy of the object on the offline media An attempt to restore anything other than the most recently saved copy of an object results in the sending of an informational message.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The description on the system for each object is updated with the date and time of the save operation. The date and time of saves are also saved in the copy of the object on the offline medium. Multiple concurrent SAVOBJ/RSTOBJ commands against a single library and SAVDLO/RSTDLO commands against a single ASP are possible. Additional information — Transition statement —




34-13

Instructor Guide

Free storage function IBM i

SAVOBJ STG(*FREE) Before

After

Object header

Object header

Contents


Figure 34-7. Free storage function

AS248.1

Notes: Normally, saving an object does not remove it from the system; however, you can use the storage (STG) parameter on some save commands to free some of the storage that is used by saved objects. If you specify STG(*FREE), the object description and search values remain on the system. The contents of the object are deleted. You can perform operations, such as moving and renaming an object whose storage has been freed; however, the object must be restored in order to be used.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — When an object is saved, the disk space occupied by the data portion of the object can be freed (released for use by other objects). The description of the object remains on the system. To use the object, the data portion must be restored to the system. When disk utilization is extremely high, this function is handy for seldom-used objects, such as year-end files. Additional information — Transition statement —




34-15

Instructor Guide





Uempty

34.1. Save to tape media




34-17

Instructor Guide

Option 1: Save to tape media IBM i

SAV... command

disk

DEV(tape names)


Figure 34-8. Option 1: Save to tape media

AS248.1

Notes: IBM i supports saving to tape.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The visual on this page is used to show the concepts of the save-to-tape function. Additional information — Transition statement —




34-19

Instructor Guide

Purposes of tape on Power i IBM i

The reasons to use tape media on the Power i are: To copy objects

To migrate data between systems To distribute software To save / restore objects To provide input / output to programs


Figure 34-9. Purposes of tape on Power i

AS248.1

Notes: Tape media can be used for a variety of reasons on the Power i. Its primary use is to provide a means to save your company's data offline. If it is ever needed, it can be restored to the Power i system.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Tape can be used to copy or save the information on a Power i to an offline backup medium. All system software is distributed on CD-ROM. Tape is the most universal means of exchanging data between systems that have different architectures. Additional information — Transition statement —




34-21

Instructor Guide

Using tape labels IBM i

External tape label: Gummed label that appears on the outside of a tape box or container.

Standard label Unlabeled

Internal tape label: Identification recorded on tape. The internal tape label is used by Power i to get information about data on the tape.


Figure 34-10. Using tape labels

AS248.1

Notes: The following are the characteristics of an unlabeled tape: • Two tape marks to indicate the beginning and end of the tape • Tape marks to indicate the beginning and end of each data file • No volume label information and no data file label information When you display an unlabeled tape, no information about it appears. Unlabeled tape is used to exchange information with another system that does not support standard-label tapes; unless you need them for this purpose, you should never use unlabeled tapes. The following are the characteristics of a standard-label tape: • Tape labels provide information that identifies both the tape volume and the files that are written on it. It is a Power i requirement that tapes used for save or restore operations must have standard labels. • Standard labels are recommended when you are using tape for program input or output and for the other uses of tape (copy, migration, and journaling). Standard-label tapes are always used to distribute software on tape. 34-22 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Make sure the students understand that the term tape label refers to the internal tape label, not the external one. The internal label deserves a closer look because the system can use it to identify both the tape itself and the information written on it. A tape can be initialized as either a standard-label tape or as an unlabeled tape. A tape initialized as an unlabeled tape would most likely be used to exchange data with a system that is not another Power i (a system that does not support standard-labeled tapes). A tape mark is a unique pattern of information written on a tape and used to determine tape positioning when the tape is read. Unless an unlabeled tape is required, as it can be for data exchange, standard-label tapes should always be used. This is because the label provides information that identifies both the tape volume and the files that are written on the tape. IBM i requires that save/restore tapes be initialized as standard-label tapes. Save and restore operations are discussed in the following topics of this unit. Additional information — Transition statement —




34-23

Instructor Guide

Question IBM i

Which type of tape (standard/unlabeled) should you use to: Standard Tape

Unlabeled Tape

Migrate data between different systems (Sys i to Sys z ) Distribute software

Save / restore objects Provide input / output to programs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which type of tape would be used for each situation. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands to indicate which type of tape would be used for each situation. Answers: • Migrate data between different platform of systems (Power i to System z)- Unlabeled Tape • Distribute software (Sys i to Sys i) - Standard Tape • Save / restore objects on the same platform (sys i to sys i)- Standard Tape • Provide input / output to programs (on the Power i) - Standard Tape Additional information — Transition statement —




34-25

Instructor Guide





Uempty

34.2. Save to save file




34-27

Instructor Guide

Option 2: Save to save file IBM i

SAV... command

Disk

DEV(*SAVF) SAVF(name)

SAVLIB SAVFDTA(*YES)

Disk

SAVSAVFDTA SNDNETF

Tape © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 34-12. Option 2: Save to save file

AS248.1

Notes: A save file is a special type of file that can be created on a disk which IBM i treats essentially, as a tape. • Almost anything that can be saved to tape media can be saved to a save file. • Objects and libraries saved to a save file can be restored to disk just as they can from offline media. • The whole idea of saving system data offline is to make sure you have a copy of the data offline in case of machine failure. For this reason, for a save to a save file to be complete, the data in the save file must be saved offline later. Exercise Appendix B: Save and restore from a save file is an optional exercise for anyone who is interested in using save files.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If the contents of a save file must be saved offline in a separate step, why bother with a save file at all? There are two very good reasons. • If you are not using the Save-while-active facility, the system does not allow an object that is being saved to be changed in any way. This means that a company's applications cannot run while the objects used by those applications are being saved. This is because most applications update objects as they run. Saving to a save file copies from disk to disk at much higher speeds than copying from disk to even the fastest tape drive. Saving the data in the save file to offline media has no impact on the running of a company's applications at all. In short, using a save file can reduce the time that an application is unavailable because it is being saved. • Unless a company runs all applications 24 hours a day, saves to tape can be scheduled during non-prime hours to avoid the application impact just discussed; however, an operator must be present to change the tapes during the save process. Again, save files might be the answer. Saves, like most other functions on a Power i system, can be set up to occur automatically at a certain time. Using a save file, saves can be done at the time of lowest application impact without requiring that an operator be present. Operators can save the data in the save file at their convenience. Here are the steps to follow to use a save file: 1. If a save file does not already exist, create one using the Create Save File (CRTSAVF) command. If one does exist, it cannot contain any data. Use the Clear Save File (CLRSAVF) command to remove all data from a save file. 2. Save the required objects or libraries to the save file just as they would be saved to offline media using the appropriate SAVxxx command. 3. The data in the save file is saved to offline media using the SAVLIB SAVFDTA(*YES) command or the Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) command. In addition, the data can be sent to another user on the local Power i system or on a remote system through the SNADS network using the Send Network File (SNDNETF) command. The system operator is generally responsible for all activities relating to tape drives. Before we go into the save operation in more detail, let's look at tape operations. Additional information — Recommend Exercise Appendix B - Save and restore from a save file for anyone who is interested. Transition statement —




34-29

Instructor Guide





Uempty

34.3. Save to virtual tape




34-31

Instructor Guide

Option 3: Save to virtual tape IBM i

SAV... command

Disk

DEV(Virtual Tape Drive)

DUPTAP

Disk

FROMDEV(VirTape) TODEV(Tape)

Tape © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 34-13. Option 3: Save to virtual tape

AS248.1

Notes: Virtual tape is included in Base i operating system. Virtual tape is configured as a Random Access Cartridge Loader (RACL) tape device: • I/O to disk instead of tape media • Virtual tape behaves as tape library mounting specified volumes • You can specify up to 35 virtual tape devices • Virtual tape volumes support multiple optimum block sizes to be compatible with tape devices Tape volume management interface is supported through System i Navigator. User interface is supported through green screen emulator or System i Navigator. Virtual volumes are stored as IFS stream files: • These can be copied to other servers or partitions using FTP • Some considerations of FTP are: - Bandwidth - Management of transmitted files - Disaster recovery 34-32 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U34-F17 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U34-F17 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U34-F17 on your PC place of the next visual while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




34-33

Instructor Guide

Overview and implementation IBM i

Up to 256 virtual tape volumes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CRTIMGCLG

(2)

ADDIMGCLGE

(3)

10

LODIMGCLG

Any ASP or iASP

(4)

CRTDEVTAP

(1)

Virtual tape device

Save Restore

Disk Disk

Duplicate to media, switch or FTP to another system © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 34-14. Overview and implementation

AS248.1

Notes: The steps to implement virtual tape are: 1. Create virtual tape device description then vary on the device. 2. Create virtual tape image catalog. 3. Create virtual volumes. 4. Load image catalog. 5. Save to a virtual volume. 6. Duplicate virtual volume to physical tape. These steps are detailed in the following unit.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Image catalog: • Image catalog commands have been modified to support virtual optical and virtual tape volume. • Image catalog stores up to 256 1,000,000 MB virtual tape volumes. • *ALLOBJ authority no longer required. • Load of image catalog on virtual device makes virtual volume accessible. Virtual media: • Can be write protected. • Virtual volume can be opened by multiple virtual tape devices. Additional information — Transition statement —




34-35

Instructor Guide

Virtual tape support advantages IBM i

Supported on all save/restore commands Can be faster than saving directly to tape Eliminates save file limitations Eliminates media error limitations Duplicate saves to physical media: Duplicate tape (DUPTAP) command If you have BRMS, use Duplicate Media (DUPMEDBRM) command

Onsite and offsite storage


Figure 34-15. Virtual tape support advantages

AS248.1

Notes: Some of the advantages of working with virtual tape devices are: • Supported on all save/restore commands • Can be faster than saving directly to tape: - Similar performance as save files - Best performance in separate ASP • Eliminates save file limitations: - One library per save file - Parallel saves not supported on save file - 1 TB size limitation on save file • Eliminates media error limitations: - Saves ending due to tape device or media errors - Save-while-active checkpoint restriction - Once checkpoint reached, saves cannot be restarted 34-36 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

• Duplicate virtual saves to physical media: - Perform the duplication when a physical tape device is available - At your convenience - Use the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command or, if Backup, Recover, and Media Services (BRMS) is installed, use the Duplicate Media (DUPMEDBRM) command • Onsite and offsite storage: - Keep virtual volumes on systems as needed - Keep duplicated volumes offsite




34-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Virtual tape support considerations IBM i

Additional DASD requirements No install from SAVSYS virtual volume Might not be faster Data compaction not supported Data compression support


Figure 34-16. Virtual tape support considerations

AS248.1

Notes: Some considerations when working with virtual tape are: • Additional DASD might be required since you are saving to disk. • You cannot install SAVSYS from a virtual volume. - D IPL is only supported from physical media. • Saving to a virtual tape might not necessarily be faster: - Speed and time of save will depend on the tape technology currently installed. - Speed depends on the system configuration in place. • Data compaction is not supported when saving to a virtual tape. Data compaction is supported by hardware. • Data compression is supported. Compression is supported by software: - To implement, specify DTACPR(*YES) parameter on Save Commands • Default is *NO - SNA low data compression - Significant performance impact




34-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty

34.4. The tools




34-41

Instructor Guide

Tools used to save IBM i

Save menu Save commands Operational Assistant menu interface System i Navigator support Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS): 5250 menu and command support System i Navigator by way of a plug-in


Figure 34-17. Tools used to save

AS248.1

Notes: The tools that are available on the system to save user and system data are: • Save menu: Use the options on this menu to save the data on your system. • Save commands: Use the appropriate command to save the specific data. • Operational Assistant menu interface: Use this easy-to-use interface to save your data. • System i Navigator supports using the standard default or using BRMS if this licensed program product is installed on your system. • BRMS: This is an IBM licensed program product used to automate the backup and recovery of your system. It will mange your backup media and provide support for archive and retrieval of your data. It is supported on: - 5250 emulation - System i Navigator by way of a plug-in - Systems Director Navigator for IBM i These tools will be covered in the next two units. 34-42 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





34-43

Instructor Guide

Question IBM i

Which of the save facilities are used in your company or organization? Physical

Virtual

tape

tape

Save file

BRMS

Other tape mgmt



AS248.1

Notes: The following courses provide more information about backup services available for the Power i. AS28: Backup and Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for Power i This course covers the features and functions supported by the Backup and Recovery Media Services (BRMS). BRMS is an integrated and comprehensive tool for managing backup and recovery operations on the Power i. OV28: Introduction to Backup Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for i This course covers the features and functions supported by the *BASE portion of the Backup and Recovery Media Services software. BRMS is an integrated and comprehensive tool for managing backup and recovery operations on the Power i. OV29: BRMS Update This course enables you to acquire the skills necessary to work with new and additional BRMS functions. It will also teach additional problem data collection methods and capabilities beyond what can be found in by reviewing history and job logs to collect data to figure out problems that might occur during daily operations. It updates





Uempty

knowledge not included in the entry BRMS Workshop course and topics that have been added with new releases.




34-45

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Ask the students to place a checkmark or X on the slide using the whiteboard tools to indicate which supported save facilities they use at their organization. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Ask the students to raise their hands for each type of save facility that is in use at their organization. Instructors do not forget to sell the following courses. Course descriptions are under the student notes. AS28: Backup and Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for Power i OV28: Introduction to Backup Recovery Media Services (BRMS) for i - ILO OV29: BRMS Update - ILO Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U34-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U34-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U34-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Objects that are considered temporary do not get saved on the system. 2. When you save an object, which of the following is not saved? a. b. c. d.

Object name Object type Name of the object owner Address of this data on disk

3. Which of the following is not one of the supported media for a save operation? a. b. c. d.

Physical tape Save file Virtual tape Memory stick © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




34-47

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Objects that are considered temporary do not get saved on the system. The answer is True.

2. When you save an object, which of the following is not saved? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Address of this data on disk.


Physical tape Save file Virtual tape Memory stick

The answer is Memory stick.







Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completing this unit, you should be able to: Identify the different options available for save operations List reasons for saving to tape Explain the difference between labeled versus unlabeled tape and the uses for these Explain the purpose served by a save file Explain the purpose served by virtual tape List some of the advantages for using virtual tape



AS248.1

Notes:




34-49

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — End this unit by stressing the following points: • An offline, off-site copy of the backup is essential for disaster recovery. Objects that change frequently must be backed up each day. • Develop a plan for saving and for restoring, then document that plan. • Let the System i Navigator, the Save menu, or Operational Assistant backup menus help you to ensure complete and frequent backups. Additional information — Before continuing to the next unit stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Transition statement —





Uempty

Unit 35. Save using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:45

What this unit is about In this unit, we will review the menu options and commands used to perform save operations on your Power i. We will review the steps and commands used to save to tape and to save to a save file. We will then review the steps to set up virtual tape support followed by the steps to save to a virtual tape. We will review the menus available to perform save operations. Lastly, we will review what each of the individual commands saves.


Use the menus and commands available to work with tape media Use the menus and commands available to work with save files Perform the steps required to set up virtual tape support List what data is saved with menu options 21, 22, and 23 Explain what is saved by each of the save commands



Unit 35. Save using 5250 emulation


35-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Use the menus and commands available to work with tape media Use the menus and commands available to work with save files Perform the steps required to set up virtual tape support List what data is saved with menu options 21, 22, and 23 Explain what is saved by each of the save commands



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — After having successfully completed this unit, the student should be able to use tape and save files to save objects or the entire system, and they should be able to use tape or save files to restore objects or the entire system. This unit starts with tape fundamentals and continues with save and restore menus and commands. All systems require some means of saving data offline. Let's examine the IBM i process of accomplishing this task. In this unit, there is no access for Web topic since this function is not supported through that interface. Additional information — Transition statement —




35-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

35.1. Tape operations Instructor topic introduction In this topic, the students learn: • About the fundamentals of tape on the Power i. • How to prepare a tape to receive data, and how to display the contents of a tape. After completing this topic, the student should be able to list the commands used for tape operations.




35-5

Instructor Guide

Tape menu IBM i


Figure 35-2. Tape menu

AS248.1

Notes: The go tape command displays the Tape menu. This menu can also be displayed by selecting: • Option 3 (General system tasks) from the Power i Main menu • Option 8 (Device operations) from the General System Tasks menu • Option 4 (Tape) from the Device Operations menu From the Tape menu, you can run all tape functions. The following explains the options on the Tape menu and, where appropriate, the individual commands that the options prompt for or run: 1. Display tape information This option displays the information on a tape. It prompts for the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command. 2. Initialize a tape





Uempty

Each tape must be initialized before data can be recorded on it. This option initializes (or prepares) a tape so that data can be recorded on it and prompts for the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command. 3. Print contents of a tape This option prints the contents of a tape. It prompts for the Dump Tape (DMPTAP) command. 4. Save This option displays the Save menu, from which you can save data to tape, optical drive, save file, or tape media library device. 5. Restore This option displays the Restore menu, from which you can restore data from tape, optical drive, save file, or tape media library device. 6. Work with tape device status This option displays the Work with Configuration Status display, which shows the status information for tape devices. This option runs the Work with Configuration Status for Tape (WRKCFGSTS) command. 7. Verify tape This option allows the tape unit operations for all tape units to be verified. It prompts for the Verify Tape (VFYTAP) command.




35-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — From the Tape menu, you can find and run all commands to work with tape. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Display Tape: DSPTAP IBM i


Figure 35-3. Display Tape: DSPTAP

AS248.1

Notes: To find out what data is stored on a tape, you can either select option 1 on the Tape menu or prompt for the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command. Note the possible values for the Data type parameter - either *LABELS or *SAVRST. • If you specify *LABELS, the volume label and data file labels for the tape are displayed. • If the information on the tape was written by an IBM i save operation, the operator might want to see the names of the system objects in each tape file. To see this information, *SAVRST must be specified for the data type parameter.




35-9

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — To display data stored on a tape, you can either select option 1 on the Tape menu or prompt for the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command. This visual shows the Display Tape (DSPTAP) prompt display. An illustration of each type of display is shown in the next two visuals. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Contents of a tape: *LABELS format IBM i


Figure 35-4. Contents of a tape: *LABELS format

AS248.1

Notes: To display only the names of the files on a tape, use the default value of *LABELS for the data type parameter on the DSPTAP command. • Information about the tape volume appears at the top of the display. • Information about the first file on the tape appears in the body of the display. • Additional information about this file can be seen by using the Page Down/Up (Roll Up/Down) keys. If several files exist on the tape, the Power i system waits for you to press Enter before it searches for and displays information about the next file.




35-11

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If the operator only wants to see the names of files on a tape, he or she can use the default value of *LABELS for the Data type parameter on the DSPTAP command. Sample output of the DSPTAP command is shown in this visual. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format IBM i


Figure 35-5. Contents of a tape: *SAVRST format

AS248.1

Notes: If the information stored on a tape was written during an IBM i save operation, you might want to see the names of the actual system objects stored in each tape file. To see this type of information, specify *SAVRST for the Data type parameter on the Display Tape (DSPTAP) command. In this format, information is displayed not only about the tape volume and tape file label, but also about the system objects contained in the file. A plus sign (+) in the bottom right-hand corner of the display indicates that there are more objects to be displayed. Use the Page Down/Up (Roll Up/Down) keys to display them.




35-13

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Initialize Tape: INZTAP IBM i


Figure 35-6. Initialize Tape: INZTAP

AS248.1

Notes: Either use option 2 on the Tape menu or prompt for the Initialize Tape (INZTAP) command to prepare a tape for the offline storage of information. Each tape must be initialized before data can be recorded on it. When a tape is initialized, any information on it is overwritten. The three most frequently used parameters on this display are: • New volume identifier: If you accept the default of *NONE for this parameter, the tape you initialize is an unlabeled tape. If you specify a volume for the new volume identifier parameter, the tape is initialized as a standard-label tape, which is required for most operations. • Check for active files: You can check for active files (*YES), choose not to check for active files (*NO), or check for the first active file on the tape (*FIRST). If you specify *YES or *FIRST and an active file is found, the tape is not initialized. If you specify *NO, the tape will be initialized immediately, even if there are active files on it. • Tape density: The tape density parameter determines the amount of data recorded per inch of tape. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



35-15

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Before a tape can be used, it must be initialized (or prepared to receive data). Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

35.2. Save file operations




35-17

Instructor Guide

Save File Commands menu IBM i


Figure 35-7. Save File Commands menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Save File Commands (CMDSAVF) menu allows you to select commands to work with save files. A save file is a file allocated in auxiliary storage that can be used to store saved data on disk without requiring tape or optical media.





Uempty





35-19

Instructor Guide

Create Save File IBM i


Figure 35-8. Create Save File

AS248.1

Notes: The Create Save File (CRTSAVF) command creates a save file. A save file can be used with save and restore commands to contain data that would otherwise be written to tape or optical media. A save file can also be used like a database file to read or write records that contain save or restore information. A save file can also be used to send objects to another user on the SNADS network. You must have object operational (*OBJOPR) authority to the CRTSAVF command in order to create a duplicate save file object or to restore a save file object. You must have add (*ADD) and read (*READ) authority to the library in which the save file is to be created.





Uempty





35-21

Instructor Guide

Save library to a save file IBM i


Figure 35-9. Save library to a save file

AS248.1

Notes: The Device (DEV) parameter specifies the name of the device used for the save operation. The device name must already be known on the system by a device description. When you specify *SAVF, the save operation is done using the save file specified for the Save File (SAVF) parameter. The SAVF parameter specifies the save file that is used to contain the saved data. The save file must be empty unless *ALL is specified for the Clear (CLEAR) parameter. Note A value must be specified for this parameter if *SAVF is specified for the DEV parameter.





Uempty





35-23

Instructor Guide

Other save file commands IBM i

DSPSAVF (Display a Save File) SAVSAVFDTA (Save a Save File) CLRSAVF (Clear a Save File) WRKSAVFBRM (Work with Save Files) DLTF (Delete a Save File)


Figure 35-10. Other save file commands

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Save File (DSPSAVF) command displays the save information in a save file. This includes summary information about the save operation and a description of each object saved to the save file. The Save File Data (SAVSAVFDTA) command saves the contents of a save file to tape or optical media. This command saves the save data in the save file to the device in a way that allows you to restore objects directly from the device. The Clear Save File (CLRSAVF) command clears the contents of a save file. This command clears all existing records from the save file and reduces the amount of storage used by this file. A save file must be cleared before it can be used again. The Work with Save Files using BRM (WRKSAVFBRM) command displays or prints a report of all save files that are on the BRMS media content information. To use this command, you must have the BRMS licensed program installed (5761-BR1). The Delete File (DLTF) command deletes one or more files from the system.





Uempty





35-25

Instructor Guide





Uempty

35.3. Virtual tape operations




35-27

Instructor Guide


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CRTIMGCLG

(2)


ADDIMGCLGE

(3)

10

LODIMGCLG

Any ASP or iASP

(4)

CRTDEVTAP

(1)

Virtual tape device

Save Restore

Disk Disk

Duplicate to media, switch or FTP to another system © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes: The steps to implement virtual tape are: 1. Create virtual tape device description then vary on the device. 2. Create virtual tape image catalog. 3. Create virtual volumes. 4. Load image catalog. 5. Save to a virtual volume. 6. Duplicate virtual volume to physical tape. These steps are detailed on the following pages. Refer to this visual to keep track of where you are in the set up process.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Image catalog: • Image catalog commands have been modified to support virtual optical and virtual tape volume • Image catalog stores up to 256 1,000,000 MB virtual tape volumes • *ALLOBJ authority is no longer required • Load of image catalog on virtual device makes virtual volume accessible Virtual media: • Can be write protected • Virtual volume can be opened by multiple virtual tape devices Additional information — Transition statement —




35-29

Instructor Guide

Image Commands menu IBM i


Figure 35-12. Image Commands menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Image Commands menu includes several of the commands that will be used when setting up support for virtual tape operations. It also includes commands that will be used in day-to-day operations when working with virtual tape.





Uempty





35-31

Instructor Guide

Create Device Desc and vary on IBM i


Figure 35-13. Create Device Desc and vary on

AS248.1

Notes: The Create Device Description (Tape) (CRTDEVTAP) command creates a device description for a tape device. Resource name (RSRCNAME) parameter - *VRT The operating system will generate a virtual hardware resource name to use for the newly created device description. Once the maximum number of virtual hardware resource names have been generated, any additional device descriptions that are created will be assigned the virtual hardware resource name that was last generated. Note The resource name will not be removed if a device description is deleted. You can create a new device description for existing resources by specifying the resource by name. Once the device description is created, use the work with configuration status (WRKCFGSTS) command to vary on your device description. 35-32 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





35-33

Instructor Guide

Create virtual tape image catalog IBM i


Figure 35-14. Create virtual tape image catalog

AS248.1

Notes: The Create Image Catalog (CRTIMGCLG) command is used to create an image catalog object (*IMGCLG) in library QUSRSYS and associate the image catalog with a target directory. An image catalog can be associated with a virtual optical or virtual tape device. An image catalog contains information about images that have been added to the image catalog using the Add Image Catalog Entry (ADDIMGCLGE) command. This command is described on the next page in the guide.





Uempty





35-35

Instructor Guide

Create virtual volumes IBM i


Figure 35-15. Create virtual volumes

AS248.1

Notes: The Add Image Catalog Entry (ADDIMGCLGE) command is used to create a virtual image in the image catalog directory (as specified by the Directory (DIR) parameter on the CRTIMGCLG command). If the image is added successfully, the image will be loaded and the image catalog (*IMGCLG) in library QUSRSYS will be updated. Images can be added from the following sources: • CD or DVD media (by specifying an optical device containing the CD or DVD image to be added). This source is only allowed for optical type image catalogs. • An image file located in a directory. The image file can exist in any directory that is accessible through the Copy Object (CPY) command. • A new image file by specifying the FROMFILE(*NEW) parameter.





Uempty





35-37

Instructor Guide

Load Image Catalog IBM i


Figure 35-16. Load Image Catalog

AS248.1

Notes: The Load or Unload Image Catalog (LODIMGCLG) command is used to associate an image catalog and its images to a virtual device. The status of the image catalog will be changed based on the value specified for the Option (OPTION) parameter as follows: *LOAD

This will cause the status of the image catalog to change to Ready. All image catalog entries that are in mounted or loaded status will be loaded in the specified virtual device. The allow save attribute will be set to not allow save for all image catalog files.

*UNLOAD

This will cause the status of the image catalog to change to Not ready. All image catalog entries are removed from the specified virtual device. The allow save attribute will be set to allow save for all image catalog entries.

Only one image catalog can be associated with a virtual device.





Uempty





35-39

Instructor Guide

Work with Image Catalog IBM i


Figure 35-17. Work with Image Catalog

AS248.1

Notes: Some restrictions to be aware of are: • This command is shipped with public *EXCLUDE authority. • The following authorities are required to view entries for the image catalog specified: - *EXECUTE authority to access library QUSRSYS. - *USE authority to access the image catalog. 1=Create

Creates a new image catalog object in library QUSRSYS.

2=Change

Changes attributes of an image catalog.

4=Delete

Deletes the image catalog and image files from the system.

8=Load

Makes the image files associated with the image catalog entries available to the virtual device.

9=Unload

Makes the image files associated with the image catalog entries unavailable to the virtual device.





Uempty

10=Verify

Prompts for the Verify Image Catalog (VFYIMGCLG) command. This command allows you to verify that the required images exist in the optical image catalog.

12=Work with entries Brings up the Work with Image Catalog Entries display. From this panel, you can work with the image catalog entries for the selected image catalog.




35-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Saving to a virtual volume IBM i


Figure 35-18. Saving to a virtual volume

AS248.1

Notes: For the Device parameter, specify the names of one or more tape devices used for the save operation. If a virtual tape device is used, it must be the only device specified. If multiple tape devices are used, they must have compatible media formats, and their names must be specified in the order in which they are used. Using more than one tape device permits one tape volume to be rewound and unloaded while another tape device processes the next tape volume. To use more than one device in parallel, a media definition must be specified.




35-43

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape IBM i


Figure 35-19. Duplicating virtual volume to physical tape

AS248.1

Notes: The Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command can be used to copy from a virtual tape to a physical tape. Once the duplicate is complete, you store the physical tape offsite. You can leave the virtual tape on the system to use for recovery purposes as needed. Initialize your virtual tape before it is reused for another save operation.




35-45

Instructor Guide






Uempty

35.4. Save menus and commands Instructor topic introduction In this topic, the students learn about several methods and commands available on a Power i system to save data.




35-47

Instructor Guide

Save menu IBM i SAVE

Save System: i520DV2

Select one of the following: Save Data 1. Files 2. Libraries 3. Documents and folders 4. Programs 5. Other objects 6. Changed objects only 7. Licensed programs 8. Security data ++ 9. Storage 10. Configuration 11. Objects in directories

SAVE

Save System: i520DVL2

Select one of the following: Save System and User Data 20. Define save system and user data defaultsSAVE ++ 21. Entire system ++ 22. System data only Select one of the following: + 23. All user data

Save

Save Libraries Save Document Library Objects More... ++ 40. All libraries other than system library 30. All documents, folders, and mail Selection or command 41. All IBM libraries other than system library ===> _________________________________________________________ 31. New and changed documents, new folders, 42. all mail All user libraries _______________________________________________________________ 32. Documents and folders 43. All changed objects in user libraries F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve 33. F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant Mail only F16=System Main menu 34. Calendars Save for Different Systems 50. Save in System/36 format Related Commands More... Selection or command 70. Related commands ===> _________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=System Main menu Selection or command

+ Restricted state ++ Restricted state recommended

Bottom

===> ____________________________________ __________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=System Main menu


Figure 35-20. Save menu

AS248.1

Notes: To find and use save commands, enter go save on the command line. You can also enter option 3 (General system tasks) on the Main menu and then option 6 (Save) on the General System Tasks menu. The Save menu, which consists of three displays, provides options that allow you to save anything on the system. The option marked with a single plus sign (+) places your Power in a restricted state. (A Power is in a restricted state when no subsystems, except the controlling subsystem, are active on the system.) It is strongly recommended that, prior to running the options marked with a double plus sign (++), you place the Power in a restricted state. Option 20 from the Save menu allows you to define your save system and user data defaults. We review this display next.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The Save menu, which is shown on this visual, can be used to find and use save commands. There are three Save menu displays from which you can save all objects. For example, you can select any of these options: • • • • •

Option 1 (Save one or more files) Option 4 (One or more programs) Option 6 (Changed objects only) Option 10 (Configuration objects) Option 21 (The entire system)





35-49

Instructor Guide

Define Save System and User Data Defaults IBM i

Save Menu - Option 20


Figure 35-21. Define Save System and User Data Defaults

AS248.1

Notes: The Define Save System and User Data Defaults display allows you to specify values to be used during the selected backup or restore option. Remember that you can use the F1- Help option to help you understand what defaults will be set with each of the parameters on this display.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Reinforce the importance of the Vary off network servers parameter. If the students have IPCSs installed on their home systems, this parameter should ensure that the servers are properly shut down. Additional information — Transition statement —




35-51

Instructor Guide

Operational Assistant backup IBM i

GO ASSIST

or GO BACKUP

=> 11. Customize your system, users, and devices => 5. Backup tasks


Figure 35-22. Operational Assistant backup

AS248.1

Notes: Operational Assistant (GO ASSIST) provides options to assist in managing and customizing the system. One of those options is to set up and run a scheduled backup. The Backup Tasks menu allows predefined options for daily, weekly, and monthly backups to be set. Default options are provided, which you can change to meet your needs.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Discuss how to use Operational Assistant to manage and customize options. Setting up a backup schedule for daily, weekly, and monthly backups is easy with Operational Assistant, which then provides options to run the backup. Additional information — Transition statement —




35-53

Instructor Guide

Automatic default backups IBM i

Daily

Weekly

Monthly

Back up changes to user libraries selected on backup list.

Back up all user Libraries.

Back up all user libraries.

Back up folders selected on backup list.

Back up all folders.

Back up all folders Back up security data Back up configuration data.

Back up all user directories.




Figure 35-23. Automatic default backups

AS248.1

Notes: This visual shows the Operational Assistant backup schedule defaults: • Note that the monthly and weekly backups save all user libraries, all folders, and all directories. • The daily option backs up only those changes to the libraries and folders specified on a list. • All three of the options back up all user directories. These settings can be modified to suit your requirements using the Change Backup (CHGBCKUP) command or options from the Set Up Backup menu.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Point out the differences between the daily, weekly, and monthly backups, and discuss the library list and folder list functions. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U35-F04 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U35-F04 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U35-F04 on your PC place of the next visual, while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




35-55

Instructor Guide

Save commands IBM i

What is saved?

SAVOBJ SAVLIB SAVDLO SAV SAVCHGOBJ SAVSYS SAVSAVFDTA SAVSECDTA SAVCFG SAVSTG © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 35-24. Save commands

AS248.1

Notes: When you select an option on the Save menu, you are prompted for various save commands, all of which exist on the system. Why are there so many commands? So that you can save only what you need, when you need it. As you become more comfortable working with the Power i, you might prefer to use these commands rather than the Save menu. Following is a brief explanation of what is saved with each command: • SAVOBJ: Saves one or more objects or a group of objects by generic name and type from one or more libraries. When *ALL is specified on the Objects prompt, objects can be saved from up to 300 libraries. When saving to a save file, only one file can be specified. • SAVLIB: Saves one or more libraries (up to 300 named libraries) and all the objects associated with them. When saving to a save file or an optical volume, only one library





Uempty

can be specified. This command can also be used to save, in one operation, one of the following: - All libraries on the system other than QSYS - All libraries that normally contain user data - All IBM-supplied libraries other than QSYS (and six others that cannot be saved except by SAVSTG - see online help) The SAVLIB command saves the entire library, which includes the library description, the object descriptions, and the contents of the objects in the library. For job queues, message queues, output queues, data queues, and logical files, only the object definitions are saved, not the contents. • SAVDLO: Saves documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail). • SAV: Saves one or more directories or objects within directories. This command must be used to save the IFS. • SAVCHGOBJ: Saves only those named objects (specific or generic, combinable with object types) that have changed since the last complete save of a library. • SAVSYS: Saves the system library (QSYS), all security information, all system configuration objects, and the LIC. This saved data can be used during an install process. Individual objects cannot be restored from these tapes. • SAVSAVFDTA: Saves objects which have been saved to a save file to offline media. • SAVSECDTA: Saves one or more named user profiles or all security information, including profiles, authorization lists, and authority holders. • SAVCFG: Saves all configuration and system resource management information without requiring that the system be in a restricted system. • SAVSTG: Saves a copy of the LIC and the contents in auxiliary storage (except unused space and temporary objects) to tape. This is essentially a dump from disk to tape and is generally used as a means of providing recovery from a disaster, such as a fire or a flood. The tapes produced by this command can be used only to install the entire system. Individual libraries and objects cannot be restored from these tapes. Also, the restore disk configuration must match the save disk configuration. Some limitations exist as to the number of related objects that can be saved in a single save operation. Because of the complex nature of these limitations, there is only the slightest of possibilities that any save operation is impacted.




35-57

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Many different save commands exist on each Power i. Why so many? They exist so that only what needs to be saved is saved, and it is only saved when needed. Discuss only the highlights of each command. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Menu options IBM i

Save menu option 21

Save menu option 22

LIC

Y

Y

The system library (QSYS)

Y

Y

Security objects, including user profiles

Y

Y

Y

Device configuration objects All IBM-supplied libraries including those containing user data All user libraries

Y

Y

Y

Y

All mail All folders All documents All objects in directories All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain user data All IBM-supplied directories that do not contain user data All IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data

Save menu option 23

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y N/A

Y

N/A

Y

N/A

Y


Figure 35-25. Menu options

AS248.1

Notes: Each of these menu options ends all subsystems. Each of the options in this table are discussed on the next three pages. For further information, including a detailed checklist procedure, please consult the Power i Information Center.




35-59

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Save menu option 21: Entire system IBM i

Option 21 runs the following commands:

ENDSBS

SBS(*ALL)

OPTION(*IMMED)

SAVSYS SAVLIB

LIB(*NONSYS)

SAVDLO

DLO(*ALL)

SAV

OBJ(('/*')

ACCPTH(*YES)

FLR(*ANY) ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT)

('/QDLS' *OMIT)) STRSBS

UPDHST(*YES)

SBSD(controlling-subsystem)


Figure 35-26. Save menu option 21: Entire system

AS248.1

Notes: Select this option to save the entire system (except the contents of a message, a job, an output, or a data queue). This option performs the following operations: • Starts the save immediately or at a specified time • Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY delivery mode • Ends all subsystems




35-61

Instructor Guide

• Backs up: -

The LIC The system library (QSYS) Security objects, including user profiles Device configuration objects All IBM-supplied libraries, including those containing user data All user libraries All mail All folders All documents All objects in directories

• Starts the controlling subsystem





Uempty





35-63

Instructor Guide

Save menu option 22: System data IBM i


ENDSBS

SBS(*ALL)

OPTION(*IMMED)

SAVLIB

LIB(*IBM)

ACCPTH(*YES)

SAV

OBJ(('/QIBM/ProdData')

SAVSYS

('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData')) STRSBS

UPDHST(*YES)

SBSD(controlling-subsystem)


Figure 35-27. Save menu option 22: System data

AS248.1

Notes: Select this option to save all of the system data. This option performs the following operations: • Starts the save immediately or at a specified time • Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY delivery mode • Ends all subsystems • Backs up: -

The LIC The system library (QSYS) Security objects, including user profiles Device configuration objects All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain user data All IBM-supplied directories that do not contain user data

• Starts the controlling subsystem 35-64 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





35-65

Instructor Guide

Save menu option 23: All user data IBM i


ENDSBS

SBS(*ALL)

OPTION(*IMMED)

SAVSECDTA SAVCFG SAVLIB

LIB(*ALLUSR)

ACCPTH(*YES)

SAVDLO

DLO(*ALL)

SAV

OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT) ('/QDLS' *OMIT) ('/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT) ('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT))

FLR(*ANY)

UPDHST(*YES) STRSBS

SBSD(controlling-subsystem) © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 35-28. Save menu option 23: All user data

AS248.1

Notes: Select this option to save all user data. User data is data created by the user. User data includes IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data. This option performs the following operations: • Starts the save immediately or at a specified time • Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY delivery mode • Ends all subsystems • Backs up: - Security objects, including user profiles - Device configuration objects - All user libraries - All IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data - All mail - All folders - All documents • Starts the controlling subsystem 35-66 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





35-67

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Save using 5250 emulation




AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Save and Restore exercise.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — After completing this exercise, the students should be able to successfully use system commands to save an object, a library, and restore an object. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U35-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U35-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U35-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




35-69

Instructor Guide


1. True or False: Running the display tape command, with the *LABELS format, will show a listing by name of all of the objects that are saved on this tape. 2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command? a. b. c. d.

Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape Duplicate virtual tape to save file Duplicate only specific sequence items

3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire system? a. b. c. d.

Option 20 Option 21 Option 22 Option 23 © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: Running the display tape command, with the *LABELS format, will show a listing by name of all of the objects that are saved on this tape. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command? a. Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape b. Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape c. Duplicate virtual tape to save file d. Duplicate only specific sequence items The answer is Duplicate virtual tape to save file.

3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire system? a. Option 20 b. Option 21 c. Option 22 d. Option 23 The answer is Option 21. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





35-71

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: The save changed objects command is used to save only those objects that have changed since the last save operation. 5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file ? a. b. c. d.

DSPSAVF INZSAVF WRKSAVF CLRSAVF

6. True or False: Save menu option 21, Full system save, can be performed to a virtual tape?



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



4. True or False: The save changed objects command is used to save only those objects that have changed since the last save operation. The answer is True.

5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file? a. b. c. d.


The answer is CLRSAVF.

6. True or False: Save menu option 21, Full system save, can be performed to a virtual tape? The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





35-73

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completing this unit, you should be able to: Use the menus and commands available to work with tape media Use the menus and commands available to work with save files Perform the steps required to set up virtual tape support List what data is saved with menu options 21, 22, and 23 Explain what is saved by each of the save commands



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — End this unit by stressing the following points: • An offline, off-site copy of the backup is essential for disaster recovery. Objects that change frequently must be backed up each day. • Develop a plan for saving and restoring, and document that plan. • Let the System i Navigator, the Save menu, or Operational Assistant backup menus help you to ensure complete and frequent backups. Additional information — Transition statement —




35-75

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 36. Save using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:25

What this unit is about In this unit, we will review the graphical steps used to set up virtual tape support. We will discuss the options available to perform a save using this interface. Last, we will look at the steps to display an object’s properties and determine when the last save and restore were performed.


Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support Describe the functions performed through the Backup branch Describe the functions performed through the BRMS branch Describe the steps to display an object’s properties and determine when it was last saved or restored



Unit 36. Save using System i Navigator


36-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support Describe the functions performed through the Backup branch Describe the functions performed through the BRMS branch Describe the steps to display an objects properties and determine when it was last saved or restored



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





36-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

36.1. Setting up virtual tape support




36-5

Instructor Guide


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CRTIMGCLG

(2)


ADDIMGCLGE

(3)

10

Any ASP or iASP

LODIMGCLG

(4) CRTDEVTAP

(1)

Virtual tape device

Save Restore

Disk Disk

Duplicate to media, switch or FTP to another system



AS248.1

Notes: The steps to implement virtual tape are: 1. Create virtual tape device description then vary on the device. 2. Create virtual tape image catalog. 3. Create virtual volumes. 4. Load image catalog. 5. Save to a virtual volume. 6. Duplicate virtual volume to physical tape. These steps are detailed on the following pages. Refer to this visual to keep track of where you are in the set up process.





Uempty





36-7

Instructor Guide

Stand-Alone Devices IBM i


Figure 36-3. Stand-Alone Devices

AS248.1

Notes: The first step is to create a virtual device description. To perform this step: Expand Configuration and Service, and then click Hardware > Tape devices. Right-click Stand-Alone Devices, and click Create Virtual Device.





Uempty





36-9

Instructor Guide

Create virtual device description IBM i


Figure 36-4. Create virtual device description

AS248.1

Notes: On this panel, specify the following: • Tape Device: Specify a name for your virtual device. • Description: Specify a meaningful description. • Review the other parameters that can be set. • Click OK to create the device and see the updated panel on the next page.





Uempty





36-11

Instructor Guide

Device: Make Available IBM i


Figure 36-5. Device: Make Available

AS248.1

Notes: Clicking OK on the panel in the previous page will: • Create the device description and update the panel on the right. • Notice your device is now listed with a status of Unavailable. Type of 63B0 indicates a virtual tape device. • Right-click your device, and select Make Available to vary on this device and continue the setup steps.





Uempty





36-13

Instructor Guide

Create Image Catalog IBM i


Figure 36-6. Create Image Catalog

AS248.1

Notes: The next step is to create the tape image catalog. To start this process, perform the following: • Click Tape Image Catalogs to see a list of currently defined catalogs. • Right-click Tape Image Catalog. • Click Create Image Catalog to see the panel on the next page.





Uempty





36-15

Instructor Guide

Create Catalog pane IBM i


Figure 36-7. Create Catalog pane

AS248.1

Notes: On the Create Catalog pane, specify the following: • Catalog name: Specify a unique descriptive name. • Catalog description: Specify a meaningful description. • Directory path: This is the path where the virtual tapes will be stored in the IFS. Note This parameter is case sensitive.

• Authority level • Click OK. • This will create the image catalog and update the panel on the right. Notice it shows a status of Unloaded. 36-16 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





36-17

Instructor Guide

Add volumes (create virtual images) IBM i


Figure 36-8. Add volumes (create virtual images)

AS248.1

Notes: Click Tape Image Catalogs to see a list of the currently defined catalogs. Right-click Tape Image Catalogs, and click Add Volume to see the notebook on the next page.





Uempty





36-19

Instructor Guide

Add volume details IBM i


Figure 36-9. Add volume details

AS248.1

Notes: On the Add volume details notebook, fill in the following parameters: On the General tab, fill in the parameters as follows: From tape image file

Select New image.

To tape image file

Specify the name of the file to contain your virtual volume.

Volume desc

Specify a meaningful descriptive name.

Volume size in MB

Specify the size for your virtual volume.

The Options tab has some very important parameters when adding a new volume. Enter the following values on the Options tab: Volume name

Specify the volume ID for your virtual tape.

Allocate storage

Select Volume size. This parameter specifies, for tape image files, whether to allocate the entire amount of storage specified on the image





size parameter. This parameter is only allowed for tape image catalogs; it is not allowed for reference or dependent image catalogs.

Uempty

Tape density

Select *VRT256K.

Note The tape density parameter should correspond to the block size of the physical tape drive’s capability where you will eventually copy the virtual volumes to physical tapes. We will not be copying to physical tape in this exercise.

Click OK. Repeat the steps on this page to create additional virtual volumes.




36-21

Instructor Guide






Uempty

List Volumes IBM i


Figure 36-10. List Volumes

AS248.1

Notes: To view the volumes in your image catalog, perform the following: • Right-click your image catalog. • Select List Volumes. • That will show the window captured in the lower right on this visual.




36-23

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Load the image catalog IBM i


Figure 36-11. Load the image catalog

AS248.1

Notes: The status of your catalog will show Unloaded. To load the catalog, perform the following: • Right-click your image catalog. • Select Load Image Catalog. • Click the drop-down arrow, and specify your device. • Click the drop-down arrow, and specify your image catalog. • Click OK. This will update the pane in the right to a status of Loaded. At this point, you are ready to perform a save operation.




36-25

Instructor Guide






Uempty

36.2. The backup function




36-27

Instructor Guide

Backup > Policies > Daily: General tab IBM i


Figure 36-12. Backup > Policies > Daily: General tab

AS248.1

Notes: By default, System i Navigator will provide the Backup branch in the function tree. Using this function is equivalent to using the backup capabilities provided under the Operational Assistant menu interface on 5250 emulation. To perform a backup function: • Expand your server tree. • Click to expand Backup. • Click Policies. • In this example, we have double-clicked the Daily policy to see the notebook in the visual. • The General tab provides a place for you to specify whether scheduled system backups will take place and how much advance notice, if any, the system operator is to be given of each one.





Uempty





36-29

Instructor Guide

Backup > Policies > Daily: What tab IBM i


Figure 36-13. Backup > Policies > Daily: What tab

AS248.1

Notes: Use the What tab to view and change: • Data to save: Provides a place for you to specify where the data you want to save is stored. You can select the data based on user libraries, folders, or user directories. You can also save security data and configuration data. • Print detailed reports after backup: A summary report is printed for each scheduled backup. Click this check box to get an additional report that contains a detailed list of saved objects.





Uempty





36-31

Instructor Guide

Backup > Policies > Daily: When tab IBM i


Figure 36-14. Backup > Policies > Daily: When tab

AS248.1

Notes: The When tab provides a place for you to specify: • Daily backups: Click a box in the Daily column for each day you want a backup to take place. The information you specify on this page affects all scheduled backups. For each day that you have checked, specify the time of day that you want the backup to take place. The backups you schedule in the Daily column use the information you specify on the What and Where pages for the daily backup. • Monthly backups: Click a box in the Monthly column for each day on which you want a monthly backup to take place. The information you specify on this page affects all scheduled backups. For each day that you have checked, specify the time of day at which you want the backup to take place. The backups you schedule in the Monthly column use the information you specify on the What and Where pages for the monthly backup policy. The title bar at the top of each window tells you which scheduled backup you are working with. 36-32 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





36-33

Instructor Guide

Backup > Policies > Daily: Where tab IBM i


Figure 36-15. Backup > Policies > Daily: Where tab

AS248.1

Notes: The Where tab provides a place for you to specify where the data will be backed up for each scheduled backup. You can specify different information on this page for each backup policy: daily, weekly, and monthly. The title bar at the top of the window tells you which backup policy you are working with. For example, you might want to have your daily backup saved on one set of tapes and your weekly backup on another set. Or you might want to use a different tape drive for the monthly backup.





Uempty





36-35

Instructor Guide





Uempty

36.3. BRMS function




36-37

Instructor Guide

Backup, Recovery, and Media Services IBM i


Figure 36-16. Backup, Recovery, and Media Services

AS248.1

Notes: If you have Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS) (5770-BR1) licensed program product installed on your system, you can install the plug-in for System i Navigator. This will completely replace the default Backup branch and make the BRMS functions available when using this graphical interface. In the example in the visual, we have clicked the *Bkugrp control group to see what is specified for this control group. Click During to see the details on the next page.





Uempty





36-39

Instructor Guide

BRMS: Backup control group policy IBM i


Figure 36-17. BRMS: Backup control group policy

AS248.1

Notes: The What tab is used to specify what data is to be saved. Notice the other tabs to get an idea of what other controls you can put in place when saving this data.





Uempty





36-41

Instructor Guide





Uempty

36.4. Saving an object If the BRMS plug-in has been installed, you can right-click an object and select the Save option.




36-43

Instructor Guide

Navigator: Save an object using BRMS IBM i


Figure 36-18. Navigator: Save an object using BRMS

AS248.1

Notes: If the BRMS plug-in has been installed, you can right-click an object and select the Save option. This option is not available on a system that does not have BRMS installed.





Uempty





36-45

Instructor Guide

Save information for an object IBM i


Figure 36-19. Save information for an object

AS248.1

Notes: Select File Systems > Integrated File Systems > QSYS.LIB > your library, and then right-click your object and select Properties. Click the Save tab to display details about when this object was last saved and restored.





Uempty





36-47

Instructor Guide

Exercise IBM i


Exercise: Save using System i Navigator



AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the Save and Restore exercise.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — After completing this exercise, the students should be able to successfully use system commands to save an object and a library and to restore an object. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U36-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U36-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U36-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




36-49

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Setting up all of the support required for virtual tape can be performed using System i Navigator. 2. Which of the following is not one of the supported backup options under the Backup branch? a. b. c. d.

Daily Weekly Monthly Customized

3. True or False: Installing the BRMS plug-in will overwrite or replace the Backup branch.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: Setting up all of the support required for virtual tape can be performed using System i Navigator. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not one of the supported backup options under the Backup branch? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Customized.

3. True or False: Installing the BRMS plug-in will overwrite or replace the Backup branch. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





36-51

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completing this unit, you should be able to: Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support Describe the functions performed through the Backup branch Describe the functions performed through the BRMS branch Describe the steps to display an objects properties and determine when it was last saved or restored



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





36-53

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 37. Save using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Estimated time 00:30

What this unit is about In this unit, we will review the graphical steps used to set up virtual tape support. We will discuss the options available to perform a save using this interface. Last, we will look at the steps to display the properties of a backup control group.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i • Describe backup functions performed through BRMS • Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects using IBM Systems Director Navigator for i



Unit 37. Save using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


37-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Describe backup functions performed through BRMS Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects using IBM Systems Director Navigator for i



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





37-3

Instructor Guide





Uempty

37.1. Setting up virtual tape support Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




37-5

Instructor Guide


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CRTIMGCLG

(2)


ADDIMGCLGE

(3)

10

Any ASP or iASP

LODIMGCLG

(4) CRTDEVTAP

(1)

Virtual tape device

Save Restore

Disk Disk

Duplicate to media, switch or FTP to another system



AS248.1

Notes: The steps to implement virtual tape are: 1. Create virtual tape device description then vary on the device. 2. Create virtual tape image catalog. 3. Create virtual volumes. 4. Load image catalog. 5. Save to a virtual volume. 6. Duplicate virtual volume to physical tape. These steps are detailed on the following pages. Refer to this visual to keep track of where you are in the set up process. Note You can create up to 256 virtual tape volumes.





Uempty





37-7

Instructor Guide

Configuration tab IBM i


Figure 37-3. Configuration tab

AS248.1

Notes: The first step is to create a virtual device description. To perform this step: • Open Configuration and Service. • Click Show All Configuration and Services Tasks button. • Right click arrow for Tape Devices. • Click Create Virtual Device to see the visual on the next page.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Note before create virtual devices check QAUTOVRT system value for appropriate value to create virtual devices. Additional information — Transition statement —




37-9

Instructor Guide

Create virtual tape device description IBM i


Figure 37-4. Create virtual tape device description

AS248.1

Notes: On the Create virtual tape device description: • Type name of tape device • You can add a Text description • You can change default values • Unmark check box • Change Authority • If you specify a Message queue, also specify the Library where the message queue exist. Click OK after you set all values.





Uempty





37-11

Instructor Guide

Device: Make available IBM i


Figure 37-5. Device: Make available

AS248.1

Notes: Clicking OK on the previous page will create the device description. Click the arrow for Tape devices and choose Stand-Alone Devices to see tape devices. • Notice your device is now listed with a status of Unavailable. Type of 63B0 indicates a virtual tape device. • Right-click your device and select Make Available to vary on this device and continue the setup process.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Notice after you created device, you should always click the Refresh button (top left location on page) to see new one. Additional information — Transition statement —




37-13

Instructor Guide

Create Tape Image Catalog IBM i


Figure 37-6. Create Tape Image Catalog

AS248.1

Notes: The next step is to create the tape image catalog. To start this process, perform the following: • Right-click Tape devices. • On the drop-down menu, click Tape Image Catalogs to see a list of currently defined catalogs. • Click down arrow on the Select Action menu and choose Create Image Catalog, then click Go.





Uempty





37-15

Instructor Guide

Create tape image catalog parameters IBM i


Figure 37-7. Create tape image catalog parameters

AS248.1

Notes: On the Create Catalog page, specify the following: • Catalog name: Specify a unique descriptive name. • Catalog description: Specify a meaningful description. • Directory path: This is the path where the virtual tapes will be stored in the IFS. Note This parameter is case sensitive.

• Authority level: Default is Exclude but for basic usage for users Use will enough. You can also specify name of authority list. Click OK. • This will create the image catalog. Notice it shows a status of Unloaded. 37-16 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





37-17

Instructor Guide

Add volumes (create virtual images) IBM i


Figure 37-8. Add volumes (create virtual images)

AS248.1

Notes: Click Tape Image Catalogs, then click Add Volume to see the notebook on the next page.





Uempty





37-19

Instructor Guide

Add volume parameters IBM i


Figure 37-9. Add volume parameters

AS248.1

Notes: On the Add volume details page, fill in the following parameters: On the General tab: From tape image file

Select New image.

To tape image file

Specify the name of the file to contain your virtual volume.

Volume desc

Specify a meaningful descriptive name.

Volume size in MB

Specify the size for your virtual volume.

The Options tab has some very important parameters when adding a new volume. Enter the following values on the Options tab: Volume name

Specify the volume ID for your virtual tape.

Allocate storage

Select Volume size. This parameter specifies, for tape image files, whether to allocate the entire amount of storage specified on the image





size parameter. This parameter is only allowed for tape image catalogs; it is not allowed for reference or dependent image catalogs.

Uempty

Tape density

Select *VRT256K.

Note The tape density parameter should correspond to the block size of the physical tape drive’s capability where you will eventually copy the virtual volumes to physical tapes.

Click OK. Repeat the steps on this page to create additional virtual volumes.




37-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Volume name: Specify a Volume name of the virtual volume you are adding to the tape image catalog. Possible values are: • Generate: (default) The volume name will be generated by the system. character value The volume name can be 1 to 6 characters in length. The volume name must contain only alphanumeric characters (A through Z, $, #, @, and 0 through 9), and cannot have a prefix or contain blanks. If the virtual tape volume is being created as a standard labeled tape, the volume name will also be used as the volume identifier in the tape volume label. Each volume name in the catalog must be unique. • Character code: Specify the character code in which the volume label is written. All data that is not save data written after the label must be in the same code. Codes cannot be intermixed on a tape that is not a save tape. This parameter is only used for a volume type of Standard labeled. Possible values are: • EBCDIC (default): The volume label is written in EBCDIC and is an IBM standard label. All additional data must also be written in EBCDIC. • ASCII: The volume label is written in ASCII and is an ANSI standard label. All additional data must also be written in ASCII. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

List virtual volumes IBM i


Figure 37-10. List virtual volumes

AS248.1

Notes: To view the volumes in your image catalog, perform the following: • Click your image catalog. • Select List Volumes. That will show the window captured in the bottom on this visual.




37-23

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Load the image catalog IBM i


Figure 37-11. Load the image catalog

AS248.1

Notes: The status of your catalog will show Unloaded. To load the catalog, perform the following: • Click your image catalog. • Select Load Image Catalog. • Specify your device. • Click OK. At this point, you are ready to perform a save operation.




37-25

Instructor Guide






Uempty

37.2. BRMS function Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




37-27

Instructor Guide

Backup, Recovery and Media Services IBM i


Figure 37-12. Backup, Recovery and Media Services

AS248.1

Notes: If you have Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS) (5770-BR1) licensed program product installed on your system, you will see the BRMS on System Director Navigator for i link. You can use the main buttons on the welcome screen or use the Advanced button to begin the process to configure BRMS to perform a backup. Click Advanced to see the Web page on the next page in your student guide.





Uempty





37-29

Instructor Guide

BRMS tasks IBM i


Figure 37-13. BRMS tasks

AS248.1

Notes: This screen allows you to perform the following: • Backup, Recovery, and Media Services for IBM I - Select actions such as displaying the global policy properties, restoring data, printing reports, and managing devices. • Archive Control Groups - Create, run, display and maintain archive control groups. • Backup Control Groups - Create, run, display and maintain backup control groups. • Media Policies - Display media policies information. • Move Policies - Display move policy information. • Volumes - Display volume information. • Media Pools - Display media pool information. • Tasks - Tasks which are scheduled, executing, or have been completed.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Some basic function will be explained but more is the subject of another course. Additional information — Transition statement —




37-31

Instructor Guide

BRMS drop-down menu: Manage Devices IBM i


Figure 37-14. BRMS drop-down menu: Manage Devices

AS248.1

Notes: After you add any tape or library devices, you have to perform the following: • Click Backup Recovery and Media Services for IBM i. • Click Manage devices this is this similar to running the INZBRMS OPTION(*DEVICE) command. Otherwise, you will not see newly added devices on any of the BRMS wizards.





Uempty





37-33

Instructor Guide

Manage devices: New Media Device IBM i


Figure 37-15. Manage devices: New Media Device

AS248.1

Notes: On Manage Devices window: • Use Select Action pull-down menu and select New Media Device. • On the New Device screen, click pull-down arrow and choose Available device. Click OK.





Uempty





37-35

Instructor Guide





Uempty

37.3. Saving an object Instructor topic introduction What students will do — How students will do it — What students will learn — How this will help students on their job —




37-37

Instructor Guide

BRMS: Backup specific items IBM i


Figure 37-16. BRMS: Backup specific items

AS248.1

Notes: Click the arrow for Backup, Recovery and Media Services to see the drop-down menu. One of the options available is Backup Specific items. Click this option to start a wizard that will step you through the steps to identify what is to be saved. At this point, you are now performing a save using BRMS .





Uempty





37-39

Instructor Guide

BRMS: New Backup Control Group wizard IBM i


Figure 37-17. BRMS: New Backup Control Group wizard

AS248.1

Notes: BRMS will also provide an option to create a new Backup Control Group. A backup control group is used to specify what to save, how to save it and where to save it. Click the arrow for Backup Control Group and select New from the drop-down menu. This will start the New Backup Control Group wizard which will step through the steps to define what is to be saved, as well as.





Uempty





37-41

Instructor Guide

System: Run a command IBM i


Figure 37-18. System: Run a command

AS248.1

Notes: Systems Director Navigator allows you Run a command when using this interface. To run a command, perform the following: • Click System task. • Click Run a command link to see the visuals on the next two pages.





Uempty





37-43

Instructor Guide

Prompting the save object command IBM i


Figure 37-19. Prompting the save object command

AS248.1

Notes: To save an object, you will fill in the parameters for the Save Object (SAVOBJ) command. If you know the format for the command, you can type it into the window in the upper left. It is recommended that you type in the command, then press the Prompt button to see the window captured in the lower right; this way the system assists you with filling in the correct values to the correct parameters. Click OK to run the command.





Uempty





37-45

Instructor Guide

Prompting the save library command IBM i


Figure 37-20. Prompting the save library command

AS248.1

Notes: To save an object, you will fill in the parameters for the Save Library (SAVLIB) command. If you know the format for the command, you can type it into the window in the upper left. It is recommended that you type in the command, then press the Prompt button to see the window captured in the lower right; this way the system assists yo with filling in the correct values to the correct parameters. Click OK to run the command.





Uempty





37-47

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Setting up all of the support required for virtual tape can be performed using IBM System Director Navigator for i. 2. True or False: Installing the BRMS allow you to backup objects using IBM System Director Navigator for i. 3. How many virtual tape volumes you can create for virtual tape? a. b. c. d.

64 126 256 *nomax



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: Setting up all of the support required for virtual tape can be performed using IBM System Director Navigator for i. The answer is True.

2. True or False: Installing BRMS allow you to backup objects using IBM System Director Navigator for i. The answer is True.

3. How many virtual tape volumes you can create for virtual tape? a. b. c. d.

64 128 256 *nomax

The answer is 256. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





37-49

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Perform the steps necessary to set up virtual tape support using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i Describe backup functions performed through BRMS Describe the steps to perform backup of specific objects using IBM Systems Director Navigator for i



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





37-51

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 38. Restore concepts and overview Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about In this unit, we overview the process involved in restoring data onto your system. We will review the menu and commands available on the system to perform restore operations. We will also discuss what is restored when selecting specific options off of the Restore menu. We will also overview the steps involved when performing a full system restore.


Explain the options available to restore data Explain the function served by each of the restore commands List what is restored with menu options 21, 22, and 23 List and explain the steps involved when doing a full system restore



Unit 38. Restore concepts and overview


38-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain the options available to restore data Explain the function served by each of the restore commands List what is restored with menu options 21, 22, and 23 List and explain the steps involved when doing a full system restore



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — After having successfully completed this unit, the student should be able to use tape and save files to save objects or the entire system, and they should be able to use tape or save files to restore objects or the entire system. This unit starts with tape fundamentals and continue with save and restore menus and commands. All systems require some means of saving data offline. Let us examine the IBM i process of accomplishing this task. In this unit, there is no access for Web topic since this function is not supported through that interface. Additional information — Transition statement —




38-3

Instructor Guide

Restoring objects to disk IBM i

Restore command

Tape

Disk

Save file or virtual tape © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 38-2. Restoring objects to disk

AS248.1

Notes: Objects are saved to be able to recover them in case of a problem or emergency. The Restore menu and commands provide the tools used to restore objects back onto the system.





Uempty





38-5

Instructor Guide

Restore menu IBM i


Figure 38-3. Restore menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Restore menu provides easy access to all restore commands. This menu can be accessed by: • Using the GO RESTORE command • Selecting option 3 (General system tasks) on the Main menu and then option 7 (Restore) from the General System Tasks menu.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Point out to the students the similarities between this menu and the Save menu. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U38-F04 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U38-F04 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U38-F04 on your PC place of the next visuals while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.




38-7

Instructor Guide

Restore commands IBM i

What is restored?

RSTLIB RSTDLO RSTOBJ RST RSTUSRPRF RSTAUT RSTCFG © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 38-4. Restore commands

AS248.1

Notes: There is a corresponding restore command for each save command. What do each of these commands restore? • RSTLIB: Restores one library or all libraries saved with a SAVLIB command. • RSTDLO: Restores one or more documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail). • RSTOBJ: Restores one or more objects. Objects saved with a SAVLIB command can be individually restored with this command. • RST: Restores a copy of one or more objects that can be used in the IFS. • RSTUSRPRF: Restores one or more named user profiles or restores all saved security information, including all user profiles, authorization lists, and authority holders. • RSTAUT: Restores all object authority to all user profiles after the profiles and objects have been restored to the system. • RSTCFG: Restores one or more system configuration objects.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Be brief. There is no restore command for the tapes produced with SAVSTG. To restore these, a D IPL must be performed and then Restore storage chosen from the DST options. The restore disk configuration must match the save disk configuration. Everything must be restored. Did you notice when looking at the restore commands that there is no command to restore the system? In order to restore the system, you need to perform an IPL from tape. This process is discussed in the next visual. Additional information — Transition statement —




38-9

Instructor Guide

What is restored? IBM i

Restore menu option 21



Security objects, including user profiles

Y

Y

Y

Device configuration objects

Y

Y

Y

All IBM-supplied libraries, including those containing user data

Y

All user libraries

Y

Y

All mail, folders, documents

Y

Y

All objects in directories

Y

LIC The system library (QSYS)

All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain user data All IBM-supplied directories that do not contain user data All IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data

Y Y Y


Figure 38-5. What is restored?

AS248.1

Notes: Where option 21 on the Save menu is used to save the entire system, notice that option 21 on the Restore menu does not restore the entire system. The steps to restore an entire system will be overviewed later in this unit.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Note that LIC and OS are not restored using either option 21, 22 or 23. The steps to do a complete system restore will be covered in upcoming visuals. Additional information — Transition statement —




38-11

Instructor Guide

Restore menu option 21: System and user data IBM i

Option 21 runs the following commands: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) OPTION(*IMMED) RSTUSRPRF RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL) RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS) RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY) RST OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT) ('/QDLS' *OMIT)) RSTAUT USRPRF(*ALL) STRSBS SBSD(controlling-subsystem)


Figure 38-6. Restore menu option 21: System and user data

AS248.1

Notes: Select this option to restore a system other than the i licensed program. This option performs the following operations: • Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY delivery mode • Ends all subsystems • Restores: - User profiles - Configuration objects - All IBM-supplied libraries, including those containing user data - All user libraries - Folders, documents, and mail - All objects in directories - Private authorities • Starts controlling subsystem





Uempty





38-13

Instructor Guide

Restore menu option 22: System data IBM i

Option 22 runs the following commands: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) OPTION(*IMMED) RSTUSRPRF USRPRF(*ALL) RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL) RSTLIB SAVLIB(*IBM) RST OBJ('/QIBM/ProdData') ('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData')) STRSBS SBSD(controlling-subsystem)


Figure 38-7. Restore menu option 22: System data

AS248.1

Notes: Select this option to restore system data. This option performs the following operations: • Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY delivery mode • Ends all subsystems • Restores: -

Security objects, including user profiles Device configuration objects All IBM-supplied libraries that do not contain user data All IBM-supplied objects in directories that do not contain user data

• Starts the controlling subsystem





Uempty





38-15

Instructor Guide

Restore menu option 23: All user data IBM i

Option 23 runs the following commands: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) OPTION(*IMMED) RSTUSRPRF USRPRF(*ALL) RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL) RSTLIB SAVLIB(*ALLUSR) RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY) RST

OBJ(('/*') ('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT) ('/QDLS' *OMIT) ('/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT) ('/QOpenSys/QIBM/ProdData' *OMIT))

RSTAUT USRPRF(*ALL) STRSBS SBSD(controlling-subsystem)


Figure 38-8. Restore menu option 23: All user data

AS248.1

Notes: Select this option to restore all user data, which includes IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data. This option performs the following operations: • Starts the save immediately or at a specified time • Changes the system operator (QSYSOPR) message queue to *BREAK or *NOTIFY delivery mode • Ends all subsystems • Restores: - Security objects, including user profiles - Device configuration objects - All user libraries - All IBM-supplied libraries and directories that contain user data - All mail - All folders - All documents - Authorities • Starts the controlling subsystem 38-16 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty





38-17

Instructor Guide

Complete system restore (1 of 2) IBM i

These are the steps necessary to restore a complete system. 1

D mode IPL

2

Load last set of save tapes

3

WRKCFGSTS

4

If performing an attended restore, skip to step eight. If performing an unattended restore, proceed to the next step.

5

WRKRPYLE

6

ADDRPYLE SEQNBR(xxxx) MSGID(CPA3709) RPY('G')

7

CHGJOB INQMSGRPY (*SYSRPYL)


Figure 38-9. Complete system restore (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: To restore your entire system, including LIC and QSYS, the illustrated steps must be executed in the order listed. D mode IPL is an IPL from tape instead of disk. Detailed instructions on performing a D mode IPL can be found in the Backup and Recovery manual. If the LIC on your Power i is intact, you might be able to perform a manual IPL and select option 2 on the IPL or Install the System display instead of performing an alternate IPL. The install of the operating system and of LIC must use the first volume of the IBM distribution CD-ROM or the first volume of the most recent SAVSYS tape. It is, therefore, very important that your SAVSYS be on a tape which is compatible with your alternate IPL tape drive. After you have restored the operating system and LIC, load the correct volume of your last set of save tapes and make the tape device ready.





Uempty

Use the following command to ensure that any devices not used in the restore operation are varied off and that any devices you are using for the restore operation (workstations, tape devices, and tape controllers) are varied on: WRKCFGSTS If you are doing an attended restore, skip to Step 8. If you are doing an unattended restore, continue with the next step. This and the next two steps prevent your save operation from stopping because of unanswered messages. Use the following command to display the reply list sequence numbers to find what numbers are available for use: WRKRPYLE If MSGID (CPA3709) is not already in your reply list, add it. For xxxx, substitute an unused sequence number from one through 9999. ADDRPYLE SEQNBR(xxxx) MSGID(CPA3709) RPY('G') Use the following command to change your job to use the reply list: CHGJOB INQMSGRPY(*SYSRPYL)




38-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — To restore an entire system, including LIC and QSYS, the steps shown on this and the next visual must be run in the order shown. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Complete system restore (2 of 2) IBM i

8

GO RESTORE, Option 21

9

Reply to prompts on Specify Command Defaults display and other system displays

10

Following commands are run (load next volume when prompted): •ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) OPTION(*IMMED) •RSTUSRPRF USRPRF(*ALL) •RSTCFG OBJ(*ALL) •RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS) •RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY) •RST DEV('/QSYS.LIB/TAPxx.DEVD') OBJ(('/*')('/QSYS.LIB' *OMIT) ('/QDLS' *OMIT))

•RSTAUT •STRSBS SBSD(controlling subsystem) 11 DSPJOBLOG * *PRINT


Figure 38-10. Complete system restore (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Select option 21 from the Restore menu. The Specify Command Defaults display is shown. Respond to the prompts on the display. For example, you are prompted for the tape device you are restoring from, whether you want to perform an unattended restore or change the defaults on the RSTxxx commands, and whether you want to restore messages sent in *BREAK or *NOTIFY mode. Note Depending on your response to the prompts, you might be shown another prompt display to which you will have to respond.

The system runs the commands shown on the display to restore the entire system. As the system performs each major step in the save operation, you are shown the prompt display for that step. Each step can take a long time, so be patient. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



38-21

Instructor Guide

As the system restore occurs, messages are displayed asking you to load the next volume (or tape). Load the tape and respond to the message.





Uempty





38-23

Instructor Guide

Exercises IBM i

Refer to Appendix A: Use the information listed to perform the exercises. Exercise: Restore using 5250 emulation Exercise: Restore using System i Navigator

Inform instructor when you have completed your exercises.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





38-25

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. Which command is used to restore configuration information? a. b. c. d.

RSTCFG RSTDLO RSTLIB RSTOBJ

2. Which of the following is not a supported restore device? a. b. c. d.

Physical tape Virtual tape Save file Memory stick

3. What type of IPL is required to restore the entire system? a. b. c. d.

A B C D © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





The answer is RSTCFG.

2. Which of the following is not a supported restore device? a. Physical tape b. Virtual tape c. Save file d. Memory stick The answer is Memory stick.

3. What type of IPL is required to restore the entire system? a. A b. B c. C d. D The answer is D. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





38-27

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain the options available to restore data Explain the function served by each of the restore commands List what is restored with menu options 21, 22, and 23 List and explain the steps involved when doing a full system restore



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — End this unit by stressing the following points: • An offline, off-site copy of the backup is essential for disaster recovery. Objects that change frequently must be backed up each day. • Develop a plan for saving and restoring, and document that plan. Let the System i Navigator, the Save menu, or Operational Assistant backup menus help you to ensure complete and frequent backups. Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Additional information — Transition statement —




38-29

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 39. Problem determination using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:35

What this unit is about The system keeps track of all problems that occur and notifies you through message queues and logs. You might need to analyze a problem prior to calling IBM for service. IBM i provides many tools (commands, menus, displays, message queues, and logs) to aid you in identifying, analyzing, and reporting problems.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Identify a problem • Analyze a problem • Report a problem



Unit 39. Problem determination using 5250 emulation


39-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Identify a problem Analyze a problem Report a problem



AS248.1

Notes: This unit presents the system tools available to help you to determine whether there is a problem with your system and, if there is a problem, to gather information about it. Job logs and history logs are discussed, as well as how you can report a problem to IBM through the electronic customer support (ECS) communications line. After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to use the tools provided as part of IBM i to identify, analyze, and report a problem to IBM or another service provider.





Uempty





39-3

Instructor Guide

Problem solving tools IBM i

System i Navigat or

ST

YS RCP

CN

JOB K R W OG L B B JO TJ O C A WR K

WRKS Y HISTO SSTS RY QSYS LOG O QSYS PR MSG WRK

PR B

i tool box © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 39-2. Problem solving tools

AS248.1

Notes: The system cannot solve all problems for you, so i helps you by providing the description of a given problem and the tools to help solve it. The tools provided to help you manage problems on your server are: • • • • • • • •

Messages Error messages System reference codes Logs Alerts Problem-handling menus ECS Error codes

The problem analysis functions that your server provides allow you to manage both system-detected and user-defined problems. Your server provides functions for: • Problem analysis





Uempty

• Problem logging and tracking • Problem reporting • Problem correction The structured problem management server helps you and your service provider quickly and accurately manage problems as they occur on the server.




39-5

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The system cannot solve all system problems, but it does provide you with a description of problems and a number of tools to help you solve these problems. Each of these tools is discussed in this unit. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Problem determination steps IBM i

1. Server detects hardware error 2. Error notification sent 3. Problem record is created 4. System error log 5. System operator message 6. Problem analysis starts


Figure 39-3. Problem determination steps

AS248.1

Notes: The following is an example of the flow when you are managing a problem: 1. The server detects a hardware error. 2. An error notification is sent to the server. 3. A problem record is created with configuration information, a system reference code, the name of the reporting device, and other information. 4. The system error log records the error. 5. A message is sent to the system operator’s message queue. 6. Problem analysis starts with the message. The results of problem analysis are automatically stored, along with the collected problem information. At this point, you can report the problem to your service provider.




39-7

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U39-F04 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next two visuals. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U39-F04 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U39-F04 on your PC place of the next two visuals while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.





Uempty

Using the Work with Job command IBM i


Figure 39-4. Using the Work with Job command

AS248.1

Notes: The WRKJOB command offers problem determination information. It consists of two displays that contain extensive information about a job to help you in determining what the job is doing or has done. The full job name appears across the top of the display (Job name, User name, and Number). From this menu, you can access everything that the system knows about this job. You can select one option at a time, or you can select all of the options that appear on the two displays with option 30, which appears on the second display but is available from either display.




39-9

Instructor Guide

You access the Work with Job menu by entering the WRKJOB command on a command line. It can also be accessed by doing one of the following: • From Power i Main menu, select option 1 (User tasks) => option 1 (Display or change your job). • Enter go job and select option 1 (Work with jobs) or option 2 (Work with all active job statistics). • On either the Work with User Jobs or Work with Active Jobs display, select option 5 (Work with).





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — IBM i keeps extensive information for every job on the system. That information is available to assist the operator in determining what a job is doing or has done. In addition to displaying information about a job, this menu has options that allow the operator to change the job's attributes and hold, release, or end the job. Additional information — Transition statement —




39-11

Instructor Guide

Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG IBM i


Figure 39-5. Option 10: Job Log or DSPJOBLOG

AS248.1

Notes: The job log can be viewed by selecting option 10 off of the WRKJOB display. IBM i keeps a separate, detailed record of the activity of each job that runs on the Power i. This low-level trace of the commands run by a job and of the system messages the job receives is called a job log. You can use it to aid in problem determination. You can view the job log for your own interactive job by entering the Display Job Log command (DSPJOBLOG) on a command line. You can also use this command to display the job log of another active job, but to do so you must know the full name of that job. Perhaps the simplest way to view your job log while your job is active is to go to the command entry screen (F10 from most menus or call qcmd). While a job is active in the system or on a job queue, you can view its log by selecting option 10 (Display job log) from the Work with Job menu. Regardless of how you do it, if insufficient detail is shown to enable you to determine precisely what the job has done, F10 will cause all available details to be displayed.





Uempty

The bottom display in the visual appears after F10 is pressed from the top display in the visual. You need to use the Page Up and Page Down keys to view the complete job log. Now you have enough information to determine what has happened in the job. Here is an explanation of each of the special symbols the job log contains. >>

The running command or the next command to be run. For example, if a CL or high-level language program was called, the call to the program is shown.

>

The processing of the command is complete.

..

The command has not yet been processed.

?

Reply message. This symbol marks both those messages needing a reply and those that have been answered.




39-13

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A job log contains information related to requests entered for a job, such as commands in the job, commands in a CL program, and messages. Each job has an associated job log that can contain: • The commands in the job • The commands in a CL program if the CL program was created with the LOG(*YES) or the LOG(*JOB) option and a Change Job (CHGJOB) command was run with the LOGCLPGM(*YES) option • All messages (the message and help text for the message) sent to the requester and not removed from the program message queues Insufficient detail might be displayed to allow problem determination. Pressing F10 (Display detailed messages) brings up all available detail. In the sample job log shown on this visual, point out the commands that have been run and discuss the special symbols (>>, >,..,?) that can be shown in a job log. The bottom panel in this visual is the detail message display of the top window. Now the operator should have enough information to determine exactly what the job has done. The job log for a batch job is created when the job is placed on a job queue. The log contains a trace of all the activity of that job for as long as it is active. If the job is completed successfully, the job log is deleted from the system. If the job fails, the job log is spooled to a printer. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Job log printing IBM i

Interactive job Job log DSPJOBLOG OUTPUT(*PRINT)

Batch job SIGNOFF

SIGNOFF (*LIST) Job log

Job log

Job log

DSPJOBLOG OUTPUT(*PRINT)

X RUNS SUCCESSFULLY Job log

X

RUNS UNSUCCESSFULLY Output queue PRINT Job log


Figure 39-6. Job log printing

AS248.1

Notes: As long as a job is active on the system, its job log is accessible so that it can help with problem determination; however, when a job ends, the system uses several controls to determine whether the job log should be spooled to an output queue or simply deleted from the system. If a job is completed and you later determine that something went wrong while it was active, the job log might be the only available means of performing problem determination. The system starts logging information in the job log for an interactive job as soon as you sign on to a workstation and continues to log activity for that job in the same job log until you sign off. There is a parameter on the SIGNOFF command that overrides all other controls regarding what happens to the job log of an interactive job when the job ends. The system default value for the LOG parameter on the SIGNOFF command is *NOLIST, which instructs i to delete the job log for the interactive job. There is nothing that you, as system operator, can do to change this default action or to force all users to sign off using the value *LIST for the LOG parameter, but your Power implementer can do both.




39-15

Instructor Guide

If you know the full name of a job, and can execute the DSPJOBLOG command while it is active, you can print its job log by specifying OUTPUT (*PRINT) on the DSPJOBLOG command. It is recommended that you use the Operational Assistant, presented later in this unit, to help manage the job logs and automate their cleanup. Using the Operational Assistant, all job logs are placed in a special output queue called QEZJOBLOG.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next five visuals covering the details outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.




39-17

Instructor Guide

Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) IBM i


Figure 39-7. Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB)

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Active Jobs display gives information similar to the Active Jobs display in System i Navigator. If, after an elapsed time of more than one minute and with more than just a few jobs running on your system, the CPU% column for any one job is significantly higher than for other jobs on the system, it could mean that the job is in a loop or is logging many errors. Keep in mind, however, that on a lightly loaded system, this might not be abnormal. Also, some jobs normally use a great deal of processor time. If you suspect that a job is having problems, hold that job using option 3 on this display while you investigate the problem further. Depending on the results of your investigation, you can then either release or end the job with options 6 or 4 on this display, respectively. To access the Work with Active Jobs display, you can enter option 3 (General system tasks) on the Power i Main menu, option 1 (Jobs) on the General System Tasks menu, and then option 2 (Work with all active job statistics) on the Job menu. You can also enter wrkactjob on a command line.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If the operator suspects that a job is having problems, he or she can hold the job by using option 3 on this display while he or she investigates the problem. Additional information — Transition statement —




39-19

Instructor Guide

Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) IBM i


Figure 39-8. Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS)

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with System Status display is another tool that helps you to check for system performance problems. Unless you always have batch jobs running, advise management whenever CPU utilization is continually greater than 80%. (Your interactive users will have probably already started complaining about response time.) Note that this percentage is meaningful only if the elapsed time is at least five minutes. To view information gathered over five minute or more, enter the Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) command on a command line, and, as soon as the display appears, press Enter. After at least five minutes have elapsed, enter the command again. IBM i remembers when you entered it the first time and calculates CPU utilization over the elapsed time. Failure to manage spooled files (typically job logs) can cause the number of jobs in the system to range into the thousands. The more jobs the system has to manage, the less productive work it can do.





Uempty

The percentage of permanent and temporary addresses used should never exceed 90. You might not be able to do anything about this other than notify management. For optimum performance, the auxiliary storage percentage used should be kept below 70% or 80%. Again, you might be able to do little except keep management informed. There is a lot of online help available with this display. If you are responsible for keeping the system running smoothly (and what system operator is not?) you should take the time to read all of it. To access the Work with System Status display, you can enter the WRKSYSSTS command on a command line. You can also enter: 1. Option 3 (General system tasks) on the Power i Main menu 2. Option 2 (Status) on the General System Tasks menu 3. Option 6 (Work with system status) on the Status menu




39-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Some guidelines for normal values and possible corrective actions follow. Advise the students that, since every Power is different, norms for their systems might differ from those stated here. In the next few visuals, we look at the tools provided with i to help you analyze system problems. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) IBM i


Figure 39-9. Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS)

AS248.1

Notes: The Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) display shows performance and status information about the disk units on the system. It displays: • • • • • • • • • •

Number of units currently on the system Type of each disk unit Size of disk space Whether the disk is currently on the system Percentage of disk space used I/O requests per second Average size of the I/O requests Average number of read and write requests Average amount of data read and written Percentage of time the disk is being used

When F11 (Display storage) is pressed, additional information is displayed, such as the ASP status and protected and unprotected storage information.




39-23

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Elapsed time: The time that has elapsed between the measurement start time and the current system time. Disk unit identifier: The disk unit identifier is the same number used by the display disk configuration function of system service tools. If the disk unit identifier is zero, the disk unit is not configured. Type of disk unit: The type of disk unit. Size of disk space: The total amount of storage that the unit can contain in millions of bytes. Disk space in use: The percentage of the disk that is currently allocated. If the unit is an independent ASP which is currently in a varied off state, this field might be blank. I/O requests: The average number of I/O requests for read and write operations that occurred per second during the elapsed time. Size of request: The average size of an I/O request in KB during the elapsed time. Read requests: The average number of requests per second to transfer data from the disk unit during the elapsed time. Write requests: The average number of requests per second to transfer data to the disk unit during the elapsed time. Data read: The average amount of data, in KB, transferred from the disk unit, per request, during the elapsed time. Data written: The average amount of data, in KB, transferred to the disk unit, per request, during the elapsed time. Percentage of use: The estimated percentage of time the disk unit is being used during the elapsed time. This estimate is based on the number of I/O requests, the amount of data transferred, and the performance characteristics of the type of disk unit. This field is blank if the performance characteristics of the disk units are not available. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

USERHELP menu IBM i


Figure 39-10. USERHELP menu

AS248.1

Notes: The options on this menu provide additional information about the system and are useful in attempting to resolve problems. Use this information when you want to work with a technical support person to resolve a problem. Option 1. How to use help: This option explains how to display help for: • Displays and for each field in them • Power i commands Option 2. Information Assistant options: This option displays a menu where you look at the following types of information: • The various sources of information available • How to comment on information • The highlights of what is new in this release You can also start online education, start using the question and answer (Q & A) database, or work with problems.




39-25

Instructor Guide

Option 3. Display workstation user: Select this option to display information about who is using this workstation. Option 10. Save information to help resolve a problem: Select this option to save sign-on session information that technical support persons will need later on in order to perform a problem analysis. Option 11. Technical support tasks: This menu provides information that can help resolve problems or maintain the system. This information is normally used by a technical support person. Options are available to: • • • • •

Display system operator messages Work with problems with the system Work with program temporary fixes (PTFs) Duplicate your screen on another workstation Connect to technical support Option 11 is not shown if you do not have the correct authority.

Option 80. Temporary sign-off: Select this option to temporarily sign off from your workstation. When you sign back on to the same workstation, you should be returned to the display you were viewing when you signed off. You cannot temporarily sign off from a pass-through device. See your system operator to find out how your Power is set up.





Uempty





39-27

Instructor Guide

TECHHELP menu IBM i


Figure 39-11. TECHHELP menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Technical Support Tasks menu provides options to help resolve problems on the system. Option 1. Display messages for the system operator: Displays all messages in the system operator message queue (QSYSOPR) and allows you to work with them. The system operator message queue can contain messages for system problems, such as those affecting the printing out of forms. Option 10. Work with problems with the system: Allows you to analyze or report problems that were not detected by the system. Option 11. Work with PTFs: Allows you to select commands from the Program Temporary Fix Commands menu to bypass a defect in a current release of a licensed program. Option 12. Copy your screen on another display station: Allows you to copy your display station screens onto another display station so that a technical support person can observe what is happening and diagnose problems.





Uempty

Option 13. Stop copying your screen: Stops copying your display station screens onto another display station. Option 20. Connect to technical support: Allows a support organization to access your system from a remote workstation. It also creates and makes available (varies on) all the devices needed for that remote support. You must provide a telephone number, a user ID, and a password before the support person can sign on to your system. Option 21. Disconnect from technical support: Ends remote support and makes unavailable (varies off) and deletes all the devices that were created when remote support was started. Option 80. Temporary sign-off: Select this option to temporarily sign off from your workstation. When you sign back on to the same workstation, you should be returned to the display you were viewing when you signed off. • You cannot temporarily sign off from a pass-through device. See your system operator to find out how your Power is set up.




39-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR IBM i

Display Messages Queue . . . . . . . . Library. . . . . . Severity . . . . . . .

: QSYSOPR : QSYS : 40

System: i520DVL2 Program . . . . : *DSPMSG Library . . . . : Delivery . . . . : *BREAK

Type reply (if required), press Enter. * Error with device DSP06 on work station controller CTL01. Device DSP06 no longer communicating

F3= Exit F11= Remove a message F13= Remove all F16= Remove all except unanswered * - Work with problem allowed for message.

F10= Display all F22= Display list details

F14= Work with Problem F24= More keys

Bottom F12= Cancel F24= More keys

F21= Select assistance level


Figure 39-12. Option 1 or DSPMSG QSYSOPR

AS248.1

Notes: To see system operator messages using a 5250 emulation session, use the command to display the system operator messages. The command is DSPMSG QSYSOPR. Often the only thing wrong on your Power is that there is an unanswered message in one of the system message queues. Always check for messages when users are experiencing problems. An asterisk (*) to the left of a message on the QSYSOPR message queue means that problem analysis can be run for that message. To run problem analysis, position the cursor on the message and press F14 (Work with Problem). The ability to run problem analysis from the Display Messages display is an added value that comes when using a 5250 emulation session. This function is not available with the GUI interfaces (System i Navigator or Systems Director Navigator for IBM i).




39-31

Instructor Guide






I

Uempty

Problem Summary Form IBM i

Problem Summary Form Date

Time

PMR or service request no. Describe problem Message

1 Record the mode. 2 Set the mode to Manual. 3 Place a check on the line below to indicate which lights on the control panel are on. Power on Processor/Active/Activity System Attention


Figure 39-13. Problem Summary Form

AS248.1

Notes: These forms are located in the back of the Handling and Reporting System Problems chapter in the Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling manual. Use this form to record problems when problem analysis cannot be run. This form is called the Problem Summary Form. The information you record on this form can then be sent to your service provider. There are different forms for different system models. Follow all of the instructions carefully. It is better to record too much information than not enough.




39-33

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Problem Handling menu IBM i


Figure 39-14. Problem Handling menu

AS248.1

Notes: You can also use the Problem Handling menu to analyze problems. You can access this menu by entering go problem on a command line. Option 2. Work with problems: on this menu allows you to view problems that have been detected on your system and to select one for analysis. These problems will have been detected by your system, by you (the user), or by an application. Option 4. Display system operator message: allows you to view messages in QSYSOPR. Option 5. Display the history log: allows you to view the history log, which offers a high-level overview of all system activity.




39-35

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — A user-written application can look out for problems and write the information to the problem log. Additional information — Transition statement — We will now look at options 2 and 5 in detail.





Uempty

Option 2 or WRKPRB IBM i

F14=Analyze new problem

F15=Sort by Date F18=Work with alerts

F24=More keys


Figure 39-15. Option 2 or WRKPRB

AS248.1

Notes: Selecting option 2 from the Problem Handling menu, or entering the WRKPRB command, brings up the Work with Problems display. This display shows a list of problems called the problem log. As each problem is identified, the system assigns it a unique problem ID, a 10-character identifier you can use to name a problem and its corresponding record of detailed information. • The first five characters indicate the date on which the problem was recorded. • The next five characters indicate the sequence number of the problem record. • These characters, combined with the network ID and the control point name are used by the system to ensure that each problem can be uniquely identified. Normally, you would select an OPENED problem on the Work with Problems display. Once a problem analysis has been run, the status changes to READY. If the problem needs to be sent to IBM for assistance in solving, you must attach your name and address to it. The




39-37

Instructor Guide

status is then changed to PREPARED. Once problems have been prepared, they can be sent to IBM, at which point the status changes to SENT. Delete old problems on a regular basis by using option 4 (Delete) on the Work with Problems display or the Delete Problem (DLTPRB) command. Only problems older than the number of days set in the QPRBHLDITV system value can be deleted in this way. Operational Assistant takes care of this cleanup task in addition to cleaning up job logs, as mentioned earlier. Option 5 (Display details) on the Work with Problems display allows you to display details about a problem, while option 6 (Print details) allows you to print them. Pressing F24 (More keys) displays F14 (Analyze new problem). You can use F14 or the Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command to open a new problem of your own.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The log of problems continues to expand and can take up considerable disk space on a system. Delete old problems regularly by using either option 4 (Delete) on the Work with Problems display or the Delete Problem (DLTPRB) command. The QPRBHLDITV (Problem log hold interval) system value specifies the minimum number of days for which a problem is kept in the problem log. The default for QPRBHLDITV is 30 days, whereupon the problem can be deleted. The system automatically deletes problem logs based upon the settings used in the system cleanup (GO CLEANUP, System journals and system logs parameter) and the QPRBHLDITV system value. If the value in the GO CLEANUP, System journals and system logs parameter is less than the value specified in the QPRBHLDITV system value, the latter takes precedence. If users wants to open a new problem of their own, they can press F24 (More keys) on the Work with Problems display. When they do this, F14 (Analyze new problem) appears on the function key line. They can either use F14 or the Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command to open a new problem. Additional information — Transition statement —




39-39

Instructor Guide

Status for a problem IBM i

OPENED READY PREPARED SENT ANSWERED VERIFIED CLOSED


Figure 39-16. Status for a problem

AS248.1

Notes: The status of each problem is also shown. The possible status values are: • OPENED: The problem was identified and a problem record was created. • READY: Problem analysis information has been added to the problem record. • PREPARED: The problem has been prepared for reporting. • SENT: The problem record has been sent to a service provider, but the information needed to correct the problem has not returned. The information needed is returned at a later time, or a service representative contacts you. • ANSWERED: An answer to the service request issued with the problem record, including the information needed to correct the problem, has been returned by the service provider, or answer information has been added by an operator on this system. The answer information might include PTFs or a list of the possible causes of the problem. If the answer involves PTFs, the list of PTFs that correct the problem is available for viewing.





Uempty

• VERIFIED: The problem has been resolved by PTFs or equipment repairs, and an operator has verified that the problem has been corrected. • CLOSED: All work on the problem record is complete. Information about the problem can be viewed, but no update operations can be performed on this problem record. A short message or a description of the type of problem the system has detected is also shown.




39-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Analyze a problem (1 of 2) IBM i Work with Problem Problem ID . . . . . . Origin . . . . . . . . . . . Current status. . . . . Problem . . . . . . . . . network

: : : :

System: I520DVL2 9833826542 APPN.i520DVL3 Display Problem Analysis Results READY Line failed during insertion into the token-ring

System: I520DVL2

List type . . . . . . . : Isolation Type options, press Enter. Press F6 to report the problem. 5=Display detail

Enter

Select one of the following:. 1. Analyze problem 2. Report problem 4. Verify problem corrected 20. Close problem 30. Save APAR data to APAR library

Opt Probability Possible Cause 5 100 ADPTADR value in CRTLINTRN command F3=Exit F6=Report problem F12=Cancel F=15=Save APAR data F17=Top

Bottom F13=Add Notes F18=Bottom

Enter

Bottom

AJCUJE35

Selection 1 F3=Exit

Display Detail - Configuration Problem

The configuration parameter that was identified as a possible problem can be verified by displaying the local area network line description with the DSPLIND command.

F12=Cancel

The line description was created by the CRTLINTRN, the CRTLINETH or the CRTLINDDI command. You may need to review the appropriate command information to determine if the configuration parameter is wrong. Information about commands related to communications can be found in the following manuals: o Programming: Control Language Reference, SC41-0030 o Communications Configurations Reference, GC41-0001 Some software problems can be temporarily solved by changing the configuration parameter, even if the original value was correct. Report this problem to your service representative if you use this temporary change. Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit

F12=Cancel


Figure 39-17. Analyze a problem (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Selecting option 8 on the Work with Problems display shows the Work with Problem display, from which you can analyze, report, and close a problem. The example on the visual shows an operator-assisted analysis of a system problem. During problem analysis, the system presents many displays with questions that must be answered or actions that must be performed. When you select option 1 from the Work with Problem menu, the system first has you check the common causes of that particular type of problem. If a line fails while it is being inserted into the token ring, check for the correct value in the ADPTADR parameter on the CRTLINTRN command. Follow the directions until the system either helps you resolve the problem or tells you that it needs to be sent to IBM for further assistance. If the system cannot precisely identify the cause of a problem, it will at least display a list of possible causes and the likelihood of each. Reporting an existing problem: Pressing F6 in the Display Problem Analysis Results display brings up the Report Problem menu. You can now use option 1 (Prepare Service Request) to send the problem analysis report to your service provider. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



39-43

Instructor Guide

Analyze a new problem: The Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command is used to analyze a problem that has occurred in the past, even though it might not be occurring now, or a problem on another system. You start with a description of the problem rather than an error message. Again, you must answer a series of questions as the system leads you through the problem analysis. This function is also available by pressing F14 on the Work with Problems display.





Uempty





39-45

Instructor Guide

Analyze a problem (2 of 2) IBM i

AJCUY1PO Work Station Problem Analysis Work station . . . . . . : DSP06 Controller. . . . . . . . . : CTL01 Port. . . . . . . . . . . : 2 Address . . . . . . . . : 2 Select one of the following: What type of cable is used to connect the failing work station to the system? 1. Twinaxial cable 2. IBM Cabling System Work Station Problem Analysis 3. Telephone twisted-pair wiring Work Station Problem Analysis Selection ___ Display Problem Analysis Results F3=Exit F12=Cancel System: I520DVL2 List type . . . . . . . . . .: isolation Type options, press Enter. 5=Display detail Opt Probability __ 95 __ 5

Possible Cause Twinaxial work station IOP card Twinaxial work station attachment

Bottom F3=Exit F6=Prepare service request F12=Cancel F24=More keys Problem analysis results recorded in the problem log.


Figure 39-18. Analyze a problem (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: The steps to see the screens captured on this visual are: 1. Enter the Work with problems command WRKPRB which will show a listing of problems encountered on the system. 2. Select option 8 - Work with problem to see the Work with problems screen captured in the upper left on this visual. 3. Select option 1 - Analyze problem to step through a series of screens (not displayed in this visual) to perform problem analysis. 4. Once you have completed the analysis you will see the Display Problem Analysis Results screen captured in the upper right part of this visual. 5. Specify option 5 - Display details to see the specific details for this problem. This is the screen captured in the lower right part of this visual.





Uempty





39-47

Instructor Guide

PROBLEM2 menu IBM i


Figure 39-19. PROBLEM2 menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Problem Handling (PROBLEM2) menu allows you to select problem-handling tasks associated with programming problems and system performance. Option 1. Program temporary fix (PTF): Select this option to use PTFs to update IBM-licensed programs and programs developed by other companies. Option 2. Work with alerts (WRKALR): Select this option to use alerts to identify problems at local or remote locations. Option 3. Performance tools (STRPFRT): Select this option to work with the performance of your system. Option 4. Programming language debug (CMDDBG): Select this option to use commands associated with solving your programming language errors. Option 5. Work with support contact information (WRKCNTINF): Select this option to update your contact information for marketing and technical support. Option 6. Copy screen image (CMDCPYSCN): Select this option to show the information on your display station to a specified user at another display station, in order to find and 39-48 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

solve a system problem. You can also send the information on your display station to a database file. Option 7. Work with alert descriptions (WRKALRD): Select this option to define alerts. You can use this function to create, change, and delete your own alert descriptions. Option 70. Related commands (CMDPRBMGT): Select this option to see commands related to analyzing and solving problems.




39-49

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Analyzing problems with a system reference code IBM i

The Attention light is on. The system reference code is displayed in control panel.

Function/Data

11-3

0000AABB


Figure 39-20. Analyzing problems with a system reference code

AS248.1

Notes: If you have a system failure, there might be a message code on the control panel on the system unit, and the Attention light should also be on. Record the code. A system reference code (SRC) is a set of eight characters that identifies the system component that detected the error code and that describes the condition. The first four characters of the SRC indicate the type of error, while the last four give additional information, which can be any set of characters. You should record the entirety of any SRC if one is displayed on the control panel when a problem is detected. The information gained from the SRC can help the service representative understand the problem fully and how to fix it. The error code indicates that a hardware or software error condition has occurred in the system. A System Attention light is turned on when the system detects a hardware error that it cannot correct. An error can result in the loss or corruption of data.




39-51

Instructor Guide

The error code recorded in the problem log is used to report errors and to perform problem analysis and resolution. Some error codes have the system automatically collect associated data that is used to diagnose the problem. Some error codes require that you restart the system for recovery, while others might indicate intermittent errors. The system unit control panel shown on this visual also applies to the 940x Version 3 system.





Uempty





39-53

Instructor Guide

History log IBM i

System history Automatically logs system activity: Job information (start/stop times) Component failures Critical system information (such as storage thresholds)

Information written to a system log QHST Multiple physical files QHST


Figure 39-21. History log

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





39-55

Instructor Guide

Problem analysis: History log IBM i

QHST *MSGQ

DSPLOG

Collection of messages summarizing system activity:

Subsystem information Job information Device status changes System operator messages PTF activity

QHSTyydddn QHSTLOGSIZ

'A LOG VERSION'


Figure 39-22. Problem analysis: History log

AS248.1

Notes: The system keeps a history log of high-level system activity. The information in this log has to do with job start and end, device actions, all messages that are received on the QSYSOPR message queue, and all PTF activity. The history information is recorded in a message queue called QHST. • You can display or print this information with the Display Log (DSPLOG) command. • When the DSPLOG command is run, the message queue contents are placed in a file named QHSTyydddn. • The name of the history log version is made up of QHST, the Julian date on which the log version was created (yyddd), and a sequence number or letter (x). • The size of this file is determined by the system value QHSTLOGSIZ (maximum history log records). The DSPLOG command has parameters to allow you to view only a portion of the history (starting and ending date and time).





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The system keeps a history log of all activity on the system. This is a high-level trace of system activity. The type of information in this log deals with: • Job start and end times • Device actions • All messages that are received on the QSYSOPR message queue • All PTF activity Additional information — Transition statement —




39-57

Instructor Guide

Saving and deleting history logs IBM i


Figure 39-23. Saving and deleting history logs

AS248.1

Notes: History files will remain on the system until they are deleted, which can be done by executing the Work with Files (WRKF) command. When a log version (another name for a history file) reaches the maximum size you have specified, the system simply creates another one, leaves the old one in QSYS, and sends a message to QSYSOPR to the effect that log version QHSTyydddn is full and should be saved. What the message does not say is that, after the old log version has been saved, it should be deleted. Leaving old log versions on disk affects disk space use and causes your system saves to take longer and longer as time goes by. If you use the Work with Files (WRKF) command for this task, you can both save and delete old history log versions using this display. This is yet another task that Operational Assistant can simplify.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform an application share of 5250 emulation for the next visual, figure covering the topics outlined in the student notes. To perform an application share: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID. 2. Select the share applications or Desktop icon in the Elluminate toolbar which looks like a monitor with a green arrow inside it. 3. Once the application share window opens select the application you want to share from the list and select OK. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Starting with the next visual, you should perform a live demo on your instructor PC of 5250 emulation for the next visual, figure covering the topics outlined in the student notes. To perform a live demo: 1. Open a 5250 emulation session and logon with your instructor ID.




39-59

Instructor Guide

Operational Assistant cleanup IBM i


Figure 39-24. Operational Assistant cleanup

AS248.1

Notes: You can have Operational Assistant (OA) perform many of the cleanup chores required on your system. Enter go assist and select option 11 to get started. One caution: OA cleans up by throwing away; it does not save anything. If you have set everything up correctly, this should not be a problem. Use option 1 (Change cleanup tasks) from the Cleanup menu to set up or change what you want OA to clean up. Determine how long you want to keep the various types of objects that OA cleans up. The values shown here are reasonable for most systems, but only you can decide what is right on your system. Pick a time for OA to run cleanup each day when there is the least amount of activity on your system. If you have implemented a power on and off schedule (or plan to do so), right before power off is a good time to clean up. After entering this information with Allow automatic cleanup set to Y, you must still use option 2 (Start cleanup at scheduled time) on the Cleanup Tasks menu before OA starts





Uempty

cleaning up according your schedule. Another alternative is to choose option 3 (Start cleanup immediately) and then option 2 to start the schedule for the next cleanup. One thing does happen automatically as soon as you specify that you want to allow cleanup on this display is that OA creates an output queue named QEZJOBLOG and changes the QPJOBLOG printer file to point to that output queue. This occurs regardless of how many days you want to keep job logs and other system output on this display for. Chapter 8 in the System Operation Manual contains information on how to implement OA automatic cleanup. Before you consider letting OA do its cleanup, you should read that chapter very carefully.




39-61

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — One caution: OA cleans up by throwing away. IT DOES NOT SAVE ANYTHING. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Functions that are automatically cleaned up IBM i

Messages:

Other user objects:

User messages queues Workstation messages queues System operator messages queue

Calendar entries Folders (reorganized) Database files (reorganized)

Printer output:

Other system objects:

Output queue QEZJOBLOG (job logs) Output queue QEZDEBUG (service and program dumps)

Journals:

APD journal DSNX journal

History log Problem log and files Alerts database PTF save files Reclaim temporary storage used by temporarily decompressed objects

Job accounting data journal Performance adjustment data journal Problem databases journal QSNADS journal OSI Message Services/400 journal © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 39-25. Functions that are automatically cleaned up

AS248.1

Notes: There are many objects that need to be cleaned up on your system. (Some of these objects, such as the history log and problem log, were discussed in this unit.) This visual shows those objects that the system can automatically clean up with OA. Little help is needed from the system operator for OA to perform this cleanup.




39-63

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Automated problem management: DSPSRVA IBM i

Page down (Roll up)


Figure 39-26. Automated problem management: DSPSRVA

AS248.1

Notes: Automated problem management provides automated problem analysis, as well as automated problem reporting to the service provider for system-detected problems. All of the analysis and reporting is done without user intervention. Automated problem management is implemented through service attributes. The Display Service Attributes (DSPSRVA) command brings up service attributes; the Change Service Attributes (CHGSRVA) command allows you to change them. Automated problem analysis applies mostly to hardware problems but also to some software problems in LIC. To determine which problems are analyzed automatically and which are not, use the Work with Problems (WRKPRB) command. When *YES is specified in the Report problem automatically field, software problems are reported automatically to the service provider. Your service provider is specified in the Control point name field. For hardware problem reporting, contact your service provider. To run the CHGSRVA command, you must be signed on with a user profile that includes *ALLOBJ special authority. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



39-65

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — IBM Service is the default service provider. Service attributes are similar to network attributes but contain service information. The default values are shown on this visual, indicating that when customers install the system, automatic problem determination and automatic problem reporting will be carried out unless they disable this function. Automatic analysis, combined with automatic reporting and notification, allows system-detected problems to be analyzed and reported to the service provider without customer interaction or knowledge. Solving this problem gives customers fewer perceptions of problems and can help improve customer satisfaction. The parameters for the Change Service Attributes command are: • Analyze Problem Automatically (ANZPRBAUTO) specifies whether problem analysis routines are run automatically at the time of failure. If problem analysis routines are run automatically, they are run at the time of failure as a background batch job. • Report Problem Automatically (RPTPRBAUTO) specifies whether problems that have been automatically analyzed are automatically sent to a service provider. • Critical Message to User (CRITMSGUSR) is an ordered list of user identifiers and user classes. These values are entered sequentially from highest to lowest. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U39-F27 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U39-F27 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U39-F27 on your PC place of the next visual while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.





Uempty

Copy screen IBM i

I need some assistance.

STRCPYSCN

Remote assistance or problem determination

Let me see what is happening on your workstation.


Figure 39-27. Copy screen

AS248.1

Notes: There is a system function that allows you, while you are at your workstation, to monitor what someone else is doing at another workstation in order to determine the cause of a problem on that workstation. You can start this function, called Copy Screen, by running the Start Copy Screen (STRCPYSCN) command and specifying the name of the display device you want to copy and the name of your own workstation. The user at the device you are copying needs to respond to a message to allow you to view the job in question. Once they have done that, you are able to follow along while the job proceeds. IBM i locks your keyboard, and you are not allowed to enter anything. You remain one screen behind the copied device. To end the copy screen function, either person can run the End Copy Screen (ENDCPYSCN) command. If the user being copied is unable to enter commands, then, at the requesting workstation, press System Request and enter the ENDCPYSCN command on the line at the bottom of your display.




39-67

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — IBM i allows a system operator to provide remote assistance or problem determination through the Copy Screen function, which allows a system operator to monitor at one workstation what someone else is doing at another workstation. The system operator can use this function to determine the cause of a problem that a user is having. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Network Management menu IBM i


Figure 39-28. Network Management menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Network Management (NETWORK) menu allows you to manage and use network communications: Option 1. Display network attributes (DSPNETA): Select this option to display how a network has been set up to operate. Option 2. Change network attributes (CHGNETA): Select this option to change network attributes. Option 3. Display sphere of control status (DSPSOCSTS): Select this option to display or print the current status of the primary and default systems in the sphere of control. Option 4. Work with sphere of control (WRKSOC): Select this option to use sphere of control to delete systems, add systems, and display the current status of the systems already defined. Option 5. Network problem handling (NETPRB): Select this option to identify and solve problems related to networks.




39-69

Instructor Guide

Option 6. Display APPN information (DSPAPPNINF): Select this option to identify and solve problems related to Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN). Option 7. Work with distribution queues (WRKDSTQ): Select this option to manage and control jobs on distribution queues. Option 8. Display distribution services (DSPDSTSRV): Select this option to display or print the distribution queue descriptions, routing table, or secondary system name table defined for your local system. Option 9. Display distribution services log (DSPDSTLOG): Select this option to use the SNADS log to determine when a network problem occurred. Option 10. TCP/IP administration (TCPADM): Select this option to manage and control jobs that are using the TCP/IP to communicate between systems. Option 14. Configure SNMP agent (CFGTCPSNMP): Select this option to define or change the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) configuration. Option 70. Related commands (CMDNET): Select this option to see commands related to managing and using a communication network.





Uempty





39-71

Instructor Guide

Network Problem Handling menu IBM i


Figure 39-29. Network Problem Handling menu

AS248.1

Notes: The Network Problem Handling (NETPRB) menu allows you to handle problems dealing with communication: Option 1. Work with problems (WRKPRB): Select this option to solve network problems. Option 2. Work with alerts (WRKALR): Select this option to use alerts to identify problems at local or remote locations. An alert is automatically sent from any Power in the network to the system that is designated to manage problems. Option 3. Verify communications (VFYCMN): Select this option to determine whether the communication links can be established. Option 4. Network management (NETWORK): Select this option to perform communication tasks related to managing a network problem handling - help network. Option 5. Send or receive files (FILETFR): Select this option to perform tasks related to sending or receiving files from systems with communications. Option 6. Access a remote system (REMOTE): Select this option to manage and control jobs on a remote system. 39-72 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

Option 7. Work with alert descriptions (WRKALRD): Select this option to define alerts. Using this function, you can create, change, and delete your own alert descriptions. Option 8. Verify APPC connection (VFYAPPCCNN): Select this option to exchange data packets between the local location and the specified remote location using Advanced Program-to-Program Communication (APPC).




39-73

Instructor Guide






Uempty

IBM Redbook SG24-8253 IBM i


Figure 39-30. IBM Redbook SG24-8253

AS248.1

Notes: The Redbook pictured in the visual can provide assistance when performing problem determination on the system. Even though this Redbook was written several releases ago, the information presented is still useful. To access this redbook, search for this publication number at the following Web site: www.redbooks.ibm.com




39-75

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Exercise IBM i


Exercise: Problem determination



AS248.1

Notes: Please refer to the Student Exercise Guide and perform the problem determination exercise.




39-77

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — This exercise gives the students an opportunity to use problem analysis and to record information in the problem log. Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U39-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U39-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U39-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.





Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: The system can be configured to perform automatic problem determination and reporting to your service provider. 2. Which of the following commands will display system status information? a. WRKSYSSTS b. WRKACTJOB c. WRKDSKSTS d. WRKUSRJOB

3. Which of the following commands will display information about your job? a. b. c. d.

WRKSYSSTS WRKACTJOB WRKDSKSTS WRKUSRJOB © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




39-79

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: The system can be configured to perform automatic problem determination and reporting to your service provider. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following commands will display system status information? a. WRKSYSSTS b. WRKACTJOB c. WRKDSKSTS d. WRKUSRJOB The answer is WRKSYSSTS.

3. Which of the following commands will display information about your job? a. WRKSYSSTS b. WRKACTJOB c. WRKDSKSTS d. WRKUSRJOB The answer is WRKACTJOB. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Identify a problem Analyze a problem Report a problem



AS248.1

Notes: It is your job as a system operator to monitor the system, reply to messages, and investigate to solve or report problems. The system collects a lot of information for you. (So much so, that if it is not cleaned up, it will create its own problem!) The system problem analysis and reporting functions can help you with this job.




39-81

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Use this visual to summarize problem handling for the system operator. Discuss the various tools that are available with i to identify, analyze, and report a problem. Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Unit 40. Problem determination using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:20

What this unit is about The system keeps track of all problems that occur and notifies you through message queues and logs. You might need to analyze a problem prior to calling IBM for service. System i Navigator provides tools to aid you in identifying, analyzing, and reporting problems.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Identify a problem • Analyze a problem • Report a problem



Unit 40. Problem determination using System i Navigator


40-1

Instructor Guide


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Identify a problem Analyze a problem Report a problem



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The system keeps track of all problems that occur on the system and notifies the system operator by using message queues and logs. The operator might need to analyze a problem before calling IBM for service. IBM i provides many tools to aid the operator in identifying, analyzing, and reporting problems. This unit presents the IBM i tools available to help the operator determine if there is a problem and gather information about the problem. Additional information — Transition statement —




40-3

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Details IBM i


Figure 40-2. Active Jobs: Details

AS248.1

Notes: Right-click a job to access details and the following information about a job: • Call Stack • Library List • Locked Objects • Open Files • Threads • Transactions • Elapsed Performance Statistics





Uempty





40-5

Instructor Guide

Active Jobs: Elapsed Performance Statistics IBM i


Figure 40-3. Active Jobs: Elapsed Performance Statistics

AS248.1

Notes: One of the details about the job is its performance statistics, which you can also bring up in the right pane by selecting similar columns in the Customize this View > Columns dialog.





Uempty





40-7

Instructor Guide

Job Log: Columns IBM i


Figure 40-4. Job Log: Columns

AS248.1

Notes: Right-click a job name and select Job Log to display the history of the job. You can display additional job log details by customizing your window and selecting additional columns.





Uempty





40-9

Instructor Guide

Active Pools: Customize Columns IBM i


Figure 40-5. Active Pools: Customize Columns

AS248.1

Notes: Checking performance statistics for the memory pools will be help you identify system performance problems.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U40-F06 in the multimedia library of Elluminate to allow the students to review the System Status topic. This flash can be played in place of the next four visuals. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U40-F06 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U40-F06 on your PC to review the System Status topic or since the students cannot view this themselves directly you can continue on to the next topic.




40-11

Instructor Guide

Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) IBM i


Figure 40-6. Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS)

AS248.1

Notes: This interface provides the capability to display the system status. This is equivalent to running the Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) command. To start this process, right-click your system and click System Status to see the notebook displayed on the next page.





Uempty





40-13

Instructor Guide

System Status: General / Jobs IBM i


Figure 40-7. System Status: General / Jobs

AS248.1

Notes: When the System Status dialog opens, it displays statistical information about your system for that instant in time. The exception is the CPU usage field, which displays a cumulative average during the time displayed in the Elapsed time field. Use the General tab to view high level system status values that show the current status of the system, such as elapsed CPU usage, total and active jobs in the system, permanent and temporary addresses used, total disk space, and system disk pool capacity and usage. Use the Jobs tab to view the number of total, maximum, and active jobs and threads running on the system. If you are monitoring a situation, you can update the values that are displayed on these tabs by clicking one of the following buttons: • Refresh Now: Click this button to cause the following: - The values change to reflect the current status of your system. - The Last refresh field updates to display the exact time that you clicked Refresh Now. 40-14 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

- The Elapsed time field updates to reflect the time between this refresh action and when the dialog was opened (or the last time you clicked Reset Statistics). - The CPU usage (elapsed) field updates to reflect the cumulative average during the elapsed time. • Timed Refresh: A timed refresh automatically accomplishes the same tasks at regular intervals as when you click Refresh Now. When you click this button, a dialog is shown that allows you to specify how often you would like the system status values to refresh. • Reset Statistics: When you click this button, the Elapsed time field is set to 00:00:00, and the CPU usage (elapsed) field is set to 0.0.




40-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System Status: Processors / Memory IBM i


Figure 40-8. System Status: Processors / Memory

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Processors tab to view information about the amount and type of processing power available on the system. Use the Memory tab to view the amount of memory on the system. This tab will also allow you to access the Active Memory Pools window.




40-17

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System Status: Disk Space / Addresses IBM i


Figure 40-9. System Status: Disk Space / Addresses

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Disk Space tab to view the amount of disk space on the system. You can also access the Disk Pools window and the Storage System Values window from this tab. Use the Addresses tab to view information about address use on the system. When a permanent or temporary address is created on the Power i, it is assigned an address by disk storage management. The system uses this address to correlate references to the object with disk storage. It is important to regularly monitor the percentage of addresses used on your system. If the rate at which addresses are being used will cause you to reach 100% during the planned lifetime of the system or if address usage reaches 90% (critical limit), you should call your IBM software service representative.




40-19

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Disk Status and Disk Pools IBM i


Figure 40-10. Disk Status and Disk Pools

AS248.1

Notes: The Disk Space tab on the previous page shows two buttons, Disk Status and Disk Pools. Click Disk Status button to see the window in the upper left of this visual. This is equivalent to running the Work with Disk Status (WRKDSKSTS) command. This window shows performance and status information about the disk units on the system. When you click Disk Pools, you are presented with the sign-on window displayed on the left. At this point, the IBM i is prompting you to sign on to system service tools (SST) which means you must enter your SST user ID and password. You will then be presented with the window in the middle. This displays information about the disk pools on your system. Optionally, you can choose to view a graphical representation of this information.




40-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Access to SST is available using System i Navigator and Systems Director Navigator, but it does require setup. Before you can perform any disk management tasks using IBM Systems Director Navigator for IBM i, you need to set up the proper authorizations for DST: 1. Ensure that the user profile that will be used to access disk units in IBM Systems Director Navigator for IBM i has at least these authorities: - *ALLOBJ – All object authority - *SERVICE 2. Start DST. 3. Sign on to DST using your service tools user ID and password. 4. When the Use Dedicated Service Tools (DST) display is shown, select option 5 (Work with DST environment), and press Enter. 5. From the Work with DST Environment menu, select option 6 (Service tools security data). 6. From the Work with Service Tools Security Data menu, select option 6 (Change password level). Ensure that the password level is set to SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) encryption or password level two, and press F12. 7. From the Work with DST Environment display, select option 3 (Service tools user IDs) to work with service tools user IDs. 8. Create a service tools user ID that matches the IBM i user profile and that also has the same password in uppercase. The service tools user ID and password must match the IBM i user profile and password of the user that is using IBM Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. For example, if the user profile and password combination is BOB and my1pass, the DST user ID and password combination must be BOB and MY1PASS. 9. Give this service tools user ID at least these authorities: - Disk units – operation - Disk units – administration 10. Press Enter to enable these changes. 11. Exit DST, and start IBM i. Before you can perform any disk management tasks with System i Navigator, you need to install the Configuration and Service component and enable the Disk Units folder. 1. Install the Configuration and Service component. a. From the File menu of System i Navigator, select Install Options, and then click Selective Setup. 40-22 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

b. Follow the instructions on the resulting dialog box to install the Configuration and Service component. 2. Enable the Disk Units folder. a. In System i Navigator, right-click the system connection and select Application Administration. b. On the resulting window, click OK. c. Click the Host Applications tab. d. Expand your operating system. e. Select Disk Units to have Default Access or All Object Access. f. Click OK. g. Restart System i Navigator. 3. Access the Disk Units folder to perform all disk management functions. a. In System i Navigator, expand My Connections (or your active environment). b. Expand the Power i you want to examine, Configuration and Service > Hardware > Disk Units. Additional information — Transition statement —




40-23

Instructor Guide

System operator messages IBM i


Figure 40-11. System operator messages

AS248.1

Notes: A variety of system messages can indicate conditions that range from simple typing errors to problems with system devices or programs. The following types of messages can appear: • An error message on your current display • A message that is sent to the system operator message queue, QSYSOPR, regarding a system problem • A message that is sent to the message queue specified in a device description regarding a device problem • A message that is sent to the QSYSMSG message queue, the system operator message queue, and other message queues specified by the users regarding a potential sever system condition • An unexpected error message that is not handled by a program (shown on the Display Program Messages display)





Uempty

The added value of this display is that you can create a message monitor to look out for specific messages on a message queue. • For example, you might create a message monitor to monitor a message queue to determine whether the application was completed successfully. • You might also create a message monitor to monitor the system operator message queue for a specific message that notifies you whenever a critical storage condition exists. • When you create this monitor, you can specify commands to run when the message is detected. In this case, you would want to free up storage space by specifying commands to delete unused objects or spooled files.




40-25

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Electronic Service Agent IBM i

Key functions are: System inventory collection and transmission Hardware problem reporting

To access this feature, follow these steps in System i Navigator Management Central: 1.

Expand Management Central.

2.

Select Extreme Support.

3.

Click Agent.

4.

Right-click Electronic Service Agent.

5.

Click Configure Electronic Services.


Figure 40-12. Electronic Service Agent

AS248.1

Notes: Extreme Support Personalized (ESP) is IBM’s comprehensive technical service and support initiative exclusively for IBM Power i. ESP is total solution support, personalized for you in the form you need. It involves support over the Internet, voice and onsite support, and support that is integrated right into the product. One of the offerings includes support that uses TCP/IP with Performance Management, Service Agent, and inventory consolidation with Management Central. Electronic Service Agent is a no-charge licensed program that resides on the system and is designed to monitor events and to transmit Power inventory information to IBM according to a periodic, customer-defined timetable. For additional information, see the IBM iSeries Universal Connection for Electronic Support and Services, SG24-6224, Redbook. The two key functions of Electronic Service Agent are: 1. Power inventory collection and transmission collects and sends Power information to IBM as input to problem analysis and prevention functions, and to assist IBM in © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



40-27

Instructor Guide

providing improved service. The Power information is gathered and stored by Management Central and is then sent to IBM with the Universal Connection. Electronic Service Agent can also collect and transmit information from multiple systems. This is done by consolidating inventory from multiple systems onto one Management Central system prior to transmission over the connection. The Power inventory collection and transmission function of Electronic Service Agent is available with System i Navigator. You can find this support in the Management Central hierarchy under Extreme Support. You can collect any of the following: hardware, software, fixes, system values, users and groups, service attributes, contact information, network attributes, PM/400 performance data, and system registration. You can collect inventory for users and groups; however, Electronic Service Agent does not send this inventory to IBM. 2. Hardware problem reporting predicts and prevents hardware errors, downloads fixes, and automatically calls IBM Service when necessary. With early knowledge about potential problems, IBM can provide proactive service, thereby helping to maintain higher availability and performance. The hardware problem reporting function can be activated only if one of two conditions applies: your Power is under warranty or you have purchased an IBM Maintenance Services Agreement.





Uempty





40-29

Instructor Guide

Configuration of Electronic Service Agent IBM i


Figure 40-13. Configuration of Electronic Service Agent

AS248.1

Notes: The services that can be configured once you have signed on are listed below. Report System-Detected Problems: The system problem log allows you to display a list of all problems that have been reported to the system. You can display detailed information about a specific problem and report problems to IBM by using this facility to initiate a search of the IBM database for known problems and their respective fixes. Report Hardware and Software Problems: Problems that arise on any Power i model can be analyzed using the problem analysis component of the IBM i operating system. The mechanism for problem analysis on the Power i is the Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command. The operating system builds a set of search criteria that can be submitted to the IBM electronic database by using electronic customer support. Customers are entitled to access the IBM fix database as part of their Power i hardware maintenance agreement.





Uempty

If, after analyzing a particular problem, the system determines that problem should be reported to IBM, you have the option of using electronic customer support to do the reporting. This results in an immediate search of the electronic database for a known fix for the reported problem. The fix is automatically downloaded to the Power i, or a request is placed for the fix to be supplied on the media you specify, depending on the size of the transmission. If a solution is not found, your problem record is forwarded to the IBM Power i Support Center. You can arrange for further assistance for a fee. Request Cumulative Fix Packages: In addition to electronically downloaded fixes, you can request cumulative fix packages for preventative service of i operating system and other IBM-supported licensed programs. When you submit the order electronically, electronic customer support automatically transfers all of the necessary detail to enable IBM to ship you a cumulative package on the media that you require. Order Preventative Service Information: Preventive service planning (PSP) information is a collection of information that is used when you are installing a licensed program cumulative fix package, hardware, or software upgrades. Periodically order PSP information and review the fixes listed. If you need any of these, order and install them.




40-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty

IBM Electronic Services on the Web IBM i


Figure 40-14. IBM Electronic Services on the Web

AS248.1

Notes: If you click the IBM Electronic Services on the Web button, you are connected to the IBM Electronic Services home page. The URL to get to the window captured in the upper left in this visual is: https://www-304.ibm.com/support/electronic/portal/




40-33

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: Running the analyze problem function is available using 5250 emulation and using System i Navigator. 2. Which of the following requires signing on to system service tools? a. b. c. d.

WRKACTJOB WRKSYSSTS WRKDSKSTS WRKSSTSTS

3. Which of the following is not supported by Electronic Service Agent? a. b. c. d.

Reporting system detected problems Requesting cumulative fix packages Reporting hardware and software problems Reporting a failed system backup © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:




40-35

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Running the analyze problem function is available using 5250 emulation and using System i Navigator. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following requires signing on to system service tools? a. WRKACTJOB b. WRKSYSSTS c. WRKDSKSTS d. WRKSSTSTS The answer is WRKDSKSTS.

3. Which of the following is not supported by Electronic Service Agent? a. Reporting system detected problems b. Requesting cumulative fix packages c. Reporting hardware and software problems d. Reporting a failed system backup The answer is Reporting a failed system backup. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011






Uempty

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Identify a problem Analyze a problem Report a problem



AS248.1

Notes: It is your job as a system operator to monitor the system, reply to messages, and investigate to solve or report problems. The system collects a lot of information for you. The system problem analysis and reporting functions can help you with this job.




40-37

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Use this visual to summarize problem handling for the system operator. Discuss the various tools that are available with i to identify, analyze, and report a problem. Before continuing to the next unit, stop and ask the students if there are any additional questions before continuing. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

Unit 41. Overview of the PTF process Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about Even though every IBM-licensed program product (LPP) undergoes extensive testing before being made available for general customer use, problems are still occasionally found once these LPPs are put into widespread use. In an ongoing effort to ensure that IBM-licensed program products are as error-free as possible, IBM creates a program temporary fix (PTF) to correct a problem or potential problem in one of these programs as soon as the problem is detected and reported. Each PTF is designed to fully replace one or more objects in the LPP. PTFs can be distributed electronically or by CD-ROM. After a PTF is received, it must be installed on the system to make it active.


Explain what a program temporary fix (PTF) is Describe the PTF process List and explain the PTF types that are available List the commands that are used to order PTFs Explain the different PTF strategies for PTFs



Unit 41. Overview of the PTF process


41-1

Instructor Guide

I


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain what a program temporary fix (PTF) is Describe the PTF process List and explain the PTF types that are available List the commands that are used to order PTFs Explain the different PTF strategies for PTFs



AS248.1

Notes: After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to explain what a PTF is and use information available from IBM to help you know when to order a PTF. You should also be able to order a PTF, receive and install a PTF, display the status of a PTF, and verify that a PTF has been successfully installed. There are two important things to consider when working with PTFs. First, some functions related to the installation of PTFs can only be performed while signed on to the system as the security officer (QSECOFR). No attempt has been made in the following discussion to identify those functions. Before attempting to perform any function related to PTFs, you should review the appropriate documentation. Second, it is highly recommended that you have a current backup of your system. If there is any doubt at all about the availability of a valid backup, you should take the time to perform a full system backup before you begin any PTF activity.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There is no exercise provided with this unit. Additional information — Transition statement —




41-3

Instructor Guide

What is a fix or PTF? IBM i

A fix is a temporary solution to fix or bypass a defect diagnosed by IBM in a current, unaltered release of a licensed program product (LPP).

New Function

PTF

PTF

Problem


Figure 41-2. What is a fix or PTF?

AS248.1

Notes: Periodically, bugs are discovered in Power i programs. IBM issues a fix (also called a PTF) once corrections are made to the affected IBM programs. Multiple fixes are bundled together to form a cumulative fix pack, which contains recommended fixes. The recommendation is that cumulative fix packs should be installed on a quarterly basis for dynamic environments and less frequently in stable ones. Cumulative fix packs should also be considered prior to making major hardware or software changes to your environment. Fixes play an important part in your system’s maintenance strategy. They give you a chance to fine-tune your system’s operation, add additional functionality, or improve performance.





Uempty





41-5

Instructor Guide

PTF process overview IBM i

1

Fix needed or due for cumulative fix pack?

2

Order fix

ECS

Internet: as400service.ibm.com

3

Install fix

4

Verify installation

Go LICPGM, option 50, Display log for messages DSPPTF System i Navigator: Fixes inventory

FIX

5

Test product


Figure 41-3. PTF process overview

AS248.1

Notes: Installed and permanently installed fixes: When a fix is installed to a system, both the original and new objects are kept on the system. Logically, two copies of the code reside on the machine. This allows you to restart the system using either the original objects or the new objects. Installing a fix to your system gives you a secure backup while you test the new code. If the system functions incorrectly using the new code, you simply restart your system using the original code and remove the defective code. When a fix is permanently installed on your system, only the new objects exist on the system. A fix can be permanently installed when it has been in use for a period of time and you feel confident that the chances of it being defective are small. Available and delayed fixes: Once a fix is loaded on your system, you can choose to apply it right away or wait for a period of time before applying it. A fix can be made available if the system cannot run the old and new code at the same time. Alternatively, you can choose to delay applying a fix. The fix is then applied the next time the Power is restarted.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The PTF process consists of five steps. 1. First, you might wonder whether you need a PTF. This might be prompted by you or someone else in your business having a hardware or software problem or it might be part of your monthly job to order PTFs. 2. Once you have determined you need a PTF, you must order and receive it from IBM. You can order and receive a PTF electronically from your ECS line or the Internet, or you can call your IBM service representative requesting that they order and ship the PTFs to you. If the PTF is too large to be delivered electronically, it will be shipped by way of CD-ROM or tape. The current restrictions for PTF sizes are: ECS line: 4 MB per file (can be modified by IBM Technical Support to allow up to 10 MB) Internet:

10 MB per file/15 MB per order

3. Next, you need to install the PTF. If the PTF was shipped electronically, it is stored in a save file in QGPL on the system. You need to install the PTF from the file. If the PTF was shipped on CD-ROM or tape, you need to install it from either of these media. 4. Once the PTF is installed, you should verify that it installed correctly. This can be done from the Display History Log Contents display. 5. Finally, and you might not have to do this for all the PTFs, you should test the LPP that was causing a problem to ensure the product works the way it is intended to work. (IBM does extensive testing of the PTF before they ship it, therefore it should work as intended.) Additional information — Transition statement — Let us look at each of these steps in detail.




41-7

Instructor Guide

Types of fixes IBM i

Single or HIPER fixes Cumulative PTF packages Fix groups Service packs


Figure 41-4. Types of fixes

AS248.1

Notes: Single PTFs are applied to correct specific reported problems. A high-impact pervasive (HIPER) PTF is an example of a single PTF which resolves a problem that might have a high impact on the operations of your server or a low-impact pervasive problem that affects most Power i servers. Cumulative PTF packages contain fixes for a given release of the IBM i operating system and associated licensed programs. You should install the entire cumulative PTF package after you first load or reload the operating system. A PTF group or fix group is a name that is used to order and manage a group of logically related PTFs. The advantage of a group fix is that you can use the same PTF number every time to order the latest and greatest fixes for a specific function. Service packs are different from group PTFs. A service pack is a collection of code fixes (not PTFs) for Power i Access for Windows products that is contained in a single IBM i PTF.





Uempty





41-9

Instructor Guide

How to determine available PTFs IBM i

Cross-referenced summary list

Fixes from earlier release in current release

PSP information Information to be reviewed prior to installing licensed program, cumulative fix package, or hardware

Fix summary list

Fixes that affect most users


Figure 41-5. How to determine available PTFs

AS248.1

Notes: The first step in the PTF process is determining whether you need a PTF. IBM provides a lot of information to help you determine what PTFs are available. The information you choose to use depends on what PTF information you need to know and what is going on with your system (for example, if you just loaded a new release of IBM i operating system). The cross-referenced summary list shows PTFs from an earlier release that are included in the current release. This list should be used to make sure you order any PTFs for the new release that you had at the previous release but are not included in the list. Preventive service pack (PSP) is information you should order and review prior to installing a PTF. PSP information is available for: • Licensed programs installation • LIC • System equipment • Cumulative PTF packages





Uempty

• PTFs in error • HIPER problems The fix summary list contains a list of HIPER PTFs that affect most system users. You should use this list to identify PTFs you might want to order. The fix summary list also identifies the current cumulative fix pack and what pack each PTF was included in.




41-11

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Ordering fixes (1 of 2) IBM i

Cover letters and individual fixes SNDPTFORD nnnnnnn Where nnnnnnn is the fix number Cover letter only: Add parameter PTFPART(CVRLTR)

Cumulative fix packs SNDPTFORD SF99vrm Where vrm is the version, release, and modification level

Cross-reference summary lists Refer to documentation for version and release you are moving from


Figure 41-6. Ordering fixes (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: As a system administrator, one of your responsibilities is maintaining your Power i. Part of the maintenance procedure involves getting, installing, and managing fixes. The topics described below assist you with these tasks. Before you begin ordering fixes, you should order and apply the latest cumulative PTF package. When you apply cumulative PTF packages, you reduce the number of fixes that you need to order and distribute later. Plan to regularly visit IBM’s fix page in order to find the fixes available to you, those which affect most users, those which you need before installing new hardware or licensed programs, and those that come bundled together; then get the status of the fixes you have ordered. To order fixes electronically, configure electronic customer support. The SNDPTFORD command will be covered later in this unit.




41-13

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Ordering fixes (2 of 2) IBM i

Preventive service packs (PSPs) For licensed programs: SNDPTFORD SF98vrm For LIC: SNDPTFORD MF98vrm

Fix summary lists SNDPTFORD SF97vrm

Status of fix orders


Figure 41-7. Ordering fixes (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes:




41-15

Instructor Guide






Uempty

PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service IBM i

Cumulative fix pack: Most PTFs available since start of last release Order using ECS, phone, or Internet Always shipped on CD-ROM Install every quarter This is the recommended maintenance strategy.

Preventive service packs (PSPs): PTFs available between releases of cumulative PTF packages Order using ECS, phone, or Internet Shipped electronically or by CD-ROM http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/iseries/hardware/software/index.html © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 41-8. PTF maintenance strategy: Preventive service

AS248.1

Notes: The IBM i operating system program maintenance strategy consists of both preventive and corrective service. Preventive service helps you avoid problems that have been fixed since the start of the current release. It is implemented through cumulative PTF packages and PSP information. A cumulative fix pack holds PTFs that contain key changes and improvements which affect most system users. In the case of PTFs, you should stay current by installing cumulative PTFs frequently. Take the time now to prevent problems in the future. PSP information is available between releases of cumulative PTF packages. It contains a list of PTFs that are important to your system since the last cumulative PTF package was generated (refer to the following Web site): http://www-03.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/iseries/hardware/software/ index.html




41-17

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The IBM i operating system program maintenance strategy consists of preventive service and corrective service. Preventive service is shown on this visual. Corrective service is shown on the following visual. Preventive service helps you avoid problems that have been resolved since the start of the current release. Preventive service is implemented through the cumulative fix pack which contains PTFs generated since the general availability of the last release of the licensed program. These PTFs affect the general system population. If a PTF provides a change for a limited set of users or requires special handling, it might not be included in the pack. Cumulative fix packs can be ordered through ECS, Internet, or phone and are always sent by mail on a CD-ROM. The entire cumulative fix pack should be installed after you first load or reload the current release of your system. Cumulative fix packs should be installed every three to four months if there is no change to the equipment or programs on your system. Between releases of cumulative fix packs, IBM service support provides PTFs that might be important to your system through PSP information. You should periodically order PSP information. Additional information — Transition statement —





Uempty

PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service IBM i

Corrections to problems reported to IBM service support Reported using ECS, phone, or Internet Received electronically or by CD-ROM


Figure 41-9. PTF maintenance strategy: Corrective service

AS248.1

Notes: Even if you stay current with the installation of cumulative tapes, you might still have a problem that requires immediate correction. In this situation, you can use the corrective service program to report the problem to IBM service.




41-19

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Even if the Power is kept current with the installation of cumulative PTFs, a problem might still arise that requires immediate correction. In this situation, a problem can be reported to IBM service using corrective service. Corrective service fixes problems reported to IBM service support. If you have a problem with an IBM licensed program, you can describe the problem using the Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) or Work with Problems (WRKPRB) commands. You can also configure your system to analyze and report any problems automatically. You can report problems through ECS, the Internet, or phone. Depending on the nature of the problem, IBM might create a PTF for you, or the PTF might already exist. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U41-F10 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U41-F10 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U41-F10 on your PC place of the next visual while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.





Uempty

OS and LPP PTF installation IBM i

1

LOAD (LODPTF)

FIX BUG

2

APPLY TEMPORARILY (APYPTF *TEMP) FIX

3

BUG

APPLY PERMANENTLY (APYPTF *PERM) FIX © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 41-10. OS and LPP PTF installation

AS248.1

Notes: After a PTF has been received, it must be loaded to the appropriate licensed program library. Now both the old version of the objects, the ones in error, and the new, corrected versions exist in the library. When the PTF is applied temporarily, the new object (corrected) is flagged so that it is used instead of the old one. At some point in time, when you apply the PTF permanently, the old object (in error) is deleted. Temporarily applied PTFs can be removed, but permanently applied PTFs cannot be removed. Therefore, you want to apply a PTF temporarily first to make sure it fixes the problem before you apply it permanently. Using automatic installation of PTFs, you do not have to worry about loading and applying PTFs; it is done for you as part of the install process. Manual installation of PTFs from either the Program Temporary Fix menu or by using the Load Program Temporary Fix (LODPTF) or Apply Program Temporary Fix (APYPTF) commands causes PTFs to be applied temporarily. At some point, you need to apply the PTFs permanently.




41-21

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If manual installation of a PTF is required, the steps listed in this visual must be performed using option 1 (Load PTF) and option 2 (Apply PTF) from the Program Temporary Fix menu or the LODPTF and APYPTF commands. After a PTF has been received, it must be loaded to the appropriate licensed program library. Depending on how a PTF has been received, it is loaded from CD-ROM or a save file. Now both the old version of the objects, the ones in error, and the new, corrected versions exist in the library. When the PTF is applied temporarily, the new (corrected) objects are flagged so that they are used instead of the old ones. When the PTF is applied permanently, the old (erroneous) objects are deleted. A temporarily applied PTF can be removed, but a permanently applied PTF cannot. Therefore, a PTF should always be applied temporarily to be sure that it fixes the problem before it is applied permanently. Whether installing a PTF package or PTFs for individual products, the installation process discussed earlier performs both the load and apply PTF functions. This includes permanently applying any PTFs that are superseded by PTFs currently being applied. Manual installation causes PTFs to be applied temporarily. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: You should play file AS248-U41-F11 in the multimedia library of Elluminate in place of the next visual. 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button in the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U41-F11 and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: You can then play file AS248-U41-F11 on your PC place of the next visual while providing commentary for the different parts of the file.





Uempty

LIC PTFs IBM i

1 2

Storage area B active LODPTF

BUG

LICPGM(5771-999)

BUG AB

3

APYPTF *TEMP

4

PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES) IPLSRC(B)

5

FIX

BUG BUG

FIX AB

APYPTF *PERM FIX

FIX AB


Figure 41-11. LIC PTFs

AS248.1

Notes: LIC fixes are PTFs for the Licensed Internal Code (LIC). There are two types of LIC fixes: delayed and immediate. Delayed LIC fixes can be applied immediately while running on the A side, or they can be applied while running on the B side. Immediate LIC fixes can be applied immediately while running on the A or B storage area. No IPL is required for applying immediate PTFs. The system maintains two copies of all LIC on the system. One copy is considered the permanent copy and is stored on the Power in storage area A. The other copy is considered the temporary copy and is stored on system storage B. When the Power is running, it uses the copy that was selected before the last IPL. Like all other PTFs, LIC fixes must be loaded and applied. The B storage area is what you normally use. Select the A storage area only if the IPL to the B storage area fails because of a temporarily applied LIC fix.




41-23

Instructor Guide

You should always LODPTF from the B side. The B side contains both the permanent and temporary PTFs. When you run LODPTF from the B side, any superseded PTFs are permanently applied to the A (permanent) side. The automatic installation of a cumulative PTF package takes care of these A and B IPLs for you.





Uempty





41-25

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: A PTF or a fix is a temporary solution or bypass of a defect in an IBM licensed program. 2. Which of the following is not one of the fix types available from IBM? a. b. c. d.

Single fix Cumulative package Temporary correctional fix Service pack

3. True or False: The recommendation is that cumulative fix packs should only be installed before you upgrade the software on your system.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: A PTF or a fix is a temporary solution or bypass of a defect in an IBM licensed program. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not one of the fix types available from IBM? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Temporary correctional fix.

3. True or False: The recommendation is that cumulative fix packs should only be installed before you upgrade the software on your system. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





41-27

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain what a program temporary fix (PTF) is Describe the PTF process List and explain the PTF types that are available List the commands that are used to order PTFs Explain the different PTF strategies for PTFs



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





41-29

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 42. PTFs using 5250 emulation Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about In this unit, we will review the commands used to order, receive and install a PTF. We will discuss the information contained in a PTF cover letter. We will also look at how you display the status of a PTF. Lastly we will look at how you verify a PTF installation.


Display the PTF menu Explain the command that is used for ordering PTFs Explain the contents of a PTF cover letter Display PTF status Verify PTF installation



Unit 42. PTFs using 5250 emulation


42-1

Instructor Guide

I


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Display the PTF menu Explain the command that is used for ordering PTFs Explain the contents of a PTF cover letter Display PTF status Verify PTF installation



AS248.1

Notes: After successfully completing this unit, you should be able to explain what a PTF is and use information available from IBM to help you know when to order a PTF. You should also be able to order a PTF, receive and install a PTF, display the status of a PTF, and verify that a PTF has been successfully installed. There are two important things to consider when working with PTFs. First, some functions related to the installation of PTFs can only be performed while signed on to the system as the security officer (QSECOFR). No attempt has been made in the following discussion to identify those functions. Before attempting to perform any function related to PTFs, you should review the appropriate documentation. Second, it is highly recommended that you have a current backup of your system. If there is any doubt at all about the availability of a valid backup, you should take the time to perform a full system backup before you begin any PTF activity.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There is no exercise provided with this unit. Additional information — Transition statement —




42-3

Instructor Guide

Working with PTFs IBM i


Figure 42-2. Working with PTFs

AS248.1

Notes: The Program Temporary Fix menu provides easy access to all PTF functions. You can access this menu by entering go ptf on a command line or by selecting option 7 from the Power i Main menu and then option 6 from the Define or Change the System menu. The following explains the options on the Program Temporary Fix menu and the commands that options 1 through 6 prompt for. Options 7 and 8 do not have commands associated with them. 1. Load a program temporary fix This option allows you to select the PTFs to load. It prompts for the Load a Program Temporary Fix (LODPTF) command. 2. Apply a program temporary fix This option allows you to select the PTFs to apply to a licensed program. It prompts for the Apply Program Temporary Fix (APYPTF) command.





Uempty

3. Copy a program temporary fix This option allows you to select PTFs to copy from a diskette, tape, or save file to another diskette, tape, or save file. It prompts for the Copy Program Temporary Fix (CPYPTF) command. 4. Remove a program temporary fix This option allows you to select PTFs to remove. It prompts for the Remove Program Temporary Fix (RMVPTF) command. 5. Display a program temporary fix This option allows you to select PTFs that are installed on your Power i system to display. It prompts for the Display Program Temporary Fix (DSPPTF) command. 6. Order a program temporary fix This option allows you to select PTFs to order. It prompts for the Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) command. 7. Install a program temporary fix from a list This option displays a list of PTFs. You can select PTFs from this list to install to selected IBM-supplied LPPs. 8. Install a program temporary fix package (INSPTF) This option allows you to install a PTF package. 9. Copy PTF Cover Letter (CPYPFTCVR) 10. Display PTF cover Letter (DSPPTFCVR) 11. Delete a program temporary fix (DLTPTF) Select this option to select the PTFs to delete. 12. Work with PTF groups (WRKPTFGRP) Select this option to select the PTF groups to display. 13. Copy PTF group (CPYPTFGRP) Select this option to select the PTF groups to copy. 70. Related commands (CMDPRBMGT) Select this option to manage system-related problems.




42-5

Instructor Guide

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The Program Temporary Fix menu allows most PTF functions. To access this menu, enter go ptf command on a command line. Make sure the students understand they can also run the commands associated with menu options 1 through 6 from a command line. Options 7 and 8 do not have commands associated with them. Additional information — Transition statement — We can now look at the second step in the PTF process: ordering and receiving a PTF.





Uempty

Ordering a fix using ECS IBM i


Figure 42-3. Ordering a fix using ECS

AS248.1

Notes: If the ECS line is configured, use option 6 on the Program Temporary Fix menu or prompt for the Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) command to display the Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) display. If the ECS line is not configured, you can order PTFs from an IBM service representative by way of the telephone or the Internet. From the Program Temporary Fix menu, you can order: • A specific licensed program PTF (SFnnnnn where nnnnn is the PTF number) • PSP information for LIC and hardware devices (MF98vrm where v is the version, r is the release, and m is the modification level of the system. For Version 5 Release 4 Modification 0, type 540.) • PSP information for Licensed programs (SF98vrm) • A cumulative fix pack, which is always sent on CD-ROM or tape (SF99vrm where vrm is the version, release, and modification level) • PTF group (SF99nnn where nnn is the fix identifier, which can be any number)




42-7

Instructor Guide

• Cross-referenced summary list (SF97nnn). • PTF summary list (SF97vrm where vrm is the version, release, and modification level). You can order and receive up to twenty PTFs with a single execution of the SNDPTFORD command. If your ECS line is configured and the PTFs are too large for the ECS line, they are sent on the medium you select on this display. There are several important additional parameters (F10) for this command that you should be aware of. • Delivery method (DELIVERY): If this parameter is set to the default *LINKONLY and you try to order a PTF that is too large to be delivered through ECS, the command will fail. You should change this parameter to *ANY. This will allow the command to complete and force an order for the file on your selected media type (CD-ROM or tape). • Order (ORDER): If this parameter is set to the default *REQUIRED, the PTF and its requisite PTFs will be ordered. If you desire to just order the PTF without its requisite PTFs, you should change this parameter to *PTFID. • Reorder (REORDER): This parameter specifies whether a PTF that is currently loaded, applied, or on order should be ordered again. • Check PTF (CHKPTF): This parameter specifies whether checking is performed on the service requester system to determine if PTFs are ordered based on whether the PTF product is installed or supported.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — You can order a PTF using an ECS communications line or, if the ECS line is not configured on your system, by calling an IBM service representative or through the Internet. To order a PTF using an ECS line, enter option 6 (order a program temporary fix) on the Program Temporary Fix menu or prompt for the SNDPTFORD command. The Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) display appears. From this display, you can order the PTFs listed in the student notes. Additional information — Transition statement —




42-9

Instructor Guide

Ordering a fix using the Internet IBM i


Figure 42-4. Ordering a fix using the Internet

AS248.1

Notes: You can also order PTFs using the internet. The URL to see the window captured in the upper left of this visual is: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/i/support/





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If you have Internet access, you might want to show this site to the students. Additional information — Transition statement —




42-11

Instructor Guide

Receiving a fix IBM i

QGPL

ECS/Internet

QSFnnnnn

OR


Figure 42-5. Receiving a fix

AS248.1

Notes: Fixes can either be received through the ECS line, from the Internet, or by CD-ROM. You specify the medium you want the PTF shipped on. If a PTF is too large to be sent through the ECS line or Internet, it will be sent on CD-ROM or tape. When a PTF is received by way of the ECS line or the Internet, it is stored as a save file in the QGPL library. This library is provided with IBM i operating system. A message in the job log of the ordering job contains the name of the member into which the PTF was placed. In most cases, the save file name is the PTF identifier prefixed with Q. For example, the save file for PTF identifier SFnnnnn is QSFnnnnn.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — If your ECS line is configured, you receive the fixes you ordered by way of the ECS line into a save file in library QGPL. This library is provided with the IBM i operating system. A message in the job log of the ordering job contains the name of the member into which the PTF was placed. In most cases, the save file name is the PTF identifier prefixed with a Q. For example, the save file for PTF identifier SFnnnn is QSFnnnnn. Reinforce to the students that they can also order PTFs through the Internet. The PTFs are copied by FTP to the Power i and placed in the QGPL library just as they were received from the ECS line. If the PTFs are too large, they will be shipped through the mail on tape or CD-ROM. Additional information — Transition statement —




42-13

Instructor Guide

Sample PTF cover letter IBM i


Figure 42-6. Sample PTF cover letter

AS248.1

Notes: A cover letter exists for each PTF. A cover letter contains descriptive information about the PTF (for example, the system and models for which the PTF is valid, the version, release, and modification number for which the PTF is valid, the library the PTF is intended for, and any prerequisite and corequisite PTFs) and any special installation instructions. When you order a PTF using the SNDPTFORD command, you can use the PTFPART parameter to specify that you want both the PTF and the cover letter or just the cover letter. You can search, display, and order PTFs or cover letters from the Internet. You can search for PTFs by PTF number, OS release, or search word. You can also print the cover letters from your browser. There is a lot of information in a cover letter, not all of which you will need; however, there is one piece of information, the licensed program number, which might be required to install the PTF. One more note or recommendation is - read the cover letter!





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — There is a great deal of information in a PTF cover letter, much of which might seem unnecessary for the average system user. The students can do themselves a huge favor if they always read the cover letter and carefully follow any instructions found there. The licensed program number is found only in the cover letter. This number might be required during PTF installation, depending on the method used to install the PTF. You can search, display, and order PTFs and cover letters from the Internet. You can search for PTFs by PTF number, OS release, or search word. You can also print the cover letters from your browser. If you have access to the Internet, you might want to demonstrate this to the students. Following is a description of the information contained in a cover letter. • PTF/fix #: The alphanumeric identifier for the PTF or LIC fix. • Licensed program: The alphanumeric identifier for the licensed program. • System: The IBM system for which this PTF is valid. • Release: The version, release, and modification level of the system for which this PTF is valid. • Prerequisite PTF/fix list: The information about the PTFs that must be applied on the system before this PTF can be applied. • Corequisite PTF/fix list: The information about other PTFs that must be installed at the same time as this PTF. • Description of problem fixed: A brief description of the problem this PTF fixes. • Correction: A brief description of what has been done to correct the problem. • Circumvention: A description, if applicable, of how to work around the problem and continue your operation without applying the PTF. • Special instructions: Any special information pertaining to the PTF. • Default instructions: Tells when the PTF can be applied, either at the next IPL (delayed) or immediately. • Supersedes PTF/fix nos: The numbers of the PTFs that this PTF replaces or supersedes. • APAR title line: The title of the authorized program analysis report for the superseded PTF Additional information — Transition statement —




42-15

Instructor Guide

Copy the cover letter to IBM i IBM i


Figure 42-7. Copy the cover letter to IBM i

AS248.1

Notes: The Copy Program Temporary Fix Cover Letter (CPYPTFCVR) command copies PTF cover letters from tape or optical media into file QAPZCOVER in library QGPL. Each cover letter contains information, such as problem description, correction, and special instructions. Once the cover letter is in QGPL/QAPZCOVER, you can use option 10 (Display cover letter) on the Program Temporary Fix menu to display the cover letter. If you receive your PTFs using mail, you receive them on CD-ROM. A shipping information letter is included with the CD-ROM which contains, among other things, the PTFs contained on the CD-ROM. Each PTF on the CD-ROM might have a cover letter. Each letter must be individually copied to QAPZCOVER using the Copy PTF Cover Letter (CPYPTFCVR) command.





Uempty





42-17

Instructor Guide

Display / Print the cover letter IBM i


Figure 42-8. Display / Print the cover letter

AS248.1

Notes: The Display Program Temporary Fix Cover Letter (DSPPTFCVR) command shows the PTF cover letters for a specified product.





Uempty





42-19

Instructor Guide

Option 8: Install PTF package IBM i


Figure 42-9. Option 8: Install PTF package

AS248.1

Notes: Use option 8 on the PTF menu to automatically install all PTFs from a cumulative CD-ROM or tape or other package of PTFs. If the PTFs were received electronically, type *service as the Device. If they were received on CD-ROM or tape, type the device name as the Device.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Remind the students to read the cover letters for all PTFs before they install them. Additional information — Transition statement —




42-21

Instructor Guide

Option 7: Install PTF off a list IBM i


Figure 42-10. Option 7: Install PTF off a list

AS248.1

Notes: Use option 7 on the PTF menu to install PTFs for one or more licensed programs. When the Install Program Temporary Fixes display appears, choose option 1 for each licensed program for which you want PTFs installed, and then press Enter. After you respond to a confirmation display, the Install Options for Program Temporary Fixes display appears (the display on the previous page).





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Remind the students once again to read the cover letter for each PTF they are applying. PTFs for one or more licensed programs can be installed by using option 7 (Install a program temporary fix from a list) on the Program Temporary Fix menu. When the Install Program Temporary Fixes display is shown, the students can select option 1, Install for each licensed program to which he or she wants PTFs to be installed. After responding to a confirmation display, the Install Options for Program Temporary Fixes display (see the previous visual) is shown. From this point, individual PTF installation is the same as cumulative fix pack installation. The only difference is what is installed. With package installation, all available PTFs are installed. With individual PTF installation, only PTFs for the specified products are installed. Additional information — Transition statement —




42-23

Instructor Guide

Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7 IBM i


Figure 42-11. Install PTF: Similar to PTF menu option 7

AS248.1

Notes: The Install Program Temporary Fix (INSPTF) command allows the user to load and apply PTFs for multiple products with a single command. The OMIT and HIPER parameters are supplied to allow the user of the INSPTF command to be more selective. These parameters apply only to the PTF loading activity. Any PTF already loaded on the Power is applied. The INSTYP parameter controls the apply of the PTFs. Using the different special values allows immediate and delayed apply combinations as well as starting an IPL. INSPTF does not support loading PTFs from CD-ROM for products that have multiple releases of the base option installed on the system. If PTFs for such a product exist on the tape, INSPTF does not load those PTFs and returns an error.





Uempty





42-25

Instructor Guide

Display PTF Status IBM i


Figure 42-12. Display PTF Status

AS248.1

Notes: To determine the status of PTFs for a specific licensed program or for all licensed programs installed on, or on order for, your system, you can specify option 5 (Display a program temporary fix) on the Program Temporary Fix menu. You can also prompt (PF4) for the Display PTF Status (DSPPTF) command. Option 5 (Display PTF details) will display all available details for a specific PTF.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — The fourth step in the PTF process is verifying that the PTF installed correctly. Let us look at how to do this next.




42-27

Instructor Guide

Verifying PTF installation IBM i

GO LICPGM

Display Install History

Work with Licensed Programs 50. Display log for messages

Type choices, press Enter. Start date . . .05/11/08 MM/DD/YY Start time . . .18:57:24 HH:MM:SS

Selection or command ===> 50 Enter

Output . . . . . *

*, *PRINT

Display History Log Contents Loading of PTFs started. Loading of PTFs completed successfully. Marking of PTFs for delayed application started. Marking of PTFs for delayed application completed successfully. PTFs installed successfully. Apply PTF started. Applying of PTFs for product 5761999 completed successfully. Applying of PTFs for product 5761SS1 completed successfully. Applying of PTFs for product 5761BR1 completed successfully. Applying of PTFs for product 5761DE1 completed successfully. Applying of PTFs for product 5761DG1 completed successfully. Applying of PTFs for product 5761DP4 completed successfully. More... Press Enter to continue. F3=Exit F10=Display all F12=Cancel © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 42-13. Verifying PTF installation

AS248.1

Notes: You should verify that your PTFs installed correctly. To do this, type go licpgm on a command line. On the Work with Licensed Programs menu, type 50. On the Display Install History display, the Start date and Start time indicate the date and time that the first message for the latest installation process was sent to the history file (QHST). After entering the start date and time and pressing Enter, the Display History Log Contents display appears showing both successful and unsuccessful PTF installation messages.





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — The last step in the PTF process, which is not discussed in this unit, is testing the product to ensure it works as intended. Additional information — Transition statement — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: In place of this checkpoint visual, you should play file AS248-U42-checkpoint: 1. To access the multimedia library, click the CD button along the toolbar in Elluminate. 2. Once the multimedia library window is open, select AS248-U42-checkpoint and click Play. 3. Ask the students to indicate via green checkmark when they have finished the file. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: Play file AS248-U42-checkpoint and ask the students to call out answers to the questions on the screen.




42-29

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: The GO PTFMNU command will display the PTF menu. 2. Which of the following is the command used to order a PTF? a. b. c. d.

CPYPTFCVR INSPTF SNDPTFORD DSPPTFCVR

3. True or False: PTFs can be received either electronically or on tape.



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: The GO PTFMNU command will display the PTF menu. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is the command used to order a PTF? a. CPYPTFCVR b. INSPTF c. SNDPTFORD d. DSPPTFCVR The answer is SNDPTFORD.

3. True or False: PTFs can be received either electronically or on tape. The answer is False.






42-31

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain what a program temporary fix (PTF) is Use information available from IBM to help you know when to order PTF Order, receive, and install a PTF Display PTF status Verify PTF installation



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





42-33

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 43. PTFs using System i Navigator Estimated time 00:45

What this unit is about In this unit, we will review the steps used when working with System i Navigator to work with and manage PTFs.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • • • • • •

Explain how to copy fixes from media Explain the steps to update fix inventory Explain how to run the Compare and Update wizard Explain the capabilities of the Compare and Update wizard Explain how to install fixes Explain how to verify the status of an installation



Unit 43. PTFs using System i Navigator


43-1

Instructor Guide

I


After completing this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to copy fixes from media Explain the steps to update fix inventory Explain how to run the Compare and Update wizard Explain the capabilities of the Compare and Update wizard Explain how to install fixes Explain how to verify the status of an installation



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





43-3

Instructor Guide

Management Central: Fix wizards IBM i

Installing fixes (from saved files): Received using ECS or Internet Loaded using LODPTF Fix was sent but not installed

Sending and installing fixes to endpoint systems Permanently installing fixes Uninstalling fixes Comparing and updating fixes on endpoint systems


Figure 43-2. Management Central: Fix wizards

AS248.1

Notes: A fix (or PTF) contains new or changed objects that are used to correct current or potential problems in your software. They can also provide new functions. Fixes replace one or more objects in the licensed program. One of the key benefits of Management Central is that it makes managing multiple systems as easy as managing a single system. Management Central simplifies the process of managing fixes with a variety of easy to use tools and descriptions for each fix status. These tools include several wizards to guide you through the following tasks: • • • • •

Installing fixes Sending and installing fixes Permanently installing fixes Uninstalling fixes Comparing and updating fixes

For example, to install multiple fixes, select the fixes you want from the Management Central fixes inventory list, and start the Install wizard. Similarly, you will find the Compare and Update wizard to be very helpful. The wizard compares the fix levels of a single system 43-4 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

or multiple systems to a model system. You can send the save files of the missing fixes from a source system and then install the fixes to ensure the systems have the same level of fixes. You can launch the Compare and Update wizard from an endpoint system, a system group, or from a Power in your list of connections. Use the tasks that follow to help you manage your fixes: • Obtain Fixes Find out how to download fixes from the internet using IBM ECS or copy fixes from media. You can download or copy your fixes onto your source system. To use the Compare and Update wizard, you need to have on your source system the save files for all of the systems which are installed on your model system. • Install Fixes Install and permanently install fixes with Management Central. You can also send them from a system that has the save files for the fixes and install the fixes on another Power in your Management Central network. Refer to descriptions for each fix status to see a list of the Management Central statuses. • Compare and Update Fixes Use Management Central to compare fixes between a model system and any Power in your Management Central network. You can find extra fixes or missing fixes when you run the compare. You can then update the systems in your network so that they have the same level of fixes found in your model system. • Clean Up Fixes - Over time, save files and cover letters for fixes tend to accumulate, particularly on your source system. Management Central provides you with a way to delete save files and cover letters for fixes that are no longer needed. - Display cover letters. - Identify which problems are fixed or have special instructions for installation.




43-5

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Copy fixes from media (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-3. Copy fixes from media (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: The Copy from Media dialog allows you to copy the save file for a fix from a tape or optical device onto the system. After you are finished copying the save files, you should collect your fix inventory again. You can then install the fixes if the corresponding products are installed on the system. If the corresponding products are supported on the system, you can only send and install them on other Power i systems.




43-7

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Copy fixes from media (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-4. Copy fixes from media (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Fixes to copy allows you to select which fixes you want to copy. Values include: • All products Fixes for all products, releases, options, and languages that are either supported or installed on this system are copied from the media. You should use caution when specifying this value and indicating to automatically support the product. Specifying this value will result in all fixes from the media being copied onto your system. • All supported products Fixes for all products and releases that are currently supported on this system are copied from the media to the system. Fixes for products that are installed but not supported are not copied. • Selected product Fixes for the product and release that you specify are copied. Click Browse to see a list of products that are contained in the central Power inventory.




43-9

Instructor Guide






Uempty

System group: Update fix inventory (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-5. System group: Update fix inventory (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Fixes inventory lets you periodically correct problems or potential problems found within a particular licensed program. Fixes, also known as PTFs, can correct problems that appear to be hardware failures or software failures, or they can provide new functions. Fixes are designed to replace one or more objects in the licensed program. When you select fixes inventory from the Collect Inventory dialog, software inventory will be automatically selected as well. You cannot select fixes inventory without including software inventory. The fixes inventory list (Management Central > Endpoint Systems > any endpoint system > Configuration and Service > Fixes Inventory) shows all products installed and the fixes contained within them. For each fix, you can view the status of the fix and other information, such as the ID, associated product, release, or type. From the fixes inventory list, you can do any of the following: • Run the wizards to install fixes, send and install fixes, permanently install fixes, or uninstall fixes © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



43-11

Instructor Guide

• Clean up save files and cover letters • Perform other advanced functions, such as canceling fix actions • Schedule when to perform these actions • Copy fixes from media Because a collected inventory is used for Management Central tasks, it is important that you have an inventory that is current; therefore, you should collect the fixes inventory on a regular basis. You should also be aware that any changes made from the fixes inventory list are not automatically reflected in the inventory.





Uempty





43-13

Instructor Guide

Update fix inventory (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-6. Update fix inventory (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: Use the Collect Inventory dialog to collect a list of the specified resources that currently exist on the selected systems and groups. From the inventory lists, you can use other Management Central functions to manage these items. For example, you can select fixes from the fixes inventory list and install them on the systems and groups you select. You can select one or more actions from the list of actions to be run on the central system when the inventory has been collected. For example, if you are collecting an inventory of your system's hardware, software, and fixes, and you want to receive this data in a series of reports that show your system's growth and maintenance, you would select Send collected data to IBM. You can either collect the inventory immediately or schedule it to be collected at a later time.





Uempty





43-15

Instructor Guide

Compare and Update fixes (1 of 14) IBM i


Figure 43-7. Compare and Update fixes (1 of 14)

AS248.1

Notes: The Compare and Update wizard automatically compares a group of systems to a model system, finds the missing fixes and extra fixes, and sends the missing fixes to each system to install them. You can launch the Compare and Update wizard from an endpoint system, a system group, or from a Power in your list of connections. As a general reminder, because a collected inventory is used to perform this task, it is important that you have an inventory that is current. To compare and update the levels of your fixes inventory, you need to define a model system and a source system. Your source system has the save files on it. You use your model system to compare against other systems in your network to ensure that your other systems have the same level of fixes as the model system. You should collect your fixes inventory on all systems before you perform the compare and update task. To compare and update fixes on your target systems, follow these steps: 1. In System i Navigator, expand Management Central. 43-16 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




Uempty

2. Expand Endpoint Systems or System Groups. 3. Right-click a system or a group, select Fixes, and then select Compare and Update. Only those fixes identified as missing can be sent and installed. You cannot uninstall extra fixes. You can only display them.




43-17

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: Review the information on this window; then click Next.




43-19

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1





43-21

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: Set up your model system Set up a model system that has the appropriate fixes installed for the particular products, all fixes for all products, or fixes for particular releases. In some instances, your model system might be your central system. You should define a model system that works best in your environment. To set up your model system, follow these steps: 1. Determine which fixes you want installed on the model system. 2. Install those fixes. 3. Verify that the save file exists for the fixes on the model system.




43-23

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: The Browse Systems and Groups dialog allows you to create a list of endpoint systems and system groups or modify a list that was previously created. The list of system groups can include groups that are created by applications other than Management Central. This list can be different from the list of Power i system groups shown from the System i Navigator window. The list of system groups available from the System i Navigator window includes only those groups created by Management Central. To add a system or group to the Selected systems and groups list, select it in the Available systems and groups list, and then click Add. To remove a system or group from the Selected systems and groups list, select it in the list, and then click Remove.




43-25

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1





43-27

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1





43-29

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1





43-31

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1





43-33

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: Set up your source system Set up a source system that has the save files on it. In some instances, your source system might be your model system. Get the save files to the source system by using the copy from media function.




43-35

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1





43-37

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: Refresh your inventory - The comparison is done based on the information in the inventory. It is a good idea to refresh the inventory at this time.




43-39

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: On the last window, the wizard will show all of your selections. If everything is correct, click Finish to start the comparison.




43-41

Instructor Guide






Uempty




AS248.1

Notes: The Compare Results window shows you the overall status of the compare action. After the compare finishes running, you can see a list of fixes by clicking each target system. The list shows you fixes that either are missing for each target system or that are extra for each target system when compared to the model system. A fix is listed as missing if it is installed or permanently installed on the model system but not installed on the target system. A fix is listed as extra if it is installed or permanently installed on the target system but not installed on the model system. The time and date shown in the upper right portion of the window shows the time and date when the oldest inventory information was collected for the selected systems and groups, which could be different from the inventory available on the selected systems and groups. The Compare and Update wizard uses the inventory on the central system for the compare data. You can display the cover letters for those fixes that have them. Right-click the fix in the list and select Properties. If the fix is missing, the cover letter is displayed from the model system. If the fix is extra, the cover letter is displayed from the target system. © Copyright IBM Corp. 2001, 2011



43-43

Instructor Guide






Uempty

Install Fixes (1 of 5) IBM i


Figure 43-21. Install Fixes (1 of 5)

AS248.1

Notes: You can use Management Central to install an individual fix on your Power if: • It is present on your Power in the form of a save file (and the corresponding licensed program is installed on your system). • It was loaded on your system using the Load PTF (LODPTF) command. • It was temporarily removed (uninstalled) from your system. • You sent the fix without installing it. In all these cases, before the fix is installed, Management Central reports the status of the fix as available. If the corresponding licensed program is not on the system, the fix can be present only as a save file and cannot be installed on the system. The fix has a status then of supported only, which means that you can only send it to and install it on other IBM i servers that do have the product installed.




43-45

Instructor Guide

To send fixes to an endpoint system, the save files containing the fixes must be present on the source system. These fixes have a status of either available or supported only. Management Central provides more than one path to install fixes. See the online help for a complete list of all those paths. One way to install a fix would be to do the following: 1. In System i Navigator, expand Management Central. 2. Expand Endpoint systems. 3. Expand the system or group where the fixes you want to install are stored. 4. Expand Configuration and Service. 5. Expand Fixes Inventory. 6. Select the fixes that you want to install, right-click, and select Install. Be sure the fixes you select are available (as shown in the Status column). 7. Follow the instructions of the wizard.





Uempty





43-47

Instructor Guide




AS248.1






Uempty





43-49

Instructor Guide




AS248.1






Uempty





43-51

Instructor Guide




AS248.1






Uempty





43-53

Instructor Guide




AS248.1

Notes: If everything is correct, click either Finish or Schedule. Click Finish to start the install now. Click Schedule to put this on a scheduler.





Uempty





43-55

Instructor Guide

Verifying the status of the fixes (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-26. Verifying the status of the fixes (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: To display the status for a specific fix perform the following steps: 1. Click and expand Configuration and Service 2. Click and expand Fixes Inventory 3. Click All fixes to see the right pane captured on this window 4. Right click the specific fix you are interested in 5. Click Properties on the pop down menu to see the visual on the next page in the student guide Note Fixes inventory must be collected before you can perform these steps.





Uempty





43-57

Instructor Guide

Verifying the status of the fixes (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-27. Verifying the status of the fixes (2 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





43-59

Instructor Guide

Advanced fixes IBM i


Figure 43-28. Advanced fixes

AS248.1

Notes: From the Advanced menu, you can perform one of the following actions: • Cancel Actions: This dialog allows you to select fixes that have restart actions against them and then cancel those actions. Restart actions include: -

Install at next restart Install permanently at next restart Uninstall at next restart Uninstall permanently at next restart

You can also specify what fixes to cancel actions on if the cancel actions are being done on a group of systems. You can cancel actions immediately or schedule that activity to begin at a later time. • Uninstall: This option is only available when the fix is installed temporarily. • Install Permanently: The original version of the program is deleted and only the fix can be used.





Uempty





43-61

Instructor Guide

Clean up fixes (1 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-29. Clean up fixes (1 of 2)

AS248.1

Notes: System i Navigator provides a wizard that you can use to clean up fixes on your system. To start this wizard perform the following steps: 1. Right click your system 2. Click Fixes on the drop down menu 3. Click Cleanup on the secondary drop down menu to see the window on the next page of the student notebook.





Uempty





43-63

Instructor Guide

Clean up fixes (2 of 2) IBM i


Figure 43-30. Clean up fixes (2 of 2)






Uempty





43-65

Instructor Guide

Checkpoint IBM i

1. True or False: System i Navigator provides the option to install a single PTF. 2. Which of the following is not supported by the Management Central fix wizard? a. Sending and installing fixes to multiple endpoint systems b. Permanently installing fixes c. Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version and release levels d. Compare and update fixes on endpoint systems

3. Which of the following is not one of the inventories that can be collected using Management Central? a. b. c. d.

Hardware Software Fixes Authorization lists © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty



1. True or False: System i Navigator provides the option to install a single PTF. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not supported by the Management Central fix wizards? a. Sending and installing fixes to multiple endpoint systems b. Permanently installing fixes c. Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version and release levels d. Compare and update fixes on endpoint systems The answer is Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version and release levels.

3. Which of the following is not one of the inventories that can be collected using Management Central? a. Hardware b. Software c. Fixes d. Authorization lists The answer is Authorization lists. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





43-67

Instructor Guide

Unit summary IBM i

Having completed this unit, you should be able to: Explain how to copy fixes from media Explain the steps to update fix inventory Explain how to run the Compare and Update wizard Explain the capabilities of the Compare and Update wizard Explain how to install fixes Explain how to verify the status of an installation



AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





43-69

Instructor Guide





Uempty

Unit 44. Class summary Estimated time 00:15

What this unit is about This unit is used to review the objectives that were set in the beginning of the class and that were covered throughout the course. Also to be covered is what the next course would be that a student would attend to continue learning about system operations or system administration.

What you should be able to do After completing this unit, you should be able to: • Perform Power i system operator functions -


Use the online help and references Send, display, and reply to messages Monitor and control job and output queues, jobs, and devices Start and stop the operating system Create and change user profiles Use authorization lists and group profiles Manage system devices, user display stations, and printers Save and restore objects and libraries Monitor job and history logs Diagnose a system problem Order, receive, and apply PTFs

Unit 44. Class summary


44-1

Instructor Guide

Course summary IBM i

Having completed this course, you should be able to: Perform Power i system operator functions: Use the online help and references Send, display, and reply to messages Monitor and control job and output queues, jobs, and devices Start and stop the operating system Create and change user profiles Use authorization lists and group profiles Manage system devices, user display stations, and printers Save and restore objects and libraries Monitor job and history logs Diagnose a system problem Order, receive, and apply PTFs © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

Figure 44-1. Course summary

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





44-3

Instructor Guide

Additional education IBM i

Advanced System Operator's Workshop for IBM i: Classroom course AS27 or ILO course OV27 Three days Prepares system operator for additional system operator responsibilities

IBM i Administration and Control: Classroom course OL19 or ILO course OV19 Five days Prepares user for system administrator responsibilities


Figure 44-2. Additional education

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — For an ILO (Instructor Led Online) class: Perform a Web tour to show students where to find information about the courses on the next slide. To perform a Web tour: 1. Launch the Web tour by clicking the Earth icon in the Elluminate toolbar. 2. Then enter the URL for the IBM Training homepage. http://www.ibm.com/training/global 3. Click the icon to the right of the URL address bar to past the URL into the text chat. Remind the students to bookmark this for easy reference. 4. Search for each course and display the web page while promoting that course to the students. For a FTF (Face to Face) class: 1. Open a Web browser. 2. Then enter the URL for the IBM Training homepage. http://www.ibm.com/training/global 3. Search for each course and display the Web page while promoting that course to the students. Encourage the students to follow along on their classroom computers, if possible. Additional information — Transition statement —




44-5

Instructor Guide

Class evaluation IBM i

Please fill out Student Evaluation form

Use class number _______ Use course number _______


Figure 44-3. Class evaluation

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty





44-7

Instructor Guide

System Operator Workshop for IBM i IBM i

Thank you!


Figure 44-4. System Operator Workshop for IBM i

AS248.1

Notes:





Uempty

Instructor notes: Purpose — Details — Additional information — Transition statement — End of unit and course.




44-9

Instructor Guide





AP

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions Unit 1. Power i and IBM i concepts and overview


1. True or False: Security is built into the operating system. The answer is True.

2. The OS on this system, at V7R1, is now known as which of the following? a. b. c. d.

OS/400 i5/OS IBM i All of the above

The answer is IBM i. 3. True or False: The data administrator tells the system where data will be stored on the disk drives. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011


Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions


A-1

Instructor Guide


4. Which of the following are found in every partition? a. b. c. d.

Operating system Memory Disk All of the above


5. True or False: Linux is supported as a guest operating system in a partition. The answer is True.

6. True or False: Capacity on demand is managed by the system console. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

A-2





AP



1. True or False: Any menu can be accessed on the system with the GO command. The answer is True.

2. Which function key is used to access Help? a. F1 b. F3 c. F9 d. F12 The answer is F1.

3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command that was previously entered? a. F1 b. F3 c. F9 d. F12 The answer is F9. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-3

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: The default assistance level for a system is set with a system value by the system administrator. The answer is True.

5. True or False: The Operational Assistant menu will support functions performed by a user, a system operator or by a system administrator? The answer is True.

6. True or False: The command entry display will show what commands have been entered since you signed on to the system. The answer is True.


A-4





AP



1. True or False: System i Navigator does not require any additional software to be installed on the PC. The answer is False.

2. System i Navigator allows you to manage which of the following? a. b. c. d.



3. True or False: Help is available for the functions performed with the System i Navigator. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-5

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: System i Navigator is fully integrated into Windows. The answer is True.

5. Which of the following customize options will allow you to control what is displayed in the right pane when you click on a function? a. b. c. d.


The answers are Include and Columns.

6. True or False: System i Access for windows is available in 32-bit or 64-bit. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

A-6





AP



1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i requires that additional software be installed on the PC. The answer is False.

2. True or False: Systems Director Navigator for IBM i is included in the OS? The answer is True.

3. Which of the following is not included in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? a. b. c. d.

Basic operations Work management Configuration and service Management Central

The answer is Management Central. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-7

Instructor Guide


4. Which of the following jobs must be running on your system in order for a user to connect to your system using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i ? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Admin2.

5. True or False: In the browser, the user will always specify port 2005 when they start the connection request. The answer is False.

6. True or False: In Systems Director Navigator for IBM I, you cannot customize the startup page The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

A-8





AP



1.

Which of the following message types is requesting a reply? a. Informational b. Questioning c. Inquiry d. User The answer is Inquiry.

2. When you create a user profile, which of the following is automatically created? a. User message queue b. Workstation message queue c. System operator message queue d. Application message queue The answer is User message queue.

3. Which message type will interrupt a user who is signed on to a 5250 emulation session? a. Informational b. Inquiry c. Workstation d. Break The answer is Break. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-9

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: You can allocate an application message queue when you sign on. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following delivery value will direct the system to take the default reply to a message? a. Hold b. Break c. Notify d. Default The answer is Default.

3. When the system creates a work station device description, which of the following is automatically created? a. User message queue b. Workstation message queue c. System operator message queue d. Application message queue The answer is User message queue. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011

A-10 System Operator Workshop for IBM i




AP


4. True or False: You can send a message to any user on the system. The answer is True.



e. The answer is Break.

6. True or False: The default mode for a message queue is *Notify. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-11

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: System i Navigator only allows you to see your messages. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following message types can be sent with this GUI? a. Informational b. Inquiry c. User d. All of the above The answer is All of the above.

3. Which customize option allows you to specify that you want to view messages for a different user? a. Sort b. Include c. Columns d. Auto refresh The answer is Include. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP


4. True or False. A break message will interrupt a user who is only signed on using System i Navigator. The answer is False.

5. The message function is found under which of the following? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Basic operations.

6. True or False: You are only allowed to delete a message from your message queue. The answer is False.





A-13

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Any type of message can be sent using Systems Director Navigator. The answer is True.

2. When using Systems Director Navigator, you can send a message to which of the following? a. b. c. d.



3. True or False: A break message will interrupt a user who is signed on using Systems Director Navigator. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. True or False: A user must memorize the format of a command since the system does not provide any help. The answer is False.

2. True or False: CL commands can be specified within a program. The answer is True.

3. True or False: Parameters are used to customize a CL command. The answer is True.





A-15

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: On this system a user must memorize the format of a command since the system does not provide any help. The answer is False.

2. Which function key is used to provide prompt assistance with a command? a. F1 b. F3 c. F4 d. F9 The answer is F4.

3. Which function key is used to retrieve a command? a. F1 b. F3 c. F4 d. F9 The answer is F9. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP


4. True or False: The F9 and F10 keys show the same additional parameters. The answer is False.

5. Which menu provides assistance when looking for a command? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Major.

6. True or False: The F11 function key is used to switch between command keywords or Value choices. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-17

Instructor Guide

Unit 12. Concepts: Objects, library, and the IFS


1. True or False: An object is anything that exists in storage and on which operations can be performed. The answer is True.

2. A _____ is a special object that has a named set of objects associated with it and is used to group objects. (Select all that apply.) a. Directory b. Link c. Library d. File system The answers are Directory and Library.

3. A PC object is stored in which of the following file systems in the IFS? a. Root b. QDLS c. QSYS.LIB d. QOPT The answer is Root. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP


4. True or False: A library list is used by the system when you use simple naming to work with an object. The answer is True.

5. The IBM i operating system is stored in the _______ system library. a. b. c. d.


The answer is QSYS.

6. True or False: All libraries on the system are in the system library QGPL. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-19

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: The Create Duplicate Object command can copy a file. The answer is True.

2. Which command is used to show a list of objects based on your search criteria? a. DSPOBJ b. LSTOBJ c. SHWOBJ d. WRKOBJ The answer is WRKOBJ.

3. The command used to display an objects description is ______? a. DSPOBJD b. LSTOBJD c. SHWOBJD d. WRKOBJD The answer is DSPOBJD. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP


4. True or False: You cannot see a list of the directories on your system when using a 5250 emulation session. The answer is False.

5. The __________ command is used to copy a single object or a group of objects. a. b. c. d.


The answer is CRTDUPOBJ.

6. True or False: The WRKLIB command will show you a list of all the libraries that you have authority to use. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-21

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: System i Navigator GUI allows you to duplicate an object. The answer is True.

2. Assuming you have the correct authority, which option allows you to create, change or delete user profiles? a. Basic operations b. Work management c. Configuration and service d. Users and groups The answer is Users and groups.

3. Which of the following does not provide an option to create a library? a. Right-click your system b. Work management c. Integrated file systems d. Database The answer is Work management. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP


4. True or False: Management Central allows you to issue a command once, and it can be run on multiple systems The answer is True.

5. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to run the equivalent of the WRKLIB command to see a list of libraries on the system. The answer is True.

6. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to prompt a command. The answer is False.





A-23

Instructor Guide

Unit 15. Object management using Systems Director Navigator for IBM i


1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator does not provide an option to manage users. The answer is False.

2. Which task in Systems Director Navigator provides the link to run a command? a. b. c. d.


The answer is System.

3. True or False: Prompting a command is not available with Systems Director Navigator. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP




The answer is Network.

5. True or False: Systems Director Navigator provides a graphical version of the copy file command. The answer is True.

6. True or False: Using Systems Director Navigator does not display a list of libraries. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-25

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: A job is an environment that enables work to be performed on the system. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not considered a user job? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Spooling.



The answer is Job queue. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP


4. True or False: The highest priority in a job queue is priority nine. The answer is False.

5. The system job that generates a print report runs in which of the following subsystems? a. b. c. d.


The answer is QSPL.

6. True or False: An interactive job is placed in a job queue when it is submitted. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-27

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: The name of the default job description is QDFTJOBD. The answer is True.

2. The command used to display a job description is: a. b. c. d.


The answer is DSPJOBD.

3. True or False: The library list is one of the parameters specified in a user profile. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. The Work with User Jobs command allows you to select which of the following types of jobs? a. Active b. Job queue c. Output queue d. All of these The answer is All of these.

2. On the Work with User Jobs display, which of the following options will show you all of the characteristics of a job? a. b. c. d. e.

Option 2 - Change Option 5 Work with Option 7 Display messages Option 8 Work with spool files The answer is Option 5 Work with.

3. True or False: You can use option 3 Hold, on the Work with Active Jobs display, to hold a subsystem. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-29

Instructor Guide



1. Which branch under Basic Operations will show details for your active jobs? a. Messages b. Printer Output c. Printers d. Jobs The answer is Jobs.

2. Which branch under Work Management will show details for all of the active jobs on the system? a. Active Jobs b. Server Jobs c. Subsystems d. Memory Pools The answer is Active Jobs.

3. True or False: The Active Jobs branch will basically show the same information as running the Work with Active Jobs WRKACTJOB command. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display information relating to your jobs on the system. The answer is True.

2. The Active jobs link is available under which of the following tasks in Systems Director Navigator? a. Basic Operations b. Work Management c. Configuration and Service d. Users and Groups The answer is Work Management.

3. Which task is used to display details about subsystems running on your system? a. Basic Operations b. Work Management c. Configuration and Service d. Users and Groups The answer is Work Management. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-31

Instructor Guide



1. Which of the following are created on the system when a printer is connected (Select all that apply)? a. b. c. d.

Device description Message queue Output queue Printer profile

The answers are Device description and Output queue.

2. What is the first place the system looks to determine where to send your output file? a. Printer device file b. Job description c. User profile d. System value The answer is Printer device file.

3. True or False: The system administrator can create an output queue on the system with the Create Output Queue (CRTOUTQ) command. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. Which command is used to work with your spool files? a. WRKPRTF b. WRKSPLF c. WRKJOBF d. WRKPRT The answer is WRKSPLF.

2. Which option is used to delete an individual report (a spooled file) on the Work with Output Queues screen? a. Option 2 - Change b. Option 4 - Delete c. Option 5 Display d. Option 8 Attributes The answer is Option 5 Display.

3. True or False: Changing the spool file attributes is all you have to do for an expired file to be deleted on the system. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-33

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: System i Navigator provides an option that allows you to see the output generated by another user. The answer is True.

2. Under which of the following is the Printer Output branch found? a. Basic Operations b. Work Management c. Users and Groups d. File Systems The answer is Basic Operations.

3. Which of the following actions cannot be performed for a printer from the Printers branch? a. Start b. Stop c. Create d. Change which output queue is assigned The answer is Create. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. True or False: You can export printer output as a PDF in Systems Director Navigator for IBM i. The answer is True.

2. Which Properties option would display which system the printer output came from? a. b. c. d.

Origin / Expiration Layout Other 1 Other 2

The answer is Origin / Expiration.

3. True or False: You can view the output for a specific job by clicking Work Management and then clicking Active Jobs. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-35

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: You can email spool files or keep them as records. The answer is True.

5. When using printer load balancing, what is the maximum number of writers that can be attached to an output queue? a. 5 b. 8 c. 10 d. 15 The answer is 10.

6. True or False: You can delete an expired spool file. The answer is True.






AP



1. True or False: You can use the Change IPL Attributes command to control the time it takes for your system to perform an IPL. The answer is True.

2. Which type of IPL requires an operator to complete the power on process? a. Attended b. Unattended c. Automatic d. Restart The answer is Attended.


A B C D

The answer is D. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-37

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Environment variables are used to control the operations of the system. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is information that is not stored in a users profile? a. Password b. User class c. List of owned objects d. System values The answer is System values.

3. Which of the following user types is assigned all of the system privileges? a. Programmer b. System operator c. Security administrator d. Security officer The answer is Security officer. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. Which of the following options do you need to take on the Work with User Profiles display to enable a users profile? a. Option 1 - Create b. Option 2 - Change c. Option 5 - Display d. Option 12 Work with owned objects The answer is Option 2 Change.

2. When working with user profiles, which option will show all of the objects to which a user is authorized? a. Option 1 - Create b. Option 2 - Change c. Option 5 - Display d. Option 12 Work with owned objects The answer is Option 5 Display.

3. True or False: The user who creates an object is automatically designated as the owner of an object. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-39

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: A user can change their password using System i Navigator. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following system privileges are automatically assigned to a system operator? a. b. c. d.

Auditing and Job control Job control and Save / restore Save / restore and Security administration Security administration and Auditing

The answer is Job control and Save / restore. 3. True or False: System i Navigator does not allow you to display who is authorized to work with an object. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. True or False: Systems Director Navigator allows you to display all of the objects owned by a user. The answer is True.

2. Under which of the following tasks do you find the link to change your password in Systems Director Navigator? a. System b. Work Management c. Security d. Users and Groups The answer is System.

3. Which of the following is not one of the authority views you can display for an object? a. Basic b. Details c. Columns d. Location The answer is Location. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-41

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: The system ships with automatic configuration turned off. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is not considered locally attached hardware? a. CD-ROM b. Tape systems c. Controllers d. LAN adapters The answer is LAN adapters.

3. Which of the following is not a supported console type? a. Twinax console b. Operations console c. HMC d. Wireless console The answer is Wireless console. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. Which system value is used to turn on the auto configuration of local hardware? a. QSECURITY b. QPRTDEV c. QAUTOCFG d. *SYSCTL The answer is QAUTOCFG.

2. Which system value is used to display the name of the system printer? a. QSECURITY b. QPRTDEV c. QAUTOCFG d. *SYSCTL The answer is QPRTDEV.

3. Which command is used to display the status of your configuration? a. WRKSYSSTS b. WRKDSKSTS c. WRKCFGSTS d. WRKHDWSTS The answer is WRKCFGSTS. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-43

Instructor Guide





The answer is OS information.

2. True or False: With System i Navigator you can access DST. The answer is True.

3. True or False: System i Navigator allows you to display the type, model and serial number of the hardware resources installed. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. True or False: The Local controller and devices system value is used to specify whether devices and controllers are configured automatically. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following can be configured with Systems Director Navigator for IBM i? a. b. c. d.

Processor Memory Disk units LPAR

The answer is Disk units.

3. True or False: With IBM System Director Navigator for IBM i you can manage all hardware resources in one place. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-45

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: Objects that are considered temporary do not get saved on the system. The answer is True.

2. When you save an object, which of the following is not saved? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Address of this data on disk.


Physical tape Save file Virtual tape Memory stick

The answer is Memory stick.






AP



1. True or False: Running the display tape command, with the *LABELS format, will show a listing by name of all of the objects that are saved on this tape. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is not supported by the Duplicate Tape (DUPTAP) command? a. Duplicate virtual tape to physical tape b. Duplicate physical tape to virtual tape c. Duplicate virtual tape to save file d. Duplicate only specific sequence items The answer is Duplicate virtual tape to save file.

3. On the Save menu, which option is used to save the entire system? a. Option 20 b. Option 21 c. Option 22 d. Option 23 The answer is Option 21. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-47

Instructor Guide


4. True or False: The save changed objects command is used to save only those objects that have changed since the last save operation. The answer is True.

5. Which command is used to clear the contents of a save file? a. b. c. d.


The answer is CLRSAVF.

6. True or False: Save menu option 21, Full system save, can be performed to a virtual tape? The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. True or False: Setting up all of the support required for virtual tape can be performed using System i Navigator. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not one of the supported backup options under the Backup branch? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Customized.

3. True or False: Installing the BRMS plug-in will overwrite or replace the Backup branch. The answer is True. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-49

Instructor Guide

Unit 37. Save using System Director Navigator for IBM i


1. True or False: Setting up all of the support required for virtual tape can be performed using IBM System Director Navigator for i. The answer is True.

2. True or False: Installing BRMS allow you to backup objects using IBM System Director Navigator for i. The answer is True.

3. How many virtual tape volumes you can create for virtual tape? a. b. c. d.

64 128 256 *nomax

The answer is 256. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP





The answer is RSTCFG.

2. Which of the following is not a supported restore device? a. Physical tape b. Virtual tape c. Save file d. Memory stick The answer is Memory stick.

3. What type of IPL is required to restore the entire system? a. A b. B c. C d. D The answer is D. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-51

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: The system can be configured to perform automatic problem determination and reporting to your service provider. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following commands will display system status information? a. WRKSYSSTS b. WRKACTJOB c. WRKDSKSTS d. WRKUSRJOB The answer is WRKSYSSTS.

3. Which of the following commands will display information about your job? a. WRKSYSSTS b. WRKACTJOB c. WRKDSKSTS d. WRKUSRJOB The answer is WRKACTJOB. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP

Unit 40. Program determination using System i Navigator


1. True or False: Running the analyze problem function is available using 5250 emulation and using System i Navigator. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following requires signing on to system service tools? a. WRKACTJOB b. WRKSYSSTS c. WRKDSKSTS d. WRKSSTSTS The answer is WRKDSKSTS.

3. Which of the following is not supported by Electronic Service Agent? a. Reporting system detected problems b. Requesting cumulative fix packages c. Reporting hardware and software problems d. Reporting a failed system backup The answer is Reporting a failed system backup. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




A-53

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: A PTF or a fix is a temporary solution or bypass of a defect in an IBM licensed program. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not one of the fix types available from IBM? a. b. c. d.


The answer is Temporary correctional fix.

3. True or False: The recommendation is that cumulative fix packs should only be installed before you upgrade the software on your system. The answer is False. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011





AP



1. True or False: The GO PTFMNU command will display the PTF menu. The answer is False.

2. Which of the following is the command used to order a PTF? a. CPYPTFCVR b. INSPTF c. SNDPTFORD d. DSPPTFCVR The answer is SNDPTFORD.

3. True or False: PTFs can be received either electronically or on tape. The answer is False.





A-55

Instructor Guide



1. True or False: System i Navigator provides the option to install a single PTF. The answer is True.

2. Which of the following is not supported by the Management Central fix wizards? a. Sending and installing fixes to multiple endpoint systems b. Permanently installing fixes c. Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version and release levels d. Compare and update fixes on endpoint systems The answer is Simultaneous installation of fixes to systems at different version and release levels.

3. Which of the following is not one of the inventories that can be collected using Management Central? a. Hardware b. Software c. Fixes d. Authorization lists The answer is Authorization lists. © Copyright IBM Corporation 2011




V6.0

backpg

Back page

System Operator Workshop for IBM i

Recommend Documents